230+ Best Easy Dairy-Free Recipes For Every Meal - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/dairy-free/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Fri, 24 Nov 2023 13:54:06 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.3.2 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/01/cropped-icon-1-32x32.png 230+ Best Easy Dairy-Free Recipes For Every Meal - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/dairy-free/ 32 32 Air Fryer Red Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/#respond Mon, 13 Nov 2023 17:05:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71802 It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste. If you can’t get enough of the subtle sweetness and creamy texture of red-skinned potatoes, get out your recipe book! My Red Potato Salad combines savory bacon, crisp dill pickles, and fresh dill with a creamy mayo dressing guaranteed to wow all your dinner guests. Ingredients Cooking new potatoes in...

The post Air Fryer Red Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste. If you can’t get enough of the subtle sweetness and creamy texture of red-skinned potatoes, get out your recipe book! My Red Potato Salad combines savory bacon, crisp dill pickles, and fresh dill with a creamy mayo dressing guaranteed to wow all your dinner guests.

Air fried red potatoes garnished with parsley in a bowl.

Ingredients

Cooking new potatoes in the air fryer requires only a handful of ingredients you likely already have in your pantry.

Ingredients needed for cooking red potatoes in air fryer on a marble.
  • Red potatoes: Small, creamy, and mildly sweet red potatoes (also known as red skin and new potatoes) are a must for this air fryer recipe. Though I use small red potatoes for this dish, other small, tender potatoes, such as Yukon Gold potatoes, would also work. However, avoid using potatoes with too much starch—such as russet potatoes—as they won’t crisp up or tenderize as well as other potato types.
  • Oil: I use olive oil to give my little red potatoes their irresistible crispiness and well-seasoned exterior. However, you may substitute olive oil with any other mild-flavored oil, like avocado oil or ghee.
  • Seasonings: I chose to season my air-fried new potatoes with a basic, savory mix of dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and ground black pepper. To give your potatoes extra smoky undertones, you may also use smoked paprika.

Other Seasoning Ideas

Want to take your air fryer roasted red potatoes to the next level? Though optional, these expert seasoning ideas allow you to customize your red potatoes with dozens of other tasty flavor profiles.

  • Favorite spice mixtures: One of the best parts about air fryer potato recipes is how easy they are to customize based on the dish with which you serve them. For a sweet and peppery flavor profile, Italian seasoning makes a delicious seasoning mix. Or, you can enhance this dish’s spice and savoriness by opting for authentic Cajun seasoning, which you can easily make using my Blackened Seasoning recipe. Or, you can give your new potatoes a herby, warm, and bright finish using Mediterranean SeasoningBaharat Spice Mix, or Ranch Seasoning.
  • Spices: If you love spicy food, a few simple additions can give your air-fried potatoes a hot kick. Depending on what you serve with your potatoes, curry powder, red pepper flakes, cayenne pepper, chili powder, onion powder, and more can transform your red potatoes into a piquant side fit for even the biggest spice fans.
  • Fresh herbs: Enliven your air fryer new potatoes with fresh, gourmet flavor by finishing them off with a sprinkle of chopped fresh thyme, fresh parsley, fresh basil, or fresh rosemary.
  • Parmesan cheese: A great way to give your little red potatoes a rich, umami flavor is to sprinkle them with parmesan at the end of cooking. Cheesy and salty, these garlic parmesan air fryer potatoes will have the whole table asking for your recipe.

How to Cook Red Potatoes in the Air Fryer?

Making baked red potatoes in the air fryer is one of the quickest, simplest ways to delight your tastebuds and cut your kitchen prep in half. Six steps and twenty minutes are all you need to make this mouthwatering side.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to season new potatoes and cook them in the air fryer.
  1. Combine the seasonings: Take out a large bowl and add the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
  2. Toss potatoes: Add the baby red potatoes to the seasoning mixture and toss until each potato has an even coating.
  3. Arrange the cut potatoes: Place the seasoned potatoes in the air fryer basket, arranging them in a single even layer without overcrowding.
  4. Air fry the red potatoes: Cook the potatoes for about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every five minutes, until the potatoes are tender when pierced with a knife. If the potatoes aren’t fork-tender at the end of 15 minutes, continue cooking them in one-minute increments until done.
  5. Serve: Transfer your fresh air-fried red potatoes onto a serving platter and serve with your favorite sauce on the side.

How to Store and Reheat?

To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend eating them on the day of cooking. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in a pinch with these pro storage tips.

  • Storage: These air fryer mini red potatoes will stay fresh for up to three days when you store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: To reheat your red potatoes, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.

Serving Suggestions:

This simple air fryer side is one of the tastiest, most versatile potato recipe ideas in my cookbook. Hassle-free and quick, this simple side dish takes the stress out of complicated meal prep. 

  • Side dish with meat dishes: Hands-down, these bite-size potatoes make for the perfect weekday dinner side dish. Serve them with your favorite chicken main—like my effortless Baked Chicken Kabobs or perfectly portioned Air Fried Cornish Hens—for a menu the whole family can enjoy. Or, try a savory beef recipe, such as Reverse Sear Tenderloin or classic Pot Roast, to make a meal worthy of a gourmet dinner spread.
  • Serve as finger food: Not only are air fryer red potato wedges a perfect side dish for countless mains, but they’re also excellent finger food! Serve a plate of air-roasted potatoes with a side of your favorite dipping sauce—like my Blue Cheese Dip and Yogurt Ranch Dip, and watch them disappear in minutes.

Expert Tips

Preparing baby red potatoes in the air fryer is a surefire way to fill your plate with savory, crisp, and creamy flavors. These pro tips will guarantee your potato side is as delicious as possible—with none of the hassle!

  • Wash and dry: Washing your red potatoes is essential to removing bacteria and debris before cooking. After washing, though, dry the potatoes thoroughly with paper towels or a clean kitchen towel before adding them to your recipe. Otherwise, the seasoning will not stick to the potato skin, and they won’t come out as crispy.
  • Cut them evenly: When cutting new potatoes for this dish, slice them into uniform sizes to ensure even cooking. If they’re small enough, you may cook whole red potatoes in the air fryer, but if you have larger potatoes, I recommend cutting them into even, bite-sized pieces for the best results.
  • Don’t overcrowd: When cooking small red potatoes in the air fryer, it’s vital that you don’t overcrowd the basket to ensure proper air circulation and even cooking. I found that my 6-qt. air fryer (affiliate link) was large enough to accommodate one pound of red potatoes. However, if you have a smaller air fryer, you may need to cook your potatoes in two batches to ensure they lay in a single even layer.
  • Toss a few times while cooking: To ensure even roasting, I recommend tossing your potatoes a few times during the air frying process, preferably every five minutes.
  • Check for doneness: The best way to tell the doneness of your red skin potatoes is by using the “knife test.” Pierce the center of a potato with a knife or fork. If the blade enters and exits the flesh easily, you may remove your potatoes from the heat. If the blade encounters resistance, continue air frying the potatoes in one-minute increments until done.
  • Every air fryer is different: As you prepare your red baby potatoes, remember that different air fryers result in different heat levels and cooking times. I tested this recipe using an Instant Pot (affiliate link) and a Ninja Air Fryer (affiliate link), but if you have a different model, be sure to check your potatoes throughout the cooking process to avoid under or over-cooking.

FAQs

There’s no reason to stress over this simple air fryer recipe. This easy FAQ will answer all your remaining questions, from how long to cook red potatoes in the air fryer to nutritional information.

Can you air fry red potatoes?

Definitely! Air frying red potatoes results in expertly seasoned, delectably crisp, and lusciously tender potatoes in half the time as regular frying. All you need to do is season and oil your potato slices, air fry them at 400 degrees F. for 15-17 minutes (tossing occasionally), and enjoy.

Should you boil potatoes before air frying?

No, there’s no need to boil your potatoes before air-frying them. Boiling them first will make them mushy, and they won’t maintain their shape while eating.

What temperature to air fry potatoes?

Though you may air fry red skin potatoes at 350 and 375 degrees F., we found that 400 degrees F. for 15 minutes resulted in the crispiest, most tender potatoes. Remember, however, that you must adjust your cooking time should you choose a different temperature.

Are air-fried red potatoes healthy?

Air-frying is generally healthier than traditional frying methods, as it uses less oil, reduces calories and trans fats, and helps retain more nutrients in your main ingredient. However, it’s also important to note that potatoes—no matter your preparation method—are high in carbohydrates and low in protein, though they also contain vitamins and minerals, like Vitamin C and potassium (source.) Therefore, I encourage you to customize your menu depending on your dietary needs and the dishes with which you plan to pair your air-fried potatoes.

How long to air fry red potatoes at 400 degrees F.?

I recommend cooking your small red potatoes for 15-17 minutes at 400 degrees F., shaking the basket every five minutes to ensure even cooking.

How to make French fries with red potatoes in the air fryer?

To make air fryer red potato French fries, begin by washing, drying, and slicing your potatoes into thin, even-sized strips (i.e., into the shape of a French fry). Then, place potatoes in a large bowl of cold water and soak for 30 minutes. Once done, drain and dry the potatoes with a clean kitchen towel, toss them in olive oil and your desired seasonings until evenly coated. Next, arrange your seasoned potato slices in a single even layer in your air fryer basket and cook them at 375 degrees F. for 12-15 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through. When the air fryer red potato fries reach your preferred level of crispness, remove them from the heat, sprinkle them with any additional seasoning, and serve.

Other Potato Side Dishes You Might Also Like

Making crispy red potatoes in the air fryer is one of my favorite ways to please a crowd. For even more fan-favorite potato dishes, these tasty recipes will fill your menu with creamy, savory goodness every night of the week.

If you try this crispy Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe or any other one of our Air Fry Recipes, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer roasted red potatoes in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Air Fryer Red Potatoes Recipe

Get ready to tantalize your taste buds with this Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe! In just 20 minutes, you can transform simple ingredients into a delectably crispy and flavorful weeknight dinner side dish or snack. Use this easy recipe to make a delicious side dish or a quick snack that is guaranteed to impress.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 113kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound baby red potatoes washed, blemishes removed and halved (no need to peel)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
  • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper.
  • Add the baby red potatoes and toss to combine.
  • Place the potatoes in a single layer into the air fryer basket, being sure not to overcrowd them.
  • Cook the potatoes until tender when pierced with a knife, about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every 5 minutes. If not tender after 15 minutes, continue to cook in 1-minute increments until done.
  • Transfer the air-roasted potatoes onto a serving platter and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 pound air fried red potatoes that are ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Rinse and dry: It is important to make sure the potatoes are dry before tossing them in the olive oil mixture to ensure that the potatoes are evenly coated and can crisp up during the cooking process. 
  • Do not overcrowd your air fryer: Cook in batches, if needed, so that the heat is evenly distributed and they have enough room to crisp up.
  • Sprinkle it while it’s still hot: Though optional, you may sprinkle your air-fried small red potatoes with additional salt, herbs, and parmesan cheese directly after cooking (while the potatoes are still hot). Doing so ensures that the baby red potatoes heat and develop the new flavors—making them as rich and savory as possible—while also melting any additional cheese.
  • Storage: To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend air frying them right before serving. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.
  • Oven roasting: If you do not have an air fryer, you can roast your red potatoes in the oven. Simply use 2 tablespoons of oil (instead of one), transfer the cut potatoes onto a parchment-lined baking sheet, and roast in a preheated 450-degree oven for 25-30 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 113kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 312mg | Potassium: 526mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 75IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Air Fryer Red Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Butternut Squash https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/#respond Thu, 02 Nov 2023 16:07:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71576 While this simple recipe shows you how to make air fryer cubed butternut squash, we also have a recipe for Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves, should you need it. Ingredients Sophisticated yet nutritious, this air-fried butternut squash recipe only uses simple ingredients that you probably already have on hand. How to Air Fry Butternut Squash? Roasting butternut squash in the air fryer is a cinch when you follow these simple...

The post Air Fryer Butternut Squash appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
While this simple recipe shows you how to make air fryer cubed butternut squash, we also have a recipe for Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves, should you need it.

Butternut squash cooked in air fryer on a white oval plate with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

Sophisticated yet nutritious, this air-fried butternut squash recipe only uses simple ingredients that you probably already have on hand.

  • Butternut squash: Fresh, unblemished butternut squash is the key to making air fryer roasted squash. When selecting your squash, look for ones with an intact stem, a dark beige color, and matte skin. Once your squash is ready, peel and cut it into 1-inch cubes. Be careful when cutting it into cubes. If you are new to it, check out my foolproof guide to cutting butternut squash before you start. Also, to simplify your meal prep, you may use store-bought, pre-cut butternut squash for this recipe. However, remember that these cubes tend to be larger, so you may need to cut them into smaller, 1-inch cubes before tossing them in your seasoning mixture. 
  • Olive oil: I use olive oil to help my seasoning mix adhere to the butternut squash and give each cube a beautifully roasted exterior. However, you may also use avocado oil or coconut oil if you prefer.
  • Garlic powder: Though both have a robust garlicky flavor, I recommend using garlic powder instead of minced garlic for this recipe. Garlic powder allows for a more even flavor coating, ensuring every bite of your squash explodes with a rich, gourmet taste.
  • Seasonings: You only need Kosher salt and black pepper to give your air fryer butternut squash cubes a deliciously savory, sophisticated flavor.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Other spices: Want to infuse your air-fried squash with warm fall flavors? Add one teaspoon of ground cinnamon, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, and a pinch of nutmeg to your seasoning mix for a fall-ready side no one can resist.
  • Sweetener: For a sweeter version of this recipe, prepare your air fryer butternut squash with a teaspoon of brown sugar, maple syrup, or coconut sugar—tossed in with your other seasonings. I recommend using a small amount of sweetener (no more than 1 teaspoon), as doing so might caramelize or burn the squash while it is air frying. However, if you prefer it to be sweeter, you can drizzle it with maple syrup over the air-fried butternut squash after the cooking is completed.
  • Fresh herbs: Add a light, herbaceous flavor to your recipe by sprinkling your squash with whatever fresh herbs pair with your main dish, such as parsley, sage, rosemary, or thyme.

How to Air Fry Butternut Squash?

Roasting butternut squash in the air fryer is a cinch when you follow these simple instructions. In six steps and fifteen minutes, your squash will come out delectably caramelized, rich, and soft.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F. If you bought your squash as a whole, cut it into cubes using our guide on how to cut butternut squash.
The steps to making butternut squash in air fryer are laid out in a collage of photos.
  1. Toss the cubed butternut squash: Place the diced butternut squash, olive oil, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and pepper in a large bowl. If using, also add the ground cinnamon, ground cumin, nutmeg, and maple syrup (or sweetener of choice) to the mix. Then, toss the ingredients to ensure each butternut squash cube has an even coating of the seasonings.
  2. Transfer the seasoned butternut squash: Place the cubed butternut squash into the air fryer basket, ensuring they lie in a single layer. If your cubes don’t all fit, air fry them in two batches.
  3. Cook: Air fry the butternut squash for 15 minutes or until fork tender, shaking the basket halfway through.
  4. Check for doneness: I think the best way to check doneness (and tenderness) when air frying butternut squash is to pierce a cube with a knife. The batch is ready to eat if the blade gently enters and exits the air fryer squash cube. If the cube is still tough, cook the basket in one-minute increments until done.
  5. Serve: Once you’ve roasted the butternut squash in your air fryer, transfer the cooked cubes to a serving platter. If preferred, drizzle the squash with a teaspoon of maple syrup for additional sweetness.

How to Make Ahead and Store It

It’s no secret that air fryer-roasted butternut squash is best on the day you make it. However, these pro storage tips will ensure that no bite will go to waste when putting away your leftover squash.

  • Store: When storing your butternut squash, first let the leftovers reach room temperature. Then, transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your air-roasted squash, place it in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 3-5 minutes. Be sure to shake the basket halfway through reheating to ensure even cooking.

Ways to Use Air-Fried Butternut Squash

When you air fry butternut squash cubes, you’ll unlock countless other recipes to fill your table with sweet, savory, and garden-fresh flavors. Below are just a few of my favorite ways to incorporate this winter squash into my menus:

  • Serve it as a healthy Thanksgiving side dish: What better way to celebrate the holiday season than with air fryer winter squash? This hassle-free recipe makes for the perfect Thanksgiving side dish, complementing your favorite holiday mains with gorgeous color, caramelized taste, and simple prep.
  • Add it to salads: This recipe makes the most delicious crispy roasted squash, which pairs beautifully with any of your fall salads. I especially like using it in Ina’s Butternut Squash Salad or Ottolenghi’s Butternut Squash Feta Salad for a surprisingly complex, rich, and healthy dish.
  • Turn it into soups: Tender, mild, and exquisitely caramelized, air-roasted butternut squash is one of my favorite recipes to add to creamy soups. My Thai Butternut Squash Soup is a vegan dish brimming with aromatic, nutty flavors, while Butternut Squash Chicken Soup will warm your belly with a hearty, nutritious taste.
  • Add it to pasta or pizza as a topping: Believe it or not, air fryer cubed butternut squash makes for the perfect addition to all your Italian favorites, including pasta and pizza recipes. With this easy air fryer recipe, you can add a sumptuously sweet flavor to all your go-to weeknight meals.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a Food Network star to roast butternut squash in the air fryer. This easy guide will give you expert guidance on everything from slicing tips to seasoning suggestions.

  • Equal-sized cubes: For best results, it is imperative that your squash cubes are similar in size. There’s a direct correlation between air frying time and the size of your butternut squash cubes, so keeping your cubes uniform will ensure no piece of squash comes out over- or under-cooked.
  • Don’t overcrowd the air fryer basket: The key to proper air frying is adequate air circulation throughout the chamber. Therefore, you mustn’t overcrowd your basket when cooking, arranging your squash in a single even layer so that hot air reaches each side of your squash cubes. This positioning will ensure your squash cubes develop an even golden brown exterior and tender insides. Depending on the size of your air fryer, you may have to cook your butternut squash in two batches if they don’t all fit in the basket.
  • Shake halfway through: Be sure to shake the air fryer basket halfway through the cooking process to ensure even air frying on all sides of the butternut squash.
  • Each air fryer is different: We tested this recipe in a Ninja Air Fryer and Instant Pot Air Fryer, and the results were very similar. However, keep in mind that each brand of air fryer is different. Therefore,  your butternut squash may need more or less time, depending on the brand you own. When in doubt, check the doneness halfway through the cooking process by inserting a sharp knife into your squash and continue to cook it in one-minute increments until fork-tender.
  • Check doneness: Remember that this recipe’s recommended cooking time may change depending on your air fryer model and the size of your squash cubes. To check whether your butternut squash is ready to serve, I recommend using the “knife test.” In other words, insert a knife into one of your squash cubes and see whether it smoothly enters and exits the veggie. If it does, your air fryer squash is ready to eat.
  • Sugar: If you add sugar to your recipe, I recommend starting with a small amount— one teaspoon at most—to avoid over-caramelizing. If you prefer your butternut squash sweeter, you may drizzle or sprinkle it with additional sugar right after removing it from the air fryer (while it’s still hot).
  • Experiment with seasoning: Feel free to experiment with your squash’s seasoning blend based on what you’re serving it with. Depending on your menu, you may consider adding additional ingredients, like ground cinnamon, brown sugar, parsley, or even ground cumin.
  • Air fryer butternut squash fries: If you want to air fry butternut squash fries, cut your squash lengthwise into French fry-shaped pieces. Then, follow the recipe as directed, air frying them for 15 minutes at 375 degrees F.

FAQs

Want to know more about roasting squash in the air fryer? This handy FAQ will answer all your most pressing questions, whether you’re wondering about recommended cooking time or proper veggie prep.

Can you air fry butternut squash?

Absolutely! Air frying squash is an easy way to transform your winter squash into a deliciously tender, caramelized, and flavorful side. Even better, you can even use your air-fried squash in other recipes to cut down on prep time.

Should I peel butternut squash before air frying?

Yes, I recommend peeling your squash using a vegetable peeler before air frying it to eliminate unwanted toughness and ensure even cooking.

How long to air fry butternut squash?

When cut into 1-inch cubes, air fry your squash for about 15 minutes at 375 degrees F., shaking the basket halfway through. Remember, though, that every air fryer is different, so your squash may need more or less time, depending on what brand you own. To check for doneness, insert a knife into a cube and ensure it enters and exits the squash easily.

Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Also Like

Preparing air-roast butternut squash is an exceptionally tender, flavorful, and quick way to pack nutrition into your weekday meals. For even more delectable veggie recipes, this collection has just a few fan favorites that will satisfy the whole family.

If you try this Air Fryer Butternut Squash recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer roasted butternut squash on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Butternut Squash Recipe

Made with just a few simple ingredients, this Air Fryer Butternut Squash makes a great side dish or addition to salads, pasta, and pizza dishes. With many seasoning options, you can take this basic recipe and customize it to your liking.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 90kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 6 cups butternut squash cubes* from a 2.5 pounds squash (peeled)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Optional Add-ins

  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon optional
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin optional
  • Pinch of nutmeg optional
  • 1 teaspoon maple syrup or brown sugar plus more for drizzling if preferred

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
  • Place the diced butternut squash, olive oil, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and pepper in a large bowl. If using, also add ground cinnamon, ground cumin, nutmeg, and maple syrup. Give it a good toss, ensuring that all the butternut squash cubes are coated with the seasonings.
  • Transfer the seasoned butternut squash into the air fryer basket in a single layer. If they don’t fit, you may have to air fry them in two batches.
  • Air fry for 15 minutes or until fork tender, making sure to shake the air fryer basket halfway through the process.
  • To check tenderness, pierce a cube with a knife. If it goes in and out gently, the squash is done. If not fully tender, cook in 1-minute increments until done.
  • Transfer to a serving platter. If preferred, drizzle the butternut squash cubes with a teaspoon (or more) of maple syrup.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe, made with 2 ½ pounds of squash, yields about 5 to 6 cups of air-fried cubed butternut squash, which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Halved Squash: If you prefer to use halved squash instead of cubed squash, check out our Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves recipe.
  • Cutting butternut squash: If you are new to cutting squash, check out our guide on How To Cut Butternut Squash into cubes.
  • Evenly sized: For best results, it is important that your squash cubes are similar in size. Please keep in mind that there’s a direct correlation between air frying time and the size of the cubes, so keeping them uniform will ensure they are evenly cooked.
  • Adding sweetener: We intentionally limited the amount of sugar (maple syrup or brown sugar) to a small amount (only 1 teaspoon) as too much sugar might cause squash cubes to over-caramelize and potentially burn. If you prefer your dish to be sweeter, feel free to drizzle it with maple syrup after it is cooked (while it is still warm.)
  • Store: Bring leftovers to room temperature and then transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, place the cubed squash in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 3-5 minutes. Be sure to shake the basket halfway through reheating to ensure even cooking.
  • Frozen Butternut Squash Cubes: We also tested this recipe using a 15-ounce bag (standard size) of frozen butternut squash cubes that we bought from the grocery store. If you prefer to use frozen squash, you can follow the recipe as written but adjust the amount of oil and seasoning based on the weight of your squash. In our case, we halved the seasoning and oil. You do not need to wait for it to thaw. Just extend the air frying time to 20 minutes. Finally, be aware that because the butternut squash is frozen, when you air fry it, it will lose most of its moisture and the cubes will become smaller.

Nutrition

Calories: 90kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 394mg | Potassium: 507mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 14886IU | Vitamin C: 29mg | Calcium: 74mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Air Fryer Butternut Squash appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/#respond Thu, 02 Nov 2023 16:03:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71692 Ingredients Healthy, natural, and tasty, this air fry winter squash recipe only uses a handful of simple ingredients to get its irresistibly mouthwatering flavor. How to Air Fry Butternut Squash Halves There’s no secret to preparing butternut squash in the air fryer whole. These simple instructions will guide you every step of the way, giving you tender, caramelized squash halves in just half an hour. How to Store and Reheat?...

The post Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Air fried butternut squash halves on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients

Healthy, natural, and tasty, this air fry winter squash recipe only uses a handful of simple ingredients to get its irresistibly mouthwatering flavor.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Butternut squash: The most essential ingredient in this air fryer recipe is—you guessed it!—butternut squash. Begin by selecting a butternut squash with a firm texture, matte surface, and no bruises. Then, cut it in half lengthwise with a sharp knife. Though slicing butternut squash may seem daunting, you’ll find all the pro tips you need in my foolproof guide on How to Cut Butternut Squash. You also don’t need to peel your squash before using it in this recipe, though you may use a vegetable peeler to remove the skin if you prefer.
  • Olive oil: Olive oil is crucial to giving your air roast butternut squash a moist, tender, and perfectly crisp taste. However, you may also use any other mild-flavored oil, such as avocado oil, melted butter, or ghee.
  • Seasonings: All you need is garlic powder, kosher salt and pepper to bring out the natural flavors of the squash. Optionally—depending on your recipe—you may also sprinkle your squash with cinnamon, nutmeg, cayenne pepper, and pumpkin spice for an extra warm, sweet, and spicy taste.
  • Optional sweetener: Though not necessary, you may also add light sweeteners like maple syrup or brown sugar to your whole squash to enhance its caramelization and give it a sweet flavor.

How to Air Fry Butternut Squash Halves

There’s no secret to preparing butternut squash in the air fryer whole. These simple instructions will guide you every step of the way, giving you tender, caramelized squash halves in just half an hour.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
Person showing how to cut butternut squash in half.
  1. Cut the butternut squash: Place the whole butternut squash on its side on your cutting board. Be sure to hold it firmly around its middle with your non-dominant hand. Using a sharp chef’s knife in your free hand, trim off the stem by cutting off about half an inch. Then, while holding it in its side position, cut the squash in half lengthwise through its center, beginning from the top and working your way to the bottom. Remember that you may have to jerk the knife back and forth while applying pressure to loosen the blade while cutting. Use a spoon to scoop out the seeds and pulp from the core of the cut squash. You may either discard them or save the seeds to roast later.
Images showing how to air fryer halved butternut squash.
  1. Season the squash halves: Brush the cut side of the squash halves with olive oil and season them with garlic powder, salt, and pepper.
  2. Air fry the butternut squash: Place the halved squash cut side down into the basket of the air fryer and cook them for 22 minutes.
  3. Flip the squash: Flip the squash halves so their cut sides face up and cook them for an additional 10 minutes.
  4. Check for doneness: Insert a sharp knife into the neck (i.e., the vertical top) of the squash. If the knife pierces the flesh easily, it’s ready to remove from the heat. If the knife encounters some resistance, continue cooking the squash in one-minute increments until done.

How to Store and Reheat?

Making this air-fried butternut squash recipe is one of the easiest ways to enjoy savory, tender squash all week long. None of your favorite veggies will go to waste with these expert storage tips.

  • Storage: You can store your leftover squash in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your air-fried squash leftovers, cook them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until heated through.

How to Use Air-Fried Butternut Squash Halves in Recipes?

Exquisitely tender and expertly flavored, there are dozens of butternut squash recipes to make in the air fryer. These tasty cooking ideas will fill your table with rich, flavorful meals no matter when the craving strikes.

  • Use the flesh: My favorite way to warm up during the chilly winter months is to transform this savory air fryer butternut squash recipe into a warm, hearty meal. My Butternut Squash Soup is luscious, bright, and savory, while my vegan Thai Curry Butternut Squash Soup is a faster way to fill your bowl with bold, aromatic flavors. You can even turn your air-roasted butternut squash into a rich and creamy pasta sauce or a decadent pie filling for a fan-favorite Butternut Squash Pie.
  • Stuff it: Visually stunning and packed with nutrition, Stuffed Squash is a gourmet meal guaranteed to satisfy the whole family.
  • Mashed butternut squash: Transform your air-fried squash halves into the perfect Thanksgiving side dish using a five-star mashed butternut squash recipe. Like my Sweet Potato Mash, this recipe is fluffy, rich, and flavorful—but with half the calories!

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a squash expert to make a delicious side dish fit for a restaurant. These pro tips will ensure your air fryer butternut squash recipe is rich, caramelized, and tender every time.

  • Size of your squash matters: When making roasted butternut squash in the air fryer, you must select a squash that will fit in the basket of your air fryer. Therefore, take a minute when selecting your vegetable to ensure it is an appropriate size for your type of air fryer.
  • Air frying time: How long it takes to cook butternut squash in the air fryer may vary depending on the size of your squash and the brand of your air fryer. In this recipe, I cook my squash halves for 22 minutes cut-side down and another 10 minutes after flipping. However, I recommend checking the doneness of your air-fried squash using the knife test—inserting a knife into the neck of your squash—to tell if your veggie is appropriately tender. If the knife encounters resistance when inserted into the squash’s flesh, continue cooking it in one-minute increments until fork tender.
  • No need to peel: You don’t have to peel your butternut squash halves before adding them to the air fryer. Not only does keeping the skin cut down on prep time, but it also helps give you a good grip when scooping out the flesh to use in other recipes. However, you may peel the squash before air frying if preferred.
  • Start with skin side down: The key to cooking butternut squash halves in the air fryer is beginning the cooking process by placing the squash slices skin side down. This orientation ensures that your squash halves cook more evenly, as it allows for better air circulation and helps trap moisture in the skin of the squash to keep the veggie from drying out. It also results in better caramelization, as the flesh side of the squash will have more direct contact with the heat of the air fryer basket.
  • Add the sweetener at the last minute: If you choose to make air fryer butternut squash halves with maple syrup, brown sugar, or other sweeteners, wait until the last 5-10 minutes of cooking before adding the ingredient. Limiting these sweeteners’ exposure to high heat will help prevent burning and over-caramelization.

FAQs

Have more questions about this easy air fryer recipe? This simple guide has everything you need, whether you’re wondering about the air frying process or proper squash preparation.

Can you air fry butternut squash?

Absolutely! Air-roasted butternut squash (whether you cook it in cubes or whole) is a tasty, tender, and quick alternative to oven-roasting, and it even helps free up oven space when preparing multiple dishes at a time.

Do butternut squash halves need to be peeled before cooking?

No, you don’t have to remove the butternut squash skin before cooking. Though some prefer removing the skin beforehand, leaving the skin on helps trap moisture in the veggie during the cooking process, and it makes it easier to scoop out the flesh if you plan on using it for other recipes.

Other Butternut Squash Recipes You Might Also Like

Make the most of squash season by filling your kitchen with all your favorite butternut squash recipes. These recipes have everything you need, from delicious holiday sides to easy weeknight meals.

If you try this Air Fried Halved Butternut Squash recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fried butternut squash halves on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves Recipe

If cooking the whole butternut squash sounds daunting, try cooking them in the air fryer. The good news is that with this recipe, making Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves is not only easy but also convenient compared to other methods.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 32 minutes
Total Time 37 minutes
Servings 1 butternut squash
Calories 379kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 whole butternut squash approximately 2.5 pounds, cut in half lengthwise
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Pre-heat the air fryer to 375 degrees F.
  • Using a sharp chef’s knife, place the whole butternut squash on its side on your cutting board. Hold it firmly in the middle with your non-dominant hand. Trim the stem (the top) by cutting about ½-inch off. While still holding it firmly on its side, cut it vertically (or from top to bottom direction) in the middle. As you are cutting, you may have to jerk it back and forth while applying a little pressure to loosen it.*
  • Brush the cut sides of the butternut squash with olive oil and season with garlic powder, salt and pepper.
  • Place the butternut squash halves cut side down* and cook for 22 minutes.
  • Flip the butternut squash halves and cook for an additional 10 minutes.
  • Insert a knife in the “neck” of the squash. If it pierces easily, it should be ready. If it does not feel tender, cook in 1-minute increments until done.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes one whole butternut squash with two halves, which is good for 2 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Cutting the squash: It is imperative that you use a sharp knife and take your time as you are cutting the squash. If you are new to the process, be sure to check out our how-to guide to cutting butternut squash like a pro.
  • Sweetener: If you prefer, you can use a sweetener like maple syrup or brown sugar. However, we recommend brushing (or sprinkling) your butternut squash halves with the sweetener of your choice in the last 5 minutes of air frying to prevent over-caramelization or burning.
  • Start with skin side down ensures that your squash halves cook more evenly, as it allows for better air circulation and helps trap moisture in the skin of the squash to keep the veggie from drying out. It also results in better caramelization, as the flesh side of the squash will have more direct contact with the heat of the air fryer basket.
  • Storage: You can store your leftover halved squash in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your air-fried squash halves, cook them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until heated through.
  • Cubed Butternut Squash: If you prefer to air fry cubed butternut squash, check out our Air Fryer Butternut Squash recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 379kcal | Carbohydrates: 89g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 1194mg | Potassium: 2665mg | Fiber: 15g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 79728IU | Vitamin C: 158mg | Calcium: 364mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-butternut-squash-halves/feed/ 0
Turkey Wings Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-wings-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-wings-recipe/#respond Tue, 24 Oct 2023 21:29:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71401 Tender, tasty, and oh-so-versatile, it’s no wonder why turkey is a kitchen staple. If this delicious roasted turkey wings recipe hits the spot, I have so many other turkey recipes guaranteed to delight your tastebuds—without having to cook the entire turkey! My Baked Turkey Tenderloin is an elegant, herby main worthy of a food magazine spread, while my Turkey Drumsticks packs all the juicy, savory goodness of the whole bird...

The post Turkey Wings Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Tender, tasty, and oh-so-versatile, it’s no wonder why turkey is a kitchen staple. If this delicious roasted turkey wings recipe hits the spot, I have so many other turkey recipes guaranteed to delight your tastebuds—without having to cook the entire turkey! My Baked Turkey Tenderloin is an elegant, herby main worthy of a food magazine spread, while my Turkey Drumsticks packs all the juicy, savory goodness of the whole bird in perfectly portioned pieces.

Southern style turkey wings garnished with thyme from the top view.

Why Does This Recipe Work?

If you’ve ever tried baking turkey wings in the oven like you would cook chicken wings, chances are, you’ve ended up with dry, flavorless meat. However, I’ve designed this recipe to give you juicy turkey wings packed with savory flavor every time you prepare it. 

During our recipe testing, we learned two important lessons:

  1. Gentle heat is the best: You probably already know this, but turkey meat tends to be tougher than chicken, requiring a different cooking method. While you can technically roast turkey wings in the oven like you would with chicken wings (and they will look nice and crispy), the meat ends up being tough and dry.
    In our quest for a solution, we came across a Southern turkey wings recipe. In this method, the wings were cooked low and slow, with a bit of extra liquid added to the baking pan. Following in the food steps of the Southerners, we were able to achieve turkey meat that was juicy and tender on the inside, complemented by a beautifully browned, crispy exterior.
  2. Start with a cover and then remove it for browning. Another trick we learned was to bake them covered for an hour, followed by an additional thirty minutes uncovered. This initial covered phase helped wings retain moisture, ensuring a juicy interior, while the subsequent uncovered phase allowed them to develop a crispy exterior.

Ingredients

Tired of bland, flavorless wings? This recipe combines fresh, rich, and flavorful ingredients to make the best seasoning for turkey wings—a savory combination of fresh herbs and spices no one can resist. Below is everything you’ll need:

Turkey wings seasoning, oil, stock and turkey wings from the top view.
  • Fresh turkey wings: Whole turkey wings have three distinct parts to them: the drumette, the wingette (also known as the “flat”), and the tip or “flapper.” The turkey wing tips are small and have little meat, so they’re prone to burning. Therefore, I recommend removing the tips and saving them to make turkey stock. While you can cook turkey wings as a whole, I prefer cutting them before roasting. If you’d like some help with this step, you can buy your turkey wings whole, cut them yourself, or ask the local butcher at your grocery store to cut them for you. If you prefer using frozen turkey wings, be sure to fully thaw them first. No matter how you buy your turkey wings, though, just be sure to avoid smoked turkey wings (which come pre-cooked), as they’ll dry out while making this recipe.
  • Oil: I prefer olive oil to give my slow-roasted turkey wings their iconic crispy exteriors and tender, succulent insides. However, another mild-flavored oil, such as avocado oil, would also work.
  • Turkey wings seasonings: In my opinion, the best seasoning for turkey wings comes with a savory mix of pantry-ready ingredients, including onion powder, garlic powder, paprika, Kosher salt, and black pepper. To add extra-fresh overtones to your seasoning, I also recommend adding dried thyme and parsley to the mixture. You may also add cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes for an extra kick of spice, though this ingredient is optional.
  • Stock: Use either chicken broth or turkey stock to give your baked turkey wings extra succulent meat.
  • Fresh herbs: Though this garnish is optional, fresh herbs—like parsley, thyme, and rosemary—will transform your tender baked turkey wings into a gourmet meal, infusing each bite with herby, bright flavors.

How to Make It

This oven-baked turkey wings recipe takes only a handful of simple steps, giving you tender, juicy turkey no matter when you prepare it. 

  1. Prepare the oven: Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F.
A collage of images where a person is showing what to season turkey wings with.
  1. Dry the meat: Place the turkey wings on a cutting board and use paper towels to pat dry each piece on all sides. Once dry, transfer the wings to a large bowl.
  2. Season the turkey wings: Drizzle olive oil over the turkey wings and sprinkle them with an even coating of onion powder, garlic powder, paprika, thyme, parsley, cayenne pepper (if using), Kosher salt, and pepper. 
  3. Marinate turkey wings: Toss the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Then, cover the bowl with stretch film and let the meat sit in the turkey wing marinade for a minimum of 30 minutes in the fridge. If possible, I recommend marinating the turkey wings overnight to ensure they soak up as much flavor as possible.
Step by step images showing how to make turkey wings fall off the bone.
  1. Add the stock: When ready to bake, place the marinated turkey wings in a Dutch oven or casserole dish and add the stock to the base.
  2. Roast the turkey wings: Cover the dish with aluminum foil or the lid of your Dutch oven. Then, bake the turkey wings for one hour. After one hour, remove the foil and cook them in the baking dish for another 30 minutes. You may remove your slow-baked turkey wings from the oven when their thickest portions reach an internal temperature of 165 degrees F. However, it is OK to let the meat cook until it reaches a maximum of 180 degrees F.
  3. Serve: Transfer the roast turkey wings to a serving platter when ready. Drizzle them with the juices in the pan for maximum juiciness and flavor, then garnish the meat with fresh herbs.

How to Make Turkey Wings Crispy?

For extra crispy baked turkey wings, broil them for a few minutes. Here is how I do it:

Crispy turkey wings on a wire rack.
  1. Remove the cooked turkey from the pan after baking and transfer the wings to a sheet pan lined with a wire rack. 
  2. Place the meat under the broiler for 1-2 minutes or until the skin crisps up. However, keep a close eye on the turkey to avoid burning, as this meat can go from perfectly juicy to thoroughly dry in very little time.
  3. Let the broiled turkey wings rest for 5 minutes before serving.

How to Store, Reheat, Freeze, and Thaw?

One taste of these oven-fried turkey wings, and you won’t want to sacrifice a single bite. Storing your turkey wings is a cinch with these pro tips, giving you easy meal prep for days on end.

  • Store: After slow-cooking turkey wings in the oven, first cool them to room temperature, and then place them in an airtight container. Store them in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Allow the baked turkey flats and drummettes to come to room temperature. Once they’ve cooled, place them in an airtight container, ensuring they are well-covered to prevent freezer burn. These turkey pieces can be stored in the freezer for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: I recommend thawing your frozen turkey overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: To reheat your turkey wings, place them in a casserole dish with the juices and warm them in a 350-degree Fahrenheit oven for 10-15 minutes or until heated thoroughly.

Recipe Variations

The best-baked turkey wings recipe is one that you can customize according to your personal preference. Below, I’ve included some of my favorite ways to switch up this delectable main to satisfy all your cravings.

  • Marinade: Take this easy recipe to the next level; marinate turkey pieces in our turkey tenderloin marinade in the fridge for at least 2 hours or overnight. To make this sweet and savory version, transfer the marinated turkey into a casserole dish that will accommodate all the wings comfortably. Instead of using chicken broth, use one cup of the marinade as the cooking liquid. Follow the recipe instructions as written. During our testing, we found that using a marinade with an acid component (i.e., soy sauce and lemon juice) produced super tender, fall-off-the-bone tender turkey wings.
  • Southern-style: Looking for an authentic Southern recipe for turkey wings? To make this fresh, flavorful variation, add hardy vegetables (such as bell peppers and onions) into your cooking liquid. If preferred, you can strain the juices post-cooking, place them in a small saucepan, and reduce them until they thicken to a sauce-like texture. Then, serve your turkey wings and veggies over a bed of rice and drizzle them with the sauce for a five-star meal that tastes straight out of Tennessee.
  • Smothered: Preparing smothered baked turkey wings is an easy way to give each bite decadently rich flavors. To make the sauce, use the leftover pan drippings to make turkey gravy and pour it over the freshly baked turkey wings. Alternatively, I’ve also seen examples where people prepare cream of mushroom turkey wings instead of cooking their own gravy. If you prefer that shortcut, warm up the cream of mushroom soup and smother the meat just before serving.
  • Cajun seasoning: Give your meat a kick of savory, smoky flavor by baking Cajun turkey wings in the oven. All you need to do is change the seasoning for the turkey wings and use our spicy and bold Blackened Seasoning instead.
  • Lemon pepper turkey wings: To add bright, citrusy zest to your baked turkey wings, I recommend swapping out our recommended poultry seasoning mixture for a five-minute Lemon Pepper Seasoning.

What To Serve With Turkey Wings?

It doesn’t matter whether you’re serving up a platter of turkey wings and stuffing for a small holiday gathering or making your favorite comfort foods for Sunday supper. These ideas will fill your table with delectable sides, whether you’re preparing your go-to Healthy Thanksgiving Recipes, Friendsgiving Recipes, or looking for creative ideas for your next Football Food spread.

Turkey wings and rice in a bowl with a person drizzling rice over the meat.
  • Thanksgiving or Friendsgiving: Not a fan of cooking the full bird? Make this easy recipe instead! Serving a menu of turkey wings and Cornbread Dressing with a side of Maple Cranberry Sauce is an automatic hit among guests, especially when paired with my creamy Green Bean Casserole recipe. Or, if you’re looking for a rich, filling side, my Mashed Sweet Potatoes or Rosemary Garlic Mashed Potatoes will fill every fork with the velvety taste of seasoned potatoes.
  • Sunday dinners: With this iconic menu, you’ll never run out of turkey wing dinner ideas. All your Sunday supper guests will be satisfied when you pair your wings with cheesy classics like my Healthy Mac and Cheese and Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread. You can even add a touch of Southern goodness by baking a batch of Sweet Potato Biscuits. Or, for a healthy yet hearty meal, you can serve a spread of baked turkey wings and rice using any of your favorites, from wild rice to brown jasmine rice or even white rice.
  • Game day: No game day menu is complete without your go-to dip recipes. Your guests won’t be able to resist dipping their tender turkey meat in creamy, tangy, and light sauces, like my Yogurt Ranch Dip or Blue Cheese Dip.

Expert Tips

It is no secret that slow-baked turkey wings are a great option when trying to serve a lot of people with minimal time in the kitchen. However, there are a few lessons we learned during our recipe testing. Below are our foolproof tips for success:

  • The size of the turkey wings matters: There is a direct correlation between the size of the wings and the cooking time. For instance, young/small turkey wings will need less time in the oven than big turkey wings. Therefore, it’s best to buy wings that are similar in size to ensure even cooking. For reference, when testing this recipe, I used four wings totaling about three pounds. Furthermore, I don’t recommend using wing tips, as there is very little meat on them, and they will overcook when following this recipe.
  • Marinate longer: If you have the time, let the meat marinate overnight. While a 30-minute marination is effective, letting it sit longer ensures the flavors meld and deepen, yielding more flavorful meat.
  • Even layer: Ensure that the drummettes and wingettes are on an even layer in the baking dish. Overcrowding the dish will result in under or over-baked meat.
  • Low and slow is the way to go: If you do a quick internet search for this recipe, you will see versions of it where people bake their wings at higher oven temperatures—like 350, 375, or even 400 degrees F. You will also find some recipes that suggest starting with a hot oven and bringing the temperature down. During our testing, we quickly learned that cooking the meat at high temperatures results in dry and tough wings, whereas cooking them at a low temperature—like 300 degrees F.—for a more extended time ensures that the meat doesn’t lose its juices but still cooks through. However, remember that turkey meat can go from perfectly cooked to dry and rubbery in very little time, so I encourage you to watch it closely.
  • Cover it well: If you own a Dutch oven with a lid (such as this Le Creuset Braiser – affiliate link), this is the time to use it. The tight-fitting lid of a Dutch oven is ideal for keeping the meat’s juices contained, giving you succulent, moist turkey wings while cooking them in the oven. However, if you don’t have a Dutch oven, just be sure to tightly cover your casserole dish with aluminum foil to ensure it is fully sealed.
  • Turkey wing temperature: Technically, your turkey is safe to eat when the thickest part of the wing reaches 165 degrees F. when tested with a digital thermometer. However, please be aware that following the recipe below, your wings could register for up to 180 degrees. But, because we are cooking it low and slow and in a bit of liquid, this is okay. As a matter of fact, it is recommended for the most tender turkey wings. According to science writer Andrew Zimmerman Jones, “As you cook the turkey, muscle fibers contract until they begin to break up at around 180 F. Bonds within the molecules begin to break down, causing proteins to unravel, and the dense muscle meat to become more tender.”
  • Experiment with the recipe: Feel free to take this basic recipe and cooking method and experiment with various seasoning blends, serving styles, and favorite side dishes to make it your own.

FAQs

What temperature to bake turkey wings?

To achieve maximum tenderness, I recommend cooking your turkey wings (covered) at a low temperature, like 300 degrees F., for one hour, followed by thirty minutes uncovered.

How long to cook turkey wings in the oven?

When making slow-cooked turkey wings in the oven, I suggest cooking them for one hour, covered, at 300 degrees F. Then, bake the meat for an additional 30 minutes, uncovered, at the same temperature. This cooking time will ensure your meat comes out both tender and crisp without being dry or lacking in flavor.

Why are my turkey wings tough?

Your turkey meat will be tough if you cook it in a high-temperature oven for a long time without any liquid.

How to make turkey wings tender?

We found that the best way to tenderize turkey wings is to cook them at a low temperature (I recommend 300 degrees F.) for a long time (about 1 ½ hours.) Cooking the meat covered for the first hour and uncovered for the last half-hour ensures that the meat cooks evenly without drying.

Do you boil turkey wings before baking?

No, I don’t recommend boiling your turkey wings before baking them, as this additional step will strip the meat of their natural juices, leaving them flavorless and rubbery.

How long to marinate turkey wings?

When you marinate your turkey wings, let them sit in your seasoning mixture or your favorite turkey marinade for a minimum total time of thirty minutes. However—if possible—I recommend letting your meat marinate overnight in the fridge for extra deep, developed flavors.

Do you cover turkey wings when baking?

Yes, we do recommend covering them for the first half of roasting and then removing the cover for the last 30 minutes to ensure browning on the skin.

At what temperature are turkey wings done?

The internal temperature for turkey wings should reach a minimum of 165 degrees F. before serving. However, it is okay to cook wings until they reach 180 degrees F. to give them time to crisp up and tenderize.

Are turkey wings healthy?

Turkey wings contain many essential nutrients, such as protein, iron, and calcium, that make them a healthy choice. However, unlike turkey breast, turkey wings are dark meat, which also tends to be high in fat. If you want to reduce your cholesterol intake, I recommend removing the skin from the turkey wings before preparing this recipe.

How many turkey wings in a pound?

The number of wings in a pound depends on the size of the turkey, as large turkey wings weigh more than small turkey wings. However, the wings I used in this recipe were of medium size, weighing 0.7 pounds each with the drumette and wingette (three pounds total).

Other Turkey Recipes You Might Also Like

Can’t get enough of this tasty turkey dinner’s rich, tender taste? These other healthy turkey dishes will fill your plate with savory, succulent, and flavorful meals every night of the week.

If you try this Baked Turkey Wings recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baked turkey wings freshly baked in a casserole dish.
Print

Baked Turkey Wings Recipe

Baked Turkey Wings perfectly seasoned with a simple spice mixture and then roasted in the oven low and slow, resulting in wings that boast crispy skin and succulent meat.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 545kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 pounds turkey wings drumettes and flats separated, and tips removed
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 2 teaspoon paprika or smoked paprika for a smoky flavor
  • 1 tablespoon dried thyme
  • 1 tablespoon dried parsley
  • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper optional
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 cup chicken stock or turkey stock
  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh thyme or parsley as garnish, optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F.
  • To prepare the turkey wings, place them on a cutting board and pat dry each piece on all sides using paper towels. Transfer them to a large bowl.
  • Drizzle the turkey wings with olive oil and sprinkle them with onion powder, garlic powder, paprika, thyme, parsley, cayenne pepper (if using), Kosher salt, and pepper.
  • Toss to combine. Cover the seasoned wings with stretch film and let them marinate for at least 30 minutes in the fridge. You can let them marinate overnight if you have the time.
  • When ready to roast, transfer the wings into a casserole dish or a Dutch oven. Add the stock, making sure to not pour it directly over the turkey (we do not want all the spices to wash away.)
  • Cover the dish tightly with aluminum foil or the lid of your Dutch oven and bake for 1 hour. After 1 hour, remove the cover and continue cooking for another 30 minutes. During this time, the turkey will reach the ideal 165 degrees F. when a meat thermometer is inserted into the thickest part of a drumette. However, it is okay to let the meat cook after it exceeds the 165 degrees F. mark (up to 180 degrees F.).
  • When ready to serve, transfer the turkey wings onto a serving platter, drizzle them with the juices in the pan, and garnish with fresh herbs.
  • Alternatively, if you prefer them to have a crispy skin, you can remove the wings from the pan onto a sheet pan lined with a wire rack. Place them under the broiler and roast for a minute or two while keeping a very close eye on them.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6-7 pieces of wings made up of drumettes and wingettes. Depending on the weight and size of your wings, this amount might change. However, we think it is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Wings: You can buy whole wings and cut them yourself (here is a tutorial on how to cut turkey wings into segments) or ask your butcher to cut them for you.
  • Size of the wings & cooking time: There is a direct correlation between the size of your wings and the time it will take them to roast thoroughly. The best way to measure doneness is by using a meat thermometer. If the wings register between 165 degrees F and 180 degrees F, they should be safe to eat.
  •  Marinade: Alternatively, you can marinade turkey pieces in our turkey tenderloin marinade in the fridge for at least 2 hours or overnight. To make this sweet and savory version, transfer the marinated turkey into a baking dish that will accommodate all the pieces comfortably. Instead of using chicken broth, use one cup of the marinade as the cooking liquid. Follow the recipe instructions as written. During our testing, we found that using a marinade with an acid component (i.e., soy sauce and lemon juice) produced super tender, fall-off-the-bone tender turkey wings.
  • Low and slow is the way to go: If you do a quick internet search for this recipe, you will see versions of it where wings are baked at higher oven temperatures. You will also find some recipes that suggest starting with a hot oven and bringing the temperature down. During our testing, we quickly learned that cooking the meat at high temperatures results in dry and tough wings. Instead, cooking them at a low temperature—like 300 degrees F.—for a more extended time ensures that the meat doesn’t lose its juices but still cooks through. However, remember that turkey meat can go from perfectly cooked to dry and rubbery in very little time, so I encourage you to watch it closely.

Nutrition

Calories: 545kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 48g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Cholesterol: 161mg | Sodium: 797mg | Potassium: 678mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 622IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Turkey Wings Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-wings-recipe/feed/ 0
How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-brown-jasmine-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-brown-jasmine-rice/#respond Mon, 16 Oct 2023 23:02:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71239 We love our whole grains for their nutty flavor, extra dietary fiber, and wholesome nutritional value. But nothing smells like comfort to me more than a pot of rice cooking away on the stove. And if you are into whole grains as much as I am, consider this as a guide to perfect brown rice every time. If you want to learn more, we have a great library of whole...

The post How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
We love our whole grains for their nutty flavor, extra dietary fiber, and wholesome nutritional value. But nothing smells like comfort to me more than a pot of rice cooking away on the stove. And if you are into whole grains as much as I am, consider this as a guide to perfect brown rice every time.

If you want to learn more, we have a great library of whole grains, including Black Rice, Bulgur Wheat, Quinoa, and Wild Rice.

Cooked jasmine brown rice in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need to Make Jasmine Brown Rice

In and of itself, jasmine brown rice is a 2-ingredient recipe. The additional ingredients add that much more flavor, character, and color. We will need:

  • Rice: Brown jasmine rice, also referred to as whole-grain jasmine rice, brown Thai rice, jasmati brown rice, or unpolished rice, is a type of long-grain brown rice coming from Thailand and Southeast Asia. Its distinctive light brown color comes from retaining the outer layers, which are removed, along with the germ, to create white jasmine rice. Because jasmine brown rice is a whole-grain rice, it has a slightly matte finish, nutty taste, and chewy texture. You can find it in the global section of the grocery store, specialty Asian markets, or even online. My favorite brands are Lundberg organic brown jasmine rice (affiliate link) and Mahatma Jasmine Brown Thai Fragrant Whole-Grain Rice (affiliate link). We tested this recipe using these two brands of rice.
  • Cooking liquid: Water is the most common cooking liquid for rice and offers the easiest approach. With that being said, you can add more flavor by swapping the water for Chicken Stock, Vegetable Broth, or Veggie Scrap Stock instead.
Ingredients to make the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

While the below additions are optional, I chose to use them in the recipe for extra flavor. Luckily, they are ingredients that you probably already have on hand.

  • Olive oil or butter: To give the rice a glossy sheen and extra flavor, add 1-2 tablespoons olive or butter right into the cooking liquid.
  • Kosher salt: Adding salt at the beginning of cooking will enhance the natural flavor of the rice.
  • Black pepper: For some slight heat, I like to add freshly ground black pepper after the rice is done cooking.
  • Fresh herbs: A sprinkle of fresh parsley at the end adds both color and flavor. However, feel free to adjust the herbs you choose based on the dish you are serving it with. I usually pair it with different herbs that complement Asian flavors, like cilantro, mint, basil, or scallions.

Brown Jasmine Rice Cooking Instructions (Stovetop)

This Thai brown jasmine rice recipe is a cinch to make. Since brown rice takes longer to cook than white rice, the hardest part is waiting for it to finish on the stove. Here’s how I like to do it:

A collage of images showing how to cook brown jasmine rice on the stove top.
  1. Rince rice: Place rice in a colander and rinse under cold water until the water runs clear, 20-30 seconds.
  2. Boil water: In a heavy-bottomed, medium saucepan over high heat, add 2 cups of cooking liquid, along with the olive oil and salt (if using). Bring to a boil.
  3. Add rice: During our recipe testing, we found that the best brown jasmine rice-to-water ratio is 1:2. Therefore, as soon as your cooking liquid comes to a boil, add 1 cup of rinsed and drained rice to the cooking liquid.
  4. Cover and cook: Cover with the lid, and reduce the heat to low. Simmer for 30 minutes without opening the lid. After 30 minutes, open the lid and check to see if the liquid is fully absorbed. If not, continue to simmer in 3-minute increments until the excess water has been absorbed.
Cooked jasmine brown rice being fluffed.
  1. Rest: Remove from the heat and rest the rice for 10 minutes with the lid on.
  2. Fluff and serve: Gently fluff the rice with a fork. Season with black pepper and parsley, if desired. Serve.

How to Store and Reheat

Stovetop brown jasmine rice is a wonderful meal prep recipe. I like to keep a container of this whole grain in either the fridge or freezer so I can have a hearty side dish ready at a moment’s notice. To store properly, simply:

  • Storage: You can keep leftover rice in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Just be sure to first bring it to room temperature before storing it.
  • Freezing: To freeze, first cool completely by spreading the rice out onto a baking sheet (this speeds up the process and prevents the formation of ice crystals in the freezer). Transfer to heavy-duty freezer bags or freezer-safe airtight containers with some room at the top for expansion. (If you are big into meal prep, package in 1-2 cup portions so you only pull out what you need.) Label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Thawing: Thaw frozen rice overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheating: Splash a few tablespoons of water on the rice to rehydrate. Microwave on high in 30-second increments, stirring each time in between, until warmed through. Or steam or stir-fry in a skillet on the stove.

Other Methods of Cooking Brown Jasmine Rice

Brown Jasmine rice is just like any other rice, in that it can be cooked following a different cooking method. Some other methods of cooking Thai jasmine rice include:

  • In a Rice Cooker: Follow the ratio of 1 ½ cups liquid to 1 cup of uncooked rice. Place in your rice cooker and set it to the ‘Rice’ setting (or ‘Brown Rice’ setting, if your cooker has it). When done cooking, fluff it and serve.
  • In the Instant Pot: Follow the ratio of 1 ¼ cups liquid to 1 cup of rice. Place in the pressure cooker, set the vent to ‘Sealing’ position, select ‘Manual’ on high pressure, and set the cooking time to 20 minutes. Once done, allow the pressure to naturally release for 10 minutes, then manually release the remaining pressure. Fluff it with a fork and serve. For more information, check out our detailed post on cooking brown jasmine rice in the instant pot.

To make it easier, below is a breakdown of the brown jasmine rice-to-water ratio for each method of cooking:

MethodRice AmountWater AmountCook TimeNotes
Stove Top1 cup2 cups30-40 minutesCheck after 30 minutes.
Rice Cooker1 cup1 1/2 cups40-60 minutesThe timing might change based on your rice cooker.
Pressure Cooker1 cup1 1/4 cups23 minutesPlus, 10 min each to come to pressure and release.

Serving Suggestions

Brown rice is an incredibly versatile side dish that can be served just as is with stir-fried vegetables, added to soup and salads, turned into grain bowls, and in some cases, even transformed into dessert-like rice pudding. Make it a great addition to any of your favorite meat, chicken, seafood, and vegetarian meals. A few of my favorites are:

Expert Tips

For the best brown jasmine rice recipe, be sure to follow these expert tips:

  • Do not skip rinsing the rice: Rinsing removes the excess starch on the coating of the rice, resulting in light and fluffy grains. Place the rice in a fine-mesh strainer and rinse under cool running water until the water runs clear.
  • Keep the lid on: The key is to cook the rice over consistent heat, low and slow, so you want to refrain from opening the lid while cooking. In other words, no peeking.
  • Use a thick-bottomed saucepan: The thick bottom of the pan serves as a protective barrier, preventing the rice from burning or sticking. In addition, it ensures even heat distribution, resulting in perfectly cooked brown jasmine rice with uniform consistency.
  • Make sure to rest: The key to perfectly cooked rice is resting it for 10 minutes, with the lid still on, as soon as you remove it from the heat. This essentially steams the rice all the way through.
  • Fluff: When ready, use a fork to gently fluff the rice. Doing so helps release steam and separate the grains, resulting in a soft, airy texture.
  • Get creative: Don’t be shy when it comes to cooking rice the way you want it. Use any cooking liquid of your choice, throw in some aromatics like garlic cloves and bay leaves, and finish with herbs and seasonings like parsley, cilantro, basil, chives, red pepper flakes, and more.

FAQs

How long does it take to cook brown jasmine rice?

The cooking time for brown jasmine rice is anywhere between 30-40 minutes when cooking on the stove. Be mindful of the cooking liquid and cook until all the liquid is absorbed and the rice is tender.

Is jasmine rice whole grain?

There are two varieties of jasmine rice: white and brown. Brown jasmine rice is considered a whole grain because it contains the endosperm, bran, and germ.

Is jasmine rice brown rice?

Jasmine rice comes in two forms: white and brown. Brown jasmine rice boasts a tan color, a chewy texture, and an earthy flavor. On the other hand, white jasmine rice has a white appearance, with a tender yet slightly sticky texture, and is accompanied by a delightful floral aroma.

What does brown jasmine rice look like?

Brown jasmine rice is tan to light brown in color, with long and slender grains. The finish is somewhat matte, thanks to the presence of the bran layer.

If you try this Jasmine Brown Rice Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Cooked brown jasmine rice in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice

Here’s the foolproof recipe for perfectly cooked brown jasmine rice on the stovetop. No special equipment is needed for this gluten-free and vegan side dish.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Resting time 10 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 203kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups water*
  • 1 cup Brown Jasmine Rice* thoroughly rinsed*

Optional add-ins:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon parsley chopped, optional

Instructions

  • Place your cooking liquid in a medium-sized saucepan over high heat. If using, add in olive oil and salt as well. Cover and bring it to a boil.
  • Add the rice, stir to combine, and bring it to a rolling boil. Put the lid on and turn the heat down to low. Simmer for 30 minutes without opening the lid.
  • At the end of the 30 minutes of simmering, open the lid and check whether or not the liquid is fully absorbed. If it hasn’t, then continue to simmer at 3-minute increments until no liquid is left.
  • Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes with the lid on.
  • When ready to serve, gently fluff it with a fork.
  • If preferred, season with black pepper and garnish with chopped parsley. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 3 ½ cups cooked. A side serving is suggested at ½-1 cup, so it would be good for approximately 4 servings. The nutrition facts below are per serving.
  • Cooking liquid: If you want to add more flavor, you can vegetable stock or chicken broth in place of water.
  • Do not skip on rinsing: Rinsing the rice is an important step as it helps remove any additional starch. The best method is to place the rice in a mesh strainer and rinse it under cold water, stirring with your fingers or spoon.
  • Jasmine Brown Rice: We tested this recipe using two different national brands: Lundbery Organic Jasmine Brown Rice and Mahatma Jasmine Brown Rice. They yielded similar results in terms of cooking time and the amount of cooked rice. However, please keep in mind that the age of the rice plays an important role in the final product. The fresher the rice, the more fragrant it will be. Additionally, if you decide to purchase brown jasmine rice from the bulk bin, the time of cooking might be different. We recommend using the visual cues we listed within the blog post to gauge doneness.
  • Storage: You can keep leftover rice in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Just be sure to first bring it to room temperature before storing it.
  • Freezing: To freeze, first cool completely by spreading the rice out onto a baking sheet Transfer to heavy-duty freezer bags or freezer-safe airtight containers with some room at the top for expansion. If cooking Thai jasmine brown rice is a part of your meal prep, I recommend packaging it in 1-2 cup portions so you only pull out what you need. Label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Thawing: Thaw frozen rice overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheating: Splash a few tablespoons of water on the rice to rehydrate. Microwave on high in 30-second increments, mixing each time in between until warmed through.

Nutrition

Calories: 203kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 591mg | Potassium: 112mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 86IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How To Cook Brown Jasmine Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-brown-jasmine-rice/feed/ 0
Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot https://foolproofliving.com/instant-pot-brown-jasmine-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/instant-pot-brown-jasmine-rice/#comments Mon, 16 Oct 2023 22:54:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71283 I love my Instant Pot for many reasons, but one of my favorite ways to use the pressure cooker is cooking whole grains. Among my go-to Instant Pot recipes like Wild Rice, Forbidden Rice, and Quinoa, brown jasmine rice has quickly become my new favorite. Ingredients Instant Pot brown jasmine rice is a 2-ingredient recipe. But I added a few additional flavorings and seasonings to give it that much more...

The post Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I love my Instant Pot for many reasons, but one of my favorite ways to use the pressure cooker is cooking whole grains. Among my go-to Instant Pot recipes like Wild Rice, Forbidden Rice, and Quinoa, brown jasmine rice has quickly become my new favorite.

Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients

Instant Pot brown jasmine rice is a 2-ingredient recipe. But I added a few additional flavorings and seasonings to give it that much more personality. We will need:

Ingredients laid out from the top view.
  • Brown jasmine rice: Brown jasmine rice is a long grain rice with the outer coating (bran and germ) still intact. Look for brown rice, sometimes labeled Thai jasmine brown rice, in the international aisle at the grocery store, specialty Asian markets, or online sellers, such as Amazon. My favorite brands are Lundberg Organic brown jasmine rice (affiliate link) and Mahatma Jasmine Brown Thai Fragrant Whole-Grain Rice (affiliate link). This instant pot jasmine brown rice was tested using these two brands of rice.
  • Cooking liquid: Use water for a clean, neutral flavor, or opt for Vegetable Broth, Chicken Stock, or Veggie Scrap Stock. Omit the salt if using stock instead of water.
  • Olive oil: A mere teaspoon of olive oil gives the rice a nice glossy sheen. Feel free to swap it out for avocado oil, coconut oil, or ghee.
  • Kosher salt: A little salt enhances the natural flavor of the rice and makes it that much more delicious.
  • Black pepper: Freshly ground black pepper is best sprinkled on top at the end of cooking to preserve those natural oils.
  • Fresh herbs: While not mentioned in the recipe card, fresh herbs or complimentary flavors really enhance the flavor of the rice and give balance to your meal. A few popular herbs and seasonings include fresh cilantro, basil, mint, green onions, lime juice, or sesame seeds.

Brown Jasmine Rice to Water Ratio for Pressure Cooker

If this is the first time cooking jasmine brown rice in the Instant Pot, there are keynotes to point out when it comes to the rice-to-water ratio. Here’s what I have discovered:

  • Firmer rice: If you prefer your rice on the firmer side, with a bit more bite to it, use a 1:1 ratio of water to rice. In other words, for every 1 cup of brown rice, use 1 cup of cooking liquid and adjust the cooking time to 20 minutes.
  • Softer rice: If you prefer soft rice that is bouncy with a chewy texture, use a 1:1.25 ratio. As in, for every 1 cup of rice, use 1 ¼ cups of cooking liquid and set the cooking time to 23 minutes (this is my preferred rice and the recipe that is written in the recipe card).

How to Cook Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot?

This Instapot brown jasmine rice recipe is so easy and virtually hands-free you’ll wonder why you never started cooking rice in the pressure cooker in the first place. Much like the rice setting on your rice cooker, this Instant Pot jasmine rice recipe is ready after the push of a button. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

A collage of images showing how to cook jasmine brown rice in Instant Pot.
  1. Rinse the rice: Place the rice in a colander and rinse under cold water, stirring with your fingers (or a spoon) until water runs clear, 20-30 seconds.
  2. Add ingredients to Instant Pot: Into the steel inner pot, add brown jasmine rice, your choice of cooking liquid, olive oil, and Kosher salt. Give it a good stir.
  3. Close lid: Secure the lid and set the pressure release to the “Sealing” position.
  4. Pressure cook: Select “Manual” on high pressure and set it to 23 minutes of pressure cooking time. It should come to full pressure within the next 5-7 minutes. 
  5. Release pressure: Natural pressure release (NPR) for 10 minutes, and then manually release the remaining pressure.
Jasmati rice in instant pot insert being fluffed by a person.
  1. Fluff and serve: Carefully remove the Instant Pot lid and fluff with a fork. Season with black pepper and serve.

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

This Instant Pot brown jasmine rice recipe bodes wonderful for meal prep, or simply any time you want to have whole grains on hand. Here’s how I like to store, freeze and reheat:

  • Storage: Leftover rice will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. To speed up the cooling process, spread the cooked brown rice out on a baking sheet (this prevents clumps from forming as the rice cools).
  • Freezing: Once completely cool, transfer to a heavy-duty freezer bag or freezer-safe airtight container with some room at the top for expansion. (If you regularly meal prep, package the rice in 1-2 cup portions. This way, you only pull out what you need.) Label, date, and freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Thawing: Thaw frozen brown rice overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Reheating: Add a few tablespoons of water to the rice. Then, steam or stir-fry with your recipe in a skillet on the stove or microwave on high in 30-second intervals, stirring each time in between, until warm.

What to Serve it With?

Instant pot Brown rice is a nutritious and delicious side dish that can be served with vegetables alongside any main dish. With a delicious nutty flavor, it pairs beautifully with meat or vegetable-based dishes. Some of my favorites are:

Expert Tips

For the absolute best Instant Pot brown jasmine rice recipe, be sure to take note of these expert tips:

  • Rinse before cooking: Rinsing the brown rice prior to cooking washes away excess starch on the surface, resulting in perfectly fluffy brown rice. The best way is to rinse the rice in a fine mesh strainer, stirring with your hands or a spoon, until the water runs clear.
  • Natural release: When the cooking time is up, allow the Instant Pot to naturally release the pressure for about 10 minutes. This allows time for the rice to cook further through.
  • Do not overfill: If you are doubling or tripling the recipe, avoid filling the steel pot more than halfway. Rice expands when cooked, and too much starch can clog the vent when the pressure is released.
  • Fluff with a fork: Make sure to fluff the rice with a fork as soon as it is done cooking. Fluffing actually helps steam to release, resulting in a lighter, softer texture.

FAQs

How long to cook brown jasmine rice in a pressure cooker?

Cook time depends on the desired texture. For firm brown rice, set the pressure cooking time to 20 minutes and adjust the ratio to 1:1. For a softer texture, set the pressure cooking time to 23 minutes and use a 1:1.25 ratio of rice to liquid.

Should I soak brown jasmine rice before cooking?

I do not soak brown rice, but according to Healthline, soaking brown rice helps to remove some of the naturally occurring phytic acid (antinutrients) present in whole grains. This makes it easier for digestion and promotes increased nutrient absorption. Soaking brown rice also reduces the cooking time.

How does brown jasmine rice taste compared to white rice?

Brown rice has a slightly more earthier and nuttier flavor compared to white jasmine rice because brown jasmine rice retains the bran layers and germ, which contributes to its richer taste.

Other Rice Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you are a fan of rice as much as I am, you might like the following basic rice recipes from the archives:

If you try this basic recipe for Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Pressure cooked brown jasmine rice in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice Recipe

Put your electric pressure cooker to use with this Instant Pot Brown Jasmine Rice recipe. It comes together with only 5 minutes of hands-on time and cooks perfectly fluffy and delicious every time.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 23 minutes
Pressure time 17 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 180kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Brown Jasmine rice* rinsed thoroughly
  • 1 ¼ cup water vegetable stock, or chicken stock
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper optional

Instructions

  • Place rice in a colander and rinse under cold water until the water runs clear, 20-30 seconds while stirring with your fingers or a spoon.
  • Place brown jasmine rice, your choice of cooking liquid, olive oil, and Kosher salt in the insert of the Instant Pot. Stir to combine.
  • Secure the lid and set the pressure release to the “Sealing” position.
  • Select “Manual” on high pressure and set it to 23 minutes* of pressure cooking time.
  • It should come to full pressure within the next 5-7 minutes. Let the pressure release naturally for 10 minutes, and then manually release the rest of the pressure.
  • Carefully remove the lid. Fluff it with a fork.
  • Season with black pepper and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields approximately about 3 cups of cooked long-grain brown rice, which is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Rice: We tested this recipe using two national brown jasmine rice brands, Lundberg and Mahatma. They delivered similar results in terms of cooking time, taste, and texture. Please keep in mind that the timing might be slightly different based on the brand.
  • Cooking liquid: If you want your rice to be flavorful, you can vegetable broth or chicken stock in place of water.
  • Rice to water ratio and time of cooking: The recipe, as written (1 to 1 ¼ rice to water ratio cooked for 23 minutes), yields soft and chewy brown rice. However, if you prefer it to be on the firmer side, with a bit more bite to it, use a 1:1 ratio of water to rice. In other words, for every 1 cup of brown rice, use 1 cup of cooking liquid and adjust the cooking time to 20 minutes.
  • Storage: If you have any leftovers, bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing: To freeze, cool completely by spreading the rice on a baking sheet. Transfer to a freezer-safe airtight container, label, date, and freeze for up to a month.
  • Reheat: You can reheat it in a microwave-safe bowl in 30-second intervals, mixing after each time until it is thoroughly heated.

Nutrition

Calories: 180kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 105mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Brown Jasmine Rice in Instant Pot appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/instant-pot-brown-jasmine-rice/feed/ 2
Chicken Butternut Squash Soup https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-butternut-squash-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-butternut-squash-soup/#respond Tue, 10 Oct 2023 20:34:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71101 Zoup! Good, Really Good® provided me with the product for the purpose of this post, as well as compensation for my time. As always, all opinions expressed in this post are my own. On a cold day, nothing satisfies me more than a yummy soup full of great flavors. While I adore the more standard Vegan Butternut Squash Soup or globally inspired Butternut Squash Thai Soup (Zoup! also makes a creamy, heat-and-eat butternut squash soup), there...

The post Chicken Butternut Squash Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Zoup! Good, Really Good® provided me with the product for the purpose of this post, as well as compensation for my time. As always, all opinions expressed in this post are my own.

On a cold day, nothing satisfies me more than a yummy soup full of great flavors. While I adore the more standard Vegan Butternut Squash Soup or globally inspired Butternut Squash Thai Soup (Zoup! also makes a creamy, heat-and-eat butternut squash soup), there is something so special about a healthy chicken soup with butternut squash.

Butternut Squash Chicken Soup in a bowl garnished with parsley and pumpkin seeds.

Creamy or chunky, made entirely from scratch using the most delicious Zoup! Good, Really Good® Chicken Bone Broth, I have got you covered with plenty of ways to make this creamy chicken and butternut squash soup your own. 

Ingredients

Butternut squash soup with chicken requires nothing more than a few simple ingredients. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe in small portions from the top view.
  • Olive oil: You can also use avocado oil or clarified butter (aka ghee) in this recipe.
  • Vegetables: Go for an aromatic background of yellow onions, red bell pepper, and garlic cloves. 
  • Spices + seasonings: Ground cumin adds depth and complexity to this butternut chicken soup. You could also try ground coriander or turmeric to celebrate that orange color and make it even more nutritious.
  • Chicken: Go for boneless, skinless chicken thighs for a richer flavor, but leaner chicken breasts can also be used.
  • Butternut squash: Pick up a butternut squash that is heavy for its size and prep when you get home. If working with butternut squash is new to you, check out my post on the Best Way to Cut Butternut Squash before you get started.
  • Chicken broth: While you can make your own Homemade Chicken Stock when I am short on time, I reach for Zoup! Good, Really Good® Chicken Bone Broth. I love purchasing Zoup! as it has the same complex, homemade taste with a balanced flavor. While it is widely available in retailers across the country, you can also purchase it online at ZoupBroth.com, Amazon, and Walmart.com. Plus, Zoup! has a number of different broths to choose from, but in this instance, I would stick to the Chicken Bone Broth, Original Chicken Broth, or Low Sodium Chicken Broth.
  • Lemon juice: A squeeze of freshly squeezed lemon juice is a last-minute addition to brighten up the flavors.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh parsley gives the slowly simmered soup a nice pop at the end. Reserve some on the side for garnish, too. For even more depth of flavor, consider adding fresh thyme or sage while the soup simmers on the stove.
  • Optional toppings: Pumpkin seeds add a wonderful crunch, but they are optional.

Variations and Substitutions

If you find yourself short on time or are looking to make this squash soup recipe on a busy weeknight, here are some short-cut suggestions to save you some time in the kitchen:

  • Rotisserie chicken: It is no secret that rotisserie chicken or cooked leftover chicken is a great shortcut when you are short on time, and this chicken soup with squash is no different. If you use either one of these options, simply shred them and add them to the soup at the same time as you are adding the butternut squash. You will need about 4-5 cups of shredded or cubed chicken.
  • Roasted butternut squash: Use leftover Roasted Butternut Squash to add extra depth and caramelized flavor, thanks to all those natural sugars.
  • Winter squash: Can’t find butternut squash? Use any winter squash that is available, like roasted acorn squash, roasted delicata squash, or pumpkin. Alternatively, you can swap out half the squash for some diced carrots and sweet potatoes for a slightly different flavor texture or flavor that is just as delicious.
  • Lime juice and cilantro: Give it a unique twist by swapping out the lemon juice and parsley for lime juice and fresh cilantro.
  • Add grains: Make it a complete meal with the addition of leftover cooked quinoa, brown rice, or pasta. Toss it right into the soup near the end of cooking.
  • Coconut milk: If you want an even more luxurious creamy texture, consider finishing it with a touch of coconut milk or heavy whipping cream.
  • Extra toppings: Add even more contrast to flavor and texture by topping it off with croutons, a swirl of yogurt or sour cream, fresh herbs like chives, basil or tarragon, or a sprinkle of red pepper flakes.

How to Make Butternut Squash Chicken Soup?

I like to think of this as a high-protein butternut squash soup, thanks to the addition of chicken. It is also a great soup to make on a cold night in chilly weather. Not to mention, it is easy to make. Here’s how I like to make it in a few easy steps on the stovetop:

A collage of images showing how to make chicken and squash soup.
  1. Saute aromatics: Heat olive oil in a large Dutch oven or large soup pot over medium to medium-high heat. Add onion, bell pepper, and cumin. Cook, stirring occasionally, until vegetables are softened, 5-6 minutes. Add the garlic and cook, stirring constantly, for 1 minute.
  2. Simmer soup: Add the chicken, butternut squash, chicken stock, salt and pepper. Give it a good stir. Cover and bring to a boil. Then, reduce to low heat, put the lid back on, and let it simmer for 15-20 minutes or until the chicken is fully cooked. Feel free to stir it once or twice during the cooking process.
  3. Shred chicken: With a large slotted spoon or tongs, remove the chicken and allow to cool slightly. Shred it with two forks or cut it into cubes.
  4. Blend half of the soup: Ladle 4-5 cups of the soup into a large heatproof bowl. Blend until smooth with an immersion blender.
A collage of images showing how to make chicken and butternut squash soup.
  1. Finish: Carefully transfer the pureed soup back into the pot (be careful, it will still be hot!) along with the shredded chicken. Bring the soup to one last boil. Finish with lemon juice and parsley.
  2. Garnish and serve: Ladle into bowls, top with pumpkin seeds and more parsley. Serve with lemon wedges on the side.

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat Leftovers?

This Chicken squash soup stores beautifully in both the fridge and freezer. Just like so many soup recipes, the flavors get better the longer they have time to marry together. To store and reheat, simply:

  • Store: Cool completely and transfer to a large airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: Cool completely and ladle soup into freezer-safe airtight containers, leaving some room at the top to allow for expansion. Freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Reheat: If frozen, thaw the soup overnight in the refrigerator. When ready to reheat, place a pot over medium heat, add the soup, and bring to a gentle simmer. Or, reheat individual servings in a microwave-safe bowl, covered, in 30-second intervals in the microwave. Stir each time in between and continue until warmed through.

What to Serve with this Butternut Squash Soup?

Butternut squash and chicken soup is a meal all its own, but I love to serve it with crusty bread or winter greens on the side to round it out as a complete meal. You could try:

Expert Tips

  • Save on time: The majority of the prep work comes from peeling and cubing the butternut squash, so if you are short on time, you can prep the vegetables the day before or buy pre-cut vegetables from the grocery store.
  • Blending is personal: I really want you to make this soup your own, so you can blend half the soup as I do in the recipe card, skip the blending altogether, or blend the entire soup for a creamy, thick consistency. Just make sure to remove the chicken prior to blending.
  • If you do not own an immersion blender, blend until smooth in a high-powered blender or food processor, or use a potato masher to puree it. However, keep in mind that when blending hot liquids, always make sure to fill no more than halfway, remove the measuring cap, and partially cover with a kitchen towel so the steam will be able to escape.

More about Zoup!

Zoup! was created by the founders of Zoup! Eatery, which served soup face-to-face to consumers for over two decades. In other words, they really know their soup! In addition to their expertise and knowledge, I always pick up a jar of Zoup! Broth (packaged in recyclable glass jars, by the way) whenever I get a chance because:

  • The Zoup! Good, Really Good® Broth lineup includes original and low-sodium chicken broths, veggie broth, seafood broth, and chicken and beef bone broths.
  • The broth is kettle-cooked in small batches using the freshest and finest ingredients.
  • It is low in calories, paleo-friendly, and completely free of artificial ingredients, preservatives, gluten, GMO’s, fat, trans fat, and saturated fat. 
  • Zoup! has also introduced Culinary Concentrates™, gourmet broth bases available in Chicken Bone Broth and Beef Bone Broth, plus Savory No Chicken Vegan Broth, offering a space-saving solution for home cooks.
  • And for when you crave soup but want something you can just heat and eat, Zoup! makes shelf-stable soups in nine flavor-forward recipes, including Chicken Potpie, Garden Vegetable, and Butternut Squash with Brown Butter and Sage.

If you are interested in learning more, visit ZoupBroth.com and follow @ZoupGoodReallyGood on Facebook, Instagram, and TikTok and @ZoupGoodReallyGoodBroth on Pinterest.

As a reader of Foolproof Living, Zoup! is offering 20% off your first order of Zoup! Products on Amazon. Use the code, 20FOOLPROOF at checkout (under the payment section.) The code is valid until November 6, 2023.

A collage of photos showing the squash chicken soup in a bowl and while it is being poured.

FAQs

What herbs go with butternut squash soup?

Hearty herbs such as rosemary, thyme, sage, and bay leaf add depth and herbal complexity, while fresh herbs like parsley, cilantro, basil, tarragon, and chives give it the finish of fresh flavor.

Can you use chicken broth in butternut squash soup?

Yes, both chicken broth and chicken stock can be used to make butternut squash soup. The delicate meaty flavor is a nice addition to an otherwise vegetarian soup.

Is butternut squash soup good when sick?

According to Healthline, butternut squash has many health benefits. It contains high amounts of powerful vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants, most notably vitamin A and vitamin C, making it an ideal choice to keep a sore throat at bay. So, yes, butternut squash soup is a good way to soothe yourself when you are feeling under the weather.

Do you need to peel butternut squash for soup?

We do recommend peeling butternut squash when making soup, as doing so will result in a creamy and smooth texture.

What protein goes with butternut squash soup?

Butternut squash pairs well with a variety of animal and plant-based protein resources. Chicken, beef, quinoa, and tofu are just a few to name.

Other Comforting Soup Recipes for Fall and Winter:

If you try this Chicken Butternut Squash Soup, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Butternut squash chicken soup in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Chicken Butternut Squash Soup Recipe

Butternut Squash chicken soup combines the heartiness of chicken thighs with the warmth of homemade soup. Great for a chilly evening, this one-pot meal is both nourishing and flavorful.
Course Soup
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 284kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped (~2 cups)
  • 1 medium red bell pepper chopped (~1 cup)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 4 cloves garlic minced or pressed
  • 1 pound boneless skinless chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • 6 cups butternut squash* peeled and cut into cubes (2 pounds)
  • 5 cups Zoup! Good Really Good® Chicken Bone Broth
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt more to taste
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped, plus more for garnish
  • 2 tablespoons pumpkin seeds optional, for garnish

Instructions

  • Heat olive oil in a large, heavy bottom pot over medium-high heat. Add in onion, pepper, and cumin. Cook, stirring occasionally, until vegetables are softened, 5-6 minutes.
  • Stir in the garlic and cook, stirring constantly, for 1 more minute.
  • Add in the chicken, cubed butternut squash, chicken stock, salt and pepper. Give it a stir.
  • Put the lid on and bring it to a boil. As soon as it comes to a boil, turn down the heat to low, put the lid back on, and let it simmer for 20-25 minutes or until the chicken is fully cooked. Feel free to stir it once or twice during the cooking process.
  • Using a slotted spoon, remove the chicken from the soup and shred it (or cut it into cubes). Set the now-shredded chicken aside.
  • Ladle 4-5 cups of the soup mixture into a large heatproof bowl. Using an immersion blender, blend until smooth.
  • Transfer the pureed soup back into the pot along with the shredded chicken. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Bring the soup to one last boil.
  • Stir in the lemon juice and parsley. Ladle into bowls, garnish with the additional parsley and pumpkin seeds (if desired), and serve with lemon wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This soup makes 6-7 cups of soup, which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: To store leftovers, cool completely and transfer to a large airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Squash: While we used butternut squash in this recipe, you can pretty much use any squash you have on hand, including pumpkin, acorn squash, kabocha squash, and even delicata squash.

Nutrition

Calories: 284kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 78mg | Sodium: 750mg | Potassium: 1018mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 15646IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Chicken Butternut Squash Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-butternut-squash-soup/feed/ 0
Tuna Melt Sandwich https://foolproofliving.com/tuna-melt-sandwich/ https://foolproofliving.com/tuna-melt-sandwich/#comments Fri, 06 Oct 2023 22:22:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=18745 I like to think that tuna melt sandwiches mean the tuna will be the star of the show. However, I find that the bread and cheese transform it into something spectacular. Because of this, I have done my research on what makes an unforgettable tuna melt. In other words, I have got you covered with plenty of variations for the bread, cheese, and cooking style. So don’t be shy and...

The post Tuna Melt Sandwich appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I like to think that tuna melt sandwiches mean the tuna will be the star of the show. However, I find that the bread and cheese transform it into something spectacular. Because of this, I have done my research on what makes an unforgettable tuna melt. In other words, I have got you covered with plenty of variations for the bread, cheese, and cooking style. So don’t be shy and have some fun with this tuna melt recipe!

If you love the convenience of canned tuna recipes, be sure to try Chickpea Tuna Pita Sandwich or Chickpea Salad with Tuna.

Homemade tuna melt sandwich from the front view.

Ingredients – What’s in a Tuna Melt?

I find the best tuna melt recipe starts with quality ingredients. The recipe starts with making a classic tuna salad, which is used to layer with cheese in between two pieces of bread before baking it in the oven or cooking it on the stovetop. Here is what you will need to make the tuna salad, along with the bread, cheese, and toppings:

Tuna Salad Ingredients

  • Tuna: Look for 5-ounce cans of high-quality wild-caught Albacore tuna packed in water. If you are concerned about mercury, go for skipjack tuna (sometimes labeled light tuna), which has lower mercury levels than larger albacore or yellowfin tuna.
  • Celery stalk
  • Pickles: Go for your favorite pickles, such as Kosher, dill pickles, or bread and butter pickles. Or swap out the pickles for pickle relish instead.
  • Hard-Boiled Egg: I follow this recipe on how to make hard-boiled eggs, which works every time.
  • Parsley: Fresh herbs, like parsley, give it a refreshing bite. Experiment with other herbs, like tarragon or dill, or give it a final sprinkle of fresh chives.
  • Mayonnaise: Mayonnaise brings the tuna salad together. Feel free to use vegan mayo or swap out half the mayo for plain Greek yogurt for a nice protein boost or sour cream for some tang.
  • Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice will provide the best flavor.
  • Kosher Salt
  • Black Pepper
Ingredients for tuna melt recipe laid out from the top view.

Tuna Sandwich Ingredients

  • Buns / Bread Slices: I used Brioche Buns for their buttery richness, but plain, sesame seed, or poppy seed hamburger buns will also do. If you want to go more on the traditional hot tuna melt, you can use ½-inch slices of white bread. However, sourdough bread, whole grain bread, ciabatta, or even English muffins would also work.
  • Cheese: Sharp cheddar cheese makes a classic tuna fish melt, which is why most people say that it’s the best cheese for a tuna melt. However, you can also use provolone, mozzarella, Swiss cheese, or Havarti in this sandwich recipe. If you want to take things up a notch, feel free to experiment with different types of cheese, like pepper jack, Monterey jack, Gruyere, fontina, or smoked gouda. You can use slices of cheese from the deli counter or grate a whole block of cheese when you get home.
  • Cucumber: Fresh cucumber slices offer a nice crunch and color.
  • Avocado: Peel, seed, and slice a fresh avocado just before serving to add some healthy fats and extra richness.
  • Tomato Slices: Use ripe tomatoes for the best flavor, such as Roma, tomatoes on the vine, or heirloom tomatoes. Once sliced, lay them out on paper towels to absorb excess moisture so your tuna and tomato sandwich doesn’t get too soggy.
  • Salad Greens: Salad greens, baby arugula, or chopped romaine lettuce offer a nice crunch and contrast to the creamy tuna salad.
  • Cornichons: Optional, but I love the extra gourmet touch of cornichons as garnish if you so choose.

Optional Add-Ins:

  • Onion: Finely dice half of a red onion or some green onion to add to the tuna salad for an extra savory bite.
  • Dijon Mustard: Add 1 tablespoon of Dijon mustard to the tuna salad mixture.
  • Spicy Peppers: Give the tuna salad a little kick with a pinch of cayenne pepper or a seeded and diced jalapeno or Fresno chile.
  • Butter / Olive Oil: When I do not have buns on hand and decide to go for sliced sandwich bread, I love to slather one side of the bread with butter or drizzle with extra virgin olive oil for extra richness (keep reading to learn more!).

How to Make a Tuna Melt Sandwich in the Oven?

This recipe for tuna melt sandwich starts with homemade tuna salad. Once you have that prepped and ready, the rest is so easy. Follow these step-by-step directions to make the tuna fish sandwich in the oven:

Tuna salad in a bowl with the rest of the sandwich ingredients around it.
  1. Make the tuna salad: In a medium bowl, mix together the tuna, celery, pickles, hard-boiled egg, parsley, mayonnaise, lemon juice, salt and pepper. Taste and adjust the seasoning to your liking.
  2. Prep the sandwiches: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper. Place all 4 buns open-face on the baking tray. Top each bottom bun with 1 slice of cheese, followed by ½ cup of the tuna filling. Place another slice of cheese on the top bun.
A person is layering tuna melts from the top view.
  1. Bake: Bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes or until the cheese melts. Remove from the oven and allow to cool slightly.
  2. Assemble: Layer each bottom bun (the one with the tuna mixture) with sliced cucumber, avocado, tomato, and a handful of salad greens. Top with the top bun. Garnish with a cornichon (if desired) and enjoy!

How to Make Tuna Melt on the Stove?

Alternatively, you can make this tuna salad melt in a large skillet on the stove. It is really not much different than making a grilled cheese sandwich. I find this works best if you are using white sandwich bread or English muffins. If you decide to go for the stovetop method, here’s how I like to do it:

  1. Butter Bread: Butter one side of 8 slices of bread or the outside of 4 English muffins.
  2. Assemble: Flip the bread or English muffins over, and place 1 slice of cheese on each unbuttered side. Add ½ cup of the tuna mixture to 4 slices of bread or the 4 bottom halves of the English muffins. Top with avocado and tomato, followed by the top slice of bread or English muffin (buttered side out).
  3. Toast: Heat a large skillet over medium to medium-low heat. Place 2 tuna melts in the skillet and cook until the bread is golden brown on the first side, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and continue to cook until the cheese is melted, about 3-4 minutes more. Remove from the skillet and continue with the remaining 2 tuna melt sandwiches.
  4. Cool and serve: Let them cool for a few minutes and serve.

How to Make Ahead and Store?

The most time-consuming part of this recipe is making the tuna salad. So if you want to get ahead, I recommend prepping the tuna salad in advance. With that out of the way, the tuna melts come together in less than 15 minutes. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the tuna salad and store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. The tuna and veggies will leach out a bit of water the longer it sits in the fridge, so give it a good stir just before using.
  • Storage: The recipe makes 4 sandwiches, so if you are only serving 1-2 people, I recommend storing leftover tuna salad and toppings in separate airtight containers in the fridge. Assemble and bake the sandwiches just before serving.

With that being said, if you end up with leftovers of this melted tuna sandwich, you can store them in an airtight container after they come to room temperature. Keep them in the fridge for up to 2 days. Reheat in a low heat (300 degrees F.) oven until heated through.

How to Serve

Think of this as a tuna cheese sandwich with all the fix-ins. Because of this, I like to serve it a bit more casually, either as a light lunch or simple dinner, with any of the following:

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this easy tuna melt sandwich recipe is pretty straightforward, there are a few things that I learned during my recipe testing. So, here are a few tips to help you get the best results when making this recipe:

  • Drain the tuna well: Make sure to drain the cans of water-packed tuna before mixing to prevent too much water in the tuna salad, which could make it soggy.
  • Preheat the oven or skillet: Whether you are using the oven or a skillet, make sure it is properly preheated before you start cooking.
  • Medium to low heat is key: Keep it low and slow. Bake at the recommended 350 degrees F or cook over medium to medium-low heat on the stove to melt the cheese without burning the bread.
  • Give it a gentle press: If using the stovetop method, feel free to gently press down on the sandwich with a spatula to give the bread a nice sear. Be careful not to push so hard that all the filling spills out the sides.
  • Serve open-faced sandwiches: If you want to cut down on the carbs or prefer to eat an open-face tuna melt with a fork and knife, assemble open-faced tuna melts by simply omitting the top slice of bread.

FAQs

What is a tuna melt?

A tuna melt is a hot sandwich that combines tuna salad with melty cheese between two slices of griddled bread. Additional toppings, such as avocado, tomato, and lettuce, can be included.

What goes good with tuna melts?

Tuna melts are a classic sandwich that pair well with tomato soup, coleslaw, pickle spears, potato chips, garden salad, potato salad, and pasta salad.

What cheese is best with tuna?

Cheddar cheese is classic in a toasted tuna sandwich, but have fun and experiment with different cheeses such as provolone, mozzarella, pepper jack, Havarti, Gruyere, fontina or smoked gouda.

Other Seafood Recipes You Might Like

If you try this Tuna Melt Sandwich recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Tuna melt sandwich with a pickle on top.
Print

Tuna Melt Sandwich Recipe

Tuna Melt Sandwich layered with cheddar cheese, homemade tuna salad and baked in the oven for all the ooey-gooey goodness. Later, topped off with sliced avocado, tomatoes and salad greens to turn it in a out-of-this world delicious sandwich. Ready in 30 minutes and great for any meal of the day.
Course Sandwich
Cuisine American
Diet Kosher
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 447kcal

Ingredients

For The Tuna Mixture:

  • 2 cans tuna 5 oz. each (I prefer wild-caught Albacore tuna packed in water) – drained
  • 4 stalks celery chopped
  • 2-3 small pickles chopped
  • 1 hard boiled egg peeled and chopped
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped
  • ½ cup mayonnaise
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Sandwich:

  • 4 hamburger buns* sliced in half as you see in the photos (or your favorite toast)
  • 8 slices cheddar cheese or provolone, mozzarella or Havarti would also work
  • 1 cucumber sliced thinly
  • 1 avocado ripe sliced
  • 1 large tomato sliced
  • ½ cup salad greens or arugula
  • 4 cornichon as garnish – optional

Instructions

  • To make the tuna mixture: Mix together drained tuna, celery, pickles, egg, parsley, mayonnaise, lemon juice, salt and pepper in a bowl. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
  • To make the sandwiches: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.
  • Place 1 slice of cheese on the bottom half of a bun and top it off with ½ cup of the tuna mixture. Place another slice of cheese on the top bun. Place both of them (facing up) on the sheet pan. Repeat the same process with the rest of the buns.
  • Bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes or until cheese melts. Take it out of the oven and let it cool for a minute.
  • To Assemble: Layer each bottom bun (the one with the tuna mixture) with sliced cucumber, avocado, tomato, and a green salad leaf. Put the top bun.
  • If preferred, garnish with a cornichon (as seen in the photos) and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 sandwiches, which is good for 4 servings. The nutrition information below is per serving.
  • Bread: We opted for brioche buns, but regular sliced whole wheat or white sandwich bread can also be used.
  • Cheese: Sharp yellow cheddar is ideal, but white cheddar, provolone, or Havarti can also be used.
  • Make Ahead: You can make the tuna salad a day in advance. When ready to serve, simply assemble the tuna melts as written in the recipe.
  • Storage: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to one additional day.
  • To cook it on the stovetop:
    1. Butter Bread: Butter one side of 8 slices of bread.
    2. Assemble: Flip the bread and place 1 slice of cheese on each unbuttered side. Add ½ cup of the tuna mixture to 4 slices of bread. Top with avocado and tomato, followed by the top slice of bread (buttered side out).
    3. Toast: Heat a large skillet over medium to medium-low heat. Place 2 tuna melts in the skillet and cook until the bread is golden brown on the first side, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and continue to cook until the cheese is melted, about 3-4 minutes more. Remove from the skillet and continue with the remaining 2 sandwiches.
    4. Cool and serve: Let them cool for a few minutes and serve.

Nutrition

Calories: 447kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 113mg | Sodium: 955mg | Potassium: 696mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1081IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 363mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Tuna Melt Sandwich appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/tuna-melt-sandwich/feed/ 9
Blackened Cod https://foolproofliving.com/blackened-cod/ https://foolproofliving.com/blackened-cod/#respond Tue, 03 Oct 2023 17:57:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=70886 Cajun cod is a must when it comes to tasty, stress-free, and well-seasoned fish recipes. However, if you’re craving other simple seafood meals, there are tons of other easy fish dinners to try on this website! My zesty Baked Sockeye Salmon uses only a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to fill your table with brilliant color and buttery taste. Or, try out my Baked Breaded Fish for a crispy, garlicky meal...

The post Blackened Cod appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Cajun cod is a must when it comes to tasty, stress-free, and well-seasoned fish recipes. However, if you’re craving other simple seafood meals, there are tons of other easy fish dinners to try on this website! My zesty Baked Sockeye Salmon uses only a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to fill your table with brilliant color and buttery taste. Or, try out my Baked Breaded Fish for a crispy, garlicky meal guaranteed to satisfy the whole family.

Blackened cod placed on a dish with lemon wedges on the side.

Ingredients

This blackened cod recipe only needs a few simple, all-natural ingredients to get its mouthwateringly smoky, bold taste—no trip to the grocery store is necessary!

Ingredients for the cod fish recipe from the top view.
  • Cod: The best codfish recipe begins with quality white fish fillets. This recipe will work with a range of cod varieties, including Alaskan cod, Pacific cod, and black cod (also known as sablefish)—all of which have a deliciously mild, sweet taste. Furthermore, I also tested this recipe using both fresh and frozen cod. Though I recommend preparing this recipe with fresh fish for maximum flavor, you may use frozen fillets. Just be sure to thaw them in the fridge overnight.
  • Olive oil: I used olive oil in this recipe to ensure my cod developed a rich, seared exterior without burning. However, any oil with a high smoke point—such as avocado oil, canola oil, and clarified butter—will also work.
  • Unsalted butter: Salted butter would also work, but if use salted butter, be sure to adjust the seasoning.
  • Lemon: Lemon makes a perfect pair with this healthy cod dinner. Serve a few wedges as garnish alongside your blackened cod, and your tastebuds will light up with zesty flavors.
  • Fresh parsley: Though optional, fresh and colorful parsley makes the ultimate garnish for these cod fish fillets.

Seasoning for Cod Fish

In my opinion, the best seasoning for cod fish is an authentic Cajun blackened seasoning. While you can buy this blend from the store, you can also put your spice cabinet to good use by following my simple blackened seasoning recipe

Cod fish seasoning spices on a plate with text on each spice.

To make a homemade blackening blend, you’ll need the following ingredients:

  • Paprika: Paprika is a surefire way to give your codfish deliciously peppery, sweet flavors. However, you may also use smoked paprika to lend your recipe extra deep, smoky undertones.
  • Onion powder
  • Garlic powder
  • Dried oregano
  • Dried thyme
  • Ground black pepper
  • Kosher salt: Feel free to adjust how much salt you add to your cod spices based on your preference (or if you’re following a low-sodium diet!).

To give your blend a kick of spice and a more robust Cajun profile, I recommend adding ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper to your cod fish seasoning. 

Alternatively, you may add a teaspoon of brown sugar to your seasoning blend for a sweeter, more caramelized taste.

How to Make Blackened Cod?

It takes less than half an hour to prepare this healthy cod recipe. With just a handful of ingredients and minimal cooking time, you can make a recipe for blackened cod that will impress even the biggest seafood fans. 

A collage of images showing how to prepare blackened cod for cooking.
  1. Prepare the cod seasoning: In a small bowl or mason jar, mix the paprika, onion powder, garlic powder, oregano, thyme, pepper, and Kosher salt. Break up any clumps of seasoning that form, and set the mixture aside.
  2. Dry the cod: Use a paper towel to pat dry the cod filets on all sides.
  3. Brush fish with olive oil: Brush all the sides of the cod with olive oil.
  4. Season the cod fillets: Evenly sprinkle the blackened seasoning on all the cod’s sides. Gently press the seasoning onto the fish’s flesh to keep it from falling off during the cooking process.
Seasoned cod being cooked in a cast iron skillet.
  1. Add the fish to the skillet: Set the stove to medium-high heat and melt the butter in a large skillet. Once the butter melts and the skillet is hot, gently add the seasoned cod. If the skillet isn’t large enough to accommodate all of your filets, sear the fish in two batches, using one tablespoon of butter for every two pieces of cod.
  2. Flip the cod: Cook the cod for 2-3 minutes without moving the fillets. Then, use a thin spatula to flip the fish and cook for another two minutes. When finished cooking, the cod should flake easily. If they don’t, continue sealing the blackened fish in 30-second intervals until a meat thermometer registers an internal temperature of 145 degrees F.
  3. Serve: Garnish the seared blackened cod with chopped parsley and serve it with lemon wedges on the side.

Other Ways to Cook Blackened Cod

Don’t want to cook your blackened cod fillets in a skillet? Below, you’ll find three other simple ways to cook cod, giving you tender, flavorful seafood every time.

  • In the oven: To make baked blackened cod, begin by preheating the oven to 400 degrees F. and lining a baking sheet with parchment paper—no butter needed. Then, lay your seasoned fillets on top of the baking tray and bake without flipping them for 10 minutes or until they reach an internal temperature of 145 degrees F. Alternatively, you can increase air circulation and add extra citrusy flavor by baking your cod fish on top of two slices of lemon.
  • On the grill: To grill your blackened cod filets, first preheat your gas grill to medium heat. Once hot, clean the grates and oil them generously with a wad of oil-soaked paper towels. Finally, add your seasoned fish to the grill and cook the fillets for 2-3 minutes on each side—until their internal temperature reaches 145 degrees F. (For more in-depth tips on grilling seafood, my recipe for Grilled Mahi Mahi has everything you need to prepare exquisitely seasoned, smoky fish.)
  • In the air fryer: To make blackened cod in the air fryer, first preheat your air fryer to 400 degrees F. Then, cook your fish for 8-10 minutes or until they reach an internal temperature of 145 degrees F. I also recommend checking your cod halfway through the air frying process, as this total time may vary depending on the thickness of your filets. For example, if your filets are thinner, too much time in the air fryer may dry out the meat, resulting in rubbery, tough flesh.

How to Store and Reheat?

Once you make this easy cod fish recipe, you won’t want a single bite to go to waste. With these expert storage tips, you can enjoy your leftovers as a tasty dinner, a light lunch, or even a protein-packed snack.

  • Storage: Though this healthy cod fish recipe tastes best on the day you prepare it, you may store it in the refrigerator for up to two days. Just be sure to let the fillets reach room temperature before transferring them to an airtight container. 
  • To reheat: When reheating your blackened cod, first preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Then, place the fish on a sheet of precut parchment paper or aluminum foil, sprinkle it with a few drops of water, and loosely wrap it. Place the blackened cod in the oven for ten minutes or until heated through.

Serving Suggestions

If you’re at a loss for what to make with cod fish, these expert serving tips will give you a five-star meal without any extra hassle. This light seafood dish will be your new go-to with these gourmet pairings.

Baked blackened cod served with rice and roasted vegetables on a plate.
  • Cod and rice: My favorite way to serve this rich cod recipe is with a side of tender brown jasmine rice and savory caramelized Roasted Sweet Potatoes and Brussels Sprouts. Not only is this pair expertly balanced, but it also gives every plate an immaculate presentation.
  • Make it into tacos: Cod fish tacos are a tasty way to transform simple fish recipes into a fun weeknight meal. This bold Cajun fish recipe tastes out of this world when served with corn tortillas and topped with tasty, fan-favorite sides. Guacamole, pickled onions, and cherry tomato salsa (or your favorite pico de gallo!) are just a few of my go-to’s. However, you can even top your spread with cilantro and a squeeze of zesty lime juice for even brighter flavors.
  • Fruit salsa: No one can resist the sweet-and-spicy blend of blackened cod topped with mango salsa. My Pineapple Mango Salsa offers fruity, tropical overtones, while Mango Habañero Salsa has a delicious kick of spice perfect for spice lovers. Or, if you want to add a few juicy tomatoes to your sauce, my Peach Salsa strikes a delightful balance between tangy and fresh flavors.
  • With a big salad on the side: Looking for a lighter way to enjoy your blackened cod? Any of my hearty salads make a great option to round out your menu with garden-fresh tastes. Creamy and crisp, my No-Mayo Coleslaw and Mexican Corn Salad are excellent choices for those who love a salad with a little tang. Or, if you’re looking for a recipe filled with classic superfoods and full-bodied flavors, my Kale Avocado Salad and Brussels Sprout Kale Salad will disappear in minutes.
  • Starches: A great way to enjoy a filling, delicious meal is to whip up a hearty starch to pair with your blackened cod. My Rosemary Mashed Potatoes are the ultimate crowd-pleaser, with a creamy, decadent taste the whole family will love. Or, for something lighter, you can also balance your table with zesty, earthy undertones with delectable sides like my Lemon Quinoa and Wild Rice Pilaf.
  • Vegetable Side Dishes: You don’t need hours of prep time to enjoy a rich, savory dish loaded with nutrition. My Buttery Garlic Breen Beans and Sautéed Asparagus take less than 15 minutes to make, and will pack each bite with bold garlic, tender greens, and expert seasoning.

Expert Tips

When you use this easy recipe for cod fish, there’s no reason to stress. These pro tips will ensure your fillets are as tender, moist, and flavorful as possible—whether you cook your cod in a cast iron skillet or use frozen fillets.

  • Frozen cod: If you choose to use frozen cod fillets for this dish, it’s vital that you fully thaw them before beginning the recipe. Frozen fish won’t cook evenly, resulting in a burnt exterior and uncooked insides. Though your codfish doesn’t need to reach full room temperature before cooking, it shouldn’t have any remaining frozen areas before you begin preparation.
  • Coat fish with seasoning on all sides: The key to making this heartily flavored recipe is to season the cod fish thoroughly during prep. Be sure to coat every side of your fillets with the Cajun seasoning blend—not just the top and bottom—and gently press the spices into the meat before cooking. This way, each bite will have a taste of this recipe’s signature blackened crust.
  • Cooking time: Because there’s a direct correlation between fillet thickness and cook time, try to select equally sized cod fillets to ensure even cooking. Also, remember that—though this recipe has basic guidelines for cooking time—thicker fillets will need more time in the pan, while thinner filets will need less. To ensure you properly cook your fish, use a meat thermometer to check its internal temperature. You can remove your fillets from the heat when they reach 145 degrees F.
  • Pat dry the fish: It’s essential that you use paper towels to thoroughly pat dry your cod fillets before seasoning them. Removing this excess moisture will help the blackened seasoning stick to the meat and give your fish a good sear when added to the pan.
  • Don’t overcrowd the pan: If you find that not all four fillets fit in the pan, it’s best to cook them in batches to keep the pan hot and ensure even searing. I recommend using one tablespoon of butter for every two fillets.
  • Well-seasoned pan: If you want to make pan-seared cod in a cast iron skillet, ensure the pan is well-seasoned, well-oiled, and super hot before adding your fish. This high heat will keep your cod from sticking to the pan, helping it naturally release from the skillet’s surface before flipping it with a thin spatula. However, a non-stick skillet will also work if you don’t have a cast-iron skillet on hand. You may also transform this dish into a low-calorie and low-fat cod recipe by substituting the butter for a little olive oil.
  • Avoid moving the fish: The best way to cook cod fish is by letting it sear undisturbed in the pan. Keeping the fish from moving will help develop a good crust and keep the delicate meat from breaking.
  • Check for doneness: An easy way to tell if your cod fish is ready is by performing the flake test. In other words, if the fish’s flesh flakes easily, it’s probably ready to remove from the heat. However, a foolproof method of ensuring doneness is by using a digital thermometer (affiliate link.) Your fish is ready to eat when its internal temperature reaches 145 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Safety: Because of its spicy and aromatic ingredients, blackened seasoning often produces smoke when exposed to high heat. To avoid respiratory irritation, ensure your kitchen is well-ventilated before cooking, or consider cooking this recipe outdoors if you have a suitable burner.

FAQs

Want to know more about this delectable cod dinner? This simple guide will answer all your remaining questions, from what to season cod fish with to must-know kitchen terms.

What is the difference between grilled and blackened cod?

Though these terms often go hand-in-hand, their meanings are a little different. Grilling refers to a specific cooking process, while blackening refers to a particular spice mixture and coating method. Blackening seasoning is a smoky, savory Cajun blend that flavors various foods, including fish, chicken, and veggies.

Is cod good for blackening?

Absolutely! Cod’s naturally sweet, mild flavor expertly balances the smoky, spicy taste of blackened seasoning, resulting in a rich and bold seafood meal.

Other Seafood Recipes You Might Also Like

If you love this recipe for a perfectly seasoned cod dinner, you won’t believe how many other tasty seafood dishes there are to try. These other fresh fish recipes will satisfy your cravings for flavorful coastal eats.

If you try this seasoned cod recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Blackened Cod on a plate served with lemon wedges on the side.
Print

Blackened Cod Recipe

This 20-minute Blackened Cod recipe is the perfect blend of smokey seasoning with flaky cod pan-seared to perfection. Made with simple ingredients, this easy and healthy dish is a great dinner for a busy weeknight.
Course Seafood
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 324kcal

Ingredients

For Homemade Blackened Seasoning:

  • 3 teaspoons smoked paprika
  • 2 teaspoons onion powder
  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • 2 teaspoons dried oregano
  • 2 teaspoons dried thyme
  • 2 teaspoons ground black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt

For The Cod:

  • 4 cod fillets fresh or frozen & thawed 4 ounces each
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 lemon cut into wedges
  • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh parsley optional

Instructions

  • Start by making the blackened seasoning. In a mason jar or bowl, mix together the smoked paprika, onion powder, garlic powder, oregano, thyme, pepper, and Kosher salt, breaking up any possible “clumps.” Set aside.
  • Pat dry the cod filets on all sides with a paper towel.
  • Brush the cod filets on all sides with the olive oil.
  • Sprinkle the blackening season evenly on all sides of the cod filets. Gently press the seasoning on the cod filets to ensure the coating adheres.
  • Melt the butter in a well-seasoned cast iron or non-stick skillet on medium-high heat. Once the skillet is hot, gently add the cod filets. If your skillet is not big enough, it is best to cook them in two batches. If that is the case, we recommend using one tablespoon of butter per two pieces of cod.
  • Cook for 2-3 minutes without moving the filets. Using a spatula, flip the filets and cook for an additional 2 minutes. They should flake easily. If not, continue to cook in 30-second intervals until done or the internal temperature of the thickest part of the fish reaches 145 degrees F. when inserted with a meat thermometer.
  • If preferred, garnish with chopped parsley and serve with a wedge of lemon on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 cod fillets, which is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Drying & seasoning the fish fillets: Do not skip the pat drying of the cod fillets, as it is an important step to reduce moisture and assist with the coating of the blackening season. Also, it is best to sprinkle the blackening season on all sides evenly and press down so the seasoning will stick.
  • Skillet: If you are using a cast iron skillet, make sure that it is well seasoned. Otherwise, the fish might stick to the pan. Using a cast iron skillet will help the fish cook fast and produce a nice “crust.” If you do not have one, you can use a non-stick skillet as well.
  • Fresh or Frozen Cod: We tested this recipe using both fresh and frozen cod. Both worked beautifully. However, it is imperative that you thaw the fish fully before cooking.
  • Time of Cooking: Cooking times will vary based on the thickness of the filets. It is best to start with shorter times until you see the flakiness or the internal temperature to avoid overcooking.
  • Make it dairy-free: If you do not want to use butter, you can substitute with additional olive oil.
  • Storage: Though this dish tastes best on the day you prepare it, you may store it in the refrigerator for up to two days. Just be sure to let the fillets reach room temperature before transferring them to an airtight container. 
  • To reheat: When reheating it, first preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Then, place the fish on a sheet of precut parchment paper or aluminum foil, sprinkle it with a few drops of water, and loosely wrap it. Place the blackened cod in the oven for ten minutes or until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 324kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 41g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 112mg | Sodium: 709mg | Potassium: 1071mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1220IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 86mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Blackened Cod appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/blackened-cod/feed/ 0
Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/apple-cinnamon-oatmeal/ https://foolproofliving.com/apple-cinnamon-oatmeal/#comments Mon, 25 Sep 2023 16:31:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20686 I don’t know about you, but I think nothing says fall like the combination of apple, cinnamon, and walnuts. And this Apple and Cinnamon Oatmeal recipe is probably the easiest way to fill your house with the smells of fall. It tastes like apple pie, but it is healthier. If you are like me, a huge fan of apples and cinnamon, be sure to also check out our Apple Almond...

The post Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I don’t know about you, but I think nothing says fall like the combination of apple, cinnamon, and walnuts. And this Apple and Cinnamon Oatmeal recipe is probably the easiest way to fill your house with the smells of fall. It tastes like apple pie, but it is healthier.

If you are like me, a huge fan of apples and cinnamon, be sure to also check out our Apple Almond Flour Muffins, Apple Roses, and Dairy-Free Apple Crisp recipes.

Apple and cinnamon oatmeal garnished with toppings from the top view.

Whether you are a morning person like me or someone who prefers to sleep until the last minute, I am pretty sure the unmistakably autumn aroma of this homemade apple oatmeal cooking on the stovetop will lure even the sleepiest member of your family out of bed.

It’s an easy way to set the mood for the fall season, and similar to my other breakfast bowl recipes, it’s ready in only 15 minutes. Bonus – it’s also vegan, dairy-free, paleo-friendly, and gluten-free!

Ingredients for Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal:

You probably already have a handful of ingredients you need to make this Cinnamon Apple Oatmeal in your pantry. Below is everything you need:

Ingredients for homemade apple cinnamon oatmeal from the top view.
  • Oil: We use oil to sautee apples and cinnamon before adding in the oats and milk. We use coconut oil, but avocado oil, butter, or clarified butter (also known as ghee) would also work in this apple oatmeal breakfast recipe.
  • Fresh Apples: We use Honeycrisp apples, but any other variety of apples, like Fuji, Pink Lady, Gala, and Granny Smith Apples, would also work. Peeling them is optional, but we recommend cutting them into 1-inch cubes. You can also use two different kinds of apples if you want to take your apple pie oatmeal recipe to the next level.
  • Spices: You’ll need ground cinnamon and a pinch of nutmeg.
  • Nuts: We are using unsalted walnuts, but pecans or almonds would also work well in this recipe. If you have the time, we recommend toasting your nuts for a few minutes to enhance their flavors.
  • Rolled Oats: Of all the different kinds of oats, rolled oats (also called old-fashioned oats) are probably the easiest to find, and therefore, it is what we are using in this apple oatmeal breakfast. Use gluten-free oats if you are following a gluten-free diet. If you are new to the world of oats and want to know more about them, be sure to check out our detailed articles on Rolled Oats vs. Steel-Cut Oats and Quick Oats vs. Rolled Oats.
  • Milk: We used unsweetened almond milk, but any dairy or non-dairy milk (such as coconut milk, oat milk, or regular milk) would work in this recipe. You can also make Almond Milk from Almond Butter in a pinch. Either way, we recommend using sugar-free milk to keep it healthy.
  • Superfoods: To boost protein and to keep you full for longer, we used a tablespoon of chia seeds. However, you can also add ground flax seeds, hemp seeds, and even your favorite protein powder to up the nutrition of this apple oats recipe.
  • Sweetener: We wanted this homemade apple oatmeal recipe to be sugar-free, so instead of adding sugar to the mixture, we opted for a drizzle of maple syrup in the end. However, if you prefer it to be sweeter, you can use brown sugar, coconut sugar, honey, or regular granulated sugar and add it to the oatmeal mixture as you are cooking it.
  • Optional Toppings: We sprinkled our apple and cinnamon oatmeal with diced apples, walnuts, and pomegranate arils for a pop of color. However, when it comes to toppings, the sky is the limit. Feel free to add a tablespoon of almond or peanut butter (a great way to add some protein to the recipe), raisins (or cranberries), and even a dollop of vanilla yogurt.

Optional Add-ins and Substitutions:

  • Vanilla Extract: A splash of vanilla extract is an easy way to enhance the sweet flavors of the apples.
  • Apple Juice: For a richer apple taste, consider replacing some of the milk with apple juice. A good place to start is 1/4 cup unsweetened apple juice with 1 1/2 cups of milk.
  • Applesauce: While we prefer this recipe with diced and sauteed apples, you can still make this apple cinnamon breakfast with applesauce instead. Simply skip the sauteing of the apples and add 1/2 cup unsweetened applesauce into the oat mixture.
  • Cranberry Sauce: Making this easy oatmeal recipe during the holiday season? A dollop of leftover maple cranberry sauce is a delicious way to sweeten it.
  • Spices: While we opted for the basic cinnamon and nutmeg, you can experiment with adding other spices, such as ground cardamom and apple spice.
  • Salt: It is optional, but as it is with any sweet recipe, adding a pinch of salt to the oatmeal mixture will help enhance and balance the sweet flavor of apples.
  • Cooking liquid: Alternatively, you can make this apple cinnamon oats recipe using water instead of milk. If you decide to do so, please keep in mind that it will be less creamy.

How To Make Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal on Stove Top?

The steps to making this easy apple cinnamon oatmeal recipe are twofold, and it only takes 15 minutes from start to finish. Below are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make cinnamon apple oatmeal step by step.
  1. Saute apples and spices: Start by heating coconut oil in a small saucepan over medium-high heat. Add apples and sauté, stirring frequently, for 2-3 minutes. Add the ground cinnamon and nutmeg and cook for 10 more seconds.
  2. Make oatmeal: Add the nuts, rolled oats, milk, and chia seeds (if using). Stir to combine and cook, keeping a close eye on it and stirring occasionally until thickened for 8-10 minutes.
  3. Serve with toppings: Ladle into bowls, and garnish with fresh diced apples (or other fruits like pomegranate seeds), more nuts, and a drizzle of maple syrup. If preferred, you can sprinkle it with more ground cinnamon and an extra splash of milk.

On a side note, we based the recipe for this healthy apple cinnamon oatmeal on my Oatmeal with Almond Milk and Chia Seeds recipe, which happens to be one of the most popular recipes on Foolproof Living. It is a great recipe to show you how to make oatmeal on the stovetop if you are new to making oatmeal for breakfast or in need of a works-every-time recipe.

How To Meal Prep, Store, and Reheat?

One of the reasons why we love making this healthy apple cinnamon oatmeal is that it is a great meal prep-friendly breakfast recipe that you can make over the weekend and enjoy in the next few days. Perfect for busy mornings! Here is how we do it:

  • Meal Prep: Make the apple oatmeal recipe as written but refrain from adding the toppings. Divide it among four mason jars and let it cool on the counter. Once fully cooled, cover it tightly with a lid and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days. When ready to serve, be sure to top it off with your favorite toppings.
  • Storing leftovers: Store the leftover cinnamon apple oatmeal in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: While you can enjoy this recipe warm, cold, or at room temperature, we like to reheat it in the microwave if we are serving it on a crisp fall morning. To do so, transfer the apple porridge into a bowl, add a splash of milk (or water), and give it a stir. Place in the microwave and heat it in 30-second increments stirring every time until it is warmed to your liking.
Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal being drizzled with maple syrup.

How to make this Oatmeal recipe in the microwave?

If you’d rather make this homemade cinnamon apple oatmeal in the microwave, simply:

  • Start with cooking the apples: Sprinkle cubed apples with cinnamon and place in a large microwave-safe bowl (it should be large enough to make the whole oatmeal)
  • Add the liquid and nuts: Add in the almond milk (or water) and nuts and cook on high for 3-5 minutes, stopping and stirring every minute or so until it reaches your desired consistency.
  • Assemble: Drizzle with maple syrup and add the toppings. Give it a taste and add more if you like.

Expert Tips for the Best Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal

While the recipe below, as written, is pretty straightforward, there are a few things to pay attention to make flavors shine through when making this easy breakfast bowl:

  • Cooking apples for oatmeal: Do not skip the sauteeing of the apples, as it is key to bringing out their sweetness and making this a sugar-free apple cinnamon oatmeal. Additionally, cooking them ensures they soften, resulting in a more delightful texture in your oatmeal.
  • Experiment with different types of apples: While we do not think that there is such a thing as “the best apple for oatmeal,” we recommend experimenting with two (or more) different kinds of apples when making this recipe. Each type offers its unique flavor and texture, enriching the overall flavor and texture of your oatmeal.
  • Enhance and toast your spices: Consider experimenting with other spices such as cloves, star anise, ginger, apple pie spice, and allspice. However, we recommend using a very small amount to start with and then adjusting it according to your tastebuds. Furthermore, we recommend taking the time to toast your spices with the apples for a few minutes to enhance their flavors.

FAQs

How to cook apples for oatmeal?

To soften apples, use a teaspoon of coconut oil and saute them in the warm melted oil for a few minutes while stirring them often. As they cook, they release some of their juices and become sweeter and softer, making it a perfect pairing for this cinnamon oatmeal.

How to boost the nutrition of apple oatmeal?

To make this apple cinnamon porridge recipe even more nutritious, you can add a scoop of ground flaxseeds for additional fiber, a scoop of collagen for additional protein, and use less (or no sugar) in the recipe.

Is apple cinnamon oatmeal healthy?

Yes, it is, especially when made without using additional sugars. According to Healthline, when consumed on a regular basis, apples lower your chance of developing cancer, diabetes, and heart disease. Additionally, ground cinnamon is packed with antioxidants and anti-inflammatory properties, which help lower the risk of disease.

How much cinnamon to add to oatmeal?

You Might Also Like:

If you enjoyed this healthy apple breakfast porridge, then you will love our collection of oatmeal and apple recipes. Below are a few that we hand-picked for you:

Other Oatmeal Recipes:

Other Autumn-Inspired Apple Recipes:

If you try this Homemade Apple Oatmeal recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Apple cinnamon oatmeal in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe

This Homemade Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal is an autumn-inspired twist on plain oatmeal. Rolled oats, apples, and cinnamon simmered in almond milk with a touch of maple syrup make a delicious and healthy breakfast ready in less than 15 minutes.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 454kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon coconut oil avocado oil or ghee would also work
  • 1 large apple or 2 small apples, cut into small chunks
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • Pinch of ground nutmeg
  • ¼ cup chopped pecans or walnuts, plus more as topping
  • 1 cup rolled oats – Not quick cooking {I used Trader Joe's gluten free brand oats}
  • 2 cups unsweetened almond milk
  • 1 teaspoon chia seeds optional
  • 1 tablespoon pure maple syrup plus more to finish
  • ¼ cup pomegranate seeds as garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Heat coconut oil in a medium sized saucepan over medium heat.
  • Add in the apples and saute for 2-3 minutes. Stir in the cinnamon and nutmeg.
  • Add in the pecans, oats, almond milk, and chia seeds (if using). Give it a stir and let it cook until thickened for about 7-10 minutes, stirring constantly during the cooking process.
  • Ladle into bowls and top them off with pomegranate seeds (or other fruit), nuts, more apples, and a slight sprinkle of ground cinnamon. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 3 cups of apple oatmeal, which is ideal for serving two people. You can multiply the recipe if you are serving a crowd. The nutritional values below are per serving and include the calories coming from the listed toppings.
  • Optional Add-ins: You can easily customize this cinnamon apple recipe according to your taste buds. A few of our favorite ways to do it are as follows:
    • Use two different types of apples
    • Add a splash of vanilla extract
    • Up the nutrition by adding other superfoods such as ground flaxseeds and hempseeds
    • Top it off with a dollop of creamy peanut butter or yogurt for additional protein
  • Meal Prep: Make the recipe as written but refrain from adding the toppings. Divide it among four mason jars and let it cool on the counter. Once fully cooled, cover it tightly with a lid and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days. When ready to serve, top it off with your favorite toppings.
  • Storing leftovers: Store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: While you can enjoy this recipe warm, cold, or at room temperature, I like to reheat it in the microwave if I am serving it on a crisp fall morning. To do so, transfer the apple porridge into a bowl, add a splash of milk (or water), and give it a stir. Place in the microwave and heat it in 30-second increments stirring every time until it is warmed to your liking.

Nutrition

Calories: 454kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 330mg | Potassium: 403mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 70IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 368mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/apple-cinnamon-oatmeal/feed/ 34
Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/#comments Wed, 20 Sep 2023 19:47:47 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15280 Here at Foolproof Living, we love to roast colorful root veggies in the oven. Not only is this method quick and easy, but it’s the tastiest way to get your daily dose of nutrients. If you’re looking for more easy recipes for beautifully caramelized, tender roasted veggies, you have to make my Roasted Acorn Squash, this Maple Roasted Carrot dish, and my Baked Butternut Squash Cubes.  Ingredients We’re keeping the...

The post Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Here at Foolproof Living, we love to roast colorful root veggies in the oven. Not only is this method quick and easy, but it’s the tastiest way to get your daily dose of nutrients. If you’re looking for more easy recipes for beautifully caramelized, tender roasted veggies, you have to make my Roasted Acorn Squash, this Maple Roasted Carrot dish, and my Baked Butternut Squash Cubes

Roasted Brussel Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes in an oval plate with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

We’re keeping the ingredient list short and simple for this roasted brussel sprout and sweet potato recipe. The veggies crisp up perfectly with just a little olive oil, and we’re adding a few additional seasonings to enhance the flavor of this dish. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view.
  • Fresh Brussels sprouts: Rinse them under cold water and slice them in half. If you have larger sprouts, cut them into quarters.
  • Sweet potatoes: You’ll need 1 or 2 large sweet potatoes or 3-4 medium sweet potatoes. Be sure to peel them and cut them into 1-inch cubes.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: Peel garlic and mince finely. Don’t have fresh garlic on hand? Use a teaspoon of garlic powder instead.
  • Extra-virgin olive oil
  • Seasonings: You’ll need paprika (sweet or smoked), ground cumin, kosher or sea salt, and black pepper. 
  • Fresh Herbs (optional): We used fresh parsley as a garnish, but when making this dish during the holiday season, we use other fresh herbs like fresh sage, fresh thyme, or fresh rosemary.

Substitutions 

Root vegetables are ideal for roasting because the high heat allows the veggie’s natural sugars to caramelize and release a sweet flavor. Feel free to swap the sweet potatoes for your favorite root vegetable or even switch up the flavor profiles of this dish. Here are some ideas:

  • Pioneer Woman’s Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes: The Pioneer Woman has a delicious variation of this Brussel sprouts and sweet potato recipe that uses butternut squash and onion. If you’d like to try out her version, swap the sweet potatoes for cubed butternut squash and add some diced onion (she uses yellow onion, but red onion would also work.) If you don’t know how to cube butternut squash, check out my easy How to Cut Butternut Squash guide. If you’re not a fan of butternut squash, try substituting chopped carrots. You can even make roasted yams and Brussels sprouts for another substitution. 
  • Maple roasted Brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes: Sweet and savory is such a classic combo! Balance the savory spices in this recipe by adding a sweetener like sweet maple syrup, which will also help to bring out those beautiful caramelized flavors. I recommend drizzling your oven-roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts with maple syrup (about one tablespoon), just as I did in this Maple Roasted Carrots recipe. For another sweet option, try drizzling your roasted veggies with a dash of balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze (affiliate link.) 

How to Roast Sweet Potatoes and Brussel Sprouts?

In just 30 minutes, you can serve up this impressive, colorful vegetable dish that pairs with an endless number of main dishes. Plus, with only one bowl and a sheet pan, it makes for a super easy cleanup. Here’s how to make brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes in oven:

  1. Prep your equipment: Preheat your oven to 400 degrees F (204 degrees C). Line a large sheet pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil and set aside. 
A collage of images showing how to roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes.
  1. Combine the veggies and seasonings: Add the veggies, olive oil, garlic, cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper to a large or medium bowl. Toss Brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes with all the oil and seasonings until evenly coated.
  2. Transfer to the baking sheet: Transfer the seasoned veggies to the prepared baking sheet and spread them into a single layer. 
  3. Roast vegetables: Place in the center rack of the oven for 20-25 min, making sure to flip halfway through. 
  4. Serve: Transfer the roasted sweet potato and brussel sprouts to a serving bowl or plate. Sprinkle with fresh parsley or other fresh herbs, if desired. 

Variations with Optional Add-Ins

While roasted brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes are delicious as-is, they make an excellent base for salads, grain bowls, and more. Get creative by drizzling with dressings, adding lots of toppings, or adjusting the flavor profile to suit a special occasion. Here are a few suggestions:

  • Add quinoa: Turn this easy side dish into a roasted vegetable salad with cooked quinoa. For nutritious, simple, and filling lunch or dinner options, add your roasted brussels sprouts and sweet potato to this yummy Quinoa Sweet Potato Bowl or to my other delicious Quinoa Salad recipes. If you’d like to try these recipes but you are unfamiliar with cooking quinoa, I have you covered. Check out my easy guide for Cooking Quinoa on the Stove.
  • Mix with salad greens or massaged kale: Amp up the nutrients of this dish by tossing it with your favorite salad greens or kale. For a restaurant-worthy creation, finish off your sweet potato brussel sprout salad with a drizzle of Lemon and Balsamic Dressing and top it with lots of Crispy Bacon
  • Nuts and dried fruits: While you can enjoy roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts year-round, they’re especially fitting for the autumn season because of their warm, cozy flavors. If I’m making this dish for Thanksgiving, I love adding festive toppings like chopped pecans (or walnuts) and dried cranberries. Feel free to use your favorite nuts and dried fruit, such as dried figs or sliced almonds. Or, add a fun pop of color by tossing this sweet potato brussel sprout recipe with some fresh pomegranate seeds. 

How to Make Ahead, Store, & Reheat?

While sheet pan Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes are quick and easy to throw together for a last-minute side dish, they’re also make-ahead-friendly for meal prep and storage-friendly for those yummy leftovers. Here are some make-ahead, storage, and reheating tips:

  • Make-ahead: You can make this sweet potato and brussel sprout recipe a day in advance so it’s ready to go when you are. Simply chop up the veggies, mix them together with the seasonings, garlic, and extra virgin olive oil, and store them in a plastic bag, large bowl, or airtight container in the fridge. Follow the above instructions to cook them when you’re ready to serve. 
  • Store: Bring the baked brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. They’ll stay fresh in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Reheat: You can reheat your leftovers for a few seconds in the microwave or in a 300-degree F oven for about 10 minutes or until warmed through. 
A close up of the dish from the top view.

What to Serve It With?

Baked sweet potato and Brussels sprouts are a classic side that pairs with virtually any main dish. While it is one of my go-to dishes for holiday dinners, you can also enjoy this recipe as a snack, appetizer, or simple lunch! Here are a few of my serving recommendations: 

Expert Tips

When it comes to roasting Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes, the goal is to make them tender, caramelized, and crisp rather than mushy and lifeless. Thankfully, this is easy to achieve with just a few tricks up your sleeve! Here’s what you need to know: 

  • Aim for equal-sized veggies: Cutting your veggies into fairly equally-sized pieces will help them cook evenly in the oven. I recommend chopping medium-sized sweet potatoes into 1-inch cubes and cutting the sprouts in half lengthwise. You may need to cut particularly large Brussels sprouts into quarters. 
  • Leave the outer leaves: While you can remove any loose sprout leaves before roasting, I prefer to leave them since they crisp up really well in the oven and add a nice crunch to the dish. 
  • Flip halfway through the roasting process: When roasting sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts, flip them halfway through to ensure even cooking. They can turn from perfectly crisp and caramelized to mushy pretty quickly, so make sure to keep an eye on them after about 20 minutes (every oven is different). You’ll know they’re done when they’re fork-tender.

FAQs

Can I roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes together?

Yes, you can. Roast sweet potatoes and brussel sprouts in the oven for a total time of about 20-25 minutes to achieve a fork-tender texture with crisp, caramelized edges. Plus, sweet potato brussels sprouts are a savory and sweet combination that makes for the perfect side dish.

What temp to roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes?

You can cook sheet pan sweet potatoes and brussel sprouts in a 400-degree F oven for 20-25 minutes or until fork-tender.

Can I roast brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes in the air fryer instead?

For a quick and easy cooking option, you can make air fryer brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes instead of roasting them in the oven. I recommend roasting them in the air fryer basket at 400 degrees F for 17-20 minutes or until you achieve tender potatoes and crispy brussel sprouts.

What pairs well with brussel sprouts?

Root veggies, such as sweet potatoes, carrots, and butternut squash, pair beautifully with sprouts. Roasted root vegetables and brussel sprouts require around the same cook time, resulting in a tender texture with crisp, golden brown, and caramelized edges. It’s the perfect combination of savory and sweet.

Should I soak brussel sprouts before roasting?

There’s no need to soak your sprouts before roasting them. However, I recommend giving them a good rinse under cold running water to remove any dirt, debris, or pesticides. You can lightly dry them with a paper towel before cooking to ensure they crisp up nicely.

Other Roasted Vegetable Recipes You Might Like:

Whether you need a delicious side dish to serve with your holiday dinner or you are just looking for a healthy veggie meal for a Tuesday night dinner, we have a good collection of vegetable side dishes for you to choose from. Below are a few hand-picked recipes that we make regularly:

If you try this Roasted Sweet Potato Brussel Sprouts Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted Sweet Potatoes and Brussels Sprouts on a plate with a spoon on the side.
Print

Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes Recipe

These Oven-Roasted Brussel Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes are an easy side dish that’s vegan, gluten-free, and dairy-free. Tender, perfectly caramelized, and seasoned with cumin and paprika, these veggies are just as tasty as they are nutritious. Serve this recipe as a snack or appetizer, alongside your favorite weeknight meal, or even as an accompaniment to your holiday table.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings (as a side dish)
Calories 271kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound Brussels sprouts trimmed and halved lengthwise
  • 1 pound sweet potatoes peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic minced or 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley optional or other fresh herbs like fresh sage, thyme or rosemary

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees F (or 204 degrees C). Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper (or aluminum foil) and set aside.
  • Into a large bowl, place halved Brussels sprouts, cubed sweet potatoes, minced garlic, olive oil, ground cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper.
  • Give it a good toss to ensure that the vegetables are coated with all the seasonings and oil.
  • Transfer onto the prepared baking sheet and make sure that they are spread on a single layer.
  • Roast vegetables in the oven for 20 to 25 minutes, flipping halfway through the cooking process.
  • Transfer the now-roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts to a serving platter. Serve it with a sprinkle of fresh parsley.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 4 to 5 cups of roasted vegetables, which is ideal for serving 4 people as a side dish. The nutritional values listed below are per serving.
  • Aim for equal-sized veggies: Cutting your veggies into fairly equally-sized pieces will help them cook evenly in the oven. I recommend chopping sweet potatoes into 1-inch cubes and cutting the sprouts in half lengthwise. You may need to cut particularly large Brussels sprouts into quarters. 
  • Make-ahead: You can make this recipe a day in advance so it’s ready to go when you are. Simply chop up the veggies, mix them together with the seasonings, garlic, and extra virgin olive oil, and store them in a plastic bag, large bowl, or airtight container in the fridge. Follow the above instructions to cook them when you’re ready to serve. 
  • Store: Bring the roasted vegetables to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. Keep them in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Turn it into a salad: An earlier version of this recipe was tossed with ½ cup of cooked quinoa, 1 cup of arugula, a handful of pumpkin seeds, and pomegranate arils. It was drizzled with a homemade salad dressing. Below are the ingredients you will need to make the dressing:
    • ¼ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Nutrition

Calories: 271kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 674mg | Potassium: 853mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 17158IU | Vitamin C: 101mg | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/feed/ 13
Blackberry Oatmeal Bake https://foolproofliving.com/baked-crunchy-blackberry-oatmeal/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-crunchy-blackberry-oatmeal/#comments Sun, 10 Sep 2023 18:06:11 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3455 Warm, natural, and healthy, this baked blackberry oatmeal is a no-brainer when it comes to filling morning meals. If you love the hearty yet nutritious taste of fresh oats, there are dozens of other mouthwatering recipes to try. Steel Cut Overnight Oats and Overnight Yogurt Oats make mornings a breeze with exceptionally creamy flavor, while Muesli offers countless ways to customize your breakfast with sweet and savory flavors. Ingredients You’ll...

The post Blackberry Oatmeal Bake appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Warm, natural, and healthy, this baked blackberry oatmeal is a no-brainer when it comes to filling morning meals. If you love the hearty yet nutritious taste of fresh oats, there are dozens of other mouthwatering recipes to try. Steel Cut Overnight Oats and Overnight Yogurt Oats make mornings a breeze with exceptionally creamy flavor, while Muesli offers countless ways to customize your breakfast with sweet and savory flavors.

Baked Blackberry Oatmeal in a square baking dish from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

When you make blackberry breakfast recipes like this, there’s no need to spend hundreds at the grocery store. This simple oatmeal bake only uses natural, pantry-ready ingredients to start your morning.

  • Coconut oil: I use coconut oil to coat my oatmeal baking dish, though oil spray would also work. If you feel luxurious and want to give your oatmeal rich, sumptuous undertones, you may also prepare this recipe with melted butter.
  • Old-fashioned oats: Old-fashioned oats (also known as rolled oats) are my go-to for this blackberry-baked oatmeal, as their flat, round flakes are perfect for absorbing excess liquid and withstand the baking process. However, if you’re unsure about the difference between Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats or Steel-Cut Oats vs. Rolled Oats, these simple guides explain everything you need to know. Furthermore, you may also make this dish with gluten-free oats to accommodate a gluten-free diet.
  • Ground cinnamon
  • Unsweetened shredded coconut: I prefer my coconut-baked oatmeal to get a mild sweetness from natural ingredients, such as maple syrup and fresh berries. However, you can also use sweetened shredded coconut to add sweetness to your breakfast.
  • Nuts: I used sliced almonds, but you can also use chopped almonds or other nuts like walnuts or pecans.
  • Chia seeds
  • Baking powder
  • Salt: You only need a pinch of salt to bring out the other nuanced flavors of this recipe.
  • Large eggs
  • Milk: Though I usually use unsweetened almond milk in this dish, any kind of milk will work, from oat milk to soy milk, cow milk, coconut milk, and beyond. If you prefer making your own milk, my Homemade Almond Milk recipe is the one I recommend.
  • Vanilla extract
  • Maple syrup
  • Lemon zest
  • Frozen or fresh blackberries: I love making this blackberry breakfast with the luscious, tart flavor of fresh blackberries. However, you may also use frozen blackberries as long as you reduce the almond milk to 1⅔ cups. This reduction will help balance the added moisture in frozen berries, keeping your oatmeal from becoming watery.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.

Optional Add-Ins and Substitutions

  • Spices: This original recipe calls for ground cinnamon to give it its signature woody warmth. However, feel free to experiment with other spices, like nutmeg for a nuttier profile or cardamom for a slightly peppery dish.
  • Fruit: Any berry would work in this easy-baked oatmeal recipe, so you can mix and match according to your personal preference. If desired, you can even take this dish to the next level by transforming it into a triple-berry oatmeal bake using a mixture of juicy blackberries, raspberries, strawberries, and/or blueberries.
  • Other superfoods: Want to pack this simple recipe with even more nutrients? Add a tablespoon of healthy superfoods, like hemp seeds, ground flaxseeds, and oat bran, and your breakfast will contain countless vitamins and minerals, like magnesium, protein, and omega-3 fatty acids. Not only do these simple ingredients promote digestive and heart health, but they also add deliciously nutty undertones to this easy breakfast.
  • Other sweeteners: Don’t have any maple syrup on hand? No problem! You can also sweeten it using other natural sweeteners, like honey, coconut sugar, or brown sugar. However, if you use these sugars in your recipe, I recommend using ⅓ cup less liquid to avoid watery oatmeal.
  • Protein powders: If you want your oatmeal to boost your metabolism while promoting muscle gain and reducing late-morning cravings, add 2-3 tablespoons of your favorite protein powder.
  • Make it vegan: To make this dish vegan, simply substitute the eggs with flax eggs. You can make flax eggs at home by mixing two tablespoons of ground flaxseed with five tablespoons of water until combined. Set the mixture aside for 10 minutes before adding it to your oatmeal recipe.

How to Make It

This baked oatmeal with berries recipe is a cinch to make and makes waking up a delight. In just nine steps and ten minutes of prep time, a delectable dish will be ready on your table.

A collage of images showing how to make blackberry oatmeal bake.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F., and coat an 8×8-inch baking dish with coconut oil. Set the coated dish aside.
  2. Mix the dry ingredients: Stir the oats, cinnamon, shredded coconut, sliced almonds, chia seeds, baking powder, and Kosher salt in a large mixing bowl until thoroughly combined.
  3. Whisk the wet ingredients: In a separate bowl, whisk together the eggs, almond milk, vanilla extract, maple syrup, and lemon zest until fully integrated.
  4. Combine wet and dry ingredients: Pour the milk mixture into the large bowl of dry ingredients and stir until combined.
  5. Add the blackberries: Gently fold the blackberries into the oat mixture.
A couple of images showing the process of mixing and baking oatmeal with blackberries.
  1. Transfer the oatmeal: Pour the oatmeal recipe into the oiled oven-safe pan and spread it evenly with a spatula.
  2. Bake: Cook for 35-40 minutes or until the oatmeal turns golden brown.
  3. Cool: Remove the baking dish from the oven and let it cool for 10 minutes.
  4. Serve: Once cooled, divide the berry oatmeal bake among several bowls, garnish them with extra berries, and drizzle with maple syrup.

How to Store, Reheat, and Freeze?

Out of all the blackberry recipes for breakfast, this is one of the most meal prep-friendly. These simple tips will show you how to make baked oatmeal to enjoy throughout the week or freeze it for future use.

  • Storage: To store your baked blackberry oatmeal, first let it reach room temperature. Then, transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. If preferred, you can also slice it and store it in single-serving portions for extra easy morning meal prep.
  • Reheat: You can reheat it in a 325-degree F. oven for 10-15 minutes or in the microwave in 30-second increments.
  • Freeze: When freezing this recipe, let it reach room temperature first. Then, cover it tightly with several layers of plastic wrap to avoid freezer burn and store it in the freezer for up to 1-2 months.
  • Thaw: To thaw your frozen blackberry oatmeal bake, place it in the fridge overnight. Then, reheat it in the oven for 15 minutes at 325 degrees F.

How to Serve?

Making blackberry recipes for breakfast is a great way to add creativity to the kitchen. Serve it any way you want, from a grab-and-go morning meal to a healthy dessert guaranteed to make your mouth water.

  • A cup of coffee or juice: If you’re used to busy mornings, nothing is as satisfying as serving up a piece of this oatmeal bake alongside a hot cup of coffee or fresh juice.
  • Greek Yogurt: One of my favorite ways to serve this dish is with a sweet dollop of Honey Vanilla Yogurt. If you prefer a plant-based yogurt, you may also add a spoonful of coconut yogurt or almond milk yogurt for an equally creamy addition.
  • Milk: Do you prefer your oatmeal bake to be a little creamier? Adding a splash of milk to your baked dish will add a rich taste and an extra helping of calcium to your breakfast.
  • Nut butters: An easy way to make this simple recipe more filling and add protein is to spread a spoonful of peanut, almond, or cashew butter over your oatmeal bake slice.
  • Sweeteners: When prepared as-is, this blackberry baked oatmeal has a mildly sweet flavor—perfect for those who don’t like their breakfasts to taste too sugary. However, if you prefer more sweetness in your morning meal, add a drizzle of honey, maple syrup, or more blackberries. 
  • Sauce: If you’re like me, you know that a dash of sauce is all that’s needed to bring a recipe to life. Add a dollop of Date Caramel, Applesauce, or Homemade Blueberry Sauce to give this oatmeal bake extra rich, gooey flavor.
  • Ice cream: If you want to transform this tasty breakfast recipe into an irresistible dessert, try serving it with a scoop of your favorite ice cream! Honey Vanilla Ice Cream exquisitely balances the warm, woody undertones of oatmeal, while Chocolate Honey Ice Cream is a great addition for those who love the rich taste of cocoa powder.
Baked blackberry oatmeal cut into slices and served on small plates.

Expert Tips

Want to prepare a healthy breakfast worthy of a five-star dinner? These pro tips will ensure you have zero hassle making this blackberry oatmeal breakfast loaded with tart, hearty, and sweet flavors.

  • Baking dish: I prefer to bake this dish in an 8×8-inch baking dish to get the best post-baking consistency, though you may also use the same cooking instructions for a 9×9-inch dish. To make baked oatmeal in ramekins, reduce the cooking time by 10-15 minutes. Or, if you’re serving a crowd, you may double the recipe and bake it in a 9×13-inch baking dish at 350 degrees F. for 40 minutes.
  • Serving: The beauty of this oatmeal bake recipe is that you can serve it at whatever temperature you prefer—warm, room temperature, or cold.
  • Play with the add-ins: Endlessly customizable, this oatmeal recipe allows you to experiment with whatever add-ins you like. By extension, don’t worry if you’re missing one or two of the listed add-ons or want to add more or less. This dish is perfect for accommodating personal preferences when designing the oat mixture.

FAQs

Are blackberries good in oatmeal?

Blackberries are easily my favorite baked oatmeal berry. Baked blackberries have a delectably sweet yet tart flavor, perfectly balancing the mild notes of oatmeal. Even better, these low-calorie berries are also packed with nutrients, including Vitamin C, Vitamin K, and fiber, while also preventing heart disease.

Why are my baked oats soggy?

There are a few reasons your baked oatmeal might come out soggy. First off, you might have too much liquid in your mixture, either from how much milk you added or if you used frozen blackberries instead of fresh. It’s also possible you didn’t bake the recipe for enough time or that the size of your baking dish is too small. It’s also important to let your baked oats rest after baking to allow them to reabsorb their liquids. Finally, you should also consider the type of oats you use in your recipe. Instant oats and quick-cooking oats don’t have as hearty of a texture as old-fashioned oats, so they might be unable to soak up as much liquid during baking.

Other Oatmeal Recipes You Might Like

There are few better ways to start your morning with a filling, heart-healthy taste than with a bowl of warm oatmeal. These tasty recipes will ensure you never endure another bland breakfast again.

If you try this Blackberry Oatmeal Bake recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baked Blackberry Oatmeal sliced in a baking dish with a spoon on the side.
Print

Blackberry Oatmeal Bake Recipe

This Blackberry Oatmeal Bake is an easy-to-make, healthy baked oatmeal recipe packed with juicy blackberries and superfoods and sweetened with maple syrup. It is a delicious morning treat that is also breakfast meal-prep friendly.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 9 slices
Calories 215kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons coconut oil avocado oil, or oil spray would also work
  • 2 cups old-fashioned oats aka rolled oats*
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ½ cup unsweetened toasted shredded coconut optional
  • ½ cup sliced almonds optional
  • 1 tablespoon chia seeds optional
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 2 large eggs or flax eggs for a vegan option
  • 2 cups unsweetened almond milk or any milk you prefer
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • cup maple syrup plus more for drizzle
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest optional
  • 2 cups fresh blackberries divided (reserving ½ cup for garnish)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Coat an 8×8 inch square baking dish with the coconut oil and set aside.
  • In a large bowl, stir the rolled oats, cinnamon, shredded coconut, sliced almonds, chia seeds, baking powder, and Kosher salt until combined.
  • In a separate bowl, whisk together the eggs, almond milk, vanilla extract, maple syrup, and lemon zest, ensuring that everything is fully combined.
  • Pour the wet ingredients into the oat mixture and stir to combine.
  • Gently fold in the blackberries.
  • Pour the mixture into the baking dish and spread it evenly using a spatula.
  • Bake for 35-40 minutes until golden brown.
  • Remove from the oven and let it cool for 10 minutes.
  • When ready to serve, divide it amongst several bowls, garnish with blackberries, and drizzle with maple syrup.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields 9 slices of baked oatmeal. The nutritional values below are per slice. 
  • Gluten-free rolled oats: If you are following a gluten-free diet, be sure to purchase gluten-free oats. 
  • Size of your casserole dish: You can use both an 8×8 or a 9×9 baking dish to make this recipe. If you prefer to use a 9×13, we recommend doubling the recipe and baking it for 40 minutes.
  • Sweetness: This recipe is mildly sweet. You may add an additional ¼ cup of maple syrup to the mixture if you prefer it to be sweeter.
  • Other sweeteners: Don’t have any maple syrup on hand? No problem! You can also sweeten it using other natural sweeteners, like honey, coconut sugar, or brown sugar. However, if you use these sugars in your recipe, I recommend using ⅓ cup less liquid to avoid watery oatmeal.
  • Fresh vs. Frozen Berries: We tested this recipe using both fresh and frozen berries. We found that frozen blackberries can be used in place of fresh. However, if you decide to do so, please reduce the almond milk to 1 ⅔ cup due to the extra moisture in the frozen berries.
  • Make it vegan*: This is a gluten-free and dairy-free recipe. However, if you also want it to be vegan, you can substitute the eggs with “flax eggs.” To make flax eggs, mix 2 tablespoons of ground flaxseeds with 5 tablespoons of water, stirring to combine. Set aside for 10 minutes, then use it in place of the eggs.
  • Make Ahead: You can bake this baked oatmeal in advance and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. Just be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing it in an airtight container. You can reheat it in the oven at 325 degrees F for 15 minutes or microwave it (in 30-second increments) until warmed through.
  • Storage: It is best to bring leftovers to room temperature before storing them in an airtight container. We recommend storing them in individual portions so you can easily reheat (if preferred) and grab and go. If stored properly in the fridge, they should be fresh for up to 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 215kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 267mg | Potassium: 230mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 122IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 155mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Blackberry Oatmeal Bake appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-crunchy-blackberry-oatmeal/feed/ 6
Mediterranean Hummus Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/#comments Tue, 05 Sep 2023 00:39:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2804 While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away. Hummus Ingredients A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the...

The post Mediterranean Hummus Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away.

A bowl of hummus garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Hummus Ingredients

A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the main ingredient. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for basic hummus recipe.
  • Chickpeas: Although you can cook your own chickpeas (more on this below), I find using canned chickpeas is easier and does not require any advanced planning. We will need one can of chickpeas (also known as garbanzo beans) rinsed and drained.
  • Lemon Juice: Fresh lemon juice will provide a fresh pop of citrus.
  • Water: A bit of water helps with consistency. For best results, use ice-cold water.
  • Tahini Paste: A high-quality tahini (sesame paste) makes all the difference and gives this easy hummus recipe that special nutty flavor. I love super creamy Soom tahini (affiliate link) or Seed + Mill (affiliate link.)
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Use good quality olive oil for the best flavor.
  • Garlic Cloves: I use raw garlic when making this hummus recipe from scratch. However, if you want to take things up a notch (and are not a fan of the pungent garlic flavor), you can use Roasted Garlic, or, quicker, Air Fried Garlic as well. 
  • Seasonings: Cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt add Mediterranean flavor and warmth.
  • Fresh Herbs: Upon serving, a final sprinkle of fresh herbs like parsley is all you need. 

Substitutions and Optional Garnish Ideas

While you can serve this DIY hummus simply as is, I find extra garnishes and Mediterranean additions compliment the classic characteristics of hummus and give it depth of flavor. Some favorites you can try include:

  • Chickpeas: If you would prefer to make hummus from dried chickpeas, I recommend trying Ottolenghi’s method of cooking chickpeas. Place 1 ⅓ cups dry chickpeas in a bowl, cover with cool water, add 1 teaspoon baking soda, cover and soak overnight. The next day, drain, rinse, and cook in a pot of water for 40 minutes to an hour, or until softened. And if you prefer it to be quicker, you can cook chickpeas in a pressure cooker as well.
  • Olive Oil: Create a deep crevice into the bowl of hummus with a large spoon and finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil.
  • Pine Nuts + Olives: Add crunch and fruitiness by finishing with toasted pine nuts and chopped Kalamata olives or green olives.
  • Hummus Seasoning: Finish with an array of spices and herbs, such as my Mediterranean Seasoning or Baharat Spice Blend, bright and tangy sumac, or dried oregano.
  • Greek: Garnish with chopped sun-dried tomatoes, crumbled feta cheese, chopped red onion, and a drizzle of olive oil.

How to Make Hummus From Scratch?

If you are ever looking for a step-by-step hummus recipe, you have come to the right place. Making your own hummus will always be better than store-bought hummus and might even be faster than taking a trip to the grocery store. Here’s how I like to do it:

Step by step photos showing how to make hummus recipe.
  1. Prep ingredients: Combine the lemon juice and water in a small bowl. Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  2. Mix Tahini: In another small bowl, whisk together the tahini and olive oil until shiny and smooth.
  3. Blend chickpeas: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade or a high-powered blender, add the remaining chickpeas and process for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice/water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until the mixture begins to form into a paste, about 1 minute.
Person showing how to make creamy hummus in a collage of images.
  1. Add tahini: With the food processor running, slowly add the tahini paste mixture through the tube and process until creamy, about 30-40 seconds. Be sure to stop the machine a few times and scrape down the sides.
  2. Serve: Transfer the hummus to a large bowl. Using the back of a spoon, create a deep crevice in the center. Finish with reserved chickpeas, a drizzle of olive oil, and chopped fresh parsley, and enjoy.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

Easy homemade hummus can be made ahead and stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare this homemade hummus recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftovers of this chickpea hummus recipe can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Store in a freezer-safe airtight container, with a little space at the top (to count for expansion), for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.

How to Serve

This basic hummus recipe can be served in a number of different ways. Go the more traditional route or think outside of the box by serving as:

  • Mezze Platter: The adoration for hummus is a social activity that is meant to be enjoyed amongst the company, and no mezze plate would be complete without it. Enjoy it alongside Baba Ganoush and Middle Eastern Red Pepper Dip for an authentic experience.
  • Grilled Meat: Make it a part of a filling meal by serving your garbanzo bean hummus alongside Mediterranean Chicken, Chicken Kabobs, grilled lamb, or beef kabobs.
  • Appetizer / Dip: Cut up fresh veggies like raw celery sticks, English cucumber, carrots, bell peppers, or radishes and dip right into Mediterranean hummus bowls.
  • Spread: Use it as a sandwich spread to make your lunch that much more enjoyable, or add it to your favorite grain bowls.
  • Pita / Bread: Give it a casual approach with toasted pita bread, pita chips, crackers, Air Fried Garlic Bread, Olive Bread, or No Knead Artisan Bread.
Greek hummus in a bowl garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this authentic hummus recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, below are a few tips to ensure you get perfect results on your first try:

  • Should I remove the skins of chickpeas? I am sure you’ve seen a lot of recipes suggesting removing the chickpea skins. While I get why they recommend doing so, I personally do not have the time or patience to do so. And I guarantee you that this recipe is just as creamy and delicious without removing the skin. 
  • Use high-quality tahini: The quality of your tahini makes a huge difference here. For optimal taste and texture, use a brand of tahini that uses the buttery white Humera sesame seeds from Ethiopia. It should also be soft and creamy. If the tahini bottle has been sitting in the fridge for a while, be sure to give it a good stir before using it.
  • Use an ice cube: This is an optional step, but it really works. To achieve an extra smooth and creamy hummus, add 1-2 ice cubes near the end of processing.
  • No food processor? Use a blender. However, please keep in mind that if you have a high-speed blender like Vitamix (affiliate link), you might have to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times.
  • Serve at room temperature: Fun fact – restaurant hummus is never refrigerated and is made fresh each morning. While I refrigerate my batch of homemade hummus to get ahead, I always serve it at room temperature.

FAQs

What is hummus?

Hummus originated in the Middle East, but many countries have welcomed and adapted it to their own. Such variations include Israeli, Lebanese, Palestine, Egyptian, and Greek hummus.

What is the secret to the creamiest hummus?

The creamiest hummus is made from soft chickpeas and a high-powered food processor or blender. Adding 1-2 ice cubes at the end of the processing time would also help.

Can you have hummus on a Mediterranean diet?

Yes, hummus is a staple of the Mediterranean diet and is celebrated for being plant-based and full of protein, dietary fiber, and healthy fats.

What is the main ingredient in hummus?

The main ingredient in hummus is chickpeas, sometimes referred to as garbanzo beans.

How much tahini for hummus?

This is more about personal preference and cultural influence, but I use ⅓ cup tahini for every 1 (14-15 oz) can of chickpeas.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Enjoy:

It is no secret that I love making and sharing Turkish recipes on the blog. Below are other Mediterranean classics that I know you’ll like:

If you try this Mediterranean Hummus Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Authentic hummus in a bowl drizzled with olive oil.
Print

Mediterranean Hummus Recipe

A restaurant style yet Homemade Mediterranean Hummus recipe. This recipe makes the creamiest and most delicious hummus that you can make in minutes. Top it off with pine nuts, chopped olives, and a drizzle of oil for extra deliciousness.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 139kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1/4 cup water
  • 1/3 cup tahini paste
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 can chickpeas (14 oz.) drained and rinsed
  • 2 small cloves garlic minced
  • 1/4 teaspoon cumin
  • Pinch of cayenne pepper
  • Pinch of black pepper
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley finely chopped

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, combine the lemon juice and water.
  • In a separate bowl (or a measuring cup), whisk together the tahini paste and olive oil until thoroughly incorporated.
  • Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  • Place the rest of the chickpeas in a food processor and process them for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice and water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until mixed, scraping down the bowl as necessary, 50-60 seconds.
  • While the food processor is running, slowly (in a steady stream), pour the tahini paste and olive oil mixture from the tube, and process until smooth and creamy (or it reaches your desired consistency,) for 30-40 seconds.
  • Transfer the hummus to a plate and sprinkle it with chopped parsley and reserved chickpeas. If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil. Serve it with pita chips or toasted bread on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ cups of hummus, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutrition information below is for one serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftover hummus can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 139kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 242mg | Potassium: 86mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 132IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Mediterranean Hummus Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/feed/ 13
Baba Ganoush Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/#respond Mon, 21 Aug 2023 15:24:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69873 What is Baba Ganoush? Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush) is an eggplant- and tahini-based appetizer native to Levantine regions—now located the Middle East and Mediterranean. Directly translated, baba ganoush’s meaning is “pampered papa” or “coy daddy,” which may refer to the recipe’s smooth, rich taste. If you are wondering, what is in baba ganoush, this savory, smoky spread generally...

The post Baba Ganoush Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
What is Baba Ganoush?

Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush) is an eggplant- and tahini-based appetizer native to Levantine regions—now located the Middle East and Mediterranean. Directly translated, baba ganoush’s meaning is “pampered papa” or “coy daddy,” which may refer to the recipe’s smooth, rich taste.

Babaganoush in a bowl garnished with pomegranate seeds served with pita chips on the side.

If you are wondering, what is in baba ganoush, this savory, smoky spread generally consists of roasted eggplant, creamy tahini, zesty lemon juice, rich olive oil, and bold garlic. However, many also add unique blends of seasonings to give this Middle East eggplant dip a tantalizingly complex flavor profile.

Ingredients

Baba ganoush ingredients include a handful of fresh, natural, and flavorful ingredients—all of which you may already have in your pantry!

Ingredients used in the recipe from the top view.
  • Eggplant: There are many eggplant varieties to choose from when selecting a baba ganoush eggplant. Plump and round, globe eggplants are an excellent option for this recipe and are the easiest type to find in most American grocery stores. However, if you can get your hands on Italian eggplants, I highly recommend them, as this variety has a more tender flesh, fewer seeds, and a deliciously sweet flavor. Japanese eggplants will also work, but you’ll need more (7-8) due to their thinner shape and smaller size. If you’d prefer not to work with fresh eggplants, you may also use canned roasted eggplant (affiliate link), though it may not have the same tenderly mild flavor.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Fresh lemon juice
  • Sesame Tahini: Ground sesame paste, aka tahini, has an earthy, nutty flavor that perfectly balances the mild, smoky taste of roasted eggplant baba ganoush. My favorite tahini brand is Soom (affiliate link), which is incredibly smooth and creamy.
  • Olive oil: I recommend using extra virgin olive oil for this recipe, as it has a higher quality with pure pressed olives, a lighter color, and a more neutral taste.
  • Kosher salt
  • Optional spices: While adding spices is not traditional to the original recipe, you can add more depth to your baba ganoush by adding a mixture of ground cumin and sweet, peppery paprika. For an extra deep taste, you may also use smoked paprika to complement your smoked eggplant baba ganoush. You can also add red pepper flakes for additional heat or black pepper for slightly pinier undertones.
  • Garnishes: Topping this Mediterranean eggplant dip with different garnishes is a great way to revitalize your spread with sweet, crunchy, and fresh notes. For a tart, sweet finish, try topping your dip with pomegranate seeds, or use sesame seeds and pine nuts for a nuttier taste. Or, if you want bright, fragrant overtones, fresh herbs like parsley are some of my go-to’s.

How to Cook Eggplant for Baba Ganoush?

There are three different ways to prepare your eggplant for this simple recipe, depending on your preferred cooking method: roasted, charred, and grilled eggplant for baba ganoush.

Roasting Eggplant in the Oven

Roasting eggplant for baba ganoush is a cinch when you use my foolproof method for preparing Whole Roasted Eggplant. These instructions will ensure your eggplants come out tender and creamy with little prep time.

Person showing how to roast eggplant for baba ganoush.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  2. Poke the eggplants: Use the tines of a fork to poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes around the exterior of each eggplant.
  3. Roast: Place eggplants on a baking sheet lined with aluminum foil in a single layer and bake for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapse, and soften.

Char Eggplant On a Gas Stove

The most authentic way to prepare eggplant for this baba ganoush recipe is by charring it over the open flame of a gas stove. Making Roast Eggplant on a Gas Stove is quicker than other cooking methods and will result in a smoky baba ganoush recipe with an irresistibly complex, aromatic flavor.

Person showing how to char eggplant on a gas stove.
  1. Prepare the stove: Line the base of a gas range stove with aluminum foil, ensuring that the burners are still exposed.
  2. Add the eggplants: Turn the burners to medium heat and place the eggplants directly on the flame. Two eggplants can fit on the larger burners, and one can fit on the smaller ones.
  3. Roast: Roast the eggplants for 15-20 minutes, depending on their size, turning them every five minutes with a pair of tongs. Be careful not to burn yourself while handling the hot eggplants.
  4. Remove from heat: Remove the charred eggplants from the flame when their skin becomes burnt and flaky, and their flesh is soft.

Grill Eggplant

Learning how to grill eggplant for baba ganoush is an easy way to give this Mediterranean dip its classic rich, smoky flavor and smooth texture. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Prep the grill: Preheat the gas grill (or charcoal grill) to medium heat.
  2. Grill the eggplants: Place the eggplants directly on the grill and cook them for 40-50 minutes, turning them every 10 minutes or so. Continue grilling until the eggplants have charred skin on all sides and are fully tender.

How to Make Baba Ganoush?

There’s no secret to making an authentic baba ganoush recipe. These foolproof instructions will ensure your tastebuds explode with fresh, Mediterranean flavors in just eight basic steps.

A collage of images showing how to make baba ghanoush.
  1. Let the eggplant cool: Cook your eggplant following one of the three methods mentioned above. Allow your cooked eggplant to cool down. In the meantime, place a fine-mesh strainer over a bowl and set it aside for later.
  2. Scoop the eggplant flesh: Once cool, draw a knife lengthwise through each eggplant until cut in half. Then, use a spoon to scoop out the eggplants’ flesh, trying to remove as much skin as possible.
  3. Strain: Transfer the scooped eggplant into the fine mesh strainer and use the back of a spoon to gently press against the flesh, removing as much moisture as you can. Let the eggplant drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients. Discard the juices.
  4. Mix the garlic and lemon: Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl and add the garlic and lemon juice. Use a fork to mix the ingredients, breaking apart and mashing the large chunks of eggplant until thoroughly combined.
A collage of images showing how to make Lebanese baba ganoush recipe.
  1. Add the tahini: Stirring constantly, pour the tahini, followed by the olive oil, into the mixing bowl in a steady stream. Mix the ingredients until emulsified.
  2. Add the seasoning: Add the salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if desired) to the bowl. Taste the mixture and add more seasoning and lemon juice if necessary.
  3. Garnish: After giving it a good stir, transfer the baba ghanoush to a serving bowl and garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if using.
  4. Serve: If wanted, drizzle the spread with olive oil and serve with pita chips.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

This homemade baba ganoush is a must-have for anyone seeking easy meal prep. Whip up this simple dip for healthy snacking throughout the week, or make it in advance for a five-star party appetizer.

  • Make ahead: You can make this baba ganoush recipe up to four days in advance. Then, store your prepared baba ghanoush in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to eat.
  • Store: You can store your freshly made eggplant garlic dip in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to four days.
  • Freeze: While you can technically freeze this vegan baba ganoush recipe, please keep in mind that it will likely lose its creamy texture after it is exposed to freezing temperatures, so it might not taste as good after storage. However, if you still want to freeze, first transfer the mixture into an airtight container, removing as much air as possible. Then, store your baba ganoush in the freezer for up to one month. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen aubergine dip in the fridge overnight. Because your mixture will likely become watery the longer it sits, drain it of excess liquid, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

What to Serve with Baba Ganoush?

One of the best things about preparing babaganoush is the many delectable ways to serve it. Though many traditionally serve this dish alongside pita triangles or vegetables, it also works as a tasty spread on toast, sandwiches, wraps, and more. 

  • Bread: Who can say no to an appetizer as effortless and tasty as this? Serve a bowl of this popular Middle Eastern dip with your favorite pita chips, roasted pita wedges, or crackers, and you’ll have the perfect crowd-ready snack.
  • Raw vegetables: Crisp, nutritious, and garden-fresh, fresh veggies make an incomparable pair with a bowl of smoky eggplant dip recipes. My favorite raw vegetables include cucumber slices, carrot sticks, cherry tomatoes, and sliced radishes.
  • Other Middle Eastern or Mediterranean dips: Wondering what to do with baba ganoush that will make even the pickiest eaters hungry for more? Try pairing your creamy eggplant dip with other classics, like Mediterranean Hummus, Muhammara, and Tzatziki. To transform this simple spread into a next-level meze platter, you can also serve them with a side of olives and nuts—gorgeous and delicious.
  • Grilled or roasted meats: A tasty way to serve baba ganoush is as a light, creamy side dish for hearty protein mains. For a classic Middle Eastern pairing, serve it alongside brightly spiced Chicken Shish Tawook or Oven Chicken Kabobs. Or, if you want an irresistibly juicy, perfectly portioned poultry meal, try this simple dish with Grilled Cornish Game Hens.
A bowl of baba ghanouj garnished with pomegranate seeds and parsley.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a Middle Eastern chef to make an epic baba ganoush the whole family will love. These pro tips have everything you need to keep your spread as flavorful and smooth as possible.

  • Roasting time might change based on the sizes of your eggplant: Depending on the size and variety of your eggplant, they may need more or less cooking time. Japanese eggplants are smaller and thinner, requiring less time on the stove/grill, while globe eggplants are larger and may need more time to develop tender insides than other types. In total, however, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of cooked eggplant flesh to make this babaganoush recipe.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. Though these seeds are entirely edible and blend into the dip after everything is mixed, you may remove them if you are not a fan.
  • Roasted eggplant skin: It is totally okay if some of the charred eggplant skin goes into the mixture. While we want to remove as much of the skin as we possibly can, the eggplant skin is edible, so don’t worry about it if some skin gets mixed into your baba ganouj.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplants after they are cooked. Not only do not skip this step but also take your time to ensure that the juices are fully drained as much as possible to ensure it is as creamy and tasty as possible.
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Taste for seasoning: One other important tip for making the best baba ganoush recipe is tasting the mixture for seasoning before serving. I cannot stress this step enough, as it’s vital that you adjust the taste of your spread to your liking. Add more salt, cumin, or paprika to achieve a more robustly flavored dip, or if you prefer a more acidic, tart flavor, add more lemon juice.
  • Let it rest: Letting your eggplant baba ganoush rest for thirty minutes will allow its flavors to mix and develop, giving every bite a rich, Middle Eastern flavor. While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, let it rest in the fridge before serving.
  • Baba ganoush without Tahini: If you are not a fan of tahini, you can use an equal amount of plain Greek yogurt for a different but equally delicious version of this recipe.
  • For the iconic smoky taste: If you want to give your roasted eggplant spread an authentically smoky, robust taste, I highly recommend charring your eggplants over an open flame. Whether you cook them on a gas stovetop or on the grill, the smoky flavor that comes from the charred eggplants is worth the effort and time, especially if you are after the traditional baba ganoush recipe you enjoy in Middle Eastern restaurants.
  • Food processor or blender: Though not a traditional preparation method, you may use a food processor or blender to make an easy baba ganoush without heavy mixing. Simply fit your food processor with a steel blade and place the roasted eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using) in the bowl. Pulse 7-9 times until thoroughly combined or longer, depending on how smooth you want the texture of your dip to be. Then, transfer the mixture to a bowl, garnish it with fresh parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve.

FAQs

If you have more questions about this classic baba ganoush recipe, don’t worry! This simple FAQ has all you need to know:

Where is baba ganoush from?

Baba ganoush originated in the Levantine regions, roughly located in the Middle East and Mediterranean. This area now includes several modern-day countries, including Palatine, Lebanon, Syria, Jordan, and Turkey.

Is baba ganoush vegan?

Yes! This baba ganoush recipe is vegan, dairy-free, and gluten-free, making it the perfect recipe for anyone with dietary restrictions.

How long to grill eggplant for baba ganoush?

When grilling eggplant for baba ganoush, your eggplants will need 40-50 minutes of cooking time, depending on their size.

What does baba ganoush taste like?

This creamy roasted eggplant dip offers a delectable balance of smoky, savory, and zesty flavors—a classic profile in Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisine. Not only does this spread taste incredible on its own, but it also makes a fabulous appetizer when served alongside a bowl of pita bread or raw veggies.

Is baba ganoush served hot or cold?

I recommend serving baba ghanouj chilled or at room temperature to ensure you can taste all its complex flavors. 

Why is my babaganoush bitter?

If your babaganoush comes out bitter, your eggplant may be old or not in season. I recommend selecting only fresh eggplants, which tend to have milder, sweeter flesh. Furthermore, it’s possible that the tahini paste you used has a naturally bitter profile or that you added too much during the mixing process. Always be sure to taste your babaganoush as you go so that you can adjust the seasoning to counteract any unwanted bitterness. You may also try adding extra fats, such as olive oil or Greek yogurt, to balance out any bitterness you taste.

What is the difference between hummus and baba ganoush?

Though they have a similarly smooth, rich flavor profile, hummus comes from a mixture of chickpeas and tahini, while baba ganoush contains a blend of eggplants and tahini.

Is baba ganoush healthy?

Absolutely! This recipe only uses the freshest, most natural ingredients—all packed with healthy nutrients. In fact, eggplants are high in antioxidants, fiber, and vitamins, helping reduce your risk of heart disease.

How long does baba ganoush last in fridge?

As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, your baba ganoush should last for up to 4 days.

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like

Wondering what to do with roasted eggplant? If you can’t resist adding this eggplant tahini dip to every meal, you’ll love adding these other eggplant recipes to your family cookbook.

Baba ganoush in a bowl with pita wedges on the side.
Print

Baba Ganoush Recipe

Learn how to make Baba Ganoush like the pros using our foolproof method. Made with just a few simple ingredients, this popular Middle Eastern recipe is the perfect appetizer for any party.
Course Dip
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 152kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 ½-3 lbs globe or Italian eggplant ~ 2-3 eggplants if using globe eggplants
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ cup lemon juice plus more to taste
  • ¼ cup tahini
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil plus more as a drizzle
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt plus more to taste
  • Pinch ground cumin optional
  • Pinch paprika to finish it off – optional
  • 1 tablespoon fresh Italian parsley chopped (as garnish)
  • Handful of pomegranate seeds optional

Instructions

  • To cook eggplants for baba ganoush, you have three options:
    a. Roast whole eggplants in the oven: Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Using a fork, poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes throughout each eggplant. Place eggplants on the sheet pan on a single layer and roast them for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapsed, and softened.
    b. Roast eggplants on the gas stove: Line the base of a gas range with aluminum foil, making sure to keep the burners exposed. Turn the burners on medium -heat and place eggplants directly on an open flame. You can put 2 eggplants on the larger burners and 1 on the smaller ones. Roast eggplants for about 15-20 minutes (depending on their size), turning every 5 minutes or so using a pair of tongs, being careful not to burn yourself. You will know that it is fully roasted when the skin is burnt and flaky and the flesh is soft.
    c. Grill eggplants: Preheat a gas grill (or a charcoal grill) to medium heat. Place eggplants directly on the grill and cook, turning every 10 minutes or so for 40-50 minutes or until charred on all sides and fully tender.
  • Let the now-cooked eggplant cool down. Meanwhile, place a fine-mesh strainer over a large bowl and set it aside.
  • When cool enough to handle, working on one eggplant at a time, slit open each eggplant lengthwise and carefully scoop the eggplant flesh removing as much of the skin as possible.
  • Transfer the eggplant flesh into the fine mesh strainer. Using the back of a spoon, gently press to remove as much of the liquid as much as possible. Let it drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients. In the end, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of eggplant flesh.
  • Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl. Add minced garlic and lemon juice. Using a fork, give it a mix while breaking the large chunks of eggplant flesh until fully combined.
  • While stirring constantly, pour in the tahini, followed by olive oil, in a steady stream. Mix until fully combined.*
  • Add salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using.). Taste for seasoning and add in more seasoning and/or lemon juice if you want.
  • Transfer baba ganoush to a serving bowl, garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if desired.
  • If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil and serve with pita chips on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 2 cups of this roasted eggplant dip, which is good for 4-6 servings when served as an appetizer.
  • * Food processor: While it is not traditional, you can make baba ganoush using a food processor or blender. To do so, place eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, and ground cumin and paprika (if using)  in the bowl of a food processor fitted with a steel blade. Pulse 7-9 times until fully combined. You can run it for longer if you prefer it to have a smoother texture. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Transfer to a bowl, garnish with parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve with pita chips on the side.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. The seeds are entirely edible and will blend into the dip after everything is mixed. However, if you are not a fan, you can remove them.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplant flesh. So, be sure to take your time when draining as much liquid as possible. 
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 152kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 497mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 107IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Baba Ganoush Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/feed/ 0
Ina Gartenโ€™s Roasted Eggplant Spread https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-vegetable-dip-with-tahini/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-vegetable-dip-with-tahini/#comments Sun, 20 Aug 2023 20:28:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=408 As one of my favorite Eggplant Recipes, this eggplant spread is just as elegant as the Barefoot Contessa herself. It is easy to make with just a few simple ingredients; it is a great appetizer to serve with crackers, pita bread, and veggies. Ingredients While this could be an eggplant red pepper spread, I like to think eggplant is the star here. Here’s a quick glance at what we need:...

The post Ina Gartenโ€™s Roasted Eggplant Spread appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
As one of my favorite Eggplant Recipes, this eggplant spread is just as elegant as the Barefoot Contessa herself. It is easy to make with just a few simple ingredients; it is a great appetizer to serve with crackers, pita bread, and veggies.

Barefoot Contessa's roasted eggplant red pepper spread in a bowl.

Ingredients

While this could be an eggplant red pepper spread, I like to think eggplant is the star here. Here’s a quick glance at what we need:

  • Eggplant: Eggplant Types vary, but I used the easy-to-find globe eggplants for this recipe. If you can get your hands on Italian eggplants, you can use them as well. Since we are roasting the eggplant in the oven pre salting the eggplant is not necessary here. However, it is important to cut eggplant into equal-sized cubes to ensure even roasting.
  • Bell Pepper: I like the sweeter red bell peppers, but you can use any color, such as yellow or orange.
  • Red Onion: All you have to do is peel and cut the onion into big chunks.
  • Garlic Cloves
  • Olive Oil
  • Seasoning: This includes Kosher salt, black pepper, and a touch of (optional) cayenne pepper for some kick.
  • Lemon Juice: Use freshly squeezed lemon juice for the best flavor.
  • Tahini: Go for a high-quality, runny tahini, such as Soom (affiliate link.) The flavor makes all the difference.
  • Herbs: I love fresh chopped parsley here, but you can also add fresh mint to enhance those Mediterranean flavors. Fresh basil leaves as a garnish are a nice addition, too.
  • Pita Bread: Whether you prefer to toast fresh pita bread triangles or enjoy it with store-bought pita chips, this red pepper eggplant dip will be delicious either way.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Tomato Paste: The original recipe from the Barefoot Contessa cookbook contains tomato paste. While I did not include it here, you can add 1 Tablespoon of tomato paste for a richer flavor.
  • Extra Seasoning: Give it a smoky eggplant dip flavor with the addition of 1 teaspoon smoked paprika or an herbal kick with 1 teaspoon dried oregano.

How to Make Eggplant Spread

This Ina Garten eggplant spread recipe is a cinch to make, with most of the work done by the oven and the food processor. Here’s how to do it in a few easy steps:

A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
  2. Prepare the vegetables: Spread the eggplant, bell pepper, onion, and garlic onto the baking sheet. 
  3. Season the veggies: Toss with olive oil, salt, pepper, and cayenne, if using.
  4. Roast vegetables: Bake for 35-40 minutes, tossing halfway through. Allow to cool for 5 minutes.
  5. Make spread: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade, add the roasted vegetables, lemon juice, tahini, and 2 tablespoons parsley. Pulse 4-5 times until the mixture resembles a coarse puree. 
  6. Taste: Taste for seasoning and add more salt and lemon juice, if necessary. 
  7. Serve: Transfer to a serving bowl. Top with the remaining parsley. Serve immediately with pita bread, crackers, or veggies on the side.

Serving Suggestions

This recipe for roasted eggplant dip is so versatile and can be served in a number of creative ways. Think outside the box and try:

  • Appetizer / Snack: Serve it as a fun and pleasing appetizer or snack with fresh pita triangles, pita chips, crackers, or fresh vegetables.
  • Mezze Plate: Make it a part of a full-on mezze plate, alongside Muhammara and Mediterranean Hummus.
  • Sandwich Spread: Eggplant dip for bread will be your new favorite sandwich addition. Spread it on crusty No Knead Olive Bread or Artisan Bread.
  • Side Dish: Serve it as a delicious side dish to grilled seafood, like Grilled Shrimp Skewers or Grilled Mahi Mahi, grilled lamb, or classic Mediterranean Lemon Chicken.
  • Pizza / Pasta: Think of it more as an eggplant paste recipe to spread on pizza dough or stir into pasta.

How to Store

This Barefoot Contessa roasted eggplant dip recipe actually gets better the longer it sits, as the flavors have a chance to marry together. You can either:

  • Make Ahead: Make the eggplant spread up to 2 days in advance for the best flavor.
  • Storage: Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. You may have to give it a good stir just before serving. Serve chilled or at room temperature.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this eggplant red pepper dip is an easy one, here are a few tips to help you achieve perfect results on your first try: 

  • Cut the vegetables into the same size pieces: This ensures the vegetables will be done at the same time.
  • Single layer: Be sure to spread the veggies on a single layer to ensure even baking. If they don’t fit in one baking sheet, you can spread them on two separate sheets.
  • Pay attention to the cooking time: We want the vegetables to be tender and slightly caramelized. Overcooking can lead to a bitter flavor.
  • Do not over-process: We want a chunky spread, not a puree. Pulse just a few times in the food processor.
  • Make a double batch: Use two sheet pans and double the recipe. It’s a wonderful dip to have on hand when hosting a party.

FAQs

Should eggplant be peeled before roasting?

Although eggplant skin can impart a bitter flavor, it is not necessary to peel eggplant before roasting.

How do you prepare eggplant before cooking?

Eggplant preparation depends on the dish you are making it for. In this roasted eggplant dip, all we have to do is cut it into 1-inch cubes and let the oven do the rest of the work for us.

More Delicious Dips and Spreads You Might Like:

If you are like us, a fan of serving dips and spreads while entertaining, you might also enjoy the recipes below:

If you try Ina Garten’s Roasted Eggplant Spread recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Barefoot Contessa's Eggplant spread in a bowl
Print

Ina Garten’s Roasted Eggplant Spread Recipe

Barefoot Contessa’s roasted eggplant spread is an easy appetizer that you can serve with pita bread, crackers, or raw vegetables.
Course Appetizer, Dip
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 222kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 medium-sized eggplants with skin on and cut into small cubes (~1 pound each)
  • 1 red bell pepper seeded and cut into smaller pieces
  • 1 red onion peeled and chopped into big chunks
  • 3 cloves garlic peeled – no need to mince
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Pinch cayenne pepper optional
  • 5 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 tablespoons tahini
  • 3 tablespoons Italian parsley chopped
  • Pita bread for serving

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Place the eggplant, bell pepper, onion, and garlic on the baking sheet.
  • Drizzle it with olive oil and sprinkle it with salt, pepper, and cayenne. Give it a gentle toss.
  • Roast vegetables for 35-40 minutes, making sure to give it a toss halfway through the baking. Let them cool for 5 minutes.
  • Place the roasted vegetables, lemon juice, tahini, and 2 tablespoons of parsley in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse 4-5 times to blend. Taste for seasoning and add if necessary.
  • Transfer to a bowl. Garnish with the rest of the Italian parsley. Serve immediately with pita wedges.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 cups of eggplant spread, which is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the eggplant spread up to 2 days in advance for the best flavor.
  • Storage: Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. You may have to give it a good stir just before serving. Serve chilled or at room temperature.

Nutrition

Serving: 6servings | Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 884mg | Potassium: 687mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 1341IU | Vitamin C: 53mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Ina Gartenโ€™s Roasted Eggplant Spread appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-vegetable-dip-with-tahini/feed/ 16
Curried Brown Rice https://foolproofliving.com/curried-brown-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/curried-brown-rice/#comments Mon, 14 Aug 2023 21:47:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=673 Curry brown rice is a super simple, versatile, and delicious side dish you can serve with any main dish. I love to make this on a Monday evening to enjoy with dinner, and then pack up the rest to have a hearty side for the week. If you are interested in cooking brown rice dishes, also check out our Brown Jasmine Rice Recipe. Ingredients The ingredients for this curried rice...

The post Curried Brown Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Curry brown rice is a super simple, versatile, and delicious side dish you can serve with any main dish. I love to make this on a Monday evening to enjoy with dinner, and then pack up the rest to have a hearty side for the week. If you are interested in cooking brown rice dishes, also check out our Brown Jasmine Rice Recipe.

Curried brown rice garnished with sunflower seeds and raisins on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients

The ingredients for this curried rice with raisins are so simple and full of ingredients you probably already have hanging about in your pantry. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Extra virgin olive oil
  • Onion: You can use both yellow and white onion in this recipe. Be sure to chop it finely.
  • Bell pepper: Use more savory green bell pepper or sweeter yellow or red bell pepper.
  • Curry powder: My favorite store-bought curry powder is Simply Organic Curry Powder (affiliate link), which is what I use for many Indian rice recipes.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Brown Basmati rice: Brown basmati rice is a long grain aromatic rice easy to find in the rice or global section of major grocery stores. My favorite brand is Pride of India (affiliate link.) If brown basmati rice is unavailable, brown jasmine rice is a great substitute.
  • Vegetable stock: Use Homemade Vegetable Stock, low sodium store-bought vegetable broth, or opt for Chicken Stock if not concerned about keeping it vegetarian.
  • Kosher salt
  • Raisins: Raisins provide a nice pop of sweetness, but the trick is to soak them beforehand (more on this below). If you can get your hands on sultanas or dried currants, either one would be a great substitute.
  • Sunflower seeds: Be sure to purchase unsalted sunflower seeds.
  • Citrus juice: This recipe can use fresh lemon juice or lime juice interchangeably.
  • Fresh herbs: Go for fresh parsley, fresh cilantro, or a mix of both to suit your taste.

Optional Add-Ins / Variations

  • Jalapenos: One small seeded and diced jalapeno can be added along with the bell pepper to add a nice spicy bite.
  • Homemade curry powder: If you don’t have curry powder on hand, make your own by mixing together 2 Tablespoons each ground coriander and ground cumin, 1.5 Tbsp ground turmeric, 2 teaspoons ginger, 1 tsp ground cinnamon, and ½ teaspoon each ground black pepper, ground cardamom, ground nutmeg, and cayenne pepper. Use 1 teaspoon for this recipe and store the rest in your spice cabinet.
  • Extra spices: Up the curry flavor with the addition of 1 teaspoon of cumin seeds.
  • Coconut milk: If you want to turn this dish into a coconut curried brown rice, replace 1 ¾ cups of the vegetable stock with one (13.5 ounces) can of coconut milk, and use 1 ¼ cups of vegetable stock to total 3 cups of liquid.
  • Craisins: Swap out the raisins for dried cranberries instead.
  • Nuts: Toasted slivered almonds or cashews are a great substitute for sunflower seeds.
  • Green peas: Add 1/2 cup frozen green peas while the rice is resting for some color and extra protein.

How to Make Curried Brown Rice?

If you have ever wondered how to spice up brown rice, this easy curry rice recipe will get you there. Here’s how to make it in a few easy steps:

A collage of images showing how to make curry rice.
  1. Rinse rice: Place brown basmati rice in a colander and thoroughly rinse under cold water.
  2. Saute aromatics and curry powder: Heat the olive oil over medium-high heat in a medium saucepan for about 1 minute. Add onion, pepper, and curry powder and saute, stirring frequently, for 4-5 minutes or until vegetables have softened. Add garlic and saute for 1 minute.
  3. Toast rice: Pour in the rinsed basmati rice and fry rice gently, stirring constantly, for 7-8 minutes.
  4. Add the stock: Pour in the vegetable stock, cover, and bring to a boil. Once the rice has come to a boil, reduce the heat to low. 
A collage of images showing how to make this recipe.
  1. Cook rice: Simmer for 45-55 minutes or until all the liquid has been absorbed. Turn off the heat and allow it to rest, with the lid on, for 10-15 minutes.
  2. Soak raisins: While the rice is cooking, place the raisins in a heat-proof small bowl and cover with hot boiling water. The raisins will plump up as the rice is cooking.
  3. Add mix-ins: After the rice has rested, fluff it with a fork. Drain the raisins and fold them in, along with the sunflower seeds.
  4. Finish and serve: Drizzle with lemon or lime juice. Taste for seasoning and add more if desired. Finish with fresh parsley or cilantro and serve.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat Leftovers?

Brown rice with curry powder is a wonderful make-ahead side dish and one that I make regularly in my kitchen. To meal prep and store for later, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prep on a Sunday or Monday evening to enjoy dinner throughout the week. Simply place it in meal prep containers with your choice of cooked meat and/or vegetables in individual portions.
  • Store: Place leftover rice in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. We do not recommend freezing.
  • Reheat: Place the rice on a microwave-safe plate, add a splash of water or broth, place a damp paper towel on top, and reheat in the microwave in 30-second increments until warmed through.

Serving Suggestions

Brown rice curry is a delicious and hearty side dish that can be paired and enjoyed with a number of different meals. You could try serving it with:

Brown rice curry in a Dutch oven from the top view.

Expert Tips

  • Rinse rice: Rinse the rice in a fine mesh strainer under cold running water for about 1-2 minutes or until the water runs clear. This removes excess starch and ensures the rice does not become too sticky.
  • No need to soak: While it is customary to soak brown basmati rice for 30 minutes prior to cooking, we found the rice texture to be just as tender and pleasing without soaking beforehand.
  • Fry in oil: Toasting or ‘frying’ the rice in olive oil and curry spices helps to prevent the rice grains from clumping or sticking. It also evenly distributes the flavors onto the rice grains, making each bite as delicious as the next.
  • Use the right ratio of liquid to rice: We found the best ratio of liquid to brown basmati rice to be 2:1. If there appears to be excess liquid in the pot, add 5-minute increments to the cooking time until all the stock is absorbed. Remove from the heat when done.
  • Increase curry spices: You can adjust the curry to your desired taste. Adding more may also change the color of the rice.
  • Do not stir: As soon as you add the vegetable stock to the pot, refrain from stirring, as this can cause the rice grains to break, resulting in a stickier product.
  • Allow the rice to rest: The key to fluffy rice is to allow the rice to rest once it is done cooking. Leave the lid on and steam the rice for 10-15 minutes to allow the moisture to distribute evenly.
  • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste and add more salt if needed.

FAQs

Can you add butter to brown rice?

Yes, butter can replace olive oil in just about all brown rice recipes. Heat and melt butter in the pan just as you would the olive oil.

What can I add to brown rice for taste?

A few aromatics, like onions, peppers, and garlic, along with warming spices, in this case, curry powder, add flavor, spice, and plenty of taste to brown rice.

Should I soak my brown rice before cooking?

Although it is usually recommended to soak brown rice before cooking, we simply rinsed the rice in a fine mesh strainer under cool running water for 1-2 minutes, and the rice came out perfectly.

Other Whole Grain Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Curried Brown Rice recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Freshly cooked Curried brown rice recipe on a plate.
Print

Curried Brown Rice Recipe

This Curried Brown Rice is an easy-to-make side dish that can be served along with any of your favorite meat, poultry, or vegetarian dishes. Packed with sweet, salty, and crunchy flavors, this brown rice recipe is sure to be a crowd-pleaser.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Indian
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 55 minutes
Resting time 10 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 335kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 medium yellow red or green bell pepper, seeded and chopped
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • 2 cloves garlic finely minced
  • 1 ½ cups Brown Basmati Rice thoroughly rinsed
  • 3 cups vegetable stock or water
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ½ cup raisins
  • ½ cup raw sunflower seeds unsalted
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juce, add more to taste
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley or cilantro, chopped

Instructions

  • In a medium size saucepan or Dutch oven, heat the olive oil over medium-high heat.
  • Add onion, pepper, and curry powder and saute, stirring frequently, for 4-5 minutes or until softened.
  • Add the garlic and saute for one more minute.
  • Stir in the basmati rice and cook, stirring constantly, for 5-6 minutes.
  • Pour the vegetable stock in, put the lid on, and bring to a boil. As soon as it is boiled, turn the heat down to low, and let it simmer for 45-55 minutes* or until all the liquid has been absorbed. Remove from the heat and let it rest for 10-15 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, place the raisin in a ramekin and pour some hot boiling water over it. Let it plump up while the rice is cooking.
  • When ready to serve, fluff the rice with a fork. Drain the raisins and stir them in, along with the sunflower seeds.
  • Drizzle it with the lemon juice. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Sprinkle it with fresh parsley and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 to 5 cups of brown rice. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Rinsing the rice is important as it helps remove any additional starch. The best method is to place the rice in a mesh strainer and rinse it under cold water, stirring with your fingers or spoon.
  • If there appears to be excess liquid in the pot, add 5-minute increments until all the stock is absorbed. Remove from the heat when done.
  • Any leftovers can be refrigerated in an airtight container for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 335kcal | Carbohydrates: 53g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 866mg | Potassium: 377mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 881IU | Vitamin C: 28mg | Calcium: 37mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Curried Brown Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/curried-brown-rice/feed/ 9
Grilled Turkey Tenderloin https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-turkey-tenderloin/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-turkey-tenderloin/#respond Thu, 10 Aug 2023 18:29:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69586 This grilled turkey tenderloin recipe isn’t the only irresistible turkey dish in my cookbook. My seven-ingredient Roasted Turkey Legs are a picture-perfect recipe for holidays and weeknight meals alike, while Ground Turkey Meatloaf gives classic beef meatloaf a lean yet rich edge. With these easy meal ideas, you’ll never wonder what to do with turkey again. Ingredients You’ll Need for Grilling Turkey Loins You only need two simple sets of...

The post Grilled Turkey Tenderloin appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This grilled turkey tenderloin recipe isn’t the only irresistible turkey dish in my cookbook. My seven-ingredient Roasted Turkey Legs are a picture-perfect recipe for holidays and weeknight meals alike, while Ground Turkey Meatloaf gives classic beef meatloaf a lean yet rich edge. With these easy meal ideas, you’ll never wonder what to do with turkey again.

Grilled Turkey Tenderloin served with grilled corn and red onions on a platter.

Ingredients You’ll Need for Grilling Turkey Loins

You only need two simple sets of ingredients to grill the perfect turkey breast fillets: the meat and my easy turkey tenderloin marinade.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Marinade ingredients: 

  • Olive oil
  • Soy sauce
  • Lemon juice
  • Dijon mustard
  • Coconut sugar (or brown sugar): Adding coconut sugar to your turkey loin marinade is an easy way to give your meat a luscious caramelized flavor using natural sweetness. However, you may also use brown sugar depending on what you have in your pantry.
  • Onion powder
  • Paprika: Paprika does wonders for giving this recipe its mouthwateringly complex, peppery taste, but you may also use smoked paprika for a more robust smoky flavor.
  • Dried herbs: I recommend adding a light mix of dried thyme and dried sage (or dried oregano if preferred) to your marinade mixture. If you’d like your turkey tips to have extra earthy undertones, you may also use fresh versions of these ingredients. Just be sure to chop them finely before adding them in the marinade.
  • Black pepper
  • Fresh Garlic cloves: While we prefer fresh garlic, you can use garlic powder (2 teaspoons) if you prefer.

Turkey tenderloins: 

  • Turkey loins: I designed this recipe to accommodate two 9-ounce turkey tenderloins, though this cut of meat often comes in many different sizes. If your cuts are larger, you may multiply the recipe to accommodate their size. 

Seasoning Options

  • Sauce: My favorite way to make a sauce for turkey tenderloin is to reserve three tablespoons of the marinade before marinating the meat in it. Then once turkey tenderloins are grilled, all you have to do is to brush them with the reserved marinade for an appetizingly savory and saucy finish.
  • Rub: If you prefer to skip the marination process, dry your turkey with paper towels, brush it with olive oil, and season it with a turkey tenderloin rub before grilling. I recommend using my  Turkey Rub Recipe for an herbaceous and bold mixture that you can make in just five minutes.
  • Salt and pepper: While the saltiness in the recipe comes from soy sauce, you are more than welcome to finish it off with a pinch of kosher salt and black pepper before serving. 

How to Grill Turkey Tenderloin

Learning to cook turkey tenderloin on a gas grill is a breeze when you use my simple cooking method. These step-by-step instructions will have even beginner chefs cooking this rich, juicy turkey recipe in no time.

A collage of images showing how to marinade turkey tenderloins for grilling.
  1. Mix the marinade: In a measuring cup, whisk together the olive oil, soy sauce, lemon juice, Dijon mustard, sugar, onion powder, paprika, thyme, sage, black pepper, and garlic. Reserve three tablespoons of the mixture and set it aside.
  2. Prep the tenderloin for marination: Place tenderloins into a large resealable plastic bag or a bowl big enough to allow them to submerge fully in the marinade.
  3. Marinate turkey tenderloin: Pour the whisked marinade over the turkey breast fillets. Then, either seal bag or cover the bowl with plastic wrap, removing as much air as possible. Transfer the covered container to the refrigerator and marinate the meat for at least one hour or up to eight hours.
  4. Transfer the tenderloins: Remove the marinated turkey tenderloin from the fridge 30 minutes before grilling.
A collage of images showing how to cook a turkey tenderloin on the grill.
  1. Heat grill: Preheat the gas grill to 400 degrees F. (medium-high heat), and scrape the grates to remove any remaining food residue. Then, dip a wad of paper towels into olive oil and use a pair of tongs to coat the grill grates generously. Remove the tenderloins from the marinade and shake off any excess liquid.
  2. Grill the turkey breast tenderloin: Place turkey tenderloins on the grill and cook, covered, for eight minutes. Then, flip the fillets and cook them for another 6-7 minutes, covered, until their internal temperature reaches 155 degrees F. in the thickest part of the meat. If the turkey begins to burn, move it to the cooler side of the grill, cover it, and cook until done.
  3. Let the meat rest: Transfer the grilled turkey breast fillets from the grill to a plate and cover them with a loose tent of aluminum foil. Let them rest for 10 minutes.
  4. Serve: After resting, slice the turkey tenderloin to your preferred thickness, brush or drizzle it with the reserved marinade, and serve.

How to Make Ahead, Store Leftovers, and Reheat?

Whether you want to grill turkey breast fillets for dinner or make it a part of protein-packed meal prep, below is everything you need to know to get the most out of this easy recipe.

  • Make ahead: To prep this dish ahead of time, I recommend making the marinade for the turkey breast tenderloin up to two days in advance. Then, store it in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to use.
  • Store: After cooking, let your grilled turkey tenderloins reach room temperature before transferring them to an airtight container. Then, store them in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheat: After storage, you have two easy options to reheat your grilled turkey loin. If you prefer an oven method, reheat your meat in a low-heat oven (300 degrees F.) for five minutes or until warm. For a stovetop method, you may also reheat your turkey on the stove with a teaspoon of olive oil.

What to Serve With Grilled Turkey Breast Tenderloin?

One of my go-to ways to serve this easy recipe (as pictured here) is with sweet, buttery Grilled Corn and tangy Pickled Red Onions. Below, you’ll find a few of my other favorite side dishes to transform your protein into a delicious meal.

Grilled turkey breast fillets on a plate from the front view.

Expert Tips

Grilling a turkey tenderloin doesn’t have to be reserved for master chefs. These simple tips will ensure every bite of your turkey explodes with rich, succulent flavors, no matter your skill level.

  • Size of the tenderloins and grilling time: When making this recipe, remember that the size of your turkey loins will affect how long the cooking process takes. Larger tenderloins will need more time on the grill, and vice versa. If you’re unsure how long to grill your turkey breast tenderloins, use a meat thermometer to check their internal temperature.
  • Shake off the excess marinade: Before grilling turkey breast tenderloin, shake off any excess marinade to avoid grill flare-ups that may char your meat. However, be sure to discard the marinade that touched the raw meat, as it may contain harmful bacteria.
  • Indirect heat: Since there’s sugar in my tenderloin marinade recipe, it’s essential to keep a close eye on your tenderloins as they are cooking on the grill. If you notice their edges beginning to char, it is best to move them to the cooler part of the grill until they cook through.
  • Make sure to let it rest: The key to getting perfectly juicy turkey tenderloin is to slightly undercook it on the grill—only to 155 degrees F.—before letting it rest under a tent of aluminum foil. The meat will continue to cook while resting (thanks to residual heat), allowing it to reabsorb and redistribute its juices as it reaches the ideal temperature of 165 degrees F.
  • Use a meat thermometer: The best way to check your turkey’s doneness is by inserting an instant-read thermometer (affiliate link) into the thickest part of the meat. When your loins reach 155 degrees F., remove them from the grates and let them rest under tin foil until they reach the desired 165 degrees F. (about 10 minutes).

FAQs

Have more questions about how long to grill turkey tips or different turkey cuts? This hassle-free FAQ section will teach you everything you need about this easy grilled turkey tenderloin recipe.

What’s the difference between turkey breast and turkey tenderloin?

Though both are cuts of lean meat, turkey breast is a larger piece of white meat that comes directly from the bird’s chest. Furthermore, turkey breast may have skin or no skin, bones or no bones, depending on its preparation. By contrast, turkey tenderloin is a smaller cut of meat that comes from just below the breast and is always boneless and skinless.

What is the ideal turkey tenderloin grill temperature?

The temperature of your grill should reach 400 degrees F. before adding your turkey tenderloin to the grates.

How long to grill turkey tenderloin?

When cooked at 400 degrees F., your turkey tenderloin grill time should be about 14-15 minutes for loins that are between 9-12 ounces. However, the timing might change depending on the size of your meat.

At what temperature is turkey fully cooked?

Turkey is safe to eat when it reaches an internal temp. of 165 degrees F. However, we find that turkey meat can go from perfectly cooked to terribly dry if it is overcooked. Therefore, we recommend removing it from the grill when it reaches 155 degrees F. and let it rest under an aluminum foil tent to continue cooking while it reabsorbs its juices. It should reach the ideal 165 degrees F as it sits, thanks to residual heat.

Other Turkey Recipes You Might Also Like

Here are a few other easy turkey recipes you won’t be able to resist:

If you try this Grilled Turkey Tenderloin recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Grilled turkey tenderloins from the top view.
Print

Grilled Turkey Tenderloin Recipe

Grilled Turkey Tenderloins marinated in an easy and quick to make soy sauce, brown sugar, and mustard marinate and then grilled or perfection. This is an easy yet elegant barbecue dinner you can enjoy for a delightful culinary experience.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 16 minutes
Marinading time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 26 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 240kcal

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus additional oil to coat the grill grates
  • ¼ cup soy sauce
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon coconut sugar or brown sugar
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon paprika or smoked paprika for a more smokey flavor
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon dried sage or oregano if you prefer ~ 9 ounces each
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 turkey tenderloins – 9 ounces each

Instructions

  • Make the turkey loin marinade: Whisk together the olive oil, soy sauce, lemon juice, Dijon mustard, brown sugar, onion powder, paprika, thyme, sage, black pepper, and garlic in a measuring cup. Reserve 3 tablespoons of the marinade and set it aside.
  • Place the tenderloins into a sealable plastic bag or a bowl that will allow them to be fully submerged.
  • Pour the marinade over the tenderloins and seal the bag or cover the bowl, trying to remove as much air as possible. Marinate for at least an hour or for up to 8 hours in the refrigerator.
  • Remove the turkey tenderloins from the refrigerator 30 minutes before grilling.
  • To start grilling, preheat the grill to 400 degrees (or medium-high heat.) Scrape the grates of any possible food residue, then generously coat the grates with a wad of paper towel that has been dipped in olive oil.
  • Remove the tenderloins from the marinade and make sure to shake off any excess marinade.
  • Place the turkey tenderloins on the grate and grill, covered, for 8 minutes. Flip and cook for an additional 6-7 minutes with the grill covered or until the internal temperature reaches 155 degrees F. in the thickest part of the tenderloin. (There will be carry-over cooking when removed from the grill so that the internal temperature will reach 165 degrees F.) If the tenderloin appears to be burning, move it to the cooler side of the grill, cover the grill, and continue to cook until done.
  • Remove from the grill, and tent with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 10 minutes.
  • Slice your grilled turkey tenderloin to your desired thickness, brush it or drizzle with the remaining marinade, and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes two 9 ounces of grilled turkey tenderloins, which I think is an ideal size for serving 4 people.
  • Size and time: Please keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the size of your loins and grilling time. If they are on the larger size, you might have to double the marinade and extend the cooking time. 
  • Ideal temperature: USDA recommends cooking turkey to 165 degrees F. In this recipe, we intentionally grill it until it reaches to 155 degrees F. We find that turkey meat can dry if it is overcooked. So, in order to prevent that we slightly undercook it and then immediately cover the meat with aluminum foil. The residual heat cooks it to 165 degrees while reserving and redistributing its juices during the 10 minutes resting time.
  • You should discard any marinade after removing the turkey tenderloins.
  • Make Ahead: You can make the marinade for up to 2 days in advance and marinade the meat the night before you are planning to grill them.
  • Storage: Bring the meat to room temperature and store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low heat oven (300 degrees F.) for five minutes or until warm. You may also reheat your turkey on the stove with a teaspoon of olive oil.

Nutrition

Calories: 240kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 38mg | Sodium: 888mg | Potassium: 71mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 260IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Grilled Turkey Tenderloin appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-turkey-tenderloin/feed/ 0
Grilled Cornish Hens https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-cornish-hens/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-cornish-hens/#comments Thu, 10 Aug 2023 16:35:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69588 It’s no secret that barbecue cornish hens contain irresistibly tender, juicy flavor—a fan favorite for summer parties and easy backyard cooking. If you want to fill your table with the same luscious chicken flavor all year round, you can also whip up effortless Air-Fried Cornish Hens in just eight simple steps. No matter how you cook them, these easy cornish hen recipes will satisfy all your chicken cravings. Ingredients You’ll...

The post Grilled Cornish Hens appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It’s no secret that barbecue cornish hens contain irresistibly tender, juicy flavor—a fan favorite for summer parties and easy backyard cooking. If you want to fill your table with the same luscious chicken flavor all year round, you can also whip up effortless Air-Fried Cornish Hens in just eight simple steps. No matter how you cook them, these easy cornish hen recipes will satisfy all your chicken cravings.

Grilled Cornish hens garnished with lemon and fresh herbs on a serving platter.

Ingredients You’ll Need for BBQ Cornish Hen Recipe?

This grilled cornish game hen recipe only needs a handful of simple ingredients:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Cornish hens: Most grocery stores usually store their cornish game hens in the freezer section, so be sure to let them thaw in the fridge for 24 to 48 hours before grilling. It is imperative that the hens are fully thawed before marinating and grilling.
  • Olive oil
  • Lemon: You’ll need fresh lemon to ensure your marinade is as bright and zesty as possible. You may also garnish your grilled hens with a side of sliced lemon for added presentation (as we did in the photos) if desired.
  • Fresh thyme leaves
  • Spices: To give your cornish hen marinade for grilling its signature bold, well-seasoned flavors, we’ll add paprika, Kosher salt, and black pepper into the seasoning.

Substitutions

  • Fresh herbs: If you don’t have any thyme leaves on hand, you can use other fresh herbs to give your grilled cornish game hens deliciously bright overtones. Instead, you can prepare lemon rosemary cornish hens for a delectable balance of woody and citrusy flavors. Or, you can substitute your thyme for oregano or parsley, as they both have a similarly earthy, garden-fresh taste.
  • Marinade: I love the bright, garden-fresh taste of my grilled cornish hen marinade. However, you can switch up your flavor profile by using my Cuban-style Cornish Hen Marinade (made with lime juice, ground cumin, garlic, and oregano) to give your game hens more robust, piquant overtones. For a tangier, more luscious option, you can also mix up my Yogurt Chicken Marinade in just 10 minutes.

How to Spatchcock a Cornish Hen?

Spatchcocking—also known as butterflying or splitting—refers to the process of removing a chicken’s backbone and flattening the bird’s body. Taking the time to split a cornish hen for grilling helps quicken the roasting process and ensures even cooking across your meat.

  1. Dry the hens: Pat hens dry on all sides with paper towels. When as dry as possible, your birds will be easier to grip while spatchcocking.
A collage of images showing how to spatchcock a Cornish hen before grilling.
  1. Spatchcock the cornish game hens: Place one hen on a cutting board, breast-side down. Locate the backbone, which runs down the center of the bird. Then, use kitchen scissors (affiliate link) to remove the backbone, beginning at the tail and cutting along one side of the backbone. Cut along the other side of the spine and remove the bone, discarding it or saving it to make chicken stock.
Person showing how to spatchcock a cornish game hen.
  1. Flatten the hen: Flip the bird so its breast side faces up. Find the breastbone running down the middle of the hen, then firmly press down on it with the heel of your hand until the bird lies flat. Set the flattened hen aside and repeat the same spatchcocking process with the second game bird.

How to Grill Cornish Hens?

You don’t have to be a master at the grill to make tasty grilled hens. These step-by-step instructions will teach even beginners how to make mouthwatering chicken in no time.

A collage of images showing how to make grilled cornish hen marinade.
  1. Mix the marinade ingredients: In a large bowl, whisk together the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, garlic, thyme, paprika, salt, and pepper. Ensure your bowl is big enough to accommodate both little birds or prepare a large Ziploc bag for the marination process.
  2. Set aside marinade: Pour two tablespoons of the marinade into an airtight jar and transfer it to the refrigerator until ready to use. We will use this marinade to brush the birds after they are grilled.
  3. Marinate the hens: Place the spatchcocked cornish hens in the marinade, covering each of the chickens with the liquid. Cover the bowl with plastic wrap, transfer it to the fridge, and marinate the cornish hens for a minimum of 30 minutes and a maximum of eight hours.
  4. Remove the hens: Remove the marinated cornish hens from the refrigerator when ready to cook. 
  5. Prep the grill:
    1. To cook cornish hens on a gas grill: Preheat the grill to 350 degrees F. 
    2. To cook cornish hens on a charcoal grill: Fill a chimney starter three-quarters with charcoal and light the coals. Let the grill burn until the coals fully ignite and develop a thin layer of ash (approximately 15-20 minutes). Spread the charcoal into an even layer over the grill’s bottom, and position the cooking grill rack on top. Cover the grill and let the insides heat for about five minutes.
Person showing how to cook Cornish hens on a grill in a collage of images.
  1. Clean the grates: Use a grill brush to eliminate any remaining residue from the grill racks. Then, dip a wad of paper towel into the oil and use a pair of tongs to wipe the towels over the grill racks generously.
  2. Place hens on the grill: Shake off excess marinade before placing each cornish game hen on the grill, skin-side up. Cover the grill (if using a charcoal grill, be sure the vents are open) and cook the birds for 10 minutes.
  3. Flip the birds: Flip the chickens to their opposite side, cover the grill, and cook for 7-10 minutes or until the skin turns crispy and golden brown. Keep a close eye on the hens to avoid overcooking, and check for doneness by inserting a meat thermometer into the thickest parts of the thigh. You can remove your cornish hens when they reach 165 degrees F.
  4. Let the hens rest: When finished grilling, transfer the barbeque cornish game hens onto a plate and cover it with a loose tent of aluminum foil. Let the birds rest for 10 minutes.
  5. Brush and serve: Brush the skin of both hens with the reserved marinade, and sprinkle them with chopped fresh thyme. Serve with a side of lemon wedges.

How to Make Ahead and Store It

Learning how to cook cornish hens on the grill is a simple way to ensure effortless meal prep throughout the week. There’s no need to sacrifice a single bite of your chicken with these easy storage tips.

  • Make ahead: If you want a headstart on your BBQ cornish game hens, prepare the marinade and transfer it into a Ziploc bag. Then, add the chicken, seal tightly, and let the meat marinate in the refrigerator for up to eight hours.
  • Store: You can store your grilled game hens in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your cornish hens, place them in the microwave for 30-second increments until heated through. If you’d prefer to reheat your meat in the oven, bake it at 300 degrees F. for 10-15 minutes until warm.

What to Serve With Grilled Cornish Hens?

If you’re looking for a gourmet menu designed to stun your dinner guests, you’ll love my master collection of Cornish Hen Meal Sides. Below are just a few of my tastiest summer side dishes.

  • Rice and grains: If you love the light yet flavorful taste of tender rice, Cooked Wild Rice (or Instant Pot Wild Rice, for a quicker cooking option!) makes for a tender, smoky side when grilling cornish game hen. For a more earthy and seasoned option, Lemon Quinoa is light and zesty, while Bulgur Pilaf is a robust Turkish classic.
  • Salads: Nutritious yet flavorful, salads make an incomparable side for your grilled whole cornish hens. Wild Rice Salad contains an irresistible balance of sweet and savory ingredients, including dried cranberries, mild pecans, and tart grapes. My Mexican Corn Salad and Yogurt Coleslaw have a tangy mix of ultra-fresh veggies and refreshing salad dressing for a creamier option. However, any of my Summer Salads will fill your menu with light, crisp flavors.
  • Vegetable dishes: Just because you want to serve a veggie side doesn’t mean you have to sacrifice taste. My Zucchini Lasagna and Eggplant Parmesan are packed with rich Italian flavors, while Rosemary Mashed Potatoes are a fluffy, buttery, and flavorful dish that takes half an hour to prepare.
  • Pasta: No one can say no to pasta’s hearty, creamy taste when grilling cornish game hens. For bold, sumptuous flavors, you can prepare simple Garlic Butter Noodles or Vodka Pasta in just 30 minutes. Or, whip up my Caprese Pasta Salad to lend your menu a classic, fresh edge.
Grilled Cornish game hens on a bed of wild rice.

Expert Tips

Whether it’s your first time at the grill or you’re an expert doesn’t matter. This master guide will help you grill your cornish game hen so it comes out with tantalizing flavors and rich tenderness.

  • Ensure the hens are fully thawed: To ensure even grilling, you must fully thaw your cornish hens before adding them to the grill. If your hens are frozen, take them out of the freezer at least 48 hours in advance.
  • Don’t skip the spatchcocking: Though it takes extra time, spatchcocking your chicken is necessary to grill your meat evenly and in less time. Grilling cornish hens whole (i.e., non-spatchcocked) takes a much longer cooking time and may result in under or over-cooked portions of meat.
  • Preheat your grill: Preheating your grill—whether you’re using a gas or charcoal grill—will ensure that your meat cooks through and develops a smoky, crispy exterior.
  • Oil the grill grates: You must thoroughly oil your grill racks before grilling a cornish hen. Otherwise, the meat may stick to them, making it difficult to flip and serve your chicken.
  • Let the excess marinade drip: Be sure to let any extra marinade drip off your hens before placing them on the grill. Because you’re cooking with an open flame, marinade may drip into the fire, resulting in flare-ups that char the exterior of your chickens.
  • Start with the skin-side up: The best way to give your game hens succulent insides and crisp skin is by beginning the grilling process with your birds arranged skin side up. Starting this way will cause the chickens’ juices and steam to rise into the skin once flipped, turning it soggy.
  • The size of the bird and its cooking time are related: Not all cornish hens are the same size. Therefore, if your birds are larger or smaller, you may need to adjust their grilling time and test frequently with a thermometer to ensure they don’t come out under or over-cooked.
  • Use a digital thermometer: When you grill cornish hens, the best way to check doneness is to insert an instant-read thermometer into the thickest part of the thigh. Your meat should reach an internal temperature of 165 degrees F. before removing it from the grates. However, remember to keep a close eye on your hens during the grilling process, as it cooks quickly at such high temperatures.
  • Let it rest: After cooking a cornish hen on the grill, let the meat rest on a plate covered with aluminum foil for 10 minutes. This resting time will allow the meat to reabsorb and evenly distribute its juices, resulting in succulent, flavorful meat.
  • Multiply the recipe: Generally, one pound of chicken serves one person, while 1½-2 pounds serves two.  Should you need to serve a larger party, feel free to multiply the recipe, and don’t be afraid to grill your hens in batches. 

FAQs

If you have more questions about this easy recipe, don’t worry! This simple collection of FAQs will answer any question, from proper cook time to how to give your hens as much flavor as possible.

How long to marinate cornish hens?

To marinate cornish hens, let them sit fully covered in the marinade mixture for at least 30 minutes and up to eight hours.

Should cornish hens be at room temperature before cooking?

It’s best if your game hens are as close to room temperature as possible before adding them to your grill. Grilling cold or frozen hens will result in uneven cooking, with an undercooked center and a burnt exterior. To thaw frozen birds, transfer them to the fridge and let them sit for 24 to 48 hours before beginning the cooking process. If your birds are already in the fridge, I recommend letting them rest at room temperature for 10-15 minutes first.

How long to grill cornish hens?

To grill spatchcock cornish hens, you’ll need to cook them at 350 degrees F. for a total of 15-20 minutes (10 minutes skin-side up and an additional 7-10 minutes skin-side down). Your birds should register an internal temperature of 165 degrees F. in the thickest part of the thigh before removing them from the grill. However, keep a close eye on the birds while grilling, as cornish hens tend to cook quickly, and over-cooking will strip your chicken of its juices, resulting in dry, tasteless meat.

What temperature to grill cornish hens?

If using a gas grill, I recommend letting it reach 350 degrees F. before placing your marinated cornish hens on the grill.

How many people does one Cornish game hen feed?

Depending on the size of your bird, one cornish game hen may feed between 1-2 people. A good rule of thumb is that each person will need about one pound of meat per serving. Therefore, if your birds are closer to two pounds, one hen may feed two people. However, you may need one hen per person if yours are smaller.

Other Grilled Chicken Recipes You Might Also Like

If you try this Grilled Cornish Hens recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Grilled Cornish game hens on a bed of wild rice garnished with fresh herbs.
Print

Grilled Cornish Hens Recipe

These Grilled Cornish game hens are showstoppers, great for an easy but impressive summer meal. Spatchcocked for even grilling, they are marinated in a quick homemade marinade that infuses each bite with rich and zesty flavors.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 584kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 1½ pounds cornish hens fully thawed if using frozen
  • ½ cup olive oil
  • 2 teaspoons lemon zest
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice from one lemon
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme leaves chopped or 2 teaspoons dried – plus more as garnish
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 lemon thinly sliced – as garnish

Instructions

  • Using paper towels, dry the birds on all sides as much as you can. Doing so will help you get a strong grip on the chicken when spatchcocking.
  • Next, spatchcock the cornish hens. Place the hen breast-side down on a cutting board. Find the backbone that runs down the center of the hen. Using poultry shears, remove the backbone starting from the tail and cutting along one side of the backbone. Repeat the same process by cutting on the other side of the bone. Remove it and discard (or save it for making chicken stock later.)
  • Turn the bird around so that the breast side is up. Locate the breastbone that runs down the middle of the bird. Firmly press down with the palms of your hands until the hen lies flat. Repeat the same process with the second cornish hen. Set them aside.
  • To make the marinade, whisk together the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, garlic, thyme, paprika, salt, and pepper in a large mixing bowl. I recommend using a bowl large enough that can accommodate both birds. You can use a Ziploc bag to marinade the birds, as well.
  • Transfer 2 tablespoons of the marinade into a small jar and keep it in the fridge until ready to use. We will use this to brush cornish hens after they are finished cooking on the grill.
  • Place the birds into the marinade (ensure that they are fully covered with it), cover with plastic wrap, and marinate for at least 30 minutes or for up to 8 hours in the fridge.
  • When ready to cook, remove the chicken from the fridge while you are preparing the grill. Preheat a gas grill to 350 degrees F.
  • Clean grill grates. Dip a wad of paper towel into olive oil and then generously wipe the grates.
  • Remove the cornish hens from the marinade (be sure to shake the excess marinade), and place them skin-side up on the grill. Cover and grill for 10 minutes.
  • Flip the hens, cover, and grill for 7-10 more minutes or until the skin is crispy and turns golden brown. Keep a close eye on them as they are grilling to avoid burning. Check doneness by inserting an instant read thermometer into the thickest part of the thigh. If it registers 165 degrees F, your cornish hens are cooked.
  • Transfer onto a plate and cover with aluminum foil. Let them rest for 10 minutes.
  • Brush the skin of each hen with the reserved marinade. Sprinkle with chopped fresh thyme and serve on a serving platter with lemon wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes two hens, with each of them being 1 ½ pounds. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Multiply the recipe: Generally speaking, one pound of chicken serves one person, while 1½-2 pounds serves two.  If you are serving a larger crowd, feel free to multiply the recipe.
  • The size of the bird and its cooking time are related: If your birds are larger or smaller, you may need to adjust their grilling time and check doneness using a digital thermometer.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare the marinade and transfer it into a plastic sealable bag. Then, add the chicken, seal tightly, and let the meat marinate in the refrigerator for up to eight hours.
  • Store: You can store your grilled game hens in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your cornish hens, place them in the microwave for 30-second increments until heated through. If you’d prefer to reheat your meat in the oven, bake it at 300 degrees F. for 10-15 minutes or until warm.

Nutrition

Calories: 584kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 49g | Fat: 40g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Cholesterol: 286mg | Sodium: 756mg | Potassium: 744mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 462IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Grilled Cornish Hens appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-cornish-hens/feed/ 2
Corn Stock https://foolproofliving.com/corn-stock/ https://foolproofliving.com/corn-stock/#respond Wed, 02 Aug 2023 13:46:06 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69428 This easy recipe for corn broth is my favorite way to reuse leftover corn cobs during the fresh corn season. After serving up delectable corn dishes— like my creamy and bold Mexican Street Corn or 15-minute Air Fried Corn on the Cob —save your bare ears of corn. Then, in five effortless steps, you’ll have a sumptuous broth ready to make dozens of gourmet meals. Ingredients You’ll Need This delicious...

The post Corn Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This easy recipe for corn broth is my favorite way to reuse leftover corn cobs during the fresh corn season. After serving up delectable corn dishes— like my creamy and bold Mexican Street Corn or 15-minute Air Fried Corn on the Cob —save your bare ears of corn. Then, in five effortless steps, you’ll have a sumptuous broth ready to make dozens of gourmet meals.

Corn cobs, celery, parsley, and whole black peppercorns in a pot.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This delicious corn cob stock recipe uses only six simple ingredients to produce an all-purpose stock perfect for countless kinds of dishes.

Ingredients for making corn broth from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  • Corn cobs: The best way to get deliciously sweet, nutritious, and robust corn stock is to use fresh corn on the cob with no blemishes. Needless to say, corn husks, silks, and kernels should be removed. If you can get your hands on it, I recommend buying Non-GMO corn.
  • Celery stalks
  • Yellow onion: I love using yellow onion in this recipe because of its mild, balanced taste. However, you may also use white onions if you’d like your stock to have a slightly more potent, intense flavor.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Fresh parsley leaves
  • Whole black peppercorns

Optional Add-Ins and Substitutions

Because of this recipe’s incredible versatility, the sky is the limit when making your unique corn broth. Feel free to adjust the below optional add-ins to match the recipe you’re preparing, and keep in mind that practically any veggie will work in your stock—as long as they don’t overpower the delicate sweetness of corn’s natural flavor.

  • Carrot: You only need one small carrot stalk to add sweet, earthy notes to your corn broth. Be careful not to add too many carrots, though, as this ingredient may take over your recipe’s more nuanced, delicate flavors.
  • Fresh herbs: To give your stock recipe a hint of bright, herbaceous flavor, I recommend adding a few sprigs of fresh thyme, rosemary, or a bay leaf.
  • Spices: A few extra spices are all this corn broth recipe needs to lend its sweet overtones a touch of bold, fresh taste. Cumin seeds will add rich, warm tones to your stock, while coriander seeds are perfect for giving your mix a spicy, slightly citrusy edge. You may add a few bay leaves, too, for a somewhat more herby flavor.
  • Salt: I didn’t add salt to my corn broth to ensure I had more control over my prepared recipes’ seasoning balance. However, you may add salt to your mixture according to personal preference.
  • Parmesan rind: This nutty, bold ingredient is a perfect addition to homemade corn stock, especially if you are using your stock to make creamy risotto or corn chowder.

How to Make Corn Stock?

Learning how to make corn broth is an easy way to give your favorite recipes tantalizingly sweet, fresh undertones. These hassle-free instructions will have your stock ready to use in just five steps.

A collage of images showing how to make corn cob stock.
  1. Add the ingredients: Take out a large pot or a large Dutch oven, and add the bare corn cobs, celery, onion, garlic, parsley, and peppercorns.
  2. Add the water: Pour water into the pot, and bring it to a boil over high heat. Once the pot of water comes to a boil, reduce the heat to a simmer. 
  3. Simmer: Let the mixture simmer for at least one hour or a maximum of two hours.
  4. Strain the stock: When cool enough to handle, place a fine-mesh strainer in a large bowl, and strain the corn stock into the bowl. Be sure to press down on the vegetables as they catch in the sieve to extract any trapped liquid.
  5. Cool: Pour the corn cob broth into individual jars and let them cool, for about 30 minutes. Discard solids.
  6. Store: Once cool, cover each jar with an airtight lid before labeling and dating them. Then, transfer the jars to the refrigerator or freezer for later use.

How to Store and Freeze Corn Cob Stock?

Homemade corn broth is one of the most storage-friendly recipes in my recipe book. Store your stock in airtight containers, such as Mason jars or weck jars, to ensure it remains as fresh and flavorful as possible.

  • To store: Let the corn stock cool for an hour or so and then divide it amongst airtight containers or jars and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • To freeze: For even longer storage, you may freeze your corn stock by letting it cool in airtight jars (such as Weck jars (affiliate link), closing the containers, and placing it in the freezer for up to three months.

How to Use Corn Stock in Recipes?

Versatile and oh-so-easy to make, this corn stock recipe comes in handy for dozens of mouthwatering dishes. Below, you’ll find just a few of my go-to stock-based recipes.

  • Soups, stews, and chili bases: Infuse your soup recipes with next-level flavors by transforming them into corn cob soup. I love adding the sweet notes of corn stock to my creamy and piquant Mexican Corn Soup—my favorite alternative to corn chowder. Or, for a heartier meal, use corn broth as a base for protein-packed chili recipes, like my Quinoa Chili or White Chicken Chili.
  • For cooking whole grains: You’ll never have to worry about bland grains again when you prepare them in this corn broth recipe. If you’re a quinoa fanatic like I am, you’ll love using corn stock in place of water to make basic cooked quinoa or to liven it up with a Mexican Quinoa version. You can also make show-stopping sides out of simple ingredients with dishes like Bulgur Wheat, Wild Rice, and Corn Risotto.
  • Cornbread and corn cakes: What’s cornbread without golden-sweet corn flavor in each bite? This corn broth makes an excellent addition to classic side dishes like Cornbread Muffins and Corn Cakes.
  • Polenta and grits: Mild, creamy, and endlessly customizable, polenta and grits taste out of this world when prepared with corn stock. If you want a vegetarian recipe that will stun your dinner guests with a five-star taste, this Creamy Polenta combines roasted mushrooms, toasted walnuts, and creamy blue cheese for an out-of-this-world flavor.
  • Poaching liquid: Corn stock makes an incomparably flavorful poaching liquid when preparing meats such as fish (especially salmon!) or chicken.
  • Sip on it: Drinking pure corn stock is a delicious and easy way to pack nutrients into every sip.
Corn cob soup stock in a jar dated and labeled.

Expert Tips

There’s no reason to stress over this beginner-friendly stock recipe. With this pro guide, you’ll never have to worry about making irresistibly fresh corn stock again.

  • More corn, no problem: The recipe below only requires six empty corn cobs. However, if you have more ears of corn, feel free to add them to your mixture with enough water to cover them by an inch.
  • Let it simmer: After coming to a boil, let your corn cob soup stock simmer for at least an hour (and no longer than two hours!). This time allows the veggies to release their natural flavors into the liquid without boiling away any nutrients or diminishing their taste.
  • Strain: Because of all the vegetable juices released into corn stock, this recipe might produce a cloudy liquid. If you prefer a clear stock, layer a cheesecloth at the bottom of your fine-mesh strainer before draining your broth.
  • Label and date: The key to ensuring that your corn cob stock remains as bright and flavorful as possible is using it while it’s fresh. I recommend labeling and dating your stored broth so that you know when to use it. Remember, broth stored in the fridge should be used within five days, while frozen corn broth should be used within three months.

FAQs

What is corn stock?

Corn stock is a liquid made from slow-cooking bare corn cobs and other veggies in water. The resultant broth has a mildly sweet, complex flavor that you can use to cook many dishes, from grains to cornbread.

Can you use corn cobs in vegetable stock?

Most definitely! Corn cobs add delightfully sweet undertones to vegetable stock and help eliminate waste in the kitchen.

Is corn stock good for you?

Yes! Corn contains many nutritious vitamins and minerals, including a hearty helping of Vitamin C, Vitamin B, and potassium.

Other Corn Recipes You Might Also Like

Few recipes match a stock of corn’s subtle sweetness and complex flavor. If you’re craving more soft, buttery corn recipes, these dishes will fill your table for days.

If you try this Corn Stock recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Corn cobs and vegetables in a pot from the top view.
Print

Corn Stock Recipe

Making corn stock is a great way to use up leftover corn cobs and getting a second life out of them. Make a batch and use it to infuse the sweet flavors of corn to your soup, risotto, chowder, and polenta recipes.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American, American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes
Servings 10 cups
Calories 6kcal

Ingredients

  • 6 corn cobs husked and kernels removed
  • 2 celery stalks cut in quarters
  • 1 medium onion peeled and quartered
  • 2 cloves garlic peeled and crushed
  • 4 sprigs fresh parsley
  • ¼ teaspoon whole black peppercorns about 10 peppercorns
  • 10 cups water

Instructions

  • Place the corn cobs, celery, onion, garlic, parsley and peppercorns in a stock pot or large Dutch oven.
  • Pour the water into the pot. Bring it to a boil over high heat. As soon as it comes to a boil, reduce the heat to a simmer. Let it simmer for at least one hour or for up to 2 hours. Off the heat, let it cool for an hour or so.
  • Meanwhile, place a fine mesh strainer in a large bowl. When cool enough to handle, carefully strain corn stock and gently press down on the vegetables to extract any remaining liquid.
  • Pour into jars and let it cool (uncovered) on the kitchen counter for 30 minutes. Discard solids.
  • When cooled, cover tightly with the lid, label and date before placing the jars in the refrigerator or freezing them for later use.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ~ 9 1/2 cups to 10 cups of corn stock. The nutritional information below is per cup.
  • Adding salt: We intentionally didn’t use salt in this recipe so that you can adjust it according to the recipe you plan to use it in. However, you can season it with salt if you prefer.
  • To store: Let the corn stock cool for an hour or so and then divide it amongst airtight containers or jars and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • To freeze: For even longer storage, you may freeze your corn stock in airtight freezer-safe containers for up to 3 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 6kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 0.02g | Saturated Fat: 0.01g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Sodium: 13mg | Potassium: 24mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 0.5g | Vitamin A: 38IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 0.1mg

The post Corn Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/corn-stock/feed/ 0
Cherry Tomato Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/#respond Tue, 01 Aug 2023 21:11:43 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69426 Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed with an abundance of cherry tomatoes, be sure to also try our Tomato Mozzarella Salad. It is a colorful, crisp, and light dish that uses juicy cherry tomatoes to bring out its garden-fresh taste. Alternatively, you can whip up my Black Eyed Peas Salad for a delicious bean salad that...

The post Cherry Tomato Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed with an abundance of cherry tomatoes, be sure to also try our Tomato Mozzarella Salad. It is a colorful, crisp, and light dish that uses juicy cherry tomatoes to bring out its garden-fresh taste. Alternatively, you can whip up my Black Eyed Peas Salad for a delicious bean salad that allows the cherry tomatoes to shine.

A bowl of cherry tomato salsa with chips on the side.

Ingredients

This cherry tomato salsa recipe only uses the most flavorful, simple ingredients to get its signature freshness. To make this tasty mix, you’ll need the following:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top level with text on each ingredient.
  • Cherry tomatoes: I prefer fresh cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes in this recipe due to their bright, tart flavor. With very minimal difference between the two varieties, both types of tomatoes would work here. Additionally, you can make this simple recipe using any other tomato—heirloom, Roma, colorful cherry tomatoes, or beyond.
  • Onion: I use roughly-chopped white onions in my version, but you can also use red onion for a mild salsa. You can also use green onions (or a combination of both!) if you prefer a less intense flavor profile.
  • Fresh Garlic Cloves
  • Jalapeno: Jalapeno is a spicy, garden-fresh ingredient perfect for adding heat and color to this homemade salsa. If you prefer it to be less spicy, be sure to remove the seeds from your jalapeno prior to chopping.
  • Cilantro: Lemony and bright, chopped cilantro leaves is a classic ingredient in this recipe. However, if you’re not a fan of cilantro, you may either omit the ingredient or substitute it with other fresh herbs, such as parsley, oregano, or mint.
  • Lime juice: Fresh lime juice is best when making your salsa due to its brilliant, citrusy flavor. While it is not traditional, lemon juice can also be used. If you don’t have any limes (or lemons) on hand, you may also use bottled lime juice in this recipe.
  • Seasonings: Only salt and ground black pepper are necessary to give this fresh salsa recipe its rich taste. For a warmer, nuttier profile, you may also add a pinch of ground cumin.
  • Olive oil: You’ll need olive oil only if you are for making roasted cherry tomato salsa. 

How to Make Salsa with Cherry Tomatoes?

Making salsa with cherry tomatoes is a great way to add bright tomato flavor to your favorite recipes. These simple instructions will teach you how to make salsa in two ways: by hand and in the food processor.

Make it by Hand

Whether it’s your first recipe or your hundredth, preparing fresh cherry tomato salsa—also known as salsa fresca—is an easy way to add light, zesty flavor to your table. Plus, it only takes 10 minutes!

Person showing how to make homemade cherry tomato salsa in a collage of photos.
  1. Prepare the tomatoes: Place a colander in another bowl and set the two aside. Then, use a sharp knife to cut the cherry tomatoes into smaller pieces and add them to the colander. Let their juices drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients.
  2. Combine the ingredients: Transfer the cut tomatoes to a medium bowl once drained. Add the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  3. Add the lime: Drizzle the mixture with lime juice, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
  4. Mix and serve: Stir the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. When ready, serve the salsa fresca with chips or on the side of your main dish.

In the Food Processor or Blender

When serving a crowd, the last thing you want to do is spend hours in the kitchen prepping your ingredients. With this simple method, you can make salsa from cherry tomatoes with little prep time.

Person showing how to make grape tomato salsa in a food processor.
  1. Blend the veggies: Add the onion, garlic, and jalapeno to the bowl of your food processor. Pulse the ingredients 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  2. Add the tomatoes: Place the cherry tomatoes in the food processor, along with the other ingredients, and process the mixture for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred texture.
  3. Drain: Place a colander over a bowl, and pour the mixture into the colander. Use the back of a spatula to remove as much excess liquid as possible.
  4. Add seasonings: Transfer the drained veggies into a medium-sized bowl. Add the lime juice, salt, and pepper, and stir until combined.

What if I Want to Roast Tomatoes?

Roasted cherry tomato salsa adds irresistibly smoky, rich undertones to traditional pico de gallo recipes. Below, I’ll show you how to make a delicious roasted salsa that comes together in no time.

  1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F.
  2. Prep the tomatoes: Arrange the cherry tomatoes on a baking sheet, and drizzle them evenly with a tablespoon of olive oil.
  3. Bake the tomatoes: Roast the tomatoes in the preheated oven for 10-12 minutes, flipping them halfway through the cooking process. Cook until the tomatoes slightly burst. For a fire-roasted cherry tomatoes version, turn on the broiler for the last 2-3 minutes of the cooking time.
  4. Cool the tomatoes: Let the roasted tomatoes rest and cool for 15 minutes. Then, transfer them to a cutting board and chop them to your desired size.
  5. Drain the tomatoes: Place the roasted tomatoes in a colander, and set the colander in another bowl. Once the excess liquid drains away, transfer the tomatoes to a medium bowl.
  6. Add the remaining ingredients: Add the chopped onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, salt, and pepper to the chopped tomatoes. Stir until combined.
  7. Taste and serve: Taste the mixture for seasoning, adding more if preferred, then serve.
A bowl of salsa with cherry tomatoes from the top view.

How to Store the Leftovers?

It’s best to serve homemade salsa with cherry tomatoes the day of, as this condiment tends to get watery as it sits. Therefore, I recommend serving it as-is and draining any excess liquid before plating your sauce.

However, if you need to store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. If necessary, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.

How to Serve?

Pico de gallo with cherry tomatoes is one of the most versatile condiments in my recipe book. Zesty and fresh, this salsa makes a delicious pair with everything from tacos to shrimp.

  • Chips: No one can resist a classic—especially one as simple as this! Serve up your salsa alongside your favorite tortilla chips for the ultimate crowd-ready appetizer, snack, or side dish.
  • Grilled or roasted meat and seafood: If you love grilled meats’ succulent, savory taste, these salsa-friendly recipes are for you! Serve your homemade salsa atop a tender fillet of Grilled Sockeye Salmon or marinated Shrimp Kabobs for a five-star meal perfect for the summer months. You can also add a helping of salsa with my Baked Chicken Kabobs if you’re looking for a tender, healthy meal you can make all year round.
  • Tacos: Want to make an authentic, party-ready Mexican menu with your grape tomato salsa? My Beef Brisket Tacos are packed with savory richness, while my Black Bean Quinoa Tacos recipe is a vegan-friendly and oh-so-delicious alternative.
  • Quinoa or burrito bowls: Few weeknight dinners are as hearty or flavor-packed as a traditional burrito bowl. My Mexican Quinoa (and Instant Pot Mexican Quinoa!) load your favorite fresh, Mexican ingredients into every serving. Or, for a meal better than Chipotle, whip up a Homemade Burrito Bowl that will satisfy your cravings and save money.
  • Eggs: My favorite way to serve a hearty, flavor-packed breakfast is with a side of this light homemade salsa recipe. I love adding this iconic salsa recipe to Mexican breakfast staples like Huevos Rancheros and Mexican Breakfast Casserole.
  • Soups and Chilis: Take your soup game to the next level by adding a dollop of this cherry tomato mixture. This salsa pairs beautifully with soups like Mexican Street Corn Soup and Chicken Tomatillo Soup. It also adds a robust tomato finish to hearty chili recipes like my Quinoa Chili and Easy Chicken Chili.
  • Nachos: No nacho recipe is complete without a helping of salsa. This classic salsa recipe makes a great topping for savory fan favorites like Chicken Nachos and Beef Nachos.

Expert Tips

This salsa recipe with cherry tomatoes is easy for any chef to prepare in a snap. These pro tips will ensure that your sauce comes out effortlessly delectable regardless of your experience level.

  • Don’t skip on draining: To keep your salsa from becoming too watery, it’s essential to let your chopped tomatoes rest and drain before adding them to your salsa mixture. Also, be sure to add the seasoning and lime (or lemon) juice only after you drain the mixture, which will result in a perfectly seasoned salsa.
  • Let it rest: While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, I highly recommend making your salsa a few hours in advance and letting it sit in the fridge. The resting time allows the flavors to marinate and develop into a restaurant-quality salsa recipe.
  • Adjust the texture: Salsas come in dozens of different textures, from chunky to pureed. Because the fineness of your chopping doesn’t affect the overall taste of your condiment, feel free to chop your ingredients according to your preference. I recommend a small chop or a food processor for a saucier texture. For a chunkier salsa, cut your ingredients into larger pieces.
  • Taste for seasoning: Any salsa—whether it’s a cherry tomato pico de gallo or an heirloom tomato salsa—needs salt to bring out the ingredients’ natural flavors. Don’t skimp on salt and pepper when seasoning your salsa to ensure your recipe is as flavorful, fresh, and complex as possible.

FAQs

Can you make salsa out of cherry tomatoes?

Yes! Cherry tomatoes have a bright, tart flavor that exquisitely balances the flavors of other salsa ingredients. Plus, their size makes them easy to chop to your desired thickness, resulting in a perfectly tailored mixture.

Do you need to peel cherry tomatoes for salsa?

When you use cherry tomatoes for salsa, there’s no need to peel your tomatoes before adding them to your blend. Cherry tomatoes have a thin skin, which won’t affect the overall texture of your condiment once mixed.

Can I freeze cherry tomato salsa?

Though you technically can freeze this salsa recipe, I don’t recommend it. Freezer salsa with cherry tomatoes may become mushy and watery, and it tends to lose its flavor the longer it remains in storage. However, if you freeze your salsa, place it in an airtight container before storage and thaw it in the refrigerator overnight or until it reaches your desired consistency. I also suggest draining out any excess liquid and tasting for seasoning before serving.

Can I use this recipe for cherry tomato salsa for canning

Unfortunately, this salsa recipe won’t work for canning. Canning requires that you boil your ingredients (and jars) before transferring them to mason jars, and this recipe only uses fresh and/or roasted ingredients.

Other Fresh Tomato Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Cherry Tomato Salsa recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of salsa from cherry tomatoes with chips on the side.
Print

Cherry Tomato Salsa Recipe

This Homemade Cherry Tomato Salsa is the ultimate Mexican party food! This easy recipe is wonderful with chips on the side or to serve as a topping with nachos, tacos, soups, stews & more.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 36kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 cups cherry tomatoes
  • ½ cup onion roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic roughly chopped
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped
  • ½ cup cilantro chopped
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground pepper

Instructions

Make it by Hand:

  • Place a colander in a bowl and set it aside. Cut up the tomatoes into smaller pieces and place them in the colander. Let the juices drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Drain tomatoes and then transfer them to a medium-sized bowl. Add in the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  • Drizzle it with lime juice and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
  • Stir to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve it with chips on the side.

Food processor version:

  • Place onion, garlic, and jalapeno in a food processor. Pulse 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  • Add the cherry tomatoes and process for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred chunkiness.
  • Pour the mixture into a colander set over a bowl. Using the back of a spatula, remove as much liquid as you can.
  • Transfer to a medium bowl; add lime juice and seasoning. Stir to combine.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields around 2 cups of salsa that should be good for 4 servings as an appetizer. If you need to serve a crowd you can multiply it as many times as you need. The nutritional values below is per serving.
  • Storage of leftovers: To store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. When ready to serve, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.
  • Texture difference: We prefer the method made by hand, but if you are serving this salsa to a large crowd you can use the food processor method. However, please be aware that, while it tastes similar, the version made in the food processor has a more liquidy texture.
  • Roasted Cherry Tomato Salsa: If you prefer to make your salsa with roasted cherry tomatoes, place them on a baking sheet and drizzle them with a tablespoon of olive oil. Roast for 10-12 minutes in a 450-degree F. preheated oven, making sure to flip them halfway through. Let them drain in a colander and follow the rest of the recipe as written.

Nutrition

Calories: 36kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.03g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 596mg | Potassium: 317mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 728IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Cherry Tomato Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/feed/ 0
Salmon Coconut Soup https://foolproofliving.com/salmon-coconut-chowder/ https://foolproofliving.com/salmon-coconut-chowder/#comments Thu, 27 Jul 2023 23:52:33 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11826 I am always looking for new and interesting ways to incorporate more seafood into my life, and this coconut salmon soup keeps me on my healthy eating journey. If you are a serious salmon lover, make sure to check out my Oven Baked Sockeye Salmon and Grilled Sockeye Salmon, too. Ingredients The ingredients for this Thai salmon soup are broken down into two parts for ease – Thai coconut broth...

The post Salmon Coconut Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I am always looking for new and interesting ways to incorporate more seafood into my life, and this coconut salmon soup keeps me on my healthy eating journey. If you are a serious salmon lover, make sure to check out my Oven Baked Sockeye Salmon and Grilled Sockeye Salmon, too.

Salmon coconut soup garnished with cilantro in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

The ingredients for this Thai salmon soup are broken down into two parts for ease – Thai coconut broth and salmon soup. Here’s a look at what we need for each one:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Thai Coconut Broth

  • Vegetable Broth: One quart of either low sodium store bought or homemade vegetable stock (or Vegetable Scrap Stock) will work. Chicken Stock is another option, but I find the vegetable stock to work better with the salmon.
  • Coconut Milk: Use one full-fat can of unsweetened coconut milk, shaken or blended until smooth.
  • Aromatics: These include fresh ginger, shallots and garlic, all minced to the finest texture.
  • Lime Zest: Lime zest offers that extra bit of zing and adds a sour note to the overall flavor.
  • Lemon grass: If using fresh lemongrass stalks, remove the tough outer layers, smash it gently to release its oils and slice the bottom white portion (the dark green portion can be discarded). If you can’t find fresh lemongrass, 1 Tablespoon storebought Lemongrass paste is a great substitute.

Salmon Soup

  • Wild Salmon Fillet: Wild Alaskan salmon or wild sockeye salmon are both delicious here. Feel free to leave the skin on or remove the skin depending on your preference. Also make sure to check parts of the salmon for pin bones before slicing them into 1-inch pieces. If using frozen salmon, thaw overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Coconut Oil: Coconut oil rounds out the coconut flavor, but olive oil, sesame oil, or avocado oil can also be used.
  • Yellow Onion
  • Pepper: Red peppers, yellow or orange bell pepper all work here.
  • Fresh Ginger
  • Garlic Cloves
  • Coconut Milk: Use another can of coconut milk, blended or shaken until smooth.
  • Broccoli: For best results, make sure to cut the broccoli head into small florets, or bite size pieces.
  • Lime: A final squeeze of fresh lime juice at the end brightens the richness of the coconut broth and gives it a tangy finish.
  • Maple Syrup: Maple syrup balances the heat from the ginger. Brown sugar or coconut sugar will also work.
  • Garnish: Garnish each bowl of soup with freshly sliced green onion, fresh cilantro and jalapeno slices or serrano chiles just before serving.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Umami: For an extra dose of umami, you can add 1 teaspoon of fish sauce, soy sauce, or coconut aminos near the end of cooking.
  • Mushrooms: Toss in a handful of thinly sliced shiitake, button, or oyster mushrooms along with the broccoli for even more fiber, vegetables, and flavor.
  • Curry Paste: To make this more of a coconut curry salmon soup, add 1 Tablespoon red or yellow curry paste while sauteing the garlic and ginger.
  • Chilli Paste: Another common ingredient in Thai cuisine, feel free to add 1 tsp – 1 tbsp of your favorite chili paste depending on your desired spice level. If you can get your hands on Thai chiles, a little goes a long way.
  • Noodles: You can cook some vermicelli noodles on the side, divide it in bowls and pour the soup over for more of a filling meal.

How to Make It?

Whether you call it salmon belly soup or salmon chowder, this delicious and nutritious meal comes together in under 1 hour. Here’s how I like to do it from start to finish:

A collage of images showing how to make salmon coconut soup recipe.
  1. Make the Thai coconut broth: In a medium-sized saucepan, add the vegetable stock, coconut milk, ginger, shallot, garlic, lime zest, lemongrass, and salt. Bring to a boil over high heat, then reduce the heat to medium-low and allow to simmer for 30 minutes.
  2. Discard solids: Strain the broth through a fine mesh strainer, either into a medium bowl or a large container. Set aside until ready to use.
  3. Prep salmon: While the stock is simmering, pat the salmon dry with a paper towel. Sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
  4. Saute aromatics: In a large stock pot or large Dutch oven set over medium heat, add the oil and heat for 1 minute. Then, add the onion and peppers and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Add grated ginger and garlic and cook for approximately 1 minute.
A collage of images showing how to poach salmon in coconut broth.
  1. Add liquids: Once the aromatics are softened and fragrant, add the reserved broth and extra can of coconut milk. Bring the mixture to a boil, then reduce to medium-low heat and let simmer for 15 minutes.
  2. Add broccoli: Stir in the broccoli florets during the last 5 minutes of simmering time.
  3. Add salmon: At the last minute, add the pieces of salmon and let it cook for 1 minute, then turn off the heat. The salmon will continue to cook as the soup settles.
  4. Finish: Add the lime juice and maple syrup. Taste for seasoning and adjust to your liking.
  5. Garnish: Ladle into soup bowls and top with scallions, a handful of cilantro leaves, and sliced jalapenos. Serve with lime wedges on the side.

How to Make Ahead, Store & Reheat Leftovers?

Since poached salmon soup is technically made in two parts, you can prepare the coconut lemongrass broth ahead of time and keep it in the fridge until the day you are ready to serve. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the stock 1-2 days in advance and store in an airtight container in the fridge. With the stock already prepared, the recipe should only take about 20 – 30 minutes from start to finish.
  • Store: Leftover salmon soup will keep in the fridge for up to 3 days in an airtight container.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a saucepan on the stove over medium-low heat until steamy and warmed through.
  • Freezing: We do not recommend freezing this soup as the poached salmon will not thaw well. However, you can certainly make the coconut broth, bring it to room temperature, and freeze it by itself to make this soup at a later time.

What to Serve it With?

This fish coconut soup is a gorgeous meal that can be served any night of the week. While it is a complete meal all on its own, you can serve it with:

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this Salmon Coconut Soup is pretty straightforward there are a few things that we recommend paying attention to for the best results. Here are a few things to pay attention to:

  • Cut the broccoli into small pieces. Smaller pieces make for a faster cooking time, which means your broccoli will be tender, not crunchy.
  • Do not overcook the salmon. For best results, add the salmon at the very last minute of simmering and immediately turn off the heat. The salmon will continue to cook in the residual heat from the soup. 
  • Taste test as you go. The key to Thai cuisine is its use of salty, sweet, spicy, sour, and umami flavors. Taste and adjust the seasonings as you go for a delicious and well-balanced meal.
Salmon coconut soup in bowls with bread on the side.

FAQs

What is creamy salmon soup made of?

This coconut salmon soup recipe starts with a coconut lemongrass broth as the base. The addition of onions, peppers, garlic, ginger, more coconut milk, salmon, and broccoli make it a complete dish.

How to cook salmon in coconut milk?

Salmon is a delicate, flaky fish that only needs 1 minute in simmering broth, especially if you are cutting it into small cubes. Immediately remove it from the heat as the residual heat from the coconut milk broth will continue to cook the salmon.

What does coconut soup taste like?

Salmon coconut soup is a Thai-inspired meal that strikes the right balance of salty, sweet, spicy, sour and umami. As always, taste test and adjust the seasonings to your liking.

Other Seafood Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Salmon Coconut Soup recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Salmon and coconut soup in a bowl garnished with cilantro.
Print

Salmon Coconut Soup Recipe

This Salmon Coconut Soup recipe is a comforting soup made with a Thai style coconut broth that is flavored with ginger, lime and lemongrass. Easy to make, this coconut fish soup is bright, aromatic and packed with a combination of sweet, spicy, sour and salty flavors.
Course Soup
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 servings
Calories 402kcal

Ingredients

For the Thai Coconut Broth:

  • 4 cups vegetable stock
  • 1 can full-fat coconut milk – 13.5 ounces
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger minced
  • 1 shallot minced
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon lime zest 1 lime
  • 1 stalk lemongrass thinly sliced or storebought Lemongrass paste
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

For the Soup:

  • 1 ½ pounds salmon filets any residual bones removed, cut into 1-inch cubes
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon coconut oil or olive oil if you prefer
  • 1 medium yellow onion diced
  • 1 red or yellow bell pepper diced
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger grated
  • 3 cloves garlic finely minced
  • 1 can full fat coconut milk – 13.5 ounces
  • 1 cup broccoli florets rinsed and cut into small pieces
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon maple syrup
  • 2 limes quartered

Garnishes:

  • 2 scallions thinly sliced
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • 1 jalapeno thinly sliced

Instructions

  • To make the Thai Coconut Broth: Place the vegetable stock, coconut milk, ginger, shallot, garlic, lime zest, lemongrass, and salt in a medium-sized saucepan. Bring it to a boil on high heat, then turn it down to medium-low and let it simmer for 30 minutes.
  • Strain the broth into a bowl and discard the solids. Set the broth aside.
  • Meanwhile, start working on the chowder ingredients. Pat the salmon dry using paper towels. Season with salt and pepper.
  • Heat the oil in a stock pot over medium heat. Add in the onion and peppers and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Add in the grated ginger and garlic and cook for approximately 1 minute.
  • Add in the broth that was set aside along with the second can of coconut milk. Bring the mixture to a boil and let it simmer for 15 minutes.
  • Add in the broccoli florets in the last 5 minutes of the simmering time.
  • At the last minute, add in the cubed salmon and let it cook for a minute, and turn the heat off. It should continue to cook with the help of the residual heat.
  • Stir in the lime juice and maple syrup. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Garnish with chopped scallions, sliced jalapenos, and torn fresh cilantro leaves. Serve with lime wedges on the side.

Notes

  • This recipe is adapted (with minor changes) from Clean Soups: Simple, Nourishing Recipes for Health and Vitality cookbook.
  • Store: Leftover soup will keep in the fridge for up to 3 days in an airtight container.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a saucepan on the stove over medium-low heat until steamy and warmed through.
  • Freezing: We do not recommend freezing this soup as the poached salmon will not thaw well. However, you can certainly make the coconut broth, bring it to room temperature, and freeze it by itself to make this soup at a later time.
  • Make Ahead: You can make the broth a day or 2 in advance and refrigerate it in an airtight container.
  • This recipe was tested with the salmon skin on and removed – there was no difference in taste or the salmon staying intact.
  • Make sure that the broccoli florets are cut small so that they can cook quickly.
  • Add the salmon at the very last minute. If you let it simmer too long, it will be overcooked and lose most of its flavor.
  • Be sure to taste the soup and adjust the seasoning accordingly. You may even have to add a bit more maple syrup and lime juice if you are a fan of those spicy, sweet, and sour flavors.

Nutrition

Calories: 402kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 36g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 68mg | Sodium: 1249mg | Potassium: 1149mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 837IU | Vitamin C: 44mg | Calcium: 91mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Salmon Coconut Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/salmon-coconut-chowder/feed/ 10
Virgin Pina Colada https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/ https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/#comments Mon, 24 Jul 2023 00:57:04 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6290 If you have ever wondered how to make a virgin pina colada or just need a non-alcoholic drink to sip on to feel like you are on a tropical island, you have come to the right place. This alcohol-free pina colada recipe has the same creamy, beachy vibes as this Pina Colada Smoothie but with a mocktail twist. And if you are looking for more refreshing non-alcoholic drinks, make sure...

The post Virgin Pina Colada appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you have ever wondered how to make a virgin pina colada or just need a non-alcoholic drink to sip on to feel like you are on a tropical island, you have come to the right place. This alcohol-free pina colada recipe has the same creamy, beachy vibes as this Pina Colada Smoothie but with a mocktail twist.

And if you are looking for more refreshing non-alcoholic drinks, make sure to check out our Strawberry Basil Limeade, Rosemary Mint Lemonade, Kale Pineapple Smoothie, and Ginger Iced Tea.

Person holding a virgin pina colada in her hand with a cherry on top.

Virgin Pina Colada Ingredients

A frozen virgin pina colada recipe only requires a handful of key ingredients. It’s a short list of  tropical flavors, including the following ingredients:

Ingredients for virgin colada from the top view.
  • Frozen Pineapple: Look for frozen pineapple chunks in the frozen fruit section of your local grocery store. If you cannot find frozen pineapple, flash freeze fresh pineapple. To do so, simply remove the outer skin and core, then cut the pineapple into bite-size pieces. Place on a parchment-lined baking sheet and freeze for 30 minutes – 1 hour. You can also add more ice if frozen pineapple is unavailable.
  • Coconut Milk: We used full-fat coconut milk to create a healthier (and mildly sweet) version. For a sweeter take, make a virgin pina colada with 3-ingredients by using 1 cup sweetened Coco Lopez Cream of Coconut (affiliate link) and omitting the coconut sugar – add more pineapple juice (or try coconut water) if you find the mixture to be a little too thick.
  • Pineapple Juice: We think that unsweetened pineapple juice, usually found in a can, gives this Piña Colada mocktail an even more tropical flavor. Add more juice after blending based on your desired consistency. Swap it out for mango juice or orange juice for a different flavor.
  • Ice Cubes: Ice adds a creamy, slushy, icy texture. You can also use about ½ cup crushed ice, which will blend more evenly.
  • Coconut Sugar: Coconut sugar keeps it naturally sweetened with no refined sugar. Add more after blending if you would like it on the sweeter side.
  • Garnish: Stick to the classic fresh pineapple wedge or pineapple slices and maraschino cherry. Or, give it a real warm beach vibe with fresh mint and a mini cocktail umbrella. Maple Whipped Cream or a dollop of Honey Ice Cream takes it that much more over the top.

Optional Add Ins / Variations

  • Rum: Make a pina colada cocktail by adding a shot of rum per drink (about 4-6 ounces total for this recipe). This could be white rum, coconut, or dark rum.
  • Extracts: If you would still like to enjoy a pina colada mocktail, but with rum flavor, add 1 – 2 tsp rum extract for extra flavor. A dash of vanilla extract never hurts, either.
  • Lime Juice: Add a squeeze of fresh lime juice to balance the sweetness of the pineapple and coconut flavor.

How to Make Pina Colada without Alcohol?

Non-alcoholic pina coladas are ready in less than 5 minutes after a quick whiz in the blender. It is so refreshing and creamy, you will never miss the alcohol. Here’s how I like to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make virgin pina colada.
  1. Add ingredients to blender: In this order, place the frozen pineapple chunks, unsweetened coconut milk, pineapple juice, coconut sugar, and ice into a blender.
  2. Blend: Start off on low power, then increase to high power and blend until smooth, about 30 seconds. Taste for sweetness and add more if desired.
  3. Serve: Pour into a chilled cocktail glass. Garnish with pineapple wedges and maraschino cherries.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

While this homemade non-alcoholic pina colada is best served the moment it is made, there are a few steps you can take to get ahead. You can:

  • Make Ahead: Prep and measure out all the ingredients in advance. Keep stored in the freezer and fridge, respectively.
  • Storage: Leftover virgin pina colada mix can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for 1-2 days. The mixture will melt and split, so reblend with some ice before enjoying.
  • Popsicles: Give it a creative spin and pour any leftovers into popsicle molds. Freeze until set, and enjoy!

Expert Tips

  • Coconut milk vs coconut cream: This recipe is best made with canned coconut milk rather than coconut cream (which has a higher fat content). To make sure the can of coconut milk is well blended, vigorously shake before opening or blend in a high-speed blender.
  • Use a hurricane glass: Stick to the curved hurricane glasses for classic pina coladas right at home.
  • Chill cocktail glasses: Chilled cocktail glasses keep the drink super cold without diluting it with extra ice. Place the glasses in the fridge or freezer for at least 1 hour, or until ready to serve.
  • Prep the garnishes: Make sure to have pineapple wedges and maraschino cherries at the ready so that your virgin colada cocktail doesn’t have time to melt. And don’t forget the paper umbrella for authentic Caribbean vibes.
Two glasses of virgin colada garnished with pineapple wedges.

FAQs

What’s in a virgin pina colada?

This healthy and mildly sweet pina colada without alcohol is made with frozen pineapple, coconut milk, pineapple juice, ice, and coconut sugar.

Who invented the pina colada?

Deemed the official drink of Puerto Rico, the first accounts of a pina colada came from bartender Ramon “Monchito” Marrero at the Caribe Hilton in 1954 in San Juan, Puerto Rico.

Why is it called virgin pina colada?

Pina Colada is Spanish for ‘strained pineapple’. Virgin pina colada denotes an alcohol-free version, which means the whole family can enjoy this fun drink on a hot summer’s day.

Are virgin pina coladas healthy?

This virgin colada is quite healthy as it contains no refined sugar, no alcohol, and clean, fresh ingredients you can feel good about. As a bonus, it is also vegan and dairy-free.

Other Non-Alcoholic Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you enjoyed this non-alcoholic pina colada recipe, I am pretty sure you will also like a few of our other mocktails. Below are our favorite summer sips that are worth checking out:

If you try this Pina Colada recipe without alcohol, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Homemade virgin piña colada recipe in glasses.
Print

Virgin Pina Colada Recipe

Here’s a simple Virgin Pina Colada recipe that’s made with healthier ingredients without any refined sugars. With only four simple ingredients, you can make this non- alcoholic and refreshing drink in minutes. It is surely the best mocktail to enjoy on a hot summer day.
Course Non Alcoholic Drink
Cuisine Caribbean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 serving
Calories 144kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups frozen pineapple chunks (8 ounces)
  • 1 can unsweetened coconut milk (13.5 ounces) – Shake well
  • ½ cup unsweetened pineapple juice
  • 1 cup ice
  • 2 tablespoons coconut sugar more if necessary

Garnishes

  • 4 wedges pineapple
  • 4 Maraschino cherries Optional

Instructions

  • Place the frozen pineapple chunks, unsweetened coconut milk, pineapple juice, coconut sugar, and ice into a blender.
  • Blend until smooth. Taste for sweetness and add more if necessary.
  • If preferred, pour into a glass and garnish with pineapple wedges and Maraschino cherries (if preferred.)

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields ~ 32 ounces of virgin colada. Each serving is about 8 ounces.
  • Chill your glasses: Place your glasses in the freezer at least 30 minutes before making this drink to ensure that they are super cold.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for 1-2 days. The mixture will melt and split, so reblend with some ice before enjoying.
  • Popsicles: Give it a creative spin and pour any leftovers into popsicle molds. Freeze until set, and enjoy!
  • Rum: Turn this into a pina colada cocktail by adding a shot of rum per drink (about 4-6 ounces total for this recipe). This could be white rum, coconut, or dark rum.

Nutrition

Calories: 144kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 331mg | Potassium: 204mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 21IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Virgin Pina Colada appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/feed/ 6
Grilled Sockeye Salmon https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-sockeye-salmon/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-sockeye-salmon/#respond Thu, 06 Jul 2023 17:05:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68750 It’s a fact: Once you make wild salmon on the grill, you’ll crave fresh seafood dinners all year round. The good news is that countless other recipes for wild-caught salmon will effortlessly fill your table with omega-3s and rich, tender flavors. Add a brilliantly sophisticated freshness to your spread with an iconic Salmon Nicoise Salad, or delight your tastebuds with the creamy Thai taste of Salmon Coconut Soup. You can’t...

The post Grilled Sockeye Salmon appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It’s a fact: Once you make wild salmon on the grill, you’ll crave fresh seafood dinners all year round. The good news is that countless other recipes for wild-caught salmon will effortlessly fill your table with omega-3s and rich, tender flavors. Add a brilliantly sophisticated freshness to your spread with an iconic Salmon Nicoise Salad, or delight your tastebuds with the creamy Thai taste of Salmon Coconut Soup. You can’t go wrong with these easy fish recipes!

Grilled red salmon with fresh vegetables and herbs on the side.

Ingredients You’ll Need

To prepare this smoky recipe for fresh sockeye salmon on the grill, you only need two sets of simple ingredients—fish and seasoning.

For the fish:

  • Wild Alaskan sockeye salmon: I prefer a fresh, whole salmon fillet for this recipe, though you may also use pre-cut fillets if you prefer easier salmon portions. Red salmon tends to be in season from May through July, but if you want to make this dish out-of-season or don’t have access to fresh alternatives, you can also use frozen sockeye salmon fillets. Just be sure to thaw them fully before roasting them.
Ingredients for grilling sockeye salmon on a marble.

For seasoning:

I use a very basic seasoning mixture to prepare my sockeye salmon for grilling.  Because, if you have ever cooked it, you know that Pacific salmon is already delicious by itself and doesn’t need much. 

So, in terms of seasoning, this easy recipe uses a handful of ingredients you likely already have in your pantry, but it will give your grilled salmon an irresistibly light, zesty, and robust flavor profile.

  • Olive oil
  • Lemon juice
  • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
  • Garlic or garlic powder: Though optional, this pantry-ready addition adds bold, smoky undertones to this BBQ sockeye salmon recipe. Simply add it on top of your fillets or mix it into your seasoning mixture before brushing your fish. However, fresh minced garlic easily burns over high heat, so keep in mind that this addition may result in slightly charred notes in your seasoning for sockeye salmon.
  • Fresh Herbs: I like to sprinkle my grilled salmon with fresh dill, but any fresh herbs you like and have on hand would work for this recipe.
  • Lemon Slices: Serve it with fresh lemon slices or grill them for the dreamy char and grill marks.

How to Grill Sockeye Salmon on a Gas Grill?

This grilled sockeye salmon recipe is a godsend for quick, delicious meals. With this effortless guide, you’ll enjoy tender, flavorful grilled fillets in under ten minutes.

  1. Prepare the grill: Preheat the grill to 350 degrees F.
Person preparing sockeye salmon for grilling in a collage of photos.
  1. Dry the fillet: Use a paper towel to pat dry both sides of the salmon.
  2. Mix the seasoning: In a small mixing bowl, whisk the olive oil, salt, and pepper until fully combined.
  3. Brush the salmon: Brush both sides of the salmon fillet with the olive oil mixture.
  4. Scrape and clean grill: Scrape the grill grates with a wire grill brush until you remove all leftover food residue. Fill a bowl with oil, and dip a wad of paper towel inside. Use this oiled towel to coat the grates generously.
  5. Grill the salmon: Place the sockeye salmon on the grill, skin side down. Cook the fish uncovered for three minutes or until it releases easily from the grates when lifted with a spatula.
Wild caught Alaskan Salmon on the grill showing grill marks.
  1. Flip the fillet: Use two spatulas to flip the salmon carefully. Grill the sockeye salmon for an additional three minutes.
  2. Let the fish rest: Transfer the grilled wild salmon onto a plate and loosely cover it with a tent of aluminum foil for a few minutes.
  3. Serve: If desired, drizzle the top of the salmon with lemon juice and garnish it with fresh dill. Enjoy while still warm.

How to Store and Reheat?

This Pacific salmon recipe makes an excellent option for easy meal prep because you can enjoy it both warm, room temperature, or cold. With these simple storage tips, you won’t have to sacrifice a single bite of this sumptuous dish.

  • Storage: To store your grilled salmon fillet, let it reach room temperature. Then, transfer it to an airtight container and place it in the refrigerator for up to two days.
  • Reheat: The secret to keeping your leftover grilled salmon from drying out is to reheat it in a low-heat oven—preferably 300 degrees F.—for 2-3 minutes or until warmed through.

What to Serve With Grilled Alaskan Salmon?

Grilling sockeye salmon is a great way to get diverse, smoky meals all summer long. This collection of tasty sides—from tender potatoes to tangy salsas—pairs excellently with this heart-healthy meal.

  • Grilled vegetables: Nearly any veggie would work as a side when you grill wild salmon. I particularly love to serve this fish recipe alongside grilled asparagus and grilled zucchini, and Mexican Street Corn is a creamy, flavorful side no one can resist. You can also grill the lemons of this recipe for added presentation and to give your fish an enticing smokiness, though this step is optional.
  • Salsa and sauces: Adding sauce is an easy way to add delectable complexity to this simply grilled salmon recipe. Grilled salmon with Pineapple Salsa is a classic dish for summertime barbecue. But for a more robust, rich flavor, you can also serve your fillets with my five-minute Garlic Butter Sauce.
  • Salads: You can serve this red sockeye salmon recipe with any of my tasty summer salads. However, my favorites include a tangy, crisp Yogurt Cucumber Salad and my crowd-friendly, healthy Mayo-Free Coleslaw.
  • Potatoes: For a classic potato salad dressed to impress, my Red Potato Salad will compliment your fish with a perfect mix of savory, creamy, and fresh flavors. Or, if you want to put a salty, gourmet spin on your dinner menu, Caper Potato Salad will lend a complex mix of briny pickles, robust mustard, and tender potatoes to your table.
Flaked grilled Sockeye salmon garnished with lemon.

Expert Tips

If you want to know the best way to grill sockeye salmon, these pro-level tips are exactly what you need. You’ll get rich, tender fillets every time with this easy guide.

  • Good-quality fish: I learned during my visit with the folks over at Copper River Salmon that the best way to turn a simple sockeye salmon recipe into a gourmet meal is by selecting high-quality fish. If you’re using fresh fish, it’s best to cook it within the first 24-48 hours for the brightest, most mouthwatering flavors. However, if you prefer frozen fillets, fully thaw them before roasting—preferably by storing them in the fridge overnight.
  • Preheat the grill: Ensure your grill preheats to 350 degrees F. before adding your salmon. Because salmon cooks quickly, transferring the fish too early will result in overly cooked, dry fillets.
  • Clean and grease the grill grates well: For best results, it’s essential that you thoroughly clean and oil your grill grates before adding your salmon. If you don’t generously grease your grates, your fish will stick to the grill, making it difficult to flip and remove the fillets.
  • Keep the skin on: The skin on your sockeye salmon fillet provides an excellent fatty barrier that keeps the flesh from overcooking when exposed to high temperatures. Therefore, I highly recommend keeping the skin on while grilling. Plus, it peels off easily after the cooking process.
  • Do not move: The key to perfectly cooked salmon is to leave the fillet on the grill grates, skin-side-down, without touching it during the grilling process. Once the salmon cooks fully, it will release itself from the grates, and your spatula should fit easily under it without tearing its flesh.
  • Use two spatulas: If you are new to grilling a whole fish fillet, we recommend using two large spatulas (fish spatulas (affiliate link) are best if you have them) when flipping it. It is easier to flip them when you have ample support. 
  • Grilled sockeye salmon in foil: We tested this recipe using a sheet of aluminum foil as well. There was no difference in the cooking time but the flavor lacked some of the smokiness. However, if you prefer to grill salmon in foil, be sure to grease the foil pieces with an oil spray first. Then, transfer the salmon to the middle of the foil and grill using the recipe instructions as written.
  • The thickness of the fish: In general, sockeye salmon is thinner than Atlantic salmon, resulting in less time on the grill. However, if your salmon is thicker, you might have to add more cooking time to ensure fully cooked fillets (and vice versa).
  • Check the doneness: The secret to a moist sockeye salmon recipe is not to overcook it. Keep in mind that salmon cooks so quickly. According to the folks over at America’s Test Kitchen, the ideal internal temperature for perfectly grilled sockeye salmon is 120-125 degrees F. 
  • Marinade: Because this wild Alaskan salmon recipe packs so many robust, natural flavors, there’s no need to marinate your fish beforehand. However, if you want a different flavor profile, brush your fillets after grilling with a sweet-and-spicy Honey Mustard Glaze or a flavorful Maple Ginger Glaze for a tangy Asian take on this classic dish.

FAQs

Have more questions about how to cook Alaska salmon? This hassle-free guide will answer all your queries, from salmon preparation to grilling time.

Should you soak salmon before grilling?

Because it has so much natural flavor, there’s no reason to marinade salmon steak before grilling. However, if you prefer to add a more complex flavoring, you are welcome to brush it with your favorite glaze after it is grilled.

How long to grill sockeye salmon?

I recommend grilling red salmon over 350 degrees F. for two and a half to three minutes on each side—no more than six minutes in total. However, keep in mind that you may have to add a few minutes to the grilling time depending on the thickness of your fish.

Can you eat sockeye salmon skin?

Yes! The shiny side of Alaska sockeye salmon (AKA the skin) is perfectly edible, and skin-on fillets often contain more healthy omega-3 fatty acids. However, if you are not a fan, you can easily remove the skin before serving as it will easily come off.

Where does sockeye salmon come from?

Wild sockeye salmon is a type of salmon that comes from the Pacific Northwest, close to the coasts of North America and Asia. Fresh sockeye salmon is in season from late spring through middle summer (i.e., May through July) and are known for their deep red color and rich, firm taste.

Other Grilled Seafood Recipes You Might Like

Tempted to make grilled salmon every night of the week? These other grilled fish dishes will satiate your seafood cravings with their delectably moist, fresh, and bright flavors.

If you try this Grilled Sockeye Salmon recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Grilled Sockeye salmon with asparagus and grilled lemon on the side.
Print

Grilled Sockeye Salmon Recipe

This Grilled Sockeye salmon recipe is the ultimate summertime dinner that is ready in less than 15 minutes. Buttery rich and super flavorful, wild caught Alaskan salmon is perfect for grilling.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 6 minutes
Total Time 11 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 189kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 whole wild Sockeye salmon fillet* about 1 ¼ to 1 ½ pounds
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil plus additional to grill grates
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper
  • 1 lemon sliced or quartered
  • Fresh dill for garnish – optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the (gas) grill to 350 degrees F.
  • Pat the fillet dry with paper towels on both sides. Set it aside.
  • Whisk olive oil, salt, and pepper in a bowl until combined.
  • Brush the salmon fillet generously with the olive oil mixture on both sides.
  • Scrape the grill grates to remove any possible food residue. Dip a wad of paper towel into a bowl with oil and then generously coat the grates.
  • Carefully place salmon, skin side down, and cook uncovered for 3 minutes or until it releases easily when you slide a spatula between the salmon fillet and grill grate.
  • Using two spatulas, carefully flip the salmon fillet and cook the other side for 3 minutes. The perfectly grilled salmon should register 125 degrees F when inserted with an instant read thermometer.
  • Transfer it onto a plate and loosely cover it with aluminum foil for a few minutes.
  • If preferred, drizzle it with lemon juice and garnish with fresh dill and plenty of sliced lemon before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes one whole salmon fillet, which is ideal for 4 servings. The nutrition informatio below is for one serving.
  • Salmon: We used fresh wild Sockeye salmon but you can use frozen salmon in this recipe. Just make sure that it is fully thawed before grilling. You can use this recipe to cook Coho or King Salmon, but keep in mind that they tend to be thicker so the grilling time might slightly be longer.
  • Grilling Salmon Fillets: You can use this exact recipe to grill cut Sockeye salmon. The timing would mostly be the same. However, if your fillets are all center cut, you may have to grill slightly longer.
  • Marinade or glaze: Since Sockeye Salmon is already very flavorful, we did not think that it is necessary to marinade it. However, if you want, you can reserve some of the olive oil mixture to brush the salmon after it is grilled.
  • Don’t have a grill? Baking Sockeye in the oven is just as easy and delicious!
  • Storage: To store leftovers, bring your grilled fish to room temperature. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the refrigerator for up to 2 days. Reheat in a 275-degree oven for 3-4 minutes or until it is warmed to your liking.

Nutrition

Calories: 189kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 601mg | Potassium: 252mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 26IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Grilled Sockeye Salmon appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-sockeye-salmon/feed/ 0
Sockeye Salmon Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/sockeye-salmon-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/sockeye-salmon-recipe/#respond Thu, 06 Jul 2023 17:03:09 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68746 As I learned while on my Alaskan trip with Copper River Sockeye Salmon, once you know how to bake sockeye salmon following this basic recipe, you’ll unlock countless other delectable Pacific salmon recipes the whole family will enjoy. This baked sockeye salmon fillet recipe is a no-brainer for easy, healthy weeknight meals. Sockeye salmon itself boasts dozens of health benefits and this easy fish dish is just one of many...

The post Sockeye Salmon Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
As I learned while on my Alaskan trip with Copper River Sockeye Salmon, once you know how to bake sockeye salmon following this basic recipe, you’ll unlock countless other delectable Pacific salmon recipes the whole family will enjoy.

This baked sockeye salmon fillet recipe is a no-brainer for easy, healthy weeknight meals. Sockeye salmon itself boasts dozens of health benefits and this easy fish dish is just one of many ways to incorporate it into your weekly menu. It also serves as a stepping stone to a multitude of other Alaskan sockeye salmon recipes, from elegant Salmon Nicoise to creamy Salmon Coconut Soup.

Baked Sockeye Salmon in foil garnished with lemon slices.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need two sets of simple ingredients to make this salmon sockeye recipe: the fish and its seasoning.

For the fish: 

  • Wild Alaskan Sockeye Salmon (Fresh or Frozen): Using high-quality fish is essential to give this recipe its rich, buttery flavor. We used fresh salmon, which is in season from May through July. I also prefer using a whole salmon filet with the skin on it for easy cooking and a beautiful presentation. However, you can also use pre-cut fillets for a perfectly portioned spread. If you use frozen sockeye salmon fillets, thoroughly thaw them before roasting them.
Ingredients for baked red salmon recipe.

Seasoning:

The best seasoning for sockeye salmon includes a basic mixture of zesty, robust ingredients and fresh herbs. Because this mixture packs so much flavor, you don’t need much to give your fish an incomparably bold taste.

  • Olive oil: Olive oil ensures that this oven-baked sockeye salmon recipe develops a crisp exterior and succulent, tender flesh while cooking. However, avocado oil will also work as a substitute.
  • Lemon: You’ll need fresh lemon juice, zest, and slices to give this dish bright flavors and an immaculate presentation.
  • Seasonings: Only kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper are necessary to season this baked salmon recipe. You can also sprinkle it with a pinch of red pepper flakes if you prefer.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: Finely minced garlic is the best but you can use garlic powder in a pinch.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh dill and parsley are two signature herbs for red salmon recipes, lending them citrusy notes and grassy undertones. You can add one, the other, or both herbs for an elaborate flavor profile.

How to Cook Sockeye Salmon in the Oven

Cooking sockeye salmon is a cinch with these foolproof instructions. In just fifteen minutes, you’ll have a filling and flavorful spread that will astound foodies and families alike.

  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F.
Step by step images showing how to bake Copper River salmon in the oven.
  1. Whisk the oil mixture: In a small bowl, whisk the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, salt, and pepper until thoroughly mixed.
  2. Dry the fish: Use a few sheets of paper towel to pat dry both sides of the salmon fillet.
  3. Season the salmon: Brush both sides of it with the oil-lemon mixture.
  4. Arrange the fish: Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil, ensuring it’s at least four inches larger than your fillet. Transfer the brushed salmon—skin side down—to the middle of the foil, leaving two inches on both sides.
Person preparing Wild caught Alaskan salmon for cooking it in aluminum foil.
  1. Add the fillet: Evenly distribute the garlic and lemon slices on top of the fish fillet.
  2. Wrap the salmon: Gently fold the excess foil on both sides of the fish toward its center and loosely cinch it to help keep the foil’s shape. Fold the end foil pieces over the fish and loosely seal it.
  3. Cook the sockeye salmon: Transfer the wrapped salmon to the oven and roast it for 10 minutes, untouched. After 10 minutes, carefully open the foil covering to check for doneness. Insert a digital thermometer into the thickest part of the fish. Your fish is ready to serve if the thermometer reaches 125 degrees F.
  4. Add the herbs: Remove the Pacific salmon from the oven and carefully open the foil packet. Sprinkle the fillet with chopped parsley or dill.
  5. Serve: If desired, cut the oven-roasted sockeye salmon recipe into slices, and garnish them with lemon slices and chopped fresh herbs. Serve and enjoy!

How to Store Baked Alaskan Salmon?

With so much mouthwatering flavor, you won’t want a single morsel of your fresh wild sockeye salmon to go to waste. These easy storage tips will ensure you can enjoy your leftover salmon for the next few days.

  • Storage: To store your salmon steak, let it come to room temperature first. Then, transfer it to an airtight container (or wrap it tightly in tin foil or stretch film), and place it in the refrigerator. Your fillets will stay fresh for 2-3 days.
  • Freeze: Though you can technically freeze cooked sockeye salmon, the fish’s texture and flavor won’t be as good as the freshly roasted version. Therefore, I don’t recommend freezing this recipe once cooked.
  • Reheating: The best part about this dish is that you can enjoy it warm, room temperature, or cold. If you prefer a warm fillet, reheat your fish in a low-heat oven (275-300 degrees F.) for 3-4 minutes or until heated. However, cook your salmon sparingly, as it will become dry and flavorless if overheated.

What to Serve With Sockeye Salmon Bake?

Alaskan sockeye salmon fillets make an irresistible pair with countless other delectable recipes. All my favorites are in this delicious collection, from flavorful grains to tender roasted veggies.

Baked Wild Alaskan salmon garnished with yogurt dill sauce from the top view.
  • Sauces and salsas: With its creamy, bright flavors, Yogurt Dill Sauce is one of my favorite sauces to prepare when cooking Alaskan salmon. For a sweeter, more colorful option, you could also top your fillets with Mango Salsa or Peach Salsa—both of which complete this photo-ready spread.
  • Salad: This simple salmon recipe makes a phenomenal combination with any of my bright summertime salads. You can whip up my Spring Mix Salad or Butter Lettuce Salad in under twenty minutes for two of my most colorful, crisp sides.
  • Vegetables: Wild sockeye can pair with nearly any of my tasty vegetable sides because of its extreme versatility. However, some of my favorites include creamy Mexican Street Corn, buttery Roasted Asparagus, and Air-Fried Corn on the Cob.
  • Cooked Grains or Pasta: Nothing makes a more sumptuous pair than baking sockeye salmon in foil alongside a hearty grain dish. I recommend serving up a pot of Cooked Wild Rice or Cooked Quinoa for a well-seasoned, healthy side. You could also compliment your light fish with rich pasta recipes, like Garlic Butter Pasta or Zucchini Lasagna, or add a nutty, herbaceous taste with a bowl of Green Pasta.
  • Potatoes: Tender, flavorful, and filling, potatoes are a great option when preparing this Alaska salmon recipe. Muffin Tin Potatoes only need four ingredients for a creamy, buttery side dressed to impress. I also recommend my Parmesan Crusted Potatoes and Smashed Fingerling Potatoes for more melt-in-your-mouth potato recipes.
  • Wine: The best way to prepare sockeye salmon is alongside a bottle of crisp, dry white wine, such as pinot grigio or sauvignon blanc.

Expert Tips

This wild Alaskan salmon recipe is an easy way for both beginner and master chefs to prepare seafood without a hitch. These simple tips will ensure your fillet always comes out moist and flavorful.

  • Good quality fish: The best way to cook sockeye salmon is by starting with good-quality fish fillets. If you buy fresh fish, cooking it within the first 24-48 hours is ideal for maximum flavor. If you prefer using packaged, pre-cut frozen fillets, thaw them fully before roasting. The best way to thaw frozen fish is by placing it in the fridge overnight.
  • The temperature of your oven: We tested this recipe at various temperatures, including 375, 400, and 425 degrees F. However, we found that a gentle, low-temperature oven—ideally, 375 degrees F. for 10 minutes (until it is medium-rare) —produced the most tender, moist salmon. 
  • The thickness of the fish: Sockeye salmon tends to be thinner than Atlantic salmon, which will affect your ideal cooking time. Therefore, if you’re working with a thicker fillet, I recommend increasing its time in the oven by a few minutes and vice versa.
  • Check doneness: Your sockeye salmon temperature should reach 120-125 degrees F. before removing the fish from the oven. Keep in mind that it will continue to cook after you take it out of the oven because of the residual heat. If you do not have a thermometer to check doneness, you can also tell by looking at its texture and color. Fully cooked salmon should have a flaky texture and an opaque pink color before removing it from the oven. Finally, you can do the fork test. If it flakes easily it should be ready to enjoy.
  • Slightly undercook it: When baking sockeye salmon in the oven, it’s important to slightly undercook your fish and let it rest for a few minutes before serving. The fillets will continue to cook even while resting, giving them time to reabsorb their juices and keep them from becoming dry. In short, undercooking the fish will provide you with a moist sockeye salmon recipe no one can resist.
  • Use the skin as a barrier to avoid overcooking: For best results, I highly recommend keeping the skin on your salmon fillet while baking (even if you are not a fan of eating the skin.) It comes off easily after the roasting process and acts as a protective fatty barrier on the fillets’ bottoms, keeping the fish from overcooking.
  • Aluminum foil vs. parchment paper: I prefer to make baked sockeye salmon in foil due to its ability to trap steam and maintain heat, resulting in moist, succulent fish. However, if you prefer parchment paper, simply increase the cooking time by two minutes to ensure thorough roasting.
  • Presentation: If you want your salmon to pop, add colorful and flavorful additions to your garnish ingredients, such as lemon slices and fresh herbs. You can also ensure a beautiful presentation by serving your fillet on a center plate, drizzled with your chosen sauce.

FAQs

Have more questions about this tasty oven-baked fish? We’ve got you covered, whether you’re wondering where wild salmon fillet comes from or expert seasoning tips.

What is a sockeye salmon fillet?

Sockeye salmon—also referred to as red salmon—is a type of salmon that comes from the Pacific Ocean and has brilliant red meat, a firm texture, and a rich, fresh flavor. A fillet refers to a specific cut from the fish’s backbone, which has no bones and often still has the skin attached.

What is the difference between sockeye salmon and Atlantic salmon?

Though there are many different salmon varieties, Pacific sockeye salmon tends to have a deep red color, while Atlantic salmon is often lighter pink or orange. Furthermore, sockeye varieties are firmer, with a richer flavor profile than other, milder Alaskan types.

Where is sockeye salmon from, and when is it in season?

Sockeye salmon, also called Red Salmon or Blueback Salmon, originate from the Northern Pacific Ocean and the rivers that discharge to it—including the coasts of North America, Eastern Russia, and the Northern Hokkaido Island in Japan—and are in season from May through July.

Where to buy sockeye salmon?

When sockeye salmon is in season, you can likely purchase it at most bigger grocery stores, like Costco and Sam’s Club, or you can often find it in the frozen section of your local grocery store. However, you can also buy it online if unavailable in your area.

How to season sockeye salmon?

There are dozens of ways to season this sockeye salmon fillet recipe. If you prefer a simple, zesty version, you can whisk together an easy sockeye salmon marinade with olive oil, lemon juice, salt, and pepper. You can also create a mixture of soy sauce, garlic, ginger, and maple syrup for a more complex, Asian-inspired variation.

How long to cook sockeye salmon in the oven?

During our recipe testing, we found out that it is best to cook salmon at 375 degrees for 10-12 minutes or until it is medium-rare. Keep in mind that even after you take it out of the oven it will continue cooking with the help of the residual heat.

How to know when sockeye salmon is done?

When sockeye salmon is done, the temp. of its thickest portion should reach 125 degrees F. You can also check the doneness by looking for a flaky texture and the signature sockeye salmon cooked color: when its deep red color turns to opaque pink.

Other Fish Recipes You Might Also Like

If you enjoy this easy sockeye salmon recipe and are a fan of grilled salmon, be sure to try our Grilled Sockeye Salmon recipe as well. And if you are in need of other seafood dinner inspiration, check out these other dishes—from wild Alaskan salmon recipes to mild mahi mahi— to satisfy your seafood fix in a snap.

If you try this Wild Alaskan Sockeye Salmon recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a huge help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baked Sockeye Salmon in foil garnished with lemon slices and minced garlic.
Print

Sockeye Salmon Recipe

This Baked Sockeye Salmon recipe is my foolproof method for cooking this delicious Wild Alaskan fish in the oven. It is a perfectly moist and flaky salmon recipe that is great for a healthy weeknight meal.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 275kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 sockeye salmon fillet* ~ 1 1/4 to 1 1/2 pounds with skin on
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 small lemon sliced
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley or dill

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F.
  • Whisk together the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, salt, and pepper in a small bowl.
  • Pat dry the salmon fillet on both sides using a few sheets of paper towel. Brush both sides of the salmon with the olive oil-lemon mixture.
  • Line a baking sheet with a large sheet of aluminum foil that is 4 inches longer than your salmon fillet. Place the salmon skin side down in the middle leaving 2 inches on both sides.
  • Distribute the garlic slices and lemon slices on top of the fillets.
  • Bring the excess foil on both long sides of the fish towards the middle and cinch loosely. Fold the end pieces of the aluminum foil onto the fish and seal it loosely.
  • Transfer it to the preheated oven and Bake for 10 minutes without opening the packet of salmon. When cooking time is complete, you can carefully open the foil packet and check doneness. If you have an instant read thermometer, insert it into the thickest part of the fish, if it registers 125 degrees F, it is ready to be served.
  • Remove from the oven, carefully open the foil. Sprinkle it with chopped parsley and/or dill.
  • If preferred, cut into slices, garnish with lemon slices and chopped fresh herbs, and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe make a whole fillet of salmon and serves a family of 4 easily. You can multiply the recipe as need if preferred. Though we recommend baking each fillet in their own foil packets.
  • Fresh or Frozen Sockeye Salmon: This recipe will work with fresh or frozen salmon. If you use frozen salmon fillets make sure to thaw them fully before baking them. You can use this recipe to roast King or Coho Salmon, but keep in mind that they tend to be thicker so the cooking time might be different.
  • Not a fan of using aluminum foil? You can cook Sockeye salmon in a parchment packet instead (following the recipe as written.) However, we recommend extending the cooking time by 2-3 minutes.
  • Can I roast sockeye salmon fillet on a sheet pan without covering it in foil? I prefer to roast sockeye salmon in foil to ensure a moist, succulent texture. However, you can make this recipe without aluminum foil by preheating the oven to 350 degrees F. and placing the fillet on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper. Then, brush both sides of the fish with the olive oil mixture and sprinkle it with salt, pepper, and minced garlic. Bake the salmon in the oven for 12-14 minutes or until its internal temperature reaches 125 degrees F.
  • A note about the cook time: Please keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the thickness of your fillet and the cook time. We find that baking it in a milder heat (375 degrees) will cook it gently. For best results, we recommend checking doneness after the 10-minute mark. However, be careful as you open the foil packet as it is packed with hot steam.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container after they come to room temperature for 2-3 days. You can reheat them in a low heat oven (275-300 degrees F.) for 3-4 minutes or until heated.

Nutrition

Calories: 275kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 78mg | Sodium: 354mg | Potassium: 745mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Sockeye Salmon Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sockeye-salmon-recipe/feed/ 0
Mediterranean Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/#respond Wed, 28 Jun 2023 15:00:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68504 There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but they’re also an easy way to save money on your spice cabinet. With just a handful of fresh, natural ingredients, you can make dozens of spice combinations guaranteed to be free of fillers and preservatives. Plus, you can tailor your recipe perfectly to your preferences by adjusting the spice levels...

The post Mediterranean Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but they’re also an easy way to save money on your spice cabinet. With just a handful of fresh, natural ingredients, you can make dozens of spice combinations guaranteed to be free of fillers and preservatives. Plus, you can tailor your recipe perfectly to your preferences by adjusting the spice levels or modifying how much salt you include.

So, go ahead and make a batch and bring the most-loved flavors of the Mediterranean region to your own kitchen with this unique combination of warming spices you probably already have in your spice cabinet.

Mediterranean seasoning with a spoon from the top view.

What is in Mediterranean seasoning?

Also referred to as a Mediterranean herb blend, this seasoning is a classic mixture of common Mediterranean spices and herbs—basic, natural ingredients you likely already have in your spice cabinet!

Mediterranean herbs and spices in small spoons with text on every ingredient.
  • Garlic powder: I use garlic powder here. However, you can use granulated garlic if you can’t get your hands on it. The granulated version is thicker compared to its powdered version. Therefore, if you prefer a finer Mediterranean spice mix, simply use a food processor or spice grinder to crush your granulated garlic into smaller fragments.
  • Onion powder
  • Dried basil
  • Dried oregano: I prefer Italian oregano in this spice blend recipe due to its minty, herbaceous undertones. Mexican oregano will add too much citrusy flavor, resulting in a different flavor profile. 
  • Dried dill weed
  • Dried parsley
  • Dried rosemary
  • Dried thyme
  • Ground black pepper
  • Dried Lemon peel: This is probably the only ingredient that may require a trip to the store, but it is worth it. Dried lemon peel (affiliate link) lends this simple spice mixture an irresistible hint of fresh, tart flavor—in addition to its signature bright color. However, you could also use orange peel. And if that doesn’t work, you can add fresh lemon zest right before you are ready to use this Mediterranean seasoning in your recipe.

Optional Additions:

  • Kosher salt: Add ½ teaspoon salt to your mixing bowl for extra savory spice. Or, add it separately to your recipe while cooking to ensure it doesn’t come out too salty.
  • Ground cumin: Cumin is the key to giving Mediterranean cuisine its hearty, earthy taste—especially when making meat dishes and kabobs. Depending on your recipe, you can add ground cumin directly into your spice or separately. If you are a spice nerd like me, you can also purchase cumin seeds and grind them in your own spice grinder for an even fresh flavor.
  • Ground cinnamon: Want to add a little warmth to your Mediterranean spices? Just ¼ teaspoon of ground cinnamon will add a woody richness to your blend, making it the perfect addition to meat recipes.
  • Dried mint: Mint is a wonderful addition to this recipe, as it naturally sharpens the unique flavors of the other herbs. However, remember that dried mint is a potent herb, and a little bit can go a long way in this spice blend. 

How to Make This Recipe?

You can have a sumptuous flavoring for all your favorite dishes in just five minutes and one step.

Person mixing Mediterranean spices in a jar from the top view.

Simply add your ingredients to a small mixing bowl, adjusting the salt and seasoning levels to your taste. Mix until thoroughly blended. Use it in your recipe right away, or transfer the Mediterranean herb seasoning to an airtight jar for later use.

Storage Instructions

Whether you’re using this Mediterranean spice blend recipe for weeknight meals or a special occasion, use these storage tips to ensure that your mix stays fresh and flavorful for months.

  • Airtight container: It’s essential that you store your Mediterranean herb mix in an airtight container to ensure the ingredients don’t lose their flavor over time. A jar with a tight-fitting lid is ideal.
  • Check for dryness: Ensure your storage container is fully dry before adding your spice mixture. Also, if you dried your own fresh herbs, ensure all ingredients are completely dry before storing them. Any moisture will make your blend difficult to use, dull its flavors, and may result in unwanted bacteria or mold.
  • Store in a dark place: To keep your spices’ flavors as robust and fresh as possible, store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. Exposure to heat and sunlight can strip your herbs of their flavors and limit how long you can use them. 
  • Date and label: I recommend dating and labeling your Mediterranean spices and herbs before storage to keep track of their freshness. This way, you won’t have to fret over your calendar every time you prepare a new dish.
  • Use within six months: To ensure maximum flavor, I suggest using it within six months of preparation. Though the seasoning won’t go bad, it will likely lose its potency the longer it sits.

Uses of this Mediterranean Spice Mix

There are endless ways to incorporate it into your cooking. In minutes, you can add fresh, sunny flavors to fan-favorite recipes, from hearty chicken to light seafood.

  • Rub for chicken and turkey: This Mediterranean rub does wonders to enhance the succulent, tender flavors of chicken and turkey recipes. Use it to season chicken thighs in my Mediterranean Chicken with Lemon to bring out their zesty profile. Or, sprinkle a bit over my Baked Split Chicken Breast for a savory, herby addition perfect for soups, salads, and everyday meal prep. For an elegant recipe made for presentation, you could use this spice in my Baked Turkey Tenderloin or add it to my Middle Eastern Chicken Kabob recipe for a summer-ready dish any party crowd will love.
  • Beef and steak seasoning: Using Mediterranean spices for beef is an easy way to balance the hearty flavor of steaks, burgers, meatballs (hello, Turkish Kofte!), and roasts with delicately fresh flavors. 
  • Lamb: If you’re a fan of its grassy, robust taste, I recommend using your Mediterranean spices for lamb. Take your recipe to the next level by adding this seasoning mix to lamb shanks, grilled chops, or lamb burgers with feta.
  • Grilled seafood: It’s no secret that Mediterranean cuisine and fresh seafood go hand in hand. Rub fresh-caught fish with olive oil, lemon juice, sea salt, and Mediterranean seasoning for a delectable dish that comes together in minutes. Or, add a dash of this tasty rub on some of my favorite seafood recipes, like Grilled Mahi Mahi and Shrimp Kabobs
  • Marinades and sauces: You won’t be able to resist eating your favorite sauces by the spoonful when you include this simple recipe. Add a touch of authentic Mediterranean taste to flavorful kitchen staples, like Basil Tomato Sauce, Green Pasta Sauce, or Garlic Butter Sauce. Or, elevate your meat marinades using it in my basic Easy Shrimp Marinade or Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade recipes.
  • Salad Dressings: Looking for an easy way to bring your weekday salads to life? Mix your Mediterranean seasoning with olive oil, minced garlic, and either lemon juice or vinegar, and you’ll have a light, healthy salad dressing you can use all week long. You can also embellish my tart Lemon Dressing or creamy Yogurt Dressing by adding a pinch of this easy mixture.
  • Soups and stews: There’s no reason why your favorite soups shouldn’t explode with flavor. Add this Mediterranean blend to my healthy Broccoli and Feta Soup, creamy Red Lentil Soup, or hearty beef stews (hello, Eggplant Beef Stew!) to enliven every spoonful with herby, savory flavors.   
  • Bread dipping oil: The only thing better than a piece of freshly baked bread is one that you serve alongside delicious dipping oil. This Olive Oil Bread Dip would be the perfect accompaniment to dozens of menu ideas—with the addition of this spice mix, of course!
  • Sautéed or roasted vegetables: While some may only think to use this Mediterranean rub for chicken, this fragrant spice mix is one of the easiest ways to add mouthwatering flavor to your favorite veggie dishes. I love including this simple spice in tasty sides, like Pan Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Whole Carrots, and Roasted Cauliflower
Mediterranean herb blend in a wooden spoon from the top view.

Expert Tips

Making your own savory blend of herbs and spices is a great way to add bright, fresh flavor to your menu. With these tips for making Mediterranean spice, you’ll never eat bland food again.

  • Use new herbs and spices: The trick to getting your spice mixture as herbaceous and flavorful as possible is using fresh ingredients. You can make your own dried herbs for extra freshness, but ensure they dry thoroughly before adding them to your mixture.
  • Make it your own: My favorite part about making my own spice blends is how easy they are to customize. Feel free to adjust the spices in this recipe to match your taste. Or, if you don’t like any of the ingredients, you can omit them entirely or use a bit more of something else. For example, if you’re not a fan of dill, you can leave it out and add more thyme. For a spicier mix, you can add red pepper (aka chili pepper flakes), or you could include Spanish paprika for a slightly smokier taste.
  • Give it a good shake: Shake your spices’ storage container before incorporating the blend into your cooking. Because some ingredients tend to shift to the bottom during storage, shaking your mixture will ensure an even distribution of flavors.
  • Start with a small amount: When adding this seasoning to your cooking, I recommend beginning with a small amount and adding more after tasting. Remember, you can always add more spice but you can’t take it out. 
  • Customize your salt levels: When you buy spice blends at the store, you never know how much salt is inside. That’s why I prefer to make my own seasoning mixtures. For this recipe, you can either add the salt directly into the blend or omit it and add salt to your recipe as needed.

FAQs

What is Mediterranean seasoning?

Mediterranean spices generally include a signature blend of ingredients, such as basil, oregano, rosemary, garlic, and onion powder. However, other versions—often resultant of regional differences in the Mediterranean area—include flavor-enhancing additions, such as parsley, thyme, and dill. These different combinations give this classic mixture such versatility in Mediterranean cooking.

Is Greek seasoning the same as the Mediterranean?

Because these two variations often include the same spices used in Mediterranean cooking, there is a significant flavor overlap between them. However, Greek seasonings tend to have earthier overtones due to the inclusion of marjoram. Still, because of their similar flavor profiles and regional variations, you can use this Mediterranean spice mix instead of Greek seasoning in your recipes.

What can I use in place of Mediterranean seasoning?

Several options exist if you need a replacement for these Mediterranean food spices. Herbs de Provence is a common seasoning blend from France with a slightly more fragrant, herbaceous flavor. You can also use Italian seasoning due to its earthy, somewhat sweet overtones. However, remember that these seasoning blends have slightly different flavor profiles and may affect the outcome of your recipe.

Is Mediterranean food spicy?

Generally speaking, Mediterranean dishes are not spicy. However, chefs may add spice to their recipes to increase heat levels and accommodate personal preference.

Other Homemade Seasoning You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mediterranean Seasoning recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mediterranean spices for beef, chicken and lamb in small spoons from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Seasoning Recipe

This Mediterranean spice mix is perfect for flavoring meats, vegetables, soups, stews, sauces, and more. Use this unique blend of spices and herbs in your recipes and bring the Mediterranean to your table.
Course Seasoning
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 serving
Calories 21kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons onion powder
  • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
  • 1 tablespoon dried basil
  • ½ tablespoon dried dill weed
  • ½ tablespoon dried parsley
  • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon lemon peel
  • 1/2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon coarsely ground black pepper

Optional

  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, mix all the ingredients and transfer the mixture to an airtight jar.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 1/3 cup of spice blend. However, it can be multiplied as many times as you need.
  • Storage: B sure to store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. As long as it is kept in an airtight container, it should be fresh for up to 6 months. It would technically still be good after then, but we find that you get the freshest flavors if you use it within the first 6 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 21kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 296mg | Potassium: 110mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Mediterranean Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/feed/ 0
Breakfast Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/#comments Wed, 21 Jun 2023 15:29:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68420 This recipe is one of the most versatile of all the breakfast fruit ideas. Serve it by itself for a healthy, light breakfast, or serve it with my Fruit Yogurt Dip on the side for a tantalizingly creamy dish perfect for a beautiful brunch spread. You can even use your fruit mix to top off or incorporate it into your morning oatmeal (hello, Yogurt Overnight Oats)for a satisfying morning meal....

The post Breakfast Fruit Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This recipe is one of the most versatile of all the breakfast fruit ideas. Serve it by itself for a healthy, light breakfast, or serve it with my Fruit Yogurt Dip on the side for a tantalizingly creamy dish perfect for a beautiful brunch spread. You can even use your fruit mix to top off or incorporate it into your morning oatmeal (hello, Yogurt Overnight Oats)for a satisfying morning meal.

Fruit in a large bowl from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need for Fruit Breakfast Salad

You only need two sets of simple ingredients for this breakfast fruit salad recipe: the fruits and the fruit salad dressing.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text written on each ingredient.

Breakfast fruits: Wondering what ingredients to include when you make fruit for breakfast? This classic mix of colorful produce will brighten your table with nutritious, brilliant flavors.

  • Pineapple: Pick out a ripe pineapple that is juicy and sweet.
  • Grapes: You can use both red and yellow grapes in this recipe. However, I would recommend getting the seedless variety.
  • Berries: Nearly any berry will make this simple morning dish full of ripe, juicy flavors. My favorite fresh berries include strawberries, blackberries, and blueberries.
  • Oranges
  • Kiwis
  • Banana: I adore the creamy, sweet taste of fresh bananas. However, you can omit this ingredient if you’re not a fan of the fruit or preparing this recipe beforehand.

Fruit salad dressing:

  • Orange juice and orange zest: Be sure to use fresh orange juice and orange zest when you make fruit dishes for breakfast. Fresh oranges will give your recipe a delectable balance of tartness and sweetness guaranteed to satisfy your cravings.
  • Lime juice and lime zest: Fresh lime juice is the secret ingredient to giving this dish its zesty, bright flavor—and keeping your fruit fresh for longer! If you don’t have any limes, you can substitute this ingredient for lemon juice and zest.
  • Vanilla extract
  • Ground cinnamon
  • Sweetener: Because this dish gets natural sweetness from fruits, adding an extra sweetener is optional. If you want to enhance the sweetness of your fresh fruit breakfast, add a bit of honey (or honey syrup), maple syrup, or agave. You could also use my Honey Lime Dressing as a citrus-sweet alternative to this classic fruit dressing.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Fresh mint: Amongst all fresh herbs, I think mint is the most flavorful addition to a fruit salad. Adding a few fresh leaves will enliven every bite of your breakfast fruit recipes while adding a garden-green color.
  • Shredded coconut flakes: I love using unsweetened coconut flakes as a healthy, no added sugar topping for this sweet spread. Not only do their sweet, nutty flavors complement this simple mix, but they also add an irresistibly crunchy texture.
  • Spices: To add a warm, gourmet spice to your fruit bowl recipe, you can substitute a sprinkle of cardamom, nutmeg, or poppy seeds in place of cinnamon.

Variations Based on Season and Dietary Restrictions

The best fruits for a fruit salad match the time of year. If you want to transform this easy dish into a seasonal treat or satisfy a dietary need, you’ll love this collection of tasty fruits to use.

  • Summer: Looking to fill your morning fruit bowl with a mixture of sunny, summer-ready produce? I recommend making your summer salad with peaches, plums, raspberries, nectarines, cantaloupe, honeydew, papayas, and mango.
  • Fall: Fall produce makes some of my favorite fruit breakfasts. To make an autumn fruit salad, use apples, figs, pears, and pomegranate seeds for a dish perfect for the holiday season.
  • Winter: To make a winter fruit salad perfect for special occasions, I recommend adding tart, warm-colored fruits like Mandarin oranges, blood oranges, tangerines, grapefruit, and bananas.
  • Spring: When jumping into the garden-fresh spring season, you’ll want these fruits in your breakfast spread. Apricots and strawberries are some of the most spring-forward fruits in the produce aisle.
  • Low-sugar fruit salad: If you are in need of a healthy fruit salad recipe that has low quantities of sugar, I recommend using low-sugar fruits (as recommended by Healthline), like raspberries, strawberries, blackberries, kiwis, and grapefruit.
  • Low-calorie fruit salad: Want to cut down on your morning calorie intake? No problem! Some of the lowest-calorie fresh fruits for breakfast include apples, berries, grapefruit, passion fruit, and stone fruits (e.g., peaches, nectarines, and apricots).

Hot to Make Fruit Salad for Breakfast?

You don’t need a home garden to make a healthy breakfast. While it takes a bit of time to chop all the fruit, once you have them ready, you can prepare a breakfast or brunch fruit salad in just four simple steps:

A collage of images showing how to make breakfast or brunch fruit salad recipe.
  1. Add the fruit: Take out a large bowl, and add the fresh strawberries, pineapple, grapes, blueberries, blackberries, cut oranges, and kiwis. Add the banana if you plan to serve this dish immediately. If you’re making this dish ahead, wait to add the banana just before serving.
  2. Make the dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, mix the orange juice, orange zest, lime juice, lime zest, vanilla extract, and cinnamon. Either whisk or vigorously shake everything until combined thoroughly. If you are using honey, be sure also to whisk that into the dressing.
  3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the fruit salad and gently toss to combine.
  4. Serve: If using, garnish the fruit salad with fresh mint leaves and serve.

How To Make Ahead, Meal Prep, and Store?

It doesn’t matter whether you want a make fruit salad ahead for a crowd or an easy recipe for everyday meal prep. This simple guide will show you how to keep your salad fresh for a few additional days.

  • Make ahead: This recipe is one of the greatest brunch fruit ideas because it’s so easy to make ahead of time. Simply cut up your fruits and place them in a large mixing bowl. Then, just before serving, add the banana and drizzle the fruit with your prepared dressing.
  • Meal prep: Looking for easy breakfast fruit cup ideas? Divide the prepared fruit mixture into individual airtight cups or mason jars (or Weck Jars (affiliate link) as I did in the photo below), and store them in the fridge until ready to eat. Then, add the bananas right before serving and keep the dressing on the side. As long as they are stored in airtight containers, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
  • Storage: You can store this sugar-free fruit salad in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. Remember that the salad will get watery after the second day but still taste delicious.
Breakfast fruit placed in glass jars from the top view.

What to Serve with Fruit Salad for Breakfast?

Want to serve fruit for a brunch buffet or make a delicious fruit bowl for breakfast? When you make this easy recipe, you’ll discover countless ways to transform seasonal produce into a filling meal. 

Expert Tips

It doesn’t matter whether you’re serving this fruit salad for lunch or want to make a kid-friendly fruit salad your children will love. The below tips will ensure your salad is as fresh and flavorful on your first try.

  • Choose fresh fruits: The key to any good fruit breakfast is selecting high-quality fruits. Ensure your produce isn’t bruised or moldy, and try to choose adequately ripe fruit. However, avoid overly ripe fruit, as these ingredients likely won’t hold their shape and become mushy in your salad mixture.
  • Visual interest: To make the best fruit salad for a special event, I recommend using fruits in a variety of colors—red, yellow, green, and beyond! This way, it will look appetizing and add a nice pop of color to your tablescape.
  • Proper cutting: I recommend cutting your fruit into equal bite-sized pieces to ensure your salad is easy to eat. If you’re serving this recipe as a breakfast fruit plate, you can slice your larger fruits, arrange them on a plate, fill the empty spaces with strawberries, and top the spread with blueberries. 
  • Wash and dry your fruit properly: It’s essential to ensure your fruit is clean and safe to eat before incorporating it into your homemade fruit salad. However, remember that some fruits bruise easily, and washing berries requires particular gentleness. Be sure to be equal parts thorough and light when washing your produce.
  • Do not skip on the lime juice or lime zest: Because of its preservational properties, a little lime or lemon juice is a great way to prevent your fruit from browning. Plus, this addition enhances the taste of the salad by balancing its sweet flavors with an irresistible tanginess.
  • Adding banana: Some people think banana has no place as seasonal fruit for summer. However, they add a creamy, mild taste to any fresh fruit salad, and they pack tons of Vitamin C and potassium to fuel you through your day. Still, you can easily omit it if you are not a fan.
  • Dress it right before serving: I recommend dressing the salad right before serving. If you drizzle on the dressing too far in advance, your salad may become overly juicy and soggy.
  • Make it kid-friendly: The below recipe as written, is a great fruit salad for kids due to its bright color, nutritious ingredients, and sweet taste. However, depending on your kids’ age, you may want to cut your fruit into smaller or bite-sized pieces.

FAQs

Is it okay to eat a fruit salad for breakfast?

Yes! Fruit salad makes one of the healthiest options for a quick morning meal due to its high vitamin and mineral content. Plus, depending on which fruits you add, you can kick-start your day with other nutrients, such as potassium, that may help maintain healthy blood pressure, reduce your risk of diabetes, and promote immunity. With that being said, it is important to consume fruit in moderation.

Is fruit salad a healthy snack?

Definitely! Doctors recommend that people eat at least 400 grams of fruit per day (or five servings of 80 grams), so eating fruit salad as a snack will help you reach your dietary goals while reducing your risk of disease, aiding weight loss, and enhancing your body’s store of essential nutrients. However, it is always best to consult your doctor and get the best advice for your dietary requirements.

Should I peel fruits when making fruit salads?

Peeling your fruit is a personal choice for this breakfast fruit bowl recipe. However, I recommend peeling off any skins that are hard to digest, such as orange, kiwi, and banana peels.

Can I use frozen fruit?

Yes, but ensure your fruits are fully thawed (room temperature is best) before adding them to your mixture.

Other Fruit Breakfast Recipes

No one can resist a sweet bowl of fruit for breakfast. If you want other ingenious ways to incorporate nutritious fruit into your morning, you’ll love these simple dishes.

  • Yogurt Parfait: If you want a recipe incorporating healthy breakfast fruit with creamy, light Greek yogurt, this dish is precisely what you need.
  • Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal: Pack all the fresh, crisp flavors of the orchard into your morning bowl with this 15-minute recipe.
  • Instant Pot Quinoa Breakfast Bowl: This vegan, gluten-free breakfast recipe comes together in less than 20 minutes and is the perfect make-ahead dish.
  • Peach Galette: Search no more for a healthy dessert. This sophisticated recipe makes for the perfect brunch dessert—especially when served with my fan favorite Honey Vanilla Ice Cream.
  • Can’t get enough? Check out all our fruity desserts.

If you try this Breakfast Fruit Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Breakfast fruit salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Breakfast Fruit Salad Recipe

Here is a breakfast fruit salad that will help you start the day in a healthy way. Made without the use of any additional sugars, this easy fruit salad can be served by itself or as a side dish served with baked goods, eggs, or oatmeal.
Course Breakfast, Brunch
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 131kcal

Ingredients

For The Fruit Salad

  • 2 cups pineapple peeled, cored, and cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 1 cup grapes rinsed and halved
  • 1 cup strawberries rinsed, hulled, and quartered
  • 1 cup blueberries rinsed
  • 1 cup blackberries rinsed
  • 1 orange peeled and cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 2 Kiwis peeled and cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 1 banana peeled and sliced – optional

For The Salad Dressing

  • ¼ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon orange zest
  • 2 teaspoons lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice from approximately 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • Handful of fresh mint leaves chopped – Optional

Instructions

  • Place the pineapple, grapes, strawberries, blueberries, blackberries, cut orange, and kiwi in a large bowl. If you are serving it right away, add the banana, but if you are making it ahead of time, we recommend adding the banana right before serving.
  • To make the fruit salad dressing, combine the orange juice, orange zest, lime juice, lime zest, vanilla extract, and cinnamon* in a small bowl or mason jar. Whisk or shake vigorously to incorporate.
  • Drizzle the fruit salad with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
  • If using, garnish with fresh mint leaves and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields approximately 8-9 cups of breakfast fruit salad. The nutritional values below are for 1 serving.
  • Sweetener*: As we were working on this recipe, we wanted it to be a healthy no-sugar-added breakfast option. However, if preferred, you can add a tablespoon (or more) of honey (or honey simple syrup) to the dressing. Honey-sweetened fruit salad is slightly sweeter but has a subtle (but welcome) honey flavor.
  • Make ahead: If you want to make it ahead, simply cut up the fruit (except the banana) and prepare the dressing. Store them in separate airtight containers. Then, just before serving, add the banana and drizzle the fruit with the prepared dressing.
  • Meal prep: Divide the prepared fruit mixture into individual airtight cups, mason, or weck jars, and store them in the fridge until ready to eat. Then, add the bananas right before serving and keep the dressing on the side. As long as they are stored in airtight containers, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
  • Storage: The leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. Remember that the salad will get watery after the second day but still taste delicious.
  • Making it for a crowd? Feel free to multiply the recipe as many times as you need.

Nutrition

Calories: 131kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 4mg | Potassium: 407mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 232IU | Vitamin C: 93mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Breakfast Fruit Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/feed/ 2
Ina Garten’s Roasted Shrimp Salad https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shrimp-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shrimp-salad/#comments Thu, 15 Jun 2023 17:48:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2239 A true Barefoot Contessa classic, this roasted shrimp salad is the same one Ina Garten herself sold in stores. Much like her Orzo with Shrimp and Feta Cheese, this recipe comes together in no time at all. And if you are a serious shrimp lover, be sure to make Shrimp Scampi and BBQ Shrimp Skewers, too. Ingredients Ina Garten’s shrimp salad is a mix of pantry and fresh ingredients that...

The post Ina Garten’s Roasted Shrimp Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
A true Barefoot Contessa classic, this roasted shrimp salad is the same one Ina Garten herself sold in stores. Much like her Orzo with Shrimp and Feta Cheese, this recipe comes together in no time at all.

And if you are a serious shrimp lover, be sure to make Shrimp Scampi and BBQ Shrimp Skewers, too.

Barefoot Contessa's roasted shrimp salad with mayonnaise from the top view.

Ingredients

Ina Garten’s shrimp salad is a mix of pantry and fresh ingredients that are easy to find at the grocery store. Here are my best tips when shopping for this roasted shrimp salad recipe:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Shrimp: Buy whole shrimp labeled 16-20 or 21-25 (this is an indication of the size and number of shrimp per pound). You can peel and devein them yourself or purchase deveined shrimp to save yourself some time. If using frozen shrimp, thaw completely by placing the bag in a bowl of cold water for about 30 minutes.
  • Olive oil: Use good olive oil, preferably extra virgin olive oil if you have it on hand.
  • Mayonnaise: When first testing this recipe, we found the original 1 cup mayo Ina Garten used was too much, so I reduced it to ½ cup. As always, taste and adjust based on your desired preference.
  • Orange zest and orange juice: Orange zest and orange juice are the key ingredients that make this recipe so delicious and unforgettable. Lemon zest and lemon juice can be used in its place, but I highly recommend making it with orange.
  • Vinegar: The recipe uses white wine vinegar, but apple cider vinegar, red wine vinegar, or whatever you have on hand will work.
  • Fresh dill: While fresh dill is very classic and delicious, fresh herbs like fresh parsley would be great, too.
  • Capers: Make sure the capers are drained before adding to the salad. Not a fan? Use dill pickles or omit them altogether.
  • Red onion: Raw red onion adds a nice savory crunch. Replace it with Pickled Red Onions or Roasted Red Onions for a mild onion flavor. Or you can also use an equal amount of chopped scallions.

Optional Add-Ins and Variations

Although not included in the original recipe, here are some fun and creative add-ins to make this shrimp recipe your own:

  • Seasoning: While the shrimp is seasoned simply with Kosher salt and black pepper, you can add some nice flavor with 1 teaspoon of Old Bay seasoning, blackened seasoning, or a pinch of red pepper flakes for some heat.
  • Savory: One teaspoon of Dijon mustard or Worcestershire sauce mixed into the dressing would add a welcome savory bite.
  • Avocado: Add one cubed ripe avocado to the salad for some extra creaminess.
  • Salad greens: Serve it over a bed of mixed greens or thinly sliced romaine lettuce for some extra crunch.
  • Other veggies: Add additional fresh, crisp vegetables like diced English cucumbers, halved red cherry tomatoes, or diced bell peppers.

How to Make Barefoot Contessa’s Shrimp Salad?

This Ina Garten Shrimp Salad recipe is so easy to make and can be ready to serve in just about 1 hour, thanks to the shrimp’s quick cooking time. Here’s how to do it in a few easy steps:

  1. Preheat Oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
A collage of images showing how to cook the prawns.
  1. Prep Shrimp: Pat the shrimp dry with paper towels. Spread into one single layer on a baking sheet, drizzle with olive oil, and season with salt and pepper. Toss gently to ensure the shrimp is coated with the oil and seasonings.
  2. Roast Shrimp: Roast the shrimp for 6-8 minutes, flipping them halfway through, until pink, pearly, and slightly curled into a ‘C’. Remove from the oven and let it cool for a few minutes. Transfer to a large bowl and set aside.
A collage of images showing how to mix the roasted shrimp with the mayo dressing.
  1. Make Dressing: While the shrimp is roasting, whisk together the mayonnaise, orange zest, orange juice, and vinegar in a large mixing bowl. Add the dill, capers, and red onion and mix until combined.
  2. Toss: Pour the dressing over the shrimp and toss to combine. Cover with plastic wrap and set aside for 30 minutes before serving.

How to Make Ahead and Store

Ina Garten’s shrimp salad is a wonderful make-ahead recipe and keeps well in the refrigerator. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Make this shrimp salad up to 1 day in advance. Allow to cool to room temperature, then cover and store in the fridge. Remove from the fridge 30 minutes prior to serving.
  • Storage: Leftover shrimp salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. The sauce will sink to the bottom over time, so give it a good stir before serving.

What to Serve With This Recipe?

A fabulous Barefoot Contessa shrimp salad can be served in a number of elegant and sophisticated ways. Some of my favorites include:

Roasted shrimp salad in a bowl with bread and wine on the side.

Expert Tips

  • Use good quality ingredients. Your favorite brand of mayonnaise and olive oil will make the shrimp salad taste that much better.
  • A note on frozen shrimp: If you are using frozen shrimp, make sure it is fully thawed before cooking. According to Bon Appetit, frozen shrimp is better than fresh shrimp. But as always, shop for shrimp that is easily available to you.
  • Shrimp cooks very quickly. It is easy to overcook shrimp, so pay attention to the cooking time. Because it cooks so fast, I do not recommend using parchment paper, as the hot heat from the sheet pan does a better job of cooking the shrimp evenly.
  • Allow the shrimp to cool slightly before tossing with the sauce. You want warm shrimp, not piping hot. The gentle warmth will better absorb the dressing.
  • Put the sauce in the shrimp. Just as Ina Garten notes on the Food Network, add the sauce to the shrimp rather than adding the shrimp to the sauce. This way, you can moderate the amount of sauce you want tossed with the shrimp.
  • Let it rest before serving. Once Ina’s shrimp salad is prepared, cover it and allow it to rest for 30 minutes at room temperature to allow the flavors to marry together. Or, just as Ina Garten recommends in her cookbook, set it in the fridge for up to 6 hours before serving.

Other Shrimp Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Ina Garten’s Roasted Shrimp Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Adapted from Ina Garten’s  Barefoot Contessa, How Easy Is That? cookbook – Roasted Shrimp Salad recipe.

Ina Garten's roasted shrimp salad recipe in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Ina Garten’s Roasted Shrimp Salad Recipe

Ina Garten’s roasted shrimp salad is a deli-style salad perfect for BBQs, picnics, potlucks, and holidays all year round. Surprisingly delicious, thanks to the addition of orange juice and orange zest, once you try this easy recipe, you will never buy roasted shrimp salad from the store again.
Course Lunch, Seafood Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 8 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 48 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 276kcal

Ingredients

For The Roasted Shrimp:

  • 2 lbs shrimp 16-20 or 21-25 peeled and deveined
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Dressing:

  • ½ cup mayonnaise
  • 1 tablespoon orange zest from 2 oranges
  • 2 tablespoons orange juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 tablespoon white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
  • ¼ cup chopped fresh dill
  • 2 tablespoons capers drained
  • 2 tablespoons red onion small diced

Instructions

  • Preheat Oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Prepare Shrimp: Using a sheet of paper towel, pat dry the shrimp on both sides. Transfer onto a sheet pan. Spread the shrimp on a single layer, drizzle with olive oil, and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss together to ensure that the shrimp is evenly coated with oil and seasoning.
  • Roast Shrimp: Roast for 6-8 minutes, flipping them halfway through roasting. Remove from the oven and let it cool for a few minutes. Transfer to a large bowl and set it aside.
  • Make the salad dressing: Meanwhile, make the dressing by whisking together the mayonnaise, orange zest, orange juice, and vinegar in a mixing bowl. Add the dill, capers, and red onion and mix to combine.
  • Toss, rest and serve: Pour the dressing over the shrimp and toss to combine. Cover with stretch film and let it rest at room temperature for 30 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4-5 cups of salad, good for approximately 6 (appetizer) servings. The approximate nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make it up to 1 day in advance. Allow to cool to room temperature, then cover and store in the fridge. Remove from the fridge 30 minutes prior to serving.
  • Storage: Leftover shrimp salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. The sauce will sink to the bottom over time, so give it a good stir before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 276kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 243mg | Sodium: 556mg | Potassium: 435mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 171IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 106mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Ina Garten’s Roasted Shrimp Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shrimp-salad/feed/ 8
Homemade Blackening Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/#respond Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:52:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68051 Better than the cult favorite Zatarain’s blackened seasoning recipe, this five-minute rub builds upon cajun spice for an incredible flavor—something I always keep handy in my spice cabinet. Not only does it add an irresistible kick to dozens of foods, but it’s also the key ingredient of my Blackened Cod and Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe. Use this savory blackening rub for all of your proteins, veggies, grains, and more, and...

The post Homemade Blackening Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Better than the cult favorite Zatarain’s blackened seasoning recipe, this five-minute rub builds upon cajun spice for an incredible flavor—something I always keep handy in my spice cabinet. Not only does it add an irresistible kick to dozens of foods, but it’s also the key ingredient of my Blackened Cod and Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe. Use this savory blackening rub for all of your proteins, veggies, grains, and more, and you’ll never be at a loss for simple and flavorful weeknight meals again.

Blackened seasoning on a plate with a spoon in the middle.

What Does Blackening Mean, and How to Blacken Foods?

“Blackening” is a process in which you pat dry your main ingredient (primarily meat and fish), brush it with melted butter or olive oil, then dredge it through a combination of spices—usually a traditional blackened seasoning blend. Then, cook the meat in a scorching cast-iron skillet until it forms a charred, spice-infused exterior.

Popularized by Paul Prudhomme, this technique of cooking and the seasoning mix is usually used when cooking seafood and chicken dishes, but you can also use a blackening rub on other meats—such as steak and pork—veggies, soups, grains, and even pasta. 

What is Blackened Seasoning?

Blackened seasoning, also referred to as “Blackening Seasoning”, is a traditional Louisiana spice blend that creates a crisp, blackened exterior when added to meat, poultry, or seafood and cooked in a hot cast iron skillet. 

Popular in Cajun cooking, this iconic spice mixture often includes paprika, onion powder, garlic powder, cayenne pepper, thyme, oregano, black pepper, and salt. 

What is in Blackened Seasoning?

You only need a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to make this iconic Louisianian spice mix:

An image showing what spices are in blackened seasoning with text on each spice.
  • Paprika: Smoked paprika is ideal for giving this Cajun blackened seasoning its signature smoky flavor. However, regular paprika will also work.
  • Onion powder
  • Garlic powder
  • Dried oregano
  • Dried thyme
  • Ground black pepper
  • Kosher salt: Salt is the key ingredient to livening up the other spices’ unique flavors. However, if you’re watching your sodium intake or simply want to limit how much salt you use, you can easily make a salt-free blackened seasoning by omitting the salt. 
  • Cayenne pepper: Though cayenne pepper is optional, it’s a great addition if you want to give your rub a spicy kick. Feel free to heat level according to your taste buds.
  • Other optional additions: While these are the basic blackened spice mix ingredients, you can also add other spices for more complex flavor profiles. Some of my favorites include ground cumin, white pepper, and dried basil—though there are countless others to try.

How to Make It?

Making blackening seasoning is an easy way to infuse your kitchen with bold, aromatic flavors. With a total time of five minutes, making this recipe is as easy as it gets.

  1. Mix the spices: Place all the blackened seasoning ingredients in a small bowl. Stir them together until they blend evenly.
  2. Store: Transfer the mixture into an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid—such as a mason jar and store it in a cool, dry space. Your blackened seasoning will stay fresh for up to a year.

How to Use Blackened Seasoning?

You’ll add countless mouthwatering dishes to your recipe book when you make your own blackened seasoning. Prepare to cook like a master Lousianian chef with these tasty menu ideas.

Fish coated with blackened spice mix on a plate from the top view.
  • Meat: The traditional way to enjoy this blackening spice blend is by using it to create a flavorful crust on meats. I love dredging my favorite meats (i.e., shrimp and salmon) through this homemade seasoning, making the perfect blackening recipe for fish, chicken, seafood, and steak. I even use this seasoning as the flavor base of my Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe
  • Vegetables: This blackening spice recipe is essential when adding a savory, piquant flavor to grilled or roasted vegetables. Sprinkle it on veggies like corn, zucchini, potatoes, and eggplant for a simple veggie dish.
  • Pasta, rice, and grains: One of the best ways to use this versatile seasoning is in your favorite grain recipes. Add this secret ingredient to creamy pasta sauces, or sprinkle it in a bowl of plain rice to give it a kick of New Orleans flavor.
  • Nuts and popcorn: Transform your everyday snacks into five-star fare by adding a dash of this robust seasoning. I love sprinkling this DIY blackened seasoning over a bowl of nuts or popcorn, giving each bite an out-of-this-world taste.
  • Soups and stews: Just like Italian seasoning, this easy blackened seasoning recipe is just what you need to take your soup-making to the next level. With just a few simple ingredients, every tablespoon will burst with delicious, bold flavors.

Expert Tips

There’s no guesswork when making this easy blackening seasoning recipe. These pro tips will make your kitchen smell like a gourmet market any day of the week.

  • Fresh spices: The best blackened seasoning begins with fresh spices. Not only do quality spices have a more potent flavor, but they’ll also keep your seasoning fresher for longer. Be sure to check the expiration date of all your ingredients before adding them to your mixture, and use new ingredients whenever possible. 
  • Sealed storage: Tightly seal your blackened seasoning in an airtight container to keep it fresh during storage. I also recommend placing your sealed seasoning in a cool, dark place to keep the flavors from drying out.
  • Mix well: To give every teaspoon of this blackening spice mix a well-balanced taste, evenly blend the spices. Each spoonful should have an equal amount of every ingredient.
  • Make it your own: The best part about the ingredients in blackened seasoning is how easy they are to adjust. Feel free to experiment with each spice’s proportions to satisfy your own preferences. For example, you could give your rub more heat by increasing the amount of cayenne pepper. Or, add more paprika for a smokier, deeper taste.
  • Adjust salt: If you’d prefer a low-sodium blackening seasoning, add less salt to your mixture or omit it altogether.
  • Safety: Proper air ventilation is a must when you cook with blackened seasoning. The high heat of the cooking process may cause your spices to smoke, resulting in coughing or irritation if inhaled directly. To avoid this from happening, I recommend turning on your kitchen’s overhead fan and, if possible, opening nearby windows.

FAQs

Still have questions about this homemade blackened seasoning? Don’t worry! This simple guide covers everything from cajun seasoning vs. blackened seasoning to how to adjust spice levels.

Is blackening seasoning spicy?

It can be! This spice rub’s heat comes primarily from its cayenne pepper, so you can adjust how much you use to reach your desired spice level.

What does blackened seasoning taste like?

Blackened rub tastes very similar to cajun and creole seasonings, with a spicy, smoky, and savory flavor.

What’s the difference between blackening seasoning, cajun seasoning, and creole spice?

Though similar, slight variations exist between blackened, cajun, and creole seasoning. Cajun seasoning tends to be spicier, with a higher proportion of cayenne pepper, and people often add it to traditional Cajun cuisine dishes, such as gumbo and jambalaya. Meanwhile, creole spice uses more herbs—like celery seed and dried basil—to make milder, more refined creole dishes.

What is a good blackened seasoning substitute?

If you need a substitute for blackened seasoning, don’t worry! There are dozens of similar recipes to try. Cajun and creole seasonings use a similar base, producing comparable flavor profiles. Old Bay seasoning also has a similar taste but tends to be saltier. If you don’t have any pre-made spice mixes, you could make a stripped-down version of this recipe with a chili, onion, and garlic powder blend. You could also use homemade taco seasoning—usually a chili powder and cumin mix—for an earthier, more citrusy version. If you don’t mind a sweeter, tangier alternative, you could also use a Canadian classic made with brown sugar and dry mustard: Traeger Blackened Saskatchewan Rub.

If you try this Blackening Seasoning recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Blackened chicken seasoning recipe on a plate with a spoon.
Print

Blackened Seasoning Recipe

Learn how to make your own blackened seasoning and use it to blacken fish, chicken, steak, and vegetables. This unique seasoning mix is an inexpensive and easy way to add spicy, smokey, and earthy flavors to all your favorite dishes.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 13kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons smoked paprika
  • 1 ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Optional:

  • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper

Instructions

  • Mix all the ingredients in a small bowl and stir to ensure that they are evenly blended.
  • Store in a jar with a tight-fitting lid (such as a mason or a small glass jar) for up to a year.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ¼ cup of blackened seasoning. It can be multiplied as needed.
  • Make it your own: Feel free to adjust the amount used according to your taste buds. This also applies to the amount of salt used. If you prefer to salt your food separately, we recommend omitting salt.
  • Safety: Proper air ventilation is a must when you cook with blackened seasoning. The high heat of the cooking process may cause your seasoning mix to smoke, resulting in coughing or irritation if inhaled directly. To avoid discomfort, we recommend turning on your kitchen’s overhead fan and, if possible, opening nearby windows.

Nutrition

Calories: 13kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 64mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 617IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Homemade Blackening Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/feed/ 0
Mango Pineapple Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/#comments Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:49:18 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68053 Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that pairs with dozens of dishes. Like my Peach Salsa and Cherry Tomato Salsa, this recipe is delicious as an appetizer, a topping for fish-based mains, or even a side for hearty meats. This dish will be your new summer staple, no matter how you serve it. Ingredients This recipe for...

The post Mango Pineapple Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that pairs with dozens of dishes. Like my Peach Salsa and Cherry Tomato Salsa, this recipe is delicious as an appetizer, a topping for fish-based mains, or even a side for hearty meats. This dish will be your new summer staple, no matter how you serve it.

Mango pineapple salsa in a bowl with chips on the side from the top view.

Ingredients

This recipe for mango pineapple salsa uses a handful of fresh, healthy ingredients to get its signature fruity taste:

Ingredients for the recipe on a white backdrop with text on each ingredient.
  • Pineapple: Pineapple is essential to give this recipe its sweet, tropical overtones. I recommend using fresh pineapple for the freshest, healthiest taste. You can even add grilled pineapple for extra smoky, caramelized flavors. Canned pineapple will work in a pinch if you don’t have fresh alternatives, but be aware of their added sugar.
  • Mango: Fresh, sweet mangos are the best pick for this fresh pineapple mango salsa. Frozen mango will also work, but thaw it completely before adding it to your recipe.
  • Red onion: Red onion gives this simple salsa a sharp, bold flavor kick. You can also use Mexican Pickled Onions for a tangier, zestier take.
  • Jalapeño pepper: A bit of pepper is the key to giving this mango pineapple jalapeno salsa its classic balance of sweet and spicy flavors. I recommend using seeded jalapeno peppers to give this recipe a little heat, but you can also remove the seeds if you like.
  • Fresh cilantro
  • Fresh Lime juice: I recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice for this easy salsa dish. However, you can also use lime juice from a bottle if you don’t have any fresh limes on hand.
  • Salt

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

  • Green onions: Want to make this tangy salsa a little milder? Use a bit of finely chopped green onions instead of red onions. This easy ingredient substitution is both delicious and colorful.
  • Mint: If you’re not a fan of cilantro, fresh mint makes an excellent substitution, giving this recipe a bright, herby flavor.
  • Avocado: Adding a few chunks of ripe avocado is the best way to add a mild, creamy taste to this fruit salsa.
  • Cherry tomatoes: Transform this simple recipe into pineapple mango pico de gallo by adding a cup of finely chopped cherry tomatoes. This addition will add sharp juiciness to each bite—perfect for tacos!
  • Habanero: To increase the heat level of this recipe, add a little bit of finely chopped habanero peppers. These tiny veggies will give your salsa a bold kick, perfect for spice lovers.

How to Make Mango Pineapple Salsa

Even beginner chefs can prepare pineapple mango jalapeno salsa in a snap! With just four steps and a handful of ingredients, your table will overflow with sweet, zesty, and salty flavors.

A collage of images showing how to make mango salsa.
  1. Add the ingredients: Add the chopped pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeno, cilantro, lime juice, and salt to a large mixing bowl.
  2. Mix: Stir until you thoroughly combine the ingredients.
  3. Let it rest: Cover the mixed salsa with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes to two hours to combine the flavors.
  4. Serve: Serve the mango pineapple salsa as a condiment or with a bowl of tortilla chips.

How to Make and Ahead and Store?

This fresh fruit salsa is a great recipe for make-ahead meal plans during the summer months.

  • Make ahead: You can make this easy salsa recipe up to 24 hours in advance. Simply store it in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to serve.
  • Store: Transfer your leftover salsa to an airtight container and place it in the refrigerator for up to 2-3 days. When ready to serve, give it a good stir, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary, as fruit salsa tends to lose its saltiness during storage. This step will ensure your recipe’s flavors are still bold and evenly mixed.

What to Serve with Mango Pineapple Salsa?

It doesn’t matter whether you’re preparing a light Thai lunch or pork chops on the grill. With this delectable collection, you’ll never wonder what to serve with pineapple salsa again.

Mango pineapple salsa for fish over blackened mahi mahi on a plate.
  • Appetizer with chips: One of the easiest, tastiest ways to serve this simple salsa recipe is as an appetizer or a snack with your favorite tortilla chips. Served alongside my Super Easy Guacamole and Corn Salsa, this crowd-pleaser will complete your menu of game-day recipes.
  • On grilled or roasted fish: This mango pineapple salsa for fish is a refreshing, bright combination that will make you feel like you’re at a seaside restaurant. Serve this luscious condiment on top of Cajun Mahi Mahi (as pictured above), Grilled Mahi Mahi or Breaded Fish, and it’ll disappear in minutes.
  • Over chicken: No one can resist the tender, sweet combination of grilled chicken with pineapple salsa. Serve your salsa with grilled or roasted chicken using my succulent recipe for Chicken Breast for an elegant pairing perfect for special occasions and weeknight dinners.
  • Tacos: Take your taco game to the next level by topping your spread with this fruity, Instagram-ready condiment. I recommend serving your salsa with fish tacos—especially shrimp tacos!—to bring out your meat’s fresh, tropical flavors.
  • Rice bowls: Adding a few spoonfuls of this pineapple and mango salsa to your favorite rice bowls is an easy way to add a pop of color and sweetness to them. This simple condiment adds a rich, refreshing taste to dishes like a salmon rice bowl and fish taco rice bowl.
  • Pork chops: Few combinations are as sumptuous, sophisticated, or tasty as serving mango pineapple salsa with sweet-and-savory pork. You can even add a touch of classic outdoor smokiness to your plate by preparing grilled pork chops for the table.
  • Thai recipes: Nothing balances Thai recipes’ savory, spicy, and sweet flavors better than a fruity salsa. Top your favorite dishes, like my Thai Steak Noodle Salad, with this 20-minute condiment, and prepare yourself for a host of compliments to the chef.

Expert Tips

If you want a fresh salsa with vibrant color and the best flavor, these pro tips are a great way to cook like a master chef. Follow this simple guide for the perfect balance of presentation and taste.

  • Ripe fruit is the best: The best mango pineapple salsa begins with sweet, ripe ingredients. If you have difficulty telling which fruits are ripe, purchase pre-cut fruit at the grocery store. Not only will this save time, but it’ll also guarantee that your ingredients are maximally fresh.
  • Finely chopped: When making this salsa, it’s essential that you chop your ingredients into small, bite-sized pieces. Use a sharp knife and cutting board to ensure easy slicing, and avoid using a food processor, as it will likely result in a watery, off-colored mixture.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more: No one wants their salsa to come out bland. I recommend tasting your mixture for seasoning before serving and adding more if necessary. 
  • Let it rest: Let your fruit salsa chill for at least 30 minutes before serving. This extra resting time allows the ingredients to mix flavors and absorb the added seasoning, giving each bite an exquisite balance of fruity, savory taste.

FAQs

What can I substitute mango for in mango salsa?

If you don’t have ripe mangos, papaya or pineapple are easy substitutes that perfectly mimic mangos’ juicy, sweet taste. Plus, no one can say no to tropical salsa!

Can you freeze pineapple mango salsa?

I don’t recommend freezing this condiment, as the temperature change may result in a grainy, unpalatable texture.

Other Mango Recipes You Might Like

This mango pineapple salsa recipe explodes with sweet, tangy flavors. These simple recipes are just what you need for more refreshing ways to incorporate mango into your weekday menu.

If you try this Mango Pineapple Salsa recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mango Pineapple Salsa placed in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe

This pineapple mango salsa recipe is a delicious fruit salsa that is packed with fresh flavors. Serve it as an appetizer with tortilla chips or as a condiment over blackened or grilled chicken, fish, or pork.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 20 minutes
Resting time (optional) 30 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 57kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup pineapple peeled, cored, and cut into ¼ inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
  • 1 cup mango peeled and cut into ¼-inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
  • ¼ cup red onion roughly chopped (1 ounce)
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped (1 ounce)
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed; approximately 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

Optional add ins:

  • ¼ cup red bell pepper roughly chopped

Instructions

  • In a bowl, add pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, and salt. If using, add in the red pepper too.
  • Stir to combine.
  • Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes* or up to 2 hours for the flavors to combine.
  • Serve as a condiment or with your favorite tortilla chips on the side.

Notes

  • Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Ripe and finely chopped: We recommend using fresh ripe fruit that is finely chopped for this fruit salsa.

Nutrition

Calories: 57kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 176mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 828IU | Vitamin C: 56mg | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 0.3mg

The post Mango Pineapple Salsa appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/feed/ 2
Chicken Kabobs in Oven https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kabobs-in-oven/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kabobs-in-oven/#comments Thu, 25 May 2023 19:42:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67579 Baking chicken kabobs is one of the most flavorful ways to prepare juicy, seasoned chicken all year round. A favorite protein among many, these baked chicken skewers make the perfect meal with fresh zesty marinade, succulent meat, and easy cleanup. Even better, when you give this delicious recipe a quick broil at the very end, your chicken kabobs will taste very similar to its grilled version. Ingredients You’ll Need to...

The post Chicken Kabobs in Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Baking chicken kabobs is one of the most flavorful ways to prepare juicy, seasoned chicken all year round. A favorite protein among many, these baked chicken skewers make the perfect meal with fresh zesty marinade, succulent meat, and easy cleanup. Even better, when you give this delicious recipe a quick broil at the very end, your chicken kabobs will taste very similar to its grilled version.

Baked chicken kabobs served with rice and pita on a plate.

Ingredients You’ll Need to Make Baked Chicken Skewers

You’ll need two sets of simple ingredients to make oven-cooked chicken kabobs:

Ingredients for chicken shish kabob in oven from the top view.
  • Marinade: The seasoning for chicken shish kabobs is inspired by my Mediterranean
    seasoning
    . You’ll need the following:
    • Olive oil
    • Lemon zest and fresh lemon juice
    • Spices and herbs: Dried thyme, dried oregano, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and ground black pepper.
  • Chicken: You will need two pounds of boneless, skinless chicken breasts or chicken thighs sliced into one-inch chunks.
  • Vegetables: It is optional, but you can easily turn these into chicken vegetable kabobs by including veggies such as red onions, green bell peppers, and yellow peppers.

In terms of equipment, you’ll need metal, bamboo, or wooden skewers to assemble the kabobs.

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

  • Marinade: If you prefer a tangier, creamier taste, you can use my Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade. Or, if you’d like to make an Asian-inspired meal, you can opt for my soy sauce-based chicken teriyaki marinade instead.
  • Vegetables: The best part of cooking chicken skewers in the oven is playing around with what fresh veggies to use. In addition to onions and peppers, I recommend using quick-cooking vegetables such as button mushrooms, baby bella mushrooms, zucchini, or cherry tomatoes. 
  • Spices: Feel free to get creative by adding your favorite spices to the marinade. Earthy and flavorful spices like ground cumin and smoked paprika pair beautifully with the rest of the marinade ingredients.
  • Fresh herbs: A sprinkle of chopped fresh parsley or dill is an easy way to give these oven-roasted chicken skewers a gourmet finish.

How to Cook Chicken Shish Kabobs in the Oven?

Baking chicken kabobs in the oven is a quick and tasty way to enjoy five-star Mediterranean fare all year round. No grill, no problem! Simply follow the instructions below:

A collage of images showing how to bake chicken kabobs in oven.
  1. Prepare the chicken kabob marinade: In a large bowl (one that is big enough to accommodate all the chicken pieces), whisk together the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, dried thyme, dried oregano, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Set it aside.
  2. Dry and cut the chicken: Dry chicken breasts using a sheet of paper towel on both sides. First, cut them into strips and then each strip into 1-inch cubes. 
  3. Marinade: Add the cubed chicken to the bowl of marinade, and toss to ensure each piece of chicken receives an even coating. Cover the bowl of chicken with plastic wrap. Press down on the layer to remove any air, and seal the bowl tightly. Place the meat in the fridge for at least one hour or for up to 12 hours.
  4. Soak the skewers: If you are using wooden skewers, soak them in water 30 minutes before cooking.
  5. Remove the chicken: 20 minutes before assembly, take the marinated chicken out of the fridge.
  6. Preheat the oven: Set the oven to 450 degrees F., and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Set the prepared sheet pan aside.
A collage of images showing how to make skewered chicken in oven.
  1. Assemble the kabobs: Loosely thread the pieces of chicken on each skewer, discarding any excess liquid. If desired, alternate the chicken chunks with onion and peppers. For 2 pounds of chicken, you should have 8 skewers, with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken.
  2. Place the kabobs on the sheet pan: Arrange the assembled kabobs on the parchment-lined baking sheet, ensuring not to crowd the skewers. 
  3. Bake the chicken kabobs: Place the skewered chicken in the oven and bake for 16 minutes, flipping it halfway through baking. When rotating the chicken kabobs, I recommend removing the sheet pan from the oven as it is easier (and safer) to rotate the skewers, especially if you are using wooden ones. 
  4. Broil: Switch the oven to the broil setting and cook the chicken kabobs for one minute on each side, not exceeding a total of two minutes. Check for doneness by inserting a meat thermometer (affiliate link) into the center of one of the chicken chunks. When the meat reaches an internal temperature of 165 degrees F., remove the kabobs from the oven.
  5. Rest and serve: Loosely cover the oven-roasted kabobs with a sheet of aluminum foil, and let them rest for 5-10 minutes. Once the resting process finishes, serve!

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

Oven-baked chicken kabobs are excellent for anyone who enjoys easy meal prep. Prepare these kabobs, and simple meals will be ready throughout the week.

  • Make ahead: To transform this chicken skewer recipe into an easy 30-minute meal, prepare your chicken marinade up to two days in advance. Store the chicken and marinade in an airtight container in the fridge, and assemble your chicken kabobs when you are ready to bake them.
  • Storage: Let your baked shish kabobs reach room temperature before storing them. Then, place the skewers (or, if you prefer, you can remove the meat from the skewers) in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Your leftover kabobs will stay fresh for 2-3 days.
  • Reheat: You can reheat the leftovers in a preheated 350 degrees F. oven for 10-12 minutes or until heated through. If they look dry, you can lightly brush the chicken pieces with a teaspoon of olive oil before placing them in the oven. You can also reheat your chicken kabobs in the microwave for 1-1½ minutes (checking every 30 seconds), until they are warmed thoroughly.

What to Serve with Baked Chicken Kebabs?

When you bake chicken skewers, you’ll unlock countless delectable menus fit for a restaurant. This simple collection has everything to satisfy your table, from savory grains to crisp salads. 

  • Rice and grains: Jasmine rice is a simple classic, while other seasoned options—such as my Herbed Quinoa, Simple Wild Rice Pilaf, and Tabbouleh—perfectly capture the herby, hearty taste of a Mediterranean menu.
  • Pasta: Tender, filling, and simple, orzo is one of my favorite sides to prepare when I bake kabobs in the oven. Looking for a richer, more decadent pairing? Buttery Garlic Pasta is the ultimate crowd-pleaser for sophisticated pasta sides.
  • Yogurt Sauce: Nothing complements baked chicken shish kabobs like a creamy, tangy, and irresistibly rich dipping sauce. My authentic Tzatziki is a classic pairing, while my Dill Yogurt Sauce is a quicker alternative that you can put together in 5 minutes.
  • Salads: If you want a delicious, low-carb pairing, any of my easy quinoa salad recipes will do the trick. Or, if you’re looking for a simple green salad, my Spring Mix Salad and Caprese Pasta Salad only require a handful of pantry-ready ingredients for a garden-fresh side.
Baked chicken skewers in a sheet pan from the top view.

Expert Tips

Cooking chicken kabobs in the oven is an easy way to prepare Instagram-ready meals all week. With these simple tips, your chicken will always come out perfectly juicy and flavorful.

  • Don’t skimp on the marinade time: Thorough marination is the key to giving this baked shish kabob recipe its robust, herbaceous taste. I recommend a minimum of an hour or up to twelve hours for maximum flavor.
  • Soak the skewers: I prefer metal skewers because they heat up quickly, resulting in evenly cooked chicken pieces. However, if you are using bamboo or wooden skewers, be sure to soak them in water for at least 30 minutes before assembling your chicken kabobs to prevent them from burning while cooking.
  • Thread the skewers loosely: When assembling your chicken kabobs, thread them loosely and leave room at both ends so you have something to hold onto while eating. I also recommend shaking off any excess liquid to avoid creating a liquid bath in the baking tray. Finally, discard any extra marinade, as its contact with raw chicken will introduce unwanted bacteria to the mixture.
  • Flip halfway through the baking process: Flipping your baked kebabs will ensure they cook evenly on both sides of the meat. 
  • Finish under the broiler: Keep a close eye on your chicken kabobs while they finish under the broiler. Broilers cook very quickly, and over-cooking your chicken skewers may result in burnt or dry meat. If you’re not a fan of using a broiler, bake your chicken kabobs for an extra five minutes instead. Though, keep in mind that broiled chicken tastes very similar to its grilled version.
  • Uniform-sized chicken: It is important to cut the chicken in equal sizes to ensure even baking. If your pieces are different sizes, they’ll cook unevenly, giving you a mix of over- and under-cooked kabobs. If some portions of your chicken are thinner than others, feel free to fold them during the threading process to make them match the size of their fellow pieces.
  • Check for doneness: I recommend using a meat thermometer (affiliate link) to ensure that they are fully cooked. Poultry should reach 165 degrees F. before it’s safe to eat.
  • Do not skip the resting time: The key to juicy chicken kabobs is to let the skewers rest after removing them from the oven. Cover the baked chicken kabobs with foil for 5-10 minutes so that the meat can reabsorb its juices and ensure maximum flavor.

FAQs

Can you cook chicken kabobs in the oven?

Yes! Oven-roasting chicken skewers is the best way to cook kabobs without a grill. Not only is this process much easier than grilling, but it also gives your chicken a juicy, tender texture and an irresistibly delectable taste.

How to cut chicken breast for kabobs?

Cut your boneless chicken breast into one-inch chunks before threading them through the skewers. Uniform pieces will ensure that your skewers bake evenly.

How long to cook chicken kabobs in the oven?

I recommend baking your chicken shish kabob for 15-16 minutes at 450 degrees F., flipping it halfway through the cooking process. Then, broil your kabobs for one minute on each side to give them a crisp, golden-brown exterior.

What are the ideal temperature and bake time for cooking chicken kabobs in the oven?

The ideal temperature and time is 450 degrees F. for 15 minutes. However, with a two-minute broil, you can cook your skewers in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 35-40 minutes. Or, roast your chicken kabobs at 375 degrees F. for 30-35 minutes and finish with a two-minute broil.

How long to broil chicken skewers?

You should broil chicken kabobs for one minute on each side to ensure optimal browning. However, keep an eye on your chicken during this process to keep them from burning under the broiler’s heat.

How to make chicken kabobs without skewers?

If you don’t have any skewers on hand, you can easily prepare deconstructed chicken kabobs in the oven. First, line a sheet pan with parchment paper, add your marinaded chicken cubes and vegetables, and roast the sheet pan chicken kabobs, flipping the meat and veggies once during baking.

Other Baked Chicken Recipes You Might Like

If you try this Baked Chicken Kabobs recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Oven baked chicken kabobs on a sheet pan from the top view.
Print

Chicken Kabobs in Oven Recipe

No grill? No problem! Baking chicken kabobs in the oven is the best way to cook kabobs without a grill. With this easy recipe, you can enjoy juicy and flavorful chicken skewers all year long.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 4 hours 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 4 hours 40 minutes
Servings 8 skewers
Calories 209kcal

Ingredients

For The Marinade

  • ¼ cup olive oil or avocado oil
  • 2 teaspoons lemon zest
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt plus more for seasoning
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Kabobs

  • 2 lbs boneless skinless chicken breast or boneless skinless chicken thighs cut into 1-inch chunks
  • 1 red onion quartered and sliced into 1-inch thick then separated into single layers
  • 2 green bell peppers seeded and sliced into 1-inch pieces
  • 2 yellow bell peppers seeded and sliced into 1-inch pieces

Instructions

  • Make the marinade: Whisk together olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, dried thyme, dried oregano, garlic powder, kosher salt, and black pepper in a large bowl (one that is large enough to accommodate all the chicken.)
  • Place the cubed chicken into the bowl. Toss to make sure all of the chicken is evenly coated with the marinade.
  • Cover the bowl with plastic wrap, pressing down to remove any air, and seal tightly. Place it in the fridge for at least an hour but up to 12 hours.
  • If you use wooden or bamboo skewers, soak them in water for at least 30 minutes before cooking kabobs in the oven.
  • When ready to assemble, start by preheating the oven to 450 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Loosely thread the chicken chunks on the skewer tapping off any excess marinade, and alternate with the onion and peppers. For 2 pounds of chicken, you should have 8 skewers, with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken. If your chicken is thin, you can fold it when threading on the skewer so all pieces cook evenly.
  • Place the kabobs on the parchment-lined baking sheet in a single layer. If desired, sprinkle them with ½ teaspoon kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon black pepper.
  • Bake for 16 minutes, rotating once during baking. When rotating the skewers, I recommend removing the sheet pan from the oven as it is easier (and safer) to flip the skewers, especially if you are using wooden ones.
  • At the end of 15 minutes, switch the oven to broil and broil* the chicken kabobs for 1 minute on each side (no more than 2 minutes total.) This step helps brown the chicken. Check for doneness by inserting a thermometer into one of the cubes. It should be done when it reaches 165 degrees F.
  • Remove kebabs from the oven, cover loosely with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5 to 10 minutes. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 skewers, with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken. The approximate nutritional values listed below are per skewer.
  • Broiling: * Broiling chicken kabobs at the last minute help mimic the flavors of grilled chicken kabobs. However, if you prefer not to broil them, I recommend extending the cooking time in the oven to 20 minutes or until the internal temperature of the chicken reaches 165 degrees F.
  • Make ahead: To transform this baked chicken skewer recipe into an easy 30-minute meal, marinate the chicken up to two days in advance. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge and thread your skewers when you are ready to bake them.
  • Storage: Let your kabobs reach room temperature before storing them. Then, place the skewers (or, if you prefer, you can remove the meat from the skewers) in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Your leftover kabobs will stay fresh for 2-3 days.
  • Reheat: You can reheat the leftovers in a preheated 350 degrees F. oven for 10-12 minutes or until heated through. If they look dry, you can lightly brush the chicken pieces with a teaspoon of olive oil before placing them in the oven. Alternatively, you can warm them up in a grill pan until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 209kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 461mg | Potassium: 519mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 104IU | Vitamin C: 62mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Chicken Kabobs in Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kabobs-in-oven/feed/ 4
Roasted Red Onions https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-red-onions-with-walnut-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-red-onions-with-walnut-salsa/#comments Mon, 22 May 2023 19:52:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=5289 Here at Foolproof Living, we love roasting vegetables. If you feel the same way, be sure to also check out our Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Asparagus, and Roasted Butternut Squash recipes and add them into your weekly meal prep. Ingredients It’s incredible how delicious food can be with few ingredients and a simple cooking method. You only need a little oil and a pinch of salt and pepper to bring out...

The post Roasted Red Onions appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Here at Foolproof Living, we love roasting vegetables. If you feel the same way, be sure to also check out our Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Asparagus, and Roasted Butternut Squash recipes and add them into your weekly meal prep.

Roasted red onion slices in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

It’s incredible how delicious food can be with few ingredients and a simple cooking method. You only need a little oil and a pinch of salt and pepper to bring out the flavors while cooking red onions to get that gorgeous caramelization. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for baking red onions from the top view.
  • Red onions: When you’re at the grocery store, look for large onions that are free firm and free of bruises with their peppery skin still intact.
  • Extra virgin olive oil: I like to use extra virgin olive oil (or another oil with a high smoke point) to get that nice caramelization for your roasted onion slices. Another good option that can withstand high cooking temperatures is avocado oil. 
  • Seasonings: The beauty of this recipe is that you only need a tiny bit of seasoning to get a lot of flavor. Kosher salt and black pepper will do the job of bringing out the natural sweetness of red onions. 

Optional Add-Ins 

You may love the taste of your roasted red onions using only the simple ingredients above. However, there are many great ways to incorporate other ingredients to make this recipe work for whatever you’re cooking it with. Here are some options below:

  • Garlic Powder: Like garlic, onions are part of the allium family. You can season the onions with a dash or two of garlic powder for a savory note. 
  • Balsamic vinegar: Tossing them with a tablespoon of balsamic vinegar is an easy way to infuse them with an even deeper flavor, thereby taking this easy recipe to the next level. Balsamic roasted red onions are especially ideal for topping salads.
  • Spices: You can use a variety of spices for your baked red onion recipe, depending on what you’re making them with. Dried thyme, oregano, and rosemary are good choices for savory dishes. 
  • Brown Sugar: It is optional, but you can add a teaspoon of brown sugar (or coconut sugar) if you want sweeter onions. The sugar will enhance the caramelization and help release more of its juices. 
  • Fresh Herbs: I love finishing a dish with fresh herbs. The brightness of the herbs balances the deep roasted taste of the onions. Try fresh thyme, dill, parsley, or anything else you like.

How To Cook Red Onions in The Oven?

Cooking red onions is so quick, you’ll wonder how you’ve never tried it before. Your new favorite topping will be ready to serve on the dinner table in less than half an hour. Here’s the best way to make this tasty dish:

  1. Preheat the oven: To start, preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper, and set aside.
Red onions cut and sliced on a cutting board.
  1. Cut the onion: You have two options when cutting the onion. One is to slice them into rings and keep them whole. The other option is to slice them into rings, cut them in half, and separate them. Remember to peel off the papery skin before slicing. I recommend cutting them into ¼-inch-thick slices for roasting. 
Red onion slices cut and seasoned according to the way they were cut.
  1. Season the onions based on how you cut them: 
    • Cut into rings: If you slice them into rings, place them evenly on your baking sheet. Use a brush to lightly coat them with extra virgin olive oil on each side, and sprinkle them with salt and pepper (optional).
    • Thinly sliced: Separate the red onion slices and place them in a medium-sized bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Gently toss them together. Spread them on your sheet pan in a single layer.
Baked red onions after they came out of the oven.
  1. Roast: Place your sliced red onions in the oven. For rings, flip them halfway through, or give them a good stir for thin slices. Cook for about 20 minutes until soft and turned lightly golden brown.
  2. Serve: Take them out of the oven, and let them cool for a few minutes before using them in your recipe.

Storing and Reheating Instructions

We love the fact that baked red onion is a condiment that stores well. Here’s how we store and reheat leftovers:

  • Storing: Let your oven-roasted sliced onions cool to room temperature. Keep them fresh in an airtight container and refrigerate for 3-4 days.
  • Reheating: You can enjoy this recipe either hot or cold, but if you’d prefer it hot, you can reheat it in three ways. 
    • Oven: Put the roasted onions in an oven-proof baking dish with a splash of water. Roast them in preheated 350 degrees F. oven until heated through for about 8-10 minutes.
    • Sautee: Add the red caramelized onions to a saucepan with oil and sautee until thoroughly warmed.
    • Microwave: Place onions in a microwave-safe container with a splash of water. Heat in 30-second increments, stirring each time, until heated through.

How to Use Roasted Red Onions in Your Daily Cooking?

There are countless ways you can use this condiment. The real question is, what don’t they go with? Here are a few uses for red onions:

  • Salads: Caramelized onions pair beautifully with salads, especially if you use cheese in your salads. This La Scala Salad recipe is a prime example. The sweet tang from the onions is absolutely heavenly with feta or goat cheese. You can use butter lettuce or spring mix like in my Goat Cheese and Beet Salad. Another option is to replace the raw red onions in this Friends Salad recipe with cooked red onions. 
  • Pizzas & Taco Topping: Roasting onion to add on top of pizza will please any crowd. They’re also a great topping option for taco recipes like my Black Bean, Quinoa Tacos, and Beef Brisket Tacos.
  • Burgers, Sandwiches, and Wraps: Red onion is a staple for burgers, sandwiches, and wraps, so why not swap them out with its roasted version? Sink your teeth into a Guacamole Bacon Burger or Greek Pita Wraps topped with roasted red onion slices!
  • Cooked Grains and Grain Bowls: Grain bowls are fun because the toppings are limitless. I love adding roasted onions to dishes like my Lemon Quinoa. Have fun with a variation like roasted balsamic onions for this Sweet Potato Quinoa Bowl. They provide the overall dish with a lovely texture and a slightly sweet bite.
  • Dips and salsas: These baked red onions can be the final colorful touch to dishes like Peach Salsa and Pineapple Mango Salsa. 
Oven roasted red onions on a plate with a fork on the side.

Expert Tips:

While the recipe for roasted red onions is pretty straightforward, there are a few things that we’d like to mention so that you can get the best results on your first try:

  • Slice them evenly: It is important that the onion slices are cut evenly (about ¼-inch thickness) to ensure even baking. You can cut them thicker but again, make sure they are even in size.
  • Coat with oil and season well: Take your time when coating the slices with olive oil and seasoning them with salt and pepper. This is an important step in making sure that they are perfectly caramelized and ready to use in recipes.
  • Do not overcrowd the pan: It is important to spread them on a single layer when baking. If you are making this recipe for a crowd (using more onions), we recommend using two baking sheets or cooking them in batches.
  • Flip/Rotate: Do not forget to stir (or flip) the onion slices as they are roasting. Doing so ensures even browning and prevents them from burning.
  • Customize: Feel free to make it your own and customize it to fit the dish you intend to incorporate them into. Enhance the flavors by using various spices and fresh herbs to complement your meal.
Can you roast red onions?

Yes, you can. Roasting red onions may make anyone who doesn’t like onions an onion lover. This is because the baking process softens the pungent flavor of raw onions, bringing out their natural sweetness.

How do you cut a red onion for roasting?

When roasting red onions, you can cut them in two ways:

1- Cut into rings: You can cut the onions into ¼ inch rings or disks. I suggest cutting them this way burgers, sandwiches, or as a side dish. 
2- Thinly sliced: You can also slice them thinly. To do so, cut the onion in half and then slice each half into ¼-inch-thick half-moon slices. Red onion slices are perfect for topping salads, grain bowls, and tacos.

Are roasted red onions healthy?

Cooked red onions have several impressive health benefits. These vegetables are known for their potent antioxidants and healing properties. According to Healthline, they’re loaded with vitamin C and potassium and promote digestive health. So yes, adding a little red onion to your lunch or dinner is an easy way to up the nutritional value of your meals.

How long should I roast onions at 400 f degrees?

Cooking times may vary based on the thickness of your onion slices. However, it takes about 20-25 minutes to cook ¼-inch thick red onion slices in the oven.

Can I use this method for red onion wedges?

Yes, you can. However, depending on the size of your onion, it could take longer to roast them. Use visual cues for doneness. They are done when they are softened, look caramelized, and turned lightly golden browned.

Other Roasted Vegetables You Might Like

If you try this Roasted Red Onions recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted red onion slices are in a casserole dish from the top view.
Print

Roasted Red Onions Recipe

Roasted Red Onions are a great flavor booster for salads, tacos, sandwiches, and grains. This 3-ingredient vegan recipe also makes a tasty side dish.
Course Condiment, Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 293kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large red onion
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper (or foil) and set it aside.
  • Peel the onions by removing the outer layer and inner papery skin. When cutting, you can either slice them in rings (and keep them whole) or split them into half-moon slices (and separate them.) Either way, for even baking, we recommend cutting them into ¼ inch slices.
  • Season them depending on how you cut them:
    – Cut into rings: Place the red onion rings onto the prepared sheet pan on a single layer. Brush them on both sides with extra virgin olive oil and sprinkle them with salt and pepper (if using.)
    – Sliced thinly: Gently break apart the slices and place them in a medium-sized bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss to combine. Spread on the prepared baking sheet on a single layer.
  • Roast, flipping (if you are cooking them as rings) or stirring (if you are baking them as thin slices) until softened and caramelized, for about 20 minutes*.
  • Remove from the oven, and let them cool slightly before using in your recipe.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 to ½ cups of roasted sliced red onions.
  • Baking time: During the recipe testing, we found out that the roasting time stayed the same for both cutting methods.
  • Storing: Let them cool to room temperature, place them in an airtight container and store them in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Reheating: You can enjoy this recipe either hot or cold, but if you prefer to serve them hot you can reheat them using one of the three methods below:
    • Oven: Put the leftovers in an oven-proof baking dish with a splash of water. Roast them in preheated 350 degrees F. oven until heated through for about 8-10 minutes.
    • Saute: Add the red caramelized onions to a saucepan with a little bit of oil (or water) and saute until thoroughly warmed.
    • Microwave: Place onions in a microwave-safe container with a splash of water. Heat in 30-second increments, stirring each time, until heated through.
  • Not a fan of red onions? You can use this method/recipe to roast yellow onions as well.

Nutrition

Calories: 293kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 1168mg | Potassium: 168mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 5IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 0.5mg

The post Roasted Red Onions appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-red-onions-with-walnut-salsa/feed/ 12
Honey Lime Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/honey-lime-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/honey-lime-dressing/#respond Thu, 11 May 2023 16:00:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67142 I know it is convenient to buy salad dressing from the store, but once you learn to make your own, you will never want to spend money on dressings that are usually made with low-quality ingredients. Plus, most homemade dressings can also be used as a marinade for meat and vegetables, and this honey lime vinaigrette dressing is no exception. The good news is that our recipe archives have so...

The post Honey Lime Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I know it is convenient to buy salad dressing from the store, but once you learn to make your own, you will never want to spend money on dressings that are usually made with low-quality ingredients. Plus, most homemade dressings can also be used as a marinade for meat and vegetables, and this honey lime vinaigrette dressing is no exception.

The good news is that our recipe archives have so many dressings to choose from. For a simple yet satisfying option, try our Lemon Olive Oil Dressing, or indulge in the rich flavors of Balsamic Lemon Vinaigrette for a more elevated taste experience. And if you like spicy food, our Chili Lime Dressing is a must-try!

Person holding a jar of honey lime vinaigrette in her hand with fresh lime around it.

Ingredients

All you need is 5 simple ingredients for this honey lime dressing. And guess what? You probably already have everything in your pantry. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for lime dressing for salad from the top view.
  • Extra virgin olive oil: Olive oil is the base of this honey-lime vinaigrette. However, a neutral oil like avocado oil can also be used.
  • Fresh lime juice and lime zest: Every dressing needs an acid! For the best lime vinaigrette recipe, be sure to use fresh lime. Keep in mind that it is best to zest the lime before squeezing it.  
  • Honey: Honey is the perfect way to balance the tartness of the lime. However, for a vegan version, you can use maple syrup instead.
  • Kosher Salt: A pinch of salt will bring out these wonderful flavors.

Optional Add-Ins

While the basic honey lime dressing recipe has more neutral flavors ideal for sweet fruity salads, adding just a few basic ingredients can easily turn it into a dressing (or sauce) for savory salads, grain bowls, and more. Below are a few add-ins to give your sweet, savory, and spicy dishes a pop of flavor:

  • Garlic: One small fresh garlic clove would be a nice addition to any savory salad. However, in a pinch, garlic powder would also work.
  • Shallot: A small shallot or a quarter cup of thinly sliced red onion adds another layer of flavor.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh cilantro is a great addition to any Mexican-style dressing; this one is no exception. Add a teaspoon of chopped fresh cilantro to turn this into a delectable honey lime cilantro dressing (just like I did in my Black Bean and Quinoa Salad) to use in any of your favorite Southwest-flavored salads. Or, use a few fresh mint leaves for a refreshing flavor twist when incorporating it into your favorite fruit salad.
  • Spices: Add a small amount of ground cumin and/or chili powder to enhance the depth of flavor and add warmth and complexity to any of your favorite Mexican salads with lime dressing.
  • Balsamic vinegar: Add a splash of balsamic vinegar for an additional layer of flavor! Thanks to balsamic vinegar’s rich, sweet, and tangy taste, balsamic lime dressing is a luxurious version of this basic lime juice salad dressing perfect for your next summer or winter fruit salad.
  • Dijon Mustard: Not only is it a natural emulsifier, but adding a small amount (½ to 1 teaspoon) of Dijon mustard can help balance the sweetness from honey and the acidity of the lime juice in the dressing.

How To Make Honey Lime Dressing?

You can make a jar of this simple honey lime dressing with only 5 minutes of hands-on time. Juice, zest, whisk, and pour. Here is how to make lime vinaigrette in just 4 simple steps:

Two photos side by side showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Combine: Lime zest, lime juice, honey, and salt in a small bowl and whisk together. If you decide to use garlic, shallot, or ground cumin, you can add it here. 
  2. Emulsify until creamy: Slowly pour in the extra virgin olive oil and constantly whisk until emulsified.
  3. Season: Give it a taste and adjust it to your liking.
  4. Pour: Drizzle it over your favorite fresh salad or store it in a mason jar and refrigerate for later.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

The best part of this honey lime vinaigrette recipe is that it keeps well in the fridge, so you can make it ahead and refrigerate it until you are ready to use it. 

To store, pour the lime honey dressing into a mason jar (or an airtight container) and keep it in the fridge for up to one week.

How To Use Lime Honey Dressing

Wake up your taste buds with the many ways to use this recipe. Try fruit salad with honey lime dressing or marinade chicken before grilling for some mouth-watering goodness. Here are a few ways to use it:

  • Fruit Salads: This dressing is my favorite way to bring together a brunch side dish like summer fruit salad with strawberries, blueberries, pineapple, red grapes, kiwi, or other tropical fruit you like. 
  • Savory Salads: This honey lime salad dressing is the perfect compliment whether your salad is the main course or the side. Pour it over leafy greens like spring mix, butter lettuce, arugula, or kale for a natural sweetness with a kick of citrus. Mix with nuts, cheese, and beans for a sweet and savory combination. It’s my first choice when making Mexican-inspired salads and the ultimate last step for my Southwest Chicken Salad and Corn and Black Bean Salad.
  • Grain Bowls: Another way to use this flavorful honey and lime juice recipe is for grain bowls. It perfectly soaks into couscous, bulgur, and quinoa mixed in with roasted veggies and proteins. You’ve got to try it on my Southwest Quinoa Bowl or even this Caribbean Jerk Chicken Bowl!
  • Marinades: This recipe has more intent than just honey lime dressing for salad. I also use it for marinating chicken, pork, beef, and seafood. The acid from the lime tenderizes the meat, and the honey will caramelize it when cooked. This dressing is one of my go-to recipes when I make Grilled Mahi Mahi and Grilled Shrimp Skewers. I like playing with the ingredients by adding paprika for the Mahi Mahi Marinade and parsley for the Shrimp Marinade.  
Person drizzling a watermelon salad with honey lime dressing from the top view.

Expert Tips 

Check out some of these tips to nail this delicious salad dressing recipe the first time. Here are a few expert tips for the best results:

  • Use fresh ingredients: As with any recipe that uses minimal ingredients, prioritizing using fresh, high-quality ingredients is crucial to achieving great results. You’ll create the best honey-lime dressing that stands out by squeezing fresh limes and using high-quality olive oil.
  • Seasoning: Salt is an important addition to bring out the citrusy and sweet flavors of lime and honey, so do not skip using it (even if you are using this honey lime sauce in a fruit salad.) Additionally, as it is with any recipe, it is best to give it a taste and adjust the amount of seasoning based on your taste buds and the recipe you are using it in.
  • Change it up according to your recipe: This basic Mexican lime dressing can easily be adapted to complement the flavors of the recipe you are using it in. So, take advantage of the use of optional add-ins and make it your own.
  • Emulsify the dressing: While it is convenient to combine all the ingredients in a mason jar and give it a shake, the secret to making an ultra-creamy honey lime dressing lies in the two-step process we are using here. Slowly pouring olive oil into the lime and honey mixture while constantly mixing it ensures perfect emulsification resulting in a smooth dressing. If you skip this step, the salad dressing will not be as creamy.
  • Use a blender or food processor: If you are making a large quantity of this recipe, you can use a blender or food processor.
  • Let it marinate: For maximum flavor, let it marinate for a minimum of 30 minutes to a few hours. I like to let it sit overnight to allow everything to sink in. 
  • Shake well: Dressings separate with time, so if you decide to make it ahead of time, give it a solid shake before using. 

Other Salad Dressings You Might Like

It is no secret that a salad is as delicious as its dressing. If you agree, you will love our collection of salad dressing recipes below:

If you try this Honey Lime Dressing recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A batch of freshly made honey lime salad dressing in a jar from the top view.
Print

Honey Lime Dressing Recipe

This honey lime dressing recipe is a versatile savory vinaigrette you can make with just a few basic ingredients. Endlessly customizable with a number of optional add-ins, it can be used as a drizzle for fruit or savory salads or as a marinade for meats.
Course Salad Dressing
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 161kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 teaspoon lime zest
  • ¼ cup lime juice ~ 2 limes (freshly squeezed)
  • 2 tablespoons honey
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

Optional Add-Ins:

  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 small shallot or ¼ cup thinly sliced red onion
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cumin

Instructions

  • Whisk together lime zest, lime juice, honey, and salt in a small bowl. If using, add in the garlic, shallot, and ground cumin.
  • Slowly pour in the extra virgin olive oil while whisking constantly until emulsified.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in, if necessary.
  • Use it right away or store it in a mason jar in the refrigerator up to a week.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields approximately 1/2 cup of honey lime dressing.
  • Storage: You can store the dressing in the fridge for up to 7 days.
  • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste and add more if necessary before using it in your recipe. 
  • If you make it ahead, be sure to give it a good shake before using it.
  • While it is convenient to combine all the ingredients in a mason jar and give it a shake, the secret to making an ultra-creamy honey lime dressing lies in the two-step process we are using here. Slowly pouring olive oil into the lime and honey mixture while constantly mixing it ensures perfect emulsification resulting in a smooth dressing. So, for the most creamy dressing, do not skip this part.

Nutrition

Calories: 161kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 50mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 10IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.3mg

The post Honey Lime Dressing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/honey-lime-dressing/feed/ 0
Mediterranean Lemon Chicken https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-lemon-chicken/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-lemon-chicken/#comments Tue, 09 May 2023 17:05:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14063 Chicken gets an upgrade in this gorgeous lemony Mediterranean chicken recipe. All you need is your favorite Dutch Oven and a little under an hour. Get ready for a delicious Mediterranean-inspired feast that is also gluten-free and low-carb diet friendly. And if you are looking for more Mediterranean-inspired chicken recipes, you might like Chicken with Bulgur, Greek Yogurt Chicken, or Chicken Pita Wraps. Ingredients Mediterranean baked chicken wouldn’t be complete...

The post Mediterranean Lemon Chicken appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Chicken gets an upgrade in this gorgeous lemony Mediterranean chicken recipe. All you need is your favorite Dutch Oven and a little under an hour. Get ready for a delicious Mediterranean-inspired feast that is also gluten-free and low-carb diet friendly.

And if you are looking for more Mediterranean-inspired chicken recipes, you might like Chicken with Bulgur, Greek Yogurt Chicken, or Chicken Pita Wraps.

Baked Mediterranean chicken with lemon is in a skillet from the top view.

Ingredients

Mediterranean baked chicken wouldn’t be complete without a simple list of ingredients. All we need is a handful of ingredients, including:

Ingredients for this recipe are placed in bowls from the top view.
  • Chicken: Any chicken would work here, including bone-in chicken thighs, bone-in chicken breasts, skinless chicken thighs, boneless skinless chicken breasts, or a mix and match of any of those listed.
  • Olive oil
  • Potatoes: Yukon gold potatoes are my favorite, but any waxy yellow or red potato would also work.
  • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves are the best and add tons of savory flavor.
  • Chicken broth: Either pick up a box of your favorite low-sodium chicken stock from the store or use your own Homemade Chicken Broth.
  • Olives: I used Castelvatrano green olives for their buttery richness, but any green olive, Kalamata olives, or black olives would all work. Omit the olives completely if you are not a fan, or swap them out for artichoke hearts instead.
  • Lemon: Use fresh lemon juice for the best flavor, and add some fresh lemon slices during cooking so that the flavor of the lemon rind infuses into the chicken. If you really want to amp up the lemon flavor, have a few extra lemon wedges on the side for serving.
  • Thyme: Fresh thyme is best for its special citrus-piney aroma, but dried thyme can also be used.  Fresh oregano is another popular herb to serve in this lemon chicken with olives recipe. However, keep in mind that the flavor is very strong when compared to dried oregano. Use 2-3 sprigs of fresh oregano or 1 tablespoon dried oregano.
  • Seasonings: We are using basic kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper for this recipe. However, if you have some on hand, you can sprinkle the chicken with our Mediterranean Chicken Seasoning.

How to Make Mediterranean Lemon Chicken?

This easy chicken with lemon and olives recipe comes together in one skillet, making this a healthy chicken dinner you can make any night of the week. Simply:

Person showing how to season chicken thighs in a collage of photos.
  1. Season chicken: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. Pat dry chicken thighs (or chicken breasts)  with a sheet of paper towel. Season all over with salt and pepper.
A collage of images showing how to make this healthy lemon chicken recipe.
  1. Brown chicken: Set an oven-proof skillet over medium heat and add the olive oil. Place chicken, skin-side down, and sear until golden brown on the first side, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and continue cooking the chicken on the other side for another 3-4 minutes.
  2. Add vegetables and broth: Scatter the potatoes and garlic evenly over the chicken and pour in the chicken broth. Turn it up to medium-high heat and bring to a boil.
  3. Add olives, lemon and herbs: Once the chicken broth has come to a boil, add the olives, lemon slices and thyme.
  4. Bake: Transfer the skillet to the oven and bake for 20-25 minutes or until the chicken is cooked through. 
  5. Serve: Serve the pieces of chicken, scooping some of the sauce and lemon slices directly on top for a delicious meal.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

This Mediterranean Chicken Bake can be stored in the fridge and reheated to enjoy throughout the week. Here’s how to do it:

  • Storage: Bring your lemon chicken to room temperature. Transfer into an airtight container and store in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat individual portions in the microwave in 30-second intervals. Or, reheat in a skillet on the stove, with plenty of the chicken juices or a splash of water, until warmed through.

What to Serve It With?

This Lemon olive chicken recipe is a full meal by itself when served with a glass of white wine. However, you can easily turn it into a feast by pairing it with one of the dishes below:

Mediterranean chicken bake served in plates garnished with lemon slices.

Expert Tips

With one bite of this Mediterranean lemon chicken, you will understand why we believe that this recipe will become a staple in your weekly menu. Below are a few helpful tips to ensure that your chicken is cooked to perfection and bursting with flavor:

  • Use an ovenproof skillet: I used my Le Creuset Braiser (affiliate link), which I use for just about all of my one-pot meals. It goes from stovetop to oven in a flash. However, if you do not own an ovenproof skillet, first brown the chicken in a cast-iron skillet (or large nonstick skillet), then transfer to a small baking dish (or baking sheet) to finish cooking in the oven. 
  • Do not skip the browning of the chicken: While it might come as an extra step, searing the chicken helps build flavor and give the overall dish a deeper and more complex taste. Plus, the leftover little bits of the caramelized meat at the bottom of the pan mixed with potatoes create rich, savory flavors as they bake in the oven.
  • Make it your own: Play around with the combination of olives and/or herbs to give it your personal touch. Fresh parsley, fresh dill, fresh basil, or a combination of all three would make an excellent addition.
  • Check for doneness. The cooking time will vary based on the thickness of the chicken. Your chicken is fully cooked when the internal temperature registers 165 degrees F on an instant-read thermometer when inserted at the thickest part of the meat without touching the bone.
  • Serving Suggestion: Be sure to scoop some of the juices in the pan directly over the chicken when serving. I also garnish it with bruised olives and a few caramelized lemon slices for a visually stunning meal.

Other Weeknight Chicken Dinners You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mediterranean Lemon Chicken recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mediterranean lemon chicken bake in a skillet from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Lemon Chicken Recipe

This Mediterranean Lemon Chicken is the dictionary definition of a wholesome and visually appealing dinner made in one-pot. Ready in less than an hour, it is the perfect weeknight dinner or weekend feast.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4 Servings
Calories 583kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 1/4 pounds bone-in skin on chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2/3 pound Yukon gold potatoes washed and halved (or quartered, depending on the size)
  • 6 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 cup chicken broth
  • ½ cup large pitted green olives such as Castelvatrano
  • 1 lemon sliced
  • 6-7 sprigs of fresh thyme

Instructions

  • Prep chicken: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. Pat dry chicken thighs with paper towels. Season well with salt and pepper on both sides.
  • Brown chicken: Heat olive oil in an oven-proof skillet set over medium heat. Sear the chicken, skin-side down, until browned, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and cook the other side for another 3-4 minutes. Do your best not to move them so much. Chicken should release once it is properly seared.
  • Add vegetables and broth: Add in the potatoes and garlic and spread them around the chicken. Pour in the chicken broth. Bring it to a boil.
  • Add the rest: Add in the olives. Distribute the slices of lemon and thyme evenly over the chicken and potatoes.
  • Bake: Transfer the skillet to the oven. Bake until chicken is fully cooked and tender, 20-25 minutes.
  • Serve: Serve immediately alongside your favorite rice, bulgur, quinoa, or salad.

Video

Notes

  • Yield: Depending on the size of your chicken thighs, this recipe yields 5-6 thighs with plenty of potatoes to serve with on the side. 
  • Do not skip the browning of the chicken: While it might come as an extra step, searing the chicken helps build flavor and give the overall dish a deeper and more complex taste. Plus, the leftover little bits of the caramelized meat at the bottom of the pan mixed with potatoes create rich, savory flavors as they bake in the oven.
  • Plating: When plating, be sure to drizzle the juices over the chicken and potatoes.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature before storing them. Once cooled, transfer them into an airtight container and store them in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat individual portions in the microwave in 30-second intervals. Or, reheat in a skillet on the stove, with plenty of the chicken juices or a splash of water, until warmed through.
  • This recipe is adapted from Martha Steward’s Braised Chicken with Potatoes, Olives and Lemon recipe with minor changes.

Nutrition

Calories: 583kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 40g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 212mg | Sodium: 969mg | Potassium: 874mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 240IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Mediterranean Lemon Chicken appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-lemon-chicken/feed/ 34
Chickpea Salad with Tuna https://foolproofliving.com/chickpea-tuna-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/chickpea-tuna-salad/#comments Wed, 03 May 2023 16:46:38 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=18721 If you never thought of making your tuna salad with chickpeas, then I have got you covered with an exceptional recipe that you will find yourself making over and over again. Protein-rich tuna and fiber-rich chickpeas flavored with homemade salad dressing is the perfect quick lunch recipe. Whether you want to turn it into a Tuna Chickpea Sandwich or keep it light over a bed of greens, there are so...

The post Chickpea Salad with Tuna appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you never thought of making your tuna salad with chickpeas, then I have got you covered with an exceptional recipe that you will find yourself making over and over again. Protein-rich tuna and fiber-rich chickpeas flavored with homemade salad dressing is the perfect quick lunch recipe.

Whether you want to turn it into a Tuna Chickpea Sandwich or keep it light over a bed of greens, there are so many possibilities. If you are a tuna fan, be sure to check out this Tuna Melt Sandwich and Tuna Steak Salad to incorporate more seafood into your life, too.

Chickpea Tuna Salad in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients

I like to think of this garbanzo bean tuna salad as a nice mix of pantry staples and fresh ingredients from the grocery store. The list of ingredients has been broken down into the dressing and the salad for ease.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

To make the salad dressing, you will need:

  • Mayonnaise: I like to use vegan mayo made with avocado oil (affiliate link.) However, feel free to use a brand you like.
  • Extra virgin olive oil
  • Dijon mustard: You can use Dijon mustard, stone ground, or whole grain mustard.
  • Lemon juice: As it is in any other salad recipe, freshly squeezed lemon juice provides the best flavor, and this garbanzo tuna salad is no exception.
  • Red wine vinegar: A splash of vinegar helps with brightening up the flavors. You can also use apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: When making salad dressing, I prefer chopped fresh garlic, but in a pinch, garlic powder would also work.
  • Kosher salt + black pepper

To assemble the salad, you will need:

  • Chickpeas: I used canned chickpeas as they are convenient. Of course, you can cook your own chickpeas for this recipe. If you used canned beans, make sure to drain and rinse beforehand.
  • Canned tuna: When buying tuna, look for sustainably sourced wild-caught tuna in water. This has exceptional flavor, and the tuna will naturally flake when mixing the salad. Keep in mind if you use tuna packed in olive oil, you will have to adjust the quantity of olive oil in the recipe.
  • Tomatoes: You can use grape, Roma, or cherry tomatoes.
  • Celery stalks
  • Green onions: Alternatively, you can also use a thinly sliced small red onion, or Pickled Red Onions would also work.
  • Yellow bell pepper: I used yellow peppers, but any color of bell peppers would work in this recipe.
  • Cucumber: Persian cucumber has a great crunch and holds up well, but a regular cucumber or English cucumber can also be used.

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

  • Mayo substitutes: Not a fan of Mayo? Try an equal amount of Greek yogurt, mashed avocado (or a few tablespoons of Creamy Avocado Dressing), or store-bought pesto. A few tablespoons of this Pesto Salad Dressing could be a wonderful substitution too. If none of those work for you, use my all-purpose Lemon Dressing or Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette instead.
  • Add hard-boiled eggs: Incorporating a few eggs into this recipe is a great way to increase the protein content. The addition of eggs also gives it another layer of texture. When preparing them for the salad, be sure to dice them into bite-sized pieces.
  • Add vegetables: Add a handful of sweet vegetables, like cooked corn or green peas, or make it a Mediterranean chickpea tuna salad with drained and rinsed artichoke hearts.
  • Fresh herbs: Finish it with a sprinkle of fresh dill, fresh parsley, fresh basil, or a combination of all three.
  • Cheese (optional): Adding a small amount of crumbled feta cheese would give it a nice creamy flavor. 
  • Dill pickle relish (optional): The briny flavors of pickled relish, whether it is dill pickles or chopped Kalamata olives, or pickled red cabbage, would brighten up the flavors of the overall salad.
  • Salad greens (optional): Adding a handful of arugula, baby spinach, and spring mix or serving the salad on a bed of lettuce is an easy way to up the nutritional value of this simple salad.

How to Make Chickpea Tuna Salad?

This tuna garbanzo bean salad recipe is made in a few easy steps. Simply:

A collage of images showing how to make Tuna and chickpea salad.
  1. Make the dressing: Whisk mayonnaise, extra virgin olive oil, Dijon mustard, lemon juice, vinegar, garlic, salt, and pepper in a small bowl or measuring cup.
  2. Prepare the salad: Place the chickpeas, tuna, tomatoes, celery, scallions ( or sliced red onion), bell pepper, cucumber, and tomatoes in a large salad bowl.
  3. Toss: Drizzle over the dressing and gently toss to combine. 
  4. Serve: If you have the time, marinate for at least 30 minutes before serving.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

This simple chickpea tuna salad is the perfect lunch salad that you can incorporate into your weekly meal plan. I’d like to make it over the weekend as it stores well. Here’s how I like to do it:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the tuna salad as directed. If it is a part of your weekly meal prep lunches, divide it amongst small single-serve airtight containers and keep them in the fridge until ready to eat. With that being said, I usually do not keep tuna past the 3-day mark to avoid spoilage. 
  • Storage: Leftover tuna salad with garbanzo beans will keep in an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid for 2-3 days. If you are making this salad using greens, keep in mind that greens such as butter lettuce, and spring mix will wilt quicker than more sturdy greens such as arugula or kale.

What to Serve It With?

Tuna chickpea salad is wonderful all its own, but it can easily be elevated to the next level by serving it in any of the following ways:

  • Bread: Serve it with crusty bread, like Olive Bread, or turn it into a crostini platter with toasted French baguette, cheese, and fruit. I also love it with soft pita bread or pita chips for scooping.
  • Serve it with Grains: Make it the main dish by serving it with a side dish of cooked Quinoa or Bulgur wheat.
  • Make it a side dish with a bowl of soup: Enjoy it throughout the summer months alongside a bowl of Basil Tomato Soup or Cold Cucumber Soup.
  • Turn it into a Sandwich: Layer it between a few slices of your favorite bread (I like pita bread or brioche) or stuff it into a pita bread to make Tuna Chickpea Sandwich, along with green leaf lettuce and a tomato slice.
Tuna chickpea salad placed in small bowls from the top view.

Expert Tips

While this recipe requires only a few steps and a handful of pantry ingredients, we wanted to share a few expert tips to help you make the best chickpea tuna salad recipe on your first try:

  • Good quality tuna: Look for a high quality (preferably wild caught), sustainably sourced can of tuna in water. This has exceptional flavor and texture.
  • Rinse chickpeas: Make sure to drain and rinse the can of chickpeas to get rid of preservatives and excess salt (or purchase a can with no salt if watching your salt content). 
  • Mash chickpeas: Alternatively, you can mash the chickpeas with a potato masher for a richer and creamy consistency.
  • Taste the dressing for seasoning. The dressing is not too heavy on the salt, so be sure to taste test first and adjust it to your liking.
  • Let it marinate. I highly recommend marinating the salad for at least 30 minutes before serving, either at room temperature or in the fridge, as this helps the ingredients to marry together.

FAQs

Which canned tuna is best for tuna salad?

I suggest using sustainably sourced, wild-caught tuna packed in water for the best flavor.

Why is chickpea salad good for you?

A simple chickpea salad like this one is good for you because it is packed with healthy fats, protein-rich chickpeas and tuna, and fiber-rich vegetables. Not to mention, it is super filling and easy to make.

Other Lunch Salads You Might Also Like:

Need more inspiration for creative lunch salads that are also on the healthier side and packed with protein? Here are a few more ideas:

If you try this Chickpea Salad with Tuna recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Chickpea Salad with tuna in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Chickpea Salad with Tuna Recipe

This Chickpea Salad with Tuna recipe is the perfect weekday lunch. Made with canned tuna and packed with veggies, this is a quick and easy to make salad recipe that is also meal prep friendly.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Resting time (optional) 30 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 267kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing

  • ¼ cup mayonnaise or Greek Yogurt
  • 1 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoons Dijon mustard
  • cup freshly squeezed lemon juice
  • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Salad

  • 1 can chickpeas 15 ounces – drained and rinsed
  • 1 can solid packed Tuna in water 5-ounces – drained
  • 1 cup tomatoes – grape or cherry; approximately 5 ounces – halved
  • 3 tablespoons chopped celery about 1 stalk
  • 2 tablespoons chopped scallions or sliced red onions
  • 1 small yellow bell pepper chopped
  • 2 Persian cucumbers sliced and quartered

Optional Add Ins:

  • 1 tablespoon dill pickle relish or olives- roughly chopped
  • 1 cup canned artichokes quartered
  • 1 avocado sliced
  • 2 cups salad greens such as arugula or spring mix – loosely packed

Instructions

  • Prepare the dressing: In a bowl or large measuring cup, whisk mayonnaise, extra virgin olive oil, Dijon mustard, lemon juice, vinegar, garlic, and salt and pepper. Taste for seasoning and add more if needed. Set aside while preparing the salad.
  • Prepare the salad: Place the chickpeas, tuna, tomatoes, celery, scallions, bell pepper, cucumber, and tomatoes.
  • Add the dressing and toss to combine.

Video

Notes

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the recipe as written. If it is a part of your weekly meal prep lunches, divide it amongst small single-serve airtight containers and keep them in the fridge until ready to eat. With that being said, I usually do not keep tuna past the 3-day mark to avoid spoilage.
  • Storage: Leftover tuna and chickpea salad will keep in an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid for 2-3 days. If you are making this salad using greens, keep in mind that greens such as butter lettuce, and spring mix will wilt quicker than more sturdy greens such as arugula or kale.

Nutrition

Calories: 267kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 18mg | Sodium: 869mg | Potassium: 315mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 391IU | Vitamin C: 49mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Chickpea Salad with Tuna appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chickpea-tuna-salad/feed/ 40
Slow Cooked Beef Brisket Tacos https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooked-beef-brisket-tacos-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooked-beef-brisket-tacos-2/#comments Tue, 02 May 2023 17:24:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7564 Whether you’re planning a Cinco de Mayo party, a Tex-Mex-themed gathering, or looking for a tasty weeknight dinner doesn’t matter. These crock pot brisket tacos will delight your tastebuds with their fresh, smoky taste. Top them with my Easy Guacamole, or serve them alongside my fan-favorite Mexican Street Corn for an authentic Mexican meal. Add a pitcher of Pineapple Margaritas, and you’ll never be at a loss for party ideas...

The post Slow Cooked Beef Brisket Tacos appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Whether you’re planning a Cinco de Mayo party, a Tex-Mex-themed gathering, or looking for a tasty weeknight dinner doesn’t matter. These crock pot brisket tacos will delight your tastebuds with their fresh, smoky taste. Top them with my Easy Guacamole, or serve them alongside my fan-favorite Mexican Street Corn for an authentic Mexican meal. Add a pitcher of Pineapple Margaritas, and you’ll never be at a loss for party ideas again!

Person squeezing lime over beef brisket tacos.

Ingredients

To make these easy slow-cooker beef brisket tacos, you’ll need two sets of ingredients:

For the Slow Cooker Brisket

Made with the most flavorful and fresh ingredients, this is easily the best brisket taco recipe for Mexican food lovers. Crowds will go wild for this simple recipe’s rich, seasoned taste.

Ingredients for brisket slow cooker tacos from the top view.
  • Brisket: I recommend using 3-4 pounds of brisket for this beef brisket taco recipe—the perfect size for six servings. When selecting your taco brisket, find a piece of meat with significant marbling and a layer of fat on top for extra flavor.
  • All-purpose flour: Flour is the key to making a thick, flavorful sauce for brisket tacos. However, you can omit this ingredient if you follow a gluten-free diet.
  • Onion: Robust yet mellow, onions give great depth to these brisket crock pot tacos. Cut your onions into thick half-moon slices before adding them to the slow cooker.
  • Peppers: Spice lovers will love the addition of jalapeno or poblano peppers to this easy taco recipe. Chop your peppers well, and you’re good to go!
  • Beef broth: I use beef broth in my taco beef brisket to give it a complex, hearty taste. However, chicken broth or even vegetable broth would also work.
  • Tomato paste: Rich tomato paste will give your brisket gorgeous color and an irresistibly piquant taste.
  • Fresh thyme sprigs: Thyme is the ultimate flavor-booster ingredient in hearty meat dishes. Earthy and lemony, this simple addition will lighten your beef’s taste.
  • Seasonings: I recommend using paprika, chili powder, onion powder, garlic powder, and salt for seasoning your beef.
  • Red wine vinegar: A small dash of red wine vinegar will brighten the smoky sweetness of this slow cooker brisket recipe. However, you could also use apple cider vinegar or any other vinegar you have on hand.

Brisket Taco Toppings

The sky is the limit when it comes to toppings for brisket tacos. Any of your favorite taco toppings would work, but you can find nearly a dozen tasty ideas below. You can use flour tortillas, make your own corn tortillas (following this masa tortilla recipe), or buy them at the store if you are short on time.

Brisket tacos toppings portioned and photographed from the top.
  • Guacamole: No one can resist a classic when considering what to put on brisket tacos. You only need four ingredients to make my creamy, fresh, and super easy guacamole recipe, perfect for shredded brisket tacos.
  • Tomatoes: Lighten up these brisket slow cooker tacos with the simple addition of tomatoes. You can use your favorite store-bought salsa, cherry tomato salsa, dice up fresh tomatoes, or make homemade pico de gallo.
  • Jalapenos: If you’re a fan of spice, topping a handful of fresh or pickled jalapenos will give your Mexican brisket just the right amount of kick.
  • Mexican cheese: Tangy and mild, a blend of Mexican cheeses is guaranteed to add a creamy taste to your brisket tacos. For extra freshness, you can even crumble cotija cheese on top of your tacos.
  • Pickled red onions: Anyone who likes bold flavors will adore the tangy punch of this easy red onion topping. For the most authentic flavors, try my Mexican Red Onion recipe. Or, you can also use roasted red onion slices if you are not a fan.
  • Fresh cilantro: Cilantro is optional, but it is a nice addition if you are a fan.
  • Lime wedges: If you like a little zing to your tacos, serve them with fresh lime juice. Lime wedges are a visually stunning way to add a citrusy bite.
  • Sour cream: Cool and tangy, a dollop of sour cream is just what your Mexican brisket tacos need to balance out their robust, spicy taste.
  • Sauce: Nothing pairs better with this shredded brisket recipe than its leftover juices we reduce at the end. Simply follow the steps in the recipe to make the sauce that takes this recipe to the next level.

How to Make Shredded Brisket for Tacos

Anyone—beginner and master chefs alike—can easily whip up pulled brisket tacos. You can let your slow cooker do the work when following these easy instructions.

A collage of images showing person preparing meat to make pulled brisket in crock pot.
  1. Make the meat rub: In a small bowl, mix the paprika, chili powder, onion powder, garlic powder, and salt.
  2. Prick the meat: Use a sharp knife to puncture both sides of the meat in several places. I recommend pricking the beef about 20-30 times for maximum flavor. Then, use a paper towel to pat dry the meat.
  3. Rub the meat: Rub the spice mixture into both sides of the beef before wrapping it tightly with stretch film or plastic wrap. Let the meat marinate in the fridge for 4-8 hours.
  4. Let the beef rest: On the day of cooking, remove the spice-rubbed beef from the fridge. Let it rest for 30-45 minutes while prepping the remaining ingredients.
A collage of images showing how to make beef brisket in a crock pot for tacos.
  1. Dust the meat with flour: Remove the stretch film from the beef, and sprinkle both sides with flour. Shake off any excess flour.
  2. Whisk the broth: Whisk together the beef broth and tomato paste in a measuring cup and set the mixture aside.
  3. Layer the slow cooker: Place half of the sliced onions, pepper, and minced garlic at the base of the crock pot. Transfer the meat, fat-side-up, on top of the veggies. Then, add the remaining vegetables on top of the beef. Pour the broth mixture atop the brisket, adding the thyme and bay leaves to the liquid.
  4. Cook the brisket: Cover the slow cooker and cook the beef on low for 8-10 hours. By the end, the meat should be fully cooked and easily shreddable.
Person showing how to shred beef brisket.
  1. Shred the beef: Transfer the cooked meat to a cutting board or cookie sheet. Before adding it to your tacos, shred the brisket with two forks. Cover it with aluminum foil until ready to serve.
A collage of photos showing how to reduce the leftover juices.
  1. Prepare the sauce: Place a colander over a saucepan and strain the leftover liquid. Discard the veggies. Then, bring the sauce to a boil over medium-high heat, then reduce it to medium heat. Let the mixture simmer for 15 minutes or until it reduces by half. Taste the sauce and add any extra seasoning, if desired. Just before serving, add the red wine vinegar.

How to Assemble Brisket Tacos

The most fun part about making brisket street tacos is assembling them. Design your tacos using whatever toppings you like, and you’ll have a photo-ready main the entire family will love.

A group of images showing how to make brisket tacos with the toppings.
  1. Prepare the taco station: Place the taco toppings in individual serving bowls, including the shredded brisket and the reduced sauce.
  2. Warm the tortillas: If desired, warm the tortillas in a small pan or microwave.
  3. Assemble shredded beef tacos: Lay out a tortilla, and add a helping of shredded brisket. Drizzle the meat with a tablespoon of the sauce, and then add your favorite toppings on top of the tacos. Repeat this process with the remaining tortillas.
  4. Serve: Garnish the beef brisket tacos with fresh lime and serve.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat?

Storing brisket for tacos is one of the easiest meal preps you’ll ever do. Make your brisket ahead or store the meat and juices for simple lunches throughout the month.

  • Make ahead: You can prepare this brisket taco recipe up to 2 days in advance. Not only does this process make meal prep a cinch, but it also lets the flavors develop before serving the brisket for leftover tacos.
  • Storage: To store your slow cooker brisket tacos, shred the leftover meat and let it reach room temperature. Then, portion the brisket leftovers into airtight containers, add a little juice and store them in the refrigerator for up to 2 days.
  • Freezing and thawing: Before you freeze your brisket, shred it and let it cool to room temperature. Portion the meat and leftover sauce into several airtight containers, labeling them with dates so you can keep track of their freshness. Then, place each airtight container in the freezer for up to 2 months. When ready to eat, thaw the brisket in the fridge overnight.
  • Reheat: I recommend reheating the leftovers in a pan with the juices for maximum juiciness. However, you could also place the leftover beef brisket in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 15-20 minutes. Be sure to drizzle them with some of the juices so they won’t dry out in the oven.

What to Serve with Brisket Tacos

You’ll unlock dozens of mouthwatering Mexican sides to serve when you make slow-cooked beef brisket tacos. From creamy street corn to seasoned quinoa, this list has it all!

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a master chef to learn how to make brisket tacos. These pro tips will ensure your beef is as tender and flavorful as possible.

  • Don’t skip the resting: To get delicious flavor into every bite of brisket, I recommend letting your meat rest for at least 4 hours, preferably overnight. This step ensures that your beef absorbs its savory seasonings before adding it to the slow cooker.
  • Low and slow: A great way to ensure soft, tender meat is to take time with the recipe. Cook the brisket for at least 8-10 hours on low heat, letting the meat relax and absorb its juices. If you want to serve the tacos at night, begin cooking early in the morning. If you plan to serve these tacos during the day, start slow cooking the night before.
  • Skim the fat: Because this beef brisket recipe cooks off much of the meat’s fat in the crock pot, I recommend skimming off the extra fat from the meat mixture with a wooden spoon before serving.
  • Reduce the leftover liquid to use as a sauce: My favorite way to dress my own tacos is by transforming the brisket’s cooking liquid into a mouthwatering sauce. Let the liquid simmer for 15 minutes until it reduces by half. Then, add extra seasonings and serve!
  • Taste for seasoning: There are two times I recommend tasting your tender brisket recipe for seasoning: just after shredding your meat and when you first taste the reduced sauce (i.e., while it’s simmering). Since we are “cooking off” most of the liquid, adding seasonings to the sauce too soon may produce an overly salty sauce.
  • Customize it to your liking: Brisket tacos are one of my favorite foods because of how much fun you can have customizing them! Play with whatever toppings you want, experimenting with new combinations until you find your favorite.
Beef brisket tacos on a plate topped off with guacamole, red onion, and Mexican cheese.

FAQs

Want to know more about how to make brisket in a crock pot for tacos? I’ve answered all your questions here so you can enjoy melt-in-your-mouth eats any day of the week.

Why is my brisket tough?

The meat used for brisket tends to be tougher than other cuts, with lots of connective tissue. Therefore, you must cook your beef at a low temperature for at least 8-10 hours to ensure the meat is as soft and tender as possible.

What are some other ways I can use leftover brisket?

Do you have some leftover brisket from making tacos? There are countless delicious ways to use your meat leftovers, like using it as an enchilada filling, making brisket tacos, or even whipping up a plate of nachos.

Can I use suadero beef instead of brisket in this recipe?

Yes, you can. If you are trying to recreate the suadero tacos you had in Mexico, you can easily use suadero beef (also sold as suadero brisket or suadero meat) instead of brisket in this recipe.

Other Beef Recipes You Might Like:

Can’t get enough of this beef brisket taco recipe? These other beef dishes will satisfy your cravings with hearty, fresh flavors even a pro chef wouldn’t be able to resist.

If you try this recipe, please take a moment to give it a star rating and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Brisket tacos served over corn tortillas and topped off with toppings on a plate.
Print

Slow Cooked Brisket Tacos Recipe

This Slow Cooker Beef Brisket Tacos Recipe requires little hands on time, but every minute is worth the effort. Corn tortillas filled with slow cooked brisket, guacamole, and pickled red onion are out-of-this-world delicious.
Course Meat
Cuisine Mexican Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 10 hours
Marinading time 8 hours
Total Time 18 hours 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 642kcal

Ingredients

For The Seasoning (Meat Rub)

  • 1 tablespoon paprika
  • 1 tablespoon chili powder
  • 2 teaspoons onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 ½ teaspoons salt
  • 3 lbs. beef brisket flat cut; trimmed of excess fat and “silver skin”
  • 2 tablespoons of all-purpose flour
  • 1 onion halved and sliced ½ inch thick
  • 1 jalapeno or poblano pepper; seeds removed and roughly chopped
  • 4 garlic cloves minced
  • 3 cups beef broth
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 3 sprigs fresh thyme or 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 2 bay leaves
  • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar

For The Tacos:

  • 12 6-inch corn tortillas
  • 1 ½ cups guacamole
  • 1 tomato cut into small pieces
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and sliced
  • 1 cup Mexican cheese such as queso fresco or cotija cheese
  • 1 cup pickled red onions
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro leaves chopped
  • Lime wedges for serving

Instructions

For Slow Cooker Brisket:

  • Prepare the meat rub: Mix the paprika, chili powder, onion powder, garlic powder, and salt in a bowl.
  • Prick both sides of the meat in several places ( about 20-30 “hits”) using the tip of a sharp knife. Then pat dry the meat on both sides using a sheet of paper towel.
  • Rub the spice mixture over both sides of the meat. Wrap it tightly with stretch film or plastic wrap and let it marinate in the fridge for at least 4 hours or preferably overnight (up to 8 hours.)
  • On the day of cooking, remove the meat from the refrigerator and let it rest for 30 minutes while you prepare the rest of the ingredients.
  • Remove the stretch film. Sprinkle it with the flour on both sides, shaking off the excess.
  • Whisk together beef broth and tomato paste in a measuring cup until combined. Set it aside.
  • Place half of the sliced onions, pepper, and minced garlic at the bottom of the slow cooker. Place the meat with the fat side up on top of the mixture.
  • Add the remaining sliced onions, pepper, and minced garlic on top of the meat. Pour the mixture over the meat. Add the thyme and bay leaves to the liquid.
  • Cover and cook on low heat setting for 8-10 hours or until meat is fully cooked and shreds easily.
  • Transfer the now-cooked brisket onto a cutting board (or cookie sheet) and cover it with aluminum foil to keep it warm. Right before serving, shred the meat using two forks. When done, cover it with aluminum foil to keep it warm.

To Make The Sauce:

  • Using a large spoon, skim off the liquid fat layer in the crock pot as much as you can*. Place a colander over a saucepan, strain the leftover liquid, and discard the veggies.
  • Bring the liquid to a boil over medium-high heat. Turn the heat down to medium and let it simmer for 15 minutes or until it is reduced by half and slightly thickened. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Add the red wine vinegar at the last minute to brighten the flavor.

To Assemble the tacos:

  • Set up your taco station by placing the toppings in individual serving bowls, the now-shredded meat, and the reduced sauce.
  • If preferred, warm tortillas.
  • To assemble the brisket tacos, place shredded brisket over a corn tortilla. Drizzle it with a tablespoon (or more) of the reduced sauce, and then add the toppings. Repeat the same process with the rest of the tortillas.
  • Garnish with fresh lime and serve!

Notes

  • Taste for seasoning: There are two times I recommend tasting this recipe for seasoning: First, just after shredding your meat, and then second, when the sauce is fully reduced after the simmering time is fully completed. Since we are “cooking off” most of the liquid, adding seasonings to the sauce too soon may produce an overly salty sauce.
  • Make it your own: I included some topping suggestions, but as with any other taco recipe, the sky is the limit when dressing your tacos. Use this recipe as a place to start and customize it to your liking.
  • Skim the fat: Do not skip removing the liquid fat at the top layer of the liquid. The amount of liquid fat you’ll end up with depends on how fatty your meat is. You can reserve (I usually freeze it) and use it in place of oil or butter in recipes or discard it. Alternatively, if you have it, you can use a fat separator to remove it.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare the slow-cooked brisket recipe up to 2 days in advance. Doing so helps develop flavors and make them rich and even more delicious. When ready to serve, warm up the meat (and the sauce), prep taco toppings, and assemble at the table.
  • Storage: To store your slow cooker brisket tacos, shred the leftover meat and bring it to room temperature. Then, portion the leftovers into airtight containers, add a little juice and store them in the refrigerator for up to 2 days.
  • Freezing and thawing: Before you freeze your brisket, shred it and let it cool to room temperature. Portion the meat and leftover sauce into several airtight containers, labeling them with dates so you can keep track of their freshness. Then, place each airtight container in the freezer for up to 2 months. When ready to eat, thaw the brisket in the fridge overnight.
  • Reheat: I recommend reheating the brisket in a pan with the juices for maximum juiciness. However, you could also place the leftovers in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 15-20 minutes. Be sure to drizzle them with some of the juices so they won’t dry out in the oven.

Nutrition

Calories: 642kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 58g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Cholesterol: 158mg | Sodium: 1394mg | Potassium: 1315mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1502IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 215mg | Iron: 7mg

The post Slow Cooked Beef Brisket Tacos appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooked-beef-brisket-tacos-2/feed/ 32
Air Fryer Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-eggplant/#comments Mon, 24 Apr 2023 19:05:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66508 If you don’t have an air fryer, I have dozens of other eggplant recipes to satisfy your cravings. With my simple recipe for Roasted Eggplant Slices, you’ll have tender, savory veggies you’ll want to eat straight from the oven. Add a layer of panko breadcrumbs and mozzarella cheese, and you’ll have an irresistible appetizer of Crispy Oven-Baked Eggplant. Or, transform your tasty side into a rich, Healthy Baked Eggplant Parm...

The post Air Fryer Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you don’t have an air fryer, I have dozens of other eggplant recipes to satisfy your cravings. With my simple recipe for Roasted Eggplant Slices, you’ll have tender, savory veggies you’ll want to eat straight from the oven. Add a layer of panko breadcrumbs and mozzarella cheese, and you’ll have an irresistible appetizer of Crispy Oven-Baked Eggplant. Or, transform your tasty side into a rich, Healthy Baked Eggplant Parm that will disappear in minutes.

Air fried eggplant cubes placed in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients You’ll Need for Air-Frying Eggplant

You only need a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to make eggplant in the air fryer. Healthy, fresh, and natural, this air-fried eggplant recipe won’t require any extra trip to the grocery store.

Ingredients for the recipe are laid out on a marble backdrop.
  • Eggplant: I use globe eggplant in this crispy air fryer eggplant recipe, as it’s the most common type of eggplant found in grocery stores. However, many different types of eggplants would also work. Other types, such as Japanese eggplant, Japanese eggplant, and even Chinese eggplant, would all work in this recipe.
  • Kosher salt: Though salting eggplant is optional, this step helps remove excess liquid and gives this easy recipe its exquisitely crisp texture. It may also be helpful if you’re buying eggplant out of season. You can learn more about this process in my simple guide to sweating eggplant.
  • Oil: I recommend using high smoke point oils, like avocado oil or olive oil, when making eggplant in the air fryer.
  • Seasonings: You can use countless delicious seasoning mixes when you air-fry eggplant. However, I recommend a robust, savory mixture of Italian seasoning, garlic powder, and paprika. Don’t have Italian seasoning at home? Make your own spice blend by mixing together ¼ teaspoon of dried oregano, ¼ teaspoon of dried rosemary, ¼ teaspoon of dried thyme, and ¼ teaspoon of dried basil.
  • Optional toppings: If preferred, you can sprinkle them with fresh parsley (or any other fresh herbs you like) and a squeeze of fresh lemon juice right before serving. 

How to Cook Eggplant in Air Fryer?

Air frying eggplant is easier than you think. And the best part, you ask? No messy oil or waiting in front of the stove for it to cook.  With these easy instructions, your air fryer-fried eggplant will come out irresistibly tender in no time. Whether you like to air-fry sliced eggplant or cubed eggplant, simply follow the instructions below for my foolproof method:

Person showing how to cut eggplant into slices and cubes.
  1. Cut the eggplant: Cut your eggplant into either ½-inch air fryer eggplant slices or into 1-inch cubes to make cubed eggplant. If you are new to slicing eggplant, check out my handy guide to cutting eggplant.
Person showing how to season aubergine in a collage of images.
  1. Salt the slices of eggplant: If you want to salt the eggplant before cooking, line a sheet pan with a few sheets of paper towels, then layer the baking sheet with a single layer of your sliced eggplant. Sprinkle the veggies with ½ teaspoon of salt, covering all sides with equal seasoning. Let the salted eggplant rest for 15 minutes.
  2. Dry the eggplant: Use either paper towels or a clean kitchen towel to pat dry the surface of the eggplant. Try to remove any excess moisture.
Person showing how to prepare and season eggplant in a collage of images.
  1. Season the eggplant: For sliced eggplant, brush both sides of the slices with oil. Then, sprinkle the top of the eggplant with Italian seasoning, garlic powder, paprika, and salt, being sure to coat each side evenly. For cubed eggplant, place the vegetables in a large bowl, drizzle them with oil, and toss the mixture until thoroughly combined. Then, sprinkle the oiled veggies with Italian seasoning, garlic powder, paprika, and salt.
  2. Preheat the air fryer: Set the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
Person showing how to cook eggplant slices and eggplant cubes in the air fryer.
  1. Transfer the seasoned slices: Place the eggplant in a single even layer in the air fryer, being sure not to overlap or overcrowd the basket. If necessary, roast eggplant in the air fryer in two batches to ensure even cooking.
  2. Cook eggplant in the air fryer: Air fry the pieces for 12 minutes, flipping them halfway through. Check for doneness by inserting a paring knife in one cube/slice. Remove the eggplant if the knife easily enters and exits its flesh. However, if there is resistance on the blade, continue to air fry the pieces in one-minute increments until tender.
  3. Serve: Transfer the air-fried eggplant slices or air fry eggplant cubes to a plate and serve while warm.

How to Store, Reheat, and Freeze This Recipe?

Once you make this vegan and gluten-free recipe for eggplant in the air fryer, you’ll want it every night of the week. With these simple storage tips, you’ll have toasty, savory eggplant whenever the craving strikes.

  • Store: To store your air-fried eggplant cubes or slices, first let the veggies reach room temperature. Then, transfer the pieces to an airtight container and place them in the refrigerator for up to three days. To reheat, place your eggplant in the air fryer for two minutes (or until heated thoroughly) at 400 degrees F. or in the oven for 5-8 minutes at 300 degrees F. I recommend draining excess liquid before serving, as your veggie pieces will likely become watery during storage.
  • Freeze: After roasting the eggplant in the air fryer, place the room-temperature pieces in a freezer bag or airtight container. I recommend separating each layer with wax paper to prevent fusing during storage. Once you place the sealed container inside the freezer, your eggplant will stay fresh for up to 2 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw your air fryer roasted eggplant by placing it in the fridge overnight. Remove the wax paper between slices/cubes, and reheat them in the air fryer at 400 degrees F. for two minutes or in the oven at 300 degrees F. for 5-8 minutes.
Air fried eggplant slices on a plate from the top view.

How to Serve Air Fryer Roasted Eggplant?

You can serve this healthy eggplant recipe in the air fryer in dozens of mouthwatering ways. From a great snack to a final dish, these tasty ideas will fill your menu with maximum flavor.

  • Serve it as a vegetable side dish: Crispy eggplant slices make a delectable appetizer when served with a dip, such as your favorite marinara sauce, Basil Tomato Sauce, or creamy Tzatziki. These simple eggplant rounds are also a great way to complement a protein-packed main course. Serve them alongside Mediterranean dishes, like my Greek Yogurt Chicken and Mediterranean Lemon Chicken, or balance a hearty main, like my Classic Pot Roast, with light and healthy flavors.
  • Incorporate it into cooked grains: This delicious air fryer eggplant recipe is just the thing to add to your favorite quinoa salad or other cooked grains. Savory air-fried eggplant makes a great addition to Cooked Bulgur or even pasta recipes, like my Eggplant Pomodoro Pasta—especially when topped with rich parmesan cheese, ground black pepper, and fresh parsley.

Expert Tips

If you want to make air fryer roast eggplant that will have the whole family asking for seconds, these pro tips are just what you need. This guide has everything from slicing to seasoning and cooking pointers.

  • Select good eggplants: The first step in air frying eggplant is to choose the right produce. I recommend using eggplants that are firm to the touch and have smooth, glossy skin. Though eggplants have a bad rap for bitterness, these riper veggies tend to have fewer seeds, a sweeter taste, and a less bitter flavor.
  • Cut evenly: The key to this recipe is to cut your eggplants into evenly sized pieces (½-inch slices or 1-inch cubes). Similarly sized eggplants will cook more evenly, whether you slice them or cut them into cubes.
  • A word about salting: Sweating eggplant isn’t necessary for this recipe, especially if you are using eggplant during its peak season (May through September.) However, if you’re making this dish out of season, you may want to remove extra liquid or unwanted bitterness from your slices by salting your eggplant before putting it in the air fryer.
  • Don’t overcrowd the basket: When you layer your eggplant pieces into the air fryer basket, don’t overcrowd or layer them on top of one another. More space between slices will allow for better air circulation and limit the possibility of undercooked or unevenly cooked eggplant. Depending on the size of your air fryer, you may find that air frying your eggplant in batches helps avoid partially cooked or soggy eggplant.
  • Flip halfway through: The best thing about this vegan air fryer eggplant is its crisp-tender texture and golden brown exterior. Flipping your eggplant batches halfway through their air frying time will help give you these best results.
  • Watch closely: Many factors contribute to how long it will take to make eggplant cooked in the air fryer, including your specific air fryer, the thickness of your slices, and how densely you pack the basket. Therefore, I recommend watching your pieces after the 10-minute mark to see whether they need more or less time.

FAQs

Cooking eggplant is an easy recipe anyone can prepare (and post on Instagram!). With these helpful tips, this eggplant air fryer recipe will come out exquisitely crisp every time.

Can you air-fry eggplant?

Yes! Not only is air frying the quickest method of cooking eggplant, but it’s also effortless. Cut your eggplant into ½-inch slices or 1-inch cubes, and your eggplant will only need about 12 minutes in the air fryer at 400 degrees F.

What is the ideal cook time and temperature for cooking eggplant in an air fryer?

You’ll likely need 12 minutes in the air fryer set to 400 degrees F. to cook your eggplant pieces.

How long do you air fry eggplant?

The ideal eggplant air fryer time is about 12 minutes at 400 degrees F. However, this cooking time depends on your specific air fryer and eggplant thickness, so keep an eye on your pieces to ensure they don’t come out over- or undercooked.

Can I air-fry eggplant without oil?

Yes, you can air-fry eggplant without any added oil. However, these eggplant pieces often come out drier than those cooked with oil. You can combat this dryness by making no-oil Breaded Eggplant in the Air Fryer, which uses an egg and flour and breadcrumb mixture to give your eggplant a rich tenderness instead of oil.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like

If you can’t get enough tasty eggplant recipes like this, you’ll fall head over heels for these other effortless air fryer dishes. Feel free to check out the recipes below and never be at a loss for a delicious recipe to complete your menu again!

If you try this Air Fryer Eggplant with no breadcrumbs recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of air fried eggplant served by a person from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Eggplant Recipe

If you are in need of a recipe for Air Fryer Eggplant with no breadcrumbs, you have come to the right place! Follow this straightforward recipe to create a nicely seasoned air-fried eggplant dish (sliced or cubed) that you can serve as a side or incorporate into salads, casseroles, stews, and more.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Resting Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 96kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 large globe eggplant ~1 pound
  • 3/4 teaspoon Kosher salt divided
  • 2 tablespoons avocado oil or vegetable oil
  • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon paprika

Optional Garnish

  • 1 teaspoon fresh parsley chopped finely
  • A squeeze of lemon juice

Instructions

  • Cut the eggplant into your desired shape, either ½ inch slices or 1-inch cubes. You do not need to peel the eggplant as the skin is edible.
  • Line a sheet pan with a few sheets of paper towels. Place the eggplant on top and sprinkle with ½ teaspoon of salt, ensuring that all sides of the eggplant slices (or cubes) are evenly seasoned. Let rest for 15 minutes.
  • Using a sheet of paper towel (or a clean kitchen towel), pat the surface of the eggplant dry to absorb moisture.
  • Season the eggplant:
    For sliced eggplant: Brush eggplant slices with the oil on both sides and sprinkle each slice with Italian seasoning, garlic powder, paprika, and ¼ teaspoon of salt.
    For cubed eggplant: Place eggplant cubes in a large bowl. Drizzle with oil and toss until well combined. Sprinkle them with Italian seasoning, garlic powder, paprika, and ¼ teaspoon of salt.
  • Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
  • Place the eggplant in an even layer in the air fryer. Be sure not to overcrowd the air fryer basket. If needed, it is best to air fry it in two batches to ensure even frying.
  • Air fry for approximately 12 minutes flipping the eggplant halfway through the air frying process. To check doneness, insert a pairing knife in one of the eggplant cubes/slices, if it goes in and out easily, it should be done. If not, let it continue to air fry in one-minute increments until tender.
  • Transfer to a plate. If preferred, sprinkle it with chopped parsley and a light squeeze of lemon juice. Serve while it is still warm.

Notes

  • Yields: Depending on the size of your eggplant, this recipe yields 7-9 slices of eggplant or about 2 cups of cubed eggplant. This recipe can be multiplied as many times as you want.
  • Evenly cut eggplant: The key to this recipe is to cut your eggplants into evenly sized pieces (½-inch slices or 1-inch cubes). Similarly sized eggplants will cook more evenly, whether you slice them or cut them into cubes.
  • Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container (after they come to room temperature) for up to 3 days. To reheat, place your eggplant in the air fryer for two minutes (or until heated thoroughly) at 400 degrees F.

Nutrition

Calories: 96kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 439mg | Potassium: 289mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 283IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Air Fryer Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-eggplant/feed/ 4
Smoked Salmon Avocado Toast https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-avocado-toast/ https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-avocado-toast/#comments Tue, 18 Apr 2023 18:59:06 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66405 I love this recipe because it has light preparation, healthy ingredients, and tons of flavor. The best part, you ask? You don’t even need to use the stove or oven! With only a few minutes of prep, it deserves a spot on your weekly rotation on busy weekday mornings. And if you have a few extra minutes on the weekend, switch up your standard breakfast and try this avocado toast...

The post Smoked Salmon Avocado Toast appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I love this recipe because it has light preparation, healthy ingredients, and tons of flavor. The best part, you ask? You don’t even need to use the stove or oven! With only a few minutes of prep, it deserves a spot on your weekly rotation on busy weekday mornings. And if you have a few extra minutes on the weekend, switch up your standard breakfast and try this avocado toast with salmon and egg! 

If you are a salmon lover like I am, be sure to also check out my Salmon Nicose Salad, Baked Sockeye Salmon, or Salmon Coconut Soup to serve for lunch or dinner.

Smoked Salmon Avocado Toast cut in half on a plate with a knife on the side.

Ingredients 

This avocado toast with smoked salmon is great because you can make it your own by adding whatever toppings you like best. Here’s a short, simple list of ingredients that will make shopping a breeze:

Ingredients for the recipe are from the top view.
  • Bread: Feel free to choose your favorite bread. I like to use whole-grain bread, but if you make your own sourdough bread, go for it. If you want to make it extra special, treat yourself with buttery homemade Brioche. If you have dietary restrictions like gluten intolerance, try my Almond Flour Bread or any store-bought gluten-free bread you like. There are also easy-to-find keto-friendly options at the grocery store if you’re following a keto diet. Finally, you can ditch the bread and go for your favorite bagel.
  • Avocado: The store has many avocado choices, but I think Hass avocado is the most flavorful one out there. When buying avocados, be sure to pick one that is nice and ripe for easy mashing or slicing.
  • Fresh lemon juice: Lemon juice will give your toast the acid it needs to wake up your taste buds. Fresh lemon (and freshly squeezed lemon juice) is preferred. Alternatively, you can use fresh lime in this recipe.
  • Cucumber: Persian cucumbers sliced thinly are my favorite for this, but English will get the job done.  
  • Smoked salmon vs. lox: While lox and smoked salmon are different things, they can be used interchangeably in this smoked salmon and avocado toast recipe. Just make sure to get a brand that you like. And if you are wondering, my favorite one is Trader Joes’, Everything But The Bagel Seasoned Salmon.
  • Spices: I use kosher salt and black pepper in terms of spices. However, if I am serving this smoked salmon breakfast toast to adults, I sometimes sprinkle it with a pinch of red pepper flakes.

Optional Add-Ins

What I love most about this healthy avocado toast is that it is endlessly customizable. If you are short on time, follow the recipe as written for a 10-minute breakfast. But if you are looking for a next-level breakfast or brunch, jazz it up with one (or more) of the optional add-ins below: 

  • Soft cheese: A thin layer of cream cheese or goat cheese is a great addition to this avocado toast, but any soft cheese you have on hand would work.
  • Fresh herbs or Salad Greens: A handful of arugula, spring mix, or microgreens not only add color but also make it healthier. Alternatively, a small amount of fresh dill or parsley would make a nice addition.
  • Onions: My Pickled Red Onion recipe will give this dish a tangy bite to compliment your smoked salmon avocado toast. However, thinly sliced red onion or scallions would work nicely as well.
  • Garlic: Adding chopped garlic to your creamy avocado spread can add an extra pop of flavor. I usually opt out of garlic if I am making this on a work day, but if I am serving it to a crowd for brunch, then I add one for extra flavor.
  • Olive Oil + Flaky Salt: I usually finish this layered toast with a drizzle of good-quality olive oil and a pinch of flaky salt.
  • Spices: Who doesn’t love Everything But the Bagel seasoning? A little goes a long way!
  • Egg on top: If eggs are a staple for you’re morning breakfast, you’re welcome to top it off with scrambled eggs or a fried egg. However, if I have the time, my favorite one is smoked salmon avocado toast that’s topped off with a poached egg.
  • Sliced tomato: Like it is with any toast recipe, adding a few slices of tomato to the layers would be a nice addition to this open-faced sandwich.
  • Olives or Capers: Use one teaspoon of chopped capers or olives for a briny bite. 

How to Make Avocado Toast with Smoked Salmon

This avocado smoked salmon toast will make prep and cleanup faster than ever before. You don’t even need to cook anything. Here’s how I make it:

  1. Toast the bread: This is optional, but toasting the bread will give it a nice crispy bite. If you do, be sure to let it cool while you are working on the rest of the prep.
A collage of images showing how to make avocado lox toast.
  1. Mash or slice the avocado: Scoop your avocado into a medium size bowl and mash with a fork. Add your salt, pepper, a squeeze of lemon juice, and garlic (optional), and mix well. Give it a taste and add in if needed. Alternatively, you can slice your avocado thinly.
  2. Spread the avocado mixture: Add a layer of your mashed or sliced avocado to the bread.
  3. Top with cucumber: Arrange the sliced cucumber evenly on top.
  4. Add smoked salmon: Layer about 2 oz. of smoked salmon per person on your toast, along with the pickled red onion. 
A collage of photos showing how to assemble avocado salmon toast.
  1. Garnish: Make it your own with any of your favorite garnishes. I like microgreens and a drizzle of extra virgin olive oil. Sprinkle some Everything But the Bagel Seasoning for the finishing touch. 
  2. Serve: Once you’ve topped your toast with the desired garnishes, serve with a lemon wedge on the side.

How to Make Ahead and Store

This smoked salmon toast recipe is best when served right away. However, you can prepare some ingredients ahead of time to put together in just 5 minutes. Here’s what I recommend: 

  • Make Ahead: The most time-consuming part of this avocado toast with salmon recipe is preparing the avocado spread. However, it can be prepped in advance. So, go ahead and make it a day ahead and store it as I did in my go-to Guacamole Recipe. Here’s how to do it:
    • After making the guacamole, evenly spread it in an airtight container.
    • Cover the surface with a thin layer of water, lime, or lemon juice. We are doing this to prevent it from oxidizing.
    • Place a plastic wrap on top, and remove all the air bubbles before storing it in the refrigerator. You can also slice your cucumbers beforehand and store them in an airtight container for quick assembly. 
  • Storing: Enjoy this delicious avocado and salmon toast immediately for the best results. I’d be surprised if you have leftovers! But, if you do, then store the leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator and eat them by the next day.  
Smoked Salmon and Avocado Toast garnished with red onion and micro greens from the top view.

Expert Tips 

Even though this smoked salmon toast recipe is just as effortless as it is delicious, a few quick tips can take this dish to the next level. Here are a few tips to help you succeed on your first try:

  • Add lemon juice to the avocado: The best way to prevent your avocado mash from turning brown is to squeeze it with fresh lemon juice. The addition of a small amount of acid also helps with flavor, so do not skip using it.
  • It is best when assembled on the day you plan to serve: As is the case with most seafood recipes, I recommend assembling your avocado smoked salmon toast on the day you plan to serve it. If you are planning to serve a crowd, follow the make-ahead tips above to make the last-minute assembly a breeze.
  • Toast the bread lightly. This is an optional step, but toasting the bread gives this dish the perfect warm crunch.
  • Multiply the recipe. The recipe below, as written, is for two servings, but you can multiply it as many times as you need.

FAQs

Is avocado and smoked salmon good for you?

Absolutely! All the elements of this recipe make for a healthy smoked salmon breakfast. Both salmon (packed with Omega 3 fatty acids) and avocado are considered some of the healthiest fats on the planet. When you are shopping for smoked salmon at the store, be sure to check the back and buy a brand that is made with clean ingredients and without any sugars.

Other Avocado Recipes You Might Like:

Can’t get enough of avocado goodness? You are not alone. Here at Foolproof Living, we are huge fans of this versatile fruit and have many other recipes. Below are a few that we think you might like:

If you try this Avocado Smoked Salmon Toast recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Smoked Salmon Avocado toast on a plate with a knife on the side.
Print

Smoked Salmon Avocado Toast Recipe

This smoked salmon avocado toast is a quick, easy, and healthy breakfast that not only tastes great but also looks delicious. Ready in 10 minutes,  it is simple enough for a morning on the go and elevated enough for a holiday brunch like Easter, Mother's Day, or even Christmas morning.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Low Lactose
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 240kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 pieces toast multi-grain bread and sourdough bread would all work
  • 1 large avocado ripened
  • 1 ½ teaspoons lemon juice plus lemon wedges to serve with
  • 1 garlic clove minced – optional
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ Persian cucumber peeled and sliced thinly (or English cucumber would also work)
  • 4 oz. smoked salmon packaged
  • ½ cup micro greens or arugula
  • 1 tablespoon pickled red onions optional
  • A drizzle of extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Everything Bagel Seasoning optional

Instructions

  • If preferred, toast your bread and let it cool for a few minutes.
  • Meanwhile, in a small bowl, mash avocado using the back of a fork. Add lemon juice, minced garlic (if using), salt, and pepper. Stir well. Give it a taste and add more if necessary.
  • Spread each slice of toast with the avocado mixture.
  • Top each slice with the cucumber slices.
  • Place smoked salmon pieces and pickled onion (if using) on top.
  • Garnish with microgreens and a drizzle of olive oil. Finish it off with a sprinkle of Everything Bagel Seasoning.
  • Serve with a lemon wedge on the side.

Notes

  • Garlic: If I am making this avocado toast on a work day I omit using garlic, but if I am making it on the weekend, then I make sure to add it in. 
  • Multiply the recipe: Serving a crowd? No problem. Simply multiply the recipe as many times as you want. I usually serve 2 ounces of smoked salmon and ½ avocado per serving.
  • To Make Ahead: If you are serving this recipe to a crowd, feel free to mash the avocados in advance, but be sure to cover the surface with a thin layer of lemon juice followed by some plastic wrap to prevent oxidizing. Assemble the recipe right before serving.
  • Storing leftovers: This avocado toast is best on the day it is served. However, you can store the leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 1 day.

Nutrition

Calories: 240kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 1170mg | Potassium: 636mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 225IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 30mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Smoked Salmon Avocado Toast appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-avocado-toast/feed/ 2
How To Make Vegetable Stock https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-vegetable-stock/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-vegetable-stock/#comments Wed, 12 Apr 2023 22:08:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66223 We know that it might sound like an extra step, but trust us when we say that once you learn how to make vegetable broth and use it in any of your favorite soup recipes, you will agree that there is no better alternative. It is such an easy (and cheaper) way to add rich and robust flavors to any dish. It is also a great alternative to chicken broth...

The post How To Make Vegetable Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
We know that it might sound like an extra step, but trust us when we say that once you learn how to make vegetable broth and use it in any of your favorite soup recipes, you will agree that there is no better alternative. It is such an easy (and cheaper) way to add rich and robust flavors to any dish.

It is also a great alternative to chicken broth to make a recipe vegan or vegetarian. Not to mention, just like my Corn Cob Stock, making veggie stock takes much less time than meat stocks so you have no excuse not to try!

Vegetables in a pot to make vegetable stock.

Vegetable Stock Ingredients

The ingredients for vegetable broth are simple, healthy, and all-natural with a ton of add-in options.

For broth vegetables, I recommend using neutral vegetables with savory flavors, such as onions (with the onion skin!), carrots, celery stalks, and fresh garlic cloves.

To give your soup stock recipe extra rich flavor, you’ll also need fresh herbs, like fresh parsley and thyme; salt (both kosher salt and sea salt will work); whole peppercorns, and water.

Ingredients for the recipe are in small bowls.

Optional Add-Ins

When considering what to put in vegetable broth, the options are limitless. You can select dozens of mouthwatering combinations to make your veggie broth recipe as savory, fresh, and delectable as possible. Below is a long list of ingredients you can use:

Other Vegetables You Can Use:

  • Alliums: Alliums—such as shallots, green onions (AKA scallions), leeks, and leek tops—can give this vegan stock a robust, mildly sweet flavor.
  • Mushrooms: Umami-rich mushrooms (and mushroom stems) will give your veg broth recipe an earthy, complex taste.
  • Fresh or dried bay leaves: This simple addition adds bright, herbal notes to any DIY stock.
  • Parsnips: Sweet and mildly spicy, parsnips add a nice sweet kick to the broth.
  • Fennel and fennel tops: If you like mild, anise-like flavors, then fennel is a great addition.
  • Corn cobs: The sweet buttery taste of corn cobs is a welcome addition during the summer months when corn is in season.
  • Tomatoes: If you want to give your DIY broth a touch of sweetness, I recommend adding chopped tomatoes. However, remember to remove the seeds first, as they can give your stock a bitter taste.
  • Apple or pear: Apples and pears are the perfect ingredients to add sweetness and help eliminate bitterness.

Add-Ins With Reservations

These are some of the ingredients to use in small doses when making homemade broth:

  • Carrot tops: When added in small amounts, carrot tops will it earthy, sweet undertones. Too many carrot tops, however, will result in a bitter-tasting broth.
  • Peppers: Are you a fan of heat? Then I recommend adding bell peppers, jalapeńos, or other hot peppers to your broth. However, don’t add too many (especially when using green bell peppers!) to avoid an acidic, bitter liquid.
  • Celery leaves: Use celery leaves for a bright peppery taste, but limit it to just a few ones to avoid making your stock bitter.
  • Soy sauce or tamari: You only need a small amount of soy sauce or tamari to give your homemade veg broth a complex umami taste.

Flavor and Nutrition Boosters

  • Dried kombu: Adding a bit of dried kombu to your simmering broth is an excellent way to give it briny, mushroom-like overtones.
  • Nutritional yeast: I recommend adding a pinch of nutritional yeast to your simmering pot for extra rich flavor.
  • Tomato paste: Give your stock sweet, mild tomato flavors by adding one tablespoon of tomato paste. To help your paste mix into the broth, I recommend removing a half-cup of simmering stock, whisking in the tomato paste, then re-adding it to the pot.
  • Roasted garlic: If you have made some for another dish (such as Baked Garlic Butter), use roasted garlic to incorporate caramelized flavors into your homemade stock.
  • Fresh ginger and turmeric (or even Golden Paste): If you’re making an Asian-themed dinner, ginger, and turmeric make brilliant additions to your stock vegetables. Not only do these ingredients add a spicy, bright flavor, but they also help develop a light, appetizing color in your stock.
  • Dried mushrooms: If you are a fan of the rich umami flavors, dried mushrooms is a good addition. However, be sure to soak them for an hour (or so) in hot water before adding to the stock. 
  • Parmesan rind: If you don’t mind a non-vegan addition, parmesan cheese rind is a simple flavor booster that complements any Italian dish. 

How to Make Vegetable Broth

Wondering how to make your own vegetable broth? These simple, beginner-friendly instructions will give you exquisitely flavored, perfectly simmered broth every time.

A collage of photos showing how to make your own vegetable broth.
  1. Place ingredients in the pot: Add the onion, carrots, celery, garlic, fresh parsley, fresh thyme sprigs, salt, pepper, and other optional add-ins into a large stock pot (affiliate link) or Dutch oven (affiliate link.)
  2. Add water: Pour the water into the pot.
  3. Boil & simmer: Place the lid atop the pot and bring the mixture to a boil over medium-high heat. Once the stock comes to a boil, reduce the heat to medium. Let the mixture simmer for 60-90 minutes, stirring once or twice during this time.
  4. Cool & strain: Let the veggie stock cool for 10-15 minutes. Then, carefully strain the liquid with a fine mesh strainer (affiliate link) placed over a large, heat-proof bowl. Using the back of a spoon, gently press the vegetables for the stock into the strainer to release their juices. Discard the veggies once finished.
Straining broth into jars and a labeled jar.
  1. Store: Transfer the vegan vegetable stock into airtight jars. Let them cool to room temperature and label them before storing them in the fridge or freezer.

How Long to Cook Vegetable Stock?

Once your vegan stock comes to a boil, I recommend letting it simmer for 1 to 1½ hours. Any longer, and the vegetables’ flavors begin to break down.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

The best part of this homemade vegetable stock recipe is how easy it is to store for effortless meal prep. Store it to make a soup the next day, or freeze it for a handy ingredient to use months later.

  • Storage: Pour your veg stock into airtight mason jars (or any airtight container of your choice.) A large heat-proof measuring cup with a sprout (affiliate link) will help streamline this step. Once your jars reach room temperature, transfer them to the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing instructions: Transfer your cooled soup stock to freezer-safe, airtight containers—such as these Weck Jars (affiliate link) —being sure to leave a few inches open at the top. Then, store your stock in the freezer for up to 6 months. Adding removable freezer labels (affiliate link) helps me keep track of expiration dates. 
  • Thawing instructions: To thaw your homemade veggie stock, place it in the fridge overnight.
Veg stock stored and labeled in jars.

Vegetables to Avoid Adding to Broth

Though there are countless vegetables to use in vegetable broth, there are a few veggies to avoid. Eliminating the following ingredients will ensure your vegan broth recipe is as smooth and tasty as possible.

  • Starchy vegetables: I recommend avoiding starch-based vegetables, like potatoes (including sweet potatoes, baby potatoes, yellow potatoes, and potato peels) and turnips. These ingredients will make your stock clumpy and cloudy.
  • Zucchini and green beans: Vegetables like zucchini and green beans become bitter when simmered too long and may harsh the savory flavors of your broth.
  • Brassica family veggies: Vegetables from the Brassica family—including cruciferous vegetables, like kale, broccoli, cauliflower, cabbage, mustard greens, and bok choy—will likely turn your veggie broth bitter. However, I often use kale stems (check out this handy guide to properly remove stems from kale) and chard stems as an addition. 
  • Beets and beet skins: These reddish-purple veggies will likely transfer their color into your stock, resulting in off-colored dishes when cooking.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a master chef to make the best-tasting vegetable broth. Here are a few pro tips to help you as you make your own vegetable stock.

  • Rinse and chop veggies well: Be sure to remove all harmful debris from your veggies. When rinsing your ingredients, I recommend scrubbing them lightly under cold tap water with a soft vegetable brush. Then, chop your veggies into small pieces to ensure they release maximum flavor into your stock.
  • Choose fresh ingredients: Using fresh vegetables is the best way to give your vegetarian broth the best flavor. Avoid wilted or overripe produce, as these ingredients will give your vegetable soup stock a bitter taste. Organic vegetables are always preferable, but non-organic ones would also work.
  • Mix and match vegetables: To us, the secret to a good vegetable broth is to use a variety of vegetables in your mix. And when doing so, it is important to avoid using a lot of one kind. 
  • Roast or sauté your veggies: Roasting or sautéing your vegetables before adding them to your stock will help release their garden-fresh flavors, resulting in extra complexity and depth. These pre-cooked veggies will give you a brown vegetable stock with a more robust flavor than white stocks. To sauté your vegetables, cook them in a skillet with one tablespoon of olive oil for 15 minutes. To roast them, cook them in a 300-degree F. oven for 30-35 minutes.
  • Begin with cold water: I recommend beginning with cold water when cooking your veg stock. This more significant temperature differential will gradually extract the vegetables’ flavors, resulting in greater depth and a richer taste.
  • Simmer gently: After boiling your vegetable broth, reduce the mixture to a gentle simmer. This lower temperature will ensure that your stock comes out savory—not bitter—and clear.
  • Strain the veggie stock: Once the cooking time is completed, pour the mixture through a fine-mesh strainer to remove the remaining vegetable pieces. Some people also line it with a cheesecloth, but it is optional. Press the veggies against the strainer to extract their juices, then discard the remaining solids. This process will give your stock the most flavor while ensuring a smooth, clear texture.
  • Cool completely before storing: Before storing your DIY vegetable broth, let it reach room temperature. This cooling will ensure your storage containers don’t crack in the cold, reduce unwanted condensation, and prevent bacterial growth.
  • Adding salt: To avoid oversalting it, I prefer to begin with a small amount of salt —only one teaspoon—and add more as the flavors develop. However, if you prefer a saltier taste, you can add more.
Various veggie scraps in a sheet pan.
  • Vegetable Stock with Scraps: It is no secret that making homemade stock from vegetable leftovers is another popular method. Many people save their cooking trimmings and peels (such as carrot peels and onion skins) and store them in a freezer bag for future stock making. We are also fans of that method so we have dedicated a separate article to it, titled “How to make vegetable Stock from Scraps (and frozen scraps)”, where we covered the process in depth.

How to Use Veggie Stock

You can create hundreds of dishes using vegetable stock as a foundation point. Put it to good use with some of the suggestions below:

  • Vegetarian soup recipes: Veggie stock is a must when making these delectable soup dishes. Get your fall fix with a creamy, 30-minute dish like Pumpkin Ginger Soup or Wild Rice Chicken Soup. Or, use your stock for a soup recipe like my Spiced Chickpea Stew or Green Lentil Soup for a dish as delicious as it is filling.
  • Cooking grains or legumes: It doesn’t matter whether you prefer to cook quinoa on the stove, in an Instant Pot, in a rice cooker, or in the microwave. Prepare your quinoa with veggie broth, and you’ll be astounded by your grains’ savory flavor. You can even use vegetable stock for cooking wild rice or in popular wild rice recipes like my Wild Rice Pilaf or Wild Rice Stuffing. Looking for a hearty Mediterranean option? Cooking bulgur with this stock is an easy way to elevate your cooking or make dishes like Bulgur Pilaf. This vegetable broth recipe even makes an excellent base for cooking risotto!
  • Mashed potatoes: Looking for a healthy alternative to buttery mashed potatoes without sacrificing flavor? Instead of using milk or cream, try using veg stock instead! With this easy recipe, your mashed potatoes will come out rich and flavorful in no time.
  • Braising and sautéing vegetables: Add sophisticated depth to your favorite vegetable sides—like my Pan-Seard Mushrooms and Asparagus—by lightly braising them with vegetable stock.
  • Sauces and gravies: This quick vegetable broth provides an ideal base for dozens of savory sauces, like any of your pasta sauces or gravy.
  • Steaming vegetables: When you make your own vegetable broth, you have the perfect ingredient to give steamed vegetables an incomparably rich taste. Use your veg stock instead of water in Steamed Asparagus or any other steamed vegetable for an easy flavor upgrade.
  • Vegetable curries: Nothing beats the earthy, spicy taste of warm curry. Using my veggie stock recipe, you can add succulent flavor to dishes like Cauliflower Curry, Butternut Squash Red Curry Soup, and Curried Brown Rice.

FAQs

It’s a cinch to make vegetable broth from scratch. Here are the answers to some of the frequently asked questions:

What is the difference between vegetable broth and stock?

Vegetable stock generally has less seasoning and is often used as a base for other dishes. By contrast, vegetable broth tends to have more seasoning and can serve as either a recipe ingredient or a “finished dish,” ready to drink straight from a cup.

What not to put in vegetable stock?

I recommend eliminating starchy vegetables (i.e., potatoes), zucchini, green beans, cruciferous vegetables (i.e. kale, cabbage, Brussels sprouts), beets, and beet skins from your ingredient list.

What is the most common vegetable mixture used in making stock?

The most common ingredient combination for veg broth is referred to as “mirepoix,” meaning the combination of onions, celery, and carrots.

Can you freeze homemade vegetable stock?

Yes! To freeze your homemade veggie broth, let it first reach room temperature. Transfer the liquid to airtight, freezer-safe containers, leaving 1-2 inches at the top of each container. It should be good for up to 6 months in the freezer.

How long does homemade vegetable stock last in the fridge?

When stored properly in airtight containers, this veg stock will last up to 5 days in the refrigerator.

What to do with the leftover vegetables from making veggie stock?

A great way to eliminate food waste and eliminate your vegetable scraps is to compost them.

What is the difference between white vegetable stock and brown vegetable stock?

White vegetable stock is made by simmering whole vegetables in water whereas the brown version is made by first roasting vegetables in water and then simmering them in water.

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Vegetables in a big pot to make vegetable stock.
Print

How to Make Vegetable Stock

Learn how to make vegetable stock at home cheaper than store bought vegetable broth. Homemade veggie stock is such as easy way to elevate any of your soups, stews, sauces and casseroles.
Course Vegan
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 8 cups
Calories 107kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 large onions roughly chopped
  • 4 medium size carrots chopped in 2-inch pieces
  • 2 celery stalks chopped
  • 1 whole head of garlic cut in half widthwise
  • 5 sprigs fresh parsley
  • 3 sprigs fresh thyme
  • 2 teaspoons kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black peppercorns about 8-10 whole peppercorns
  • 10 cups water

Optional Add-ins

  • 1 cup Mushroom or mushroom stems
  • 1-2 bay leaves
  • 1 leek with the top

Instructions

  • Place onion, carrots, celery, garlic, fresh parsley and fresh thyme sprigs, salt and pepper and any of the optional add ins into a large stockpot or a Dutch oven.
  • Pour the water in.
  • Put the lid on and bring to a boil on medium-high heat.
  • Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to medium and let it simmer, stirring once or twice, for about an hour to hour and a half.
  • Let it cool for 10 – 15 minutes and carefully strain using a fine mesh strainer placed over a large heat proof bowl, pressing the juices out of the vegetables with the back of a spoon. Discard the veggies.
  • Transfer the vegetable broth into jars. Cool them to room temperature before storing in the fridge or freezing for later use.

Notes

  • Rinse your vegetables well: It is best to give your vegetables a quick rinse to get any debris before using them in your stock. You can also use a soft brush to gently rub them (such as carrots). This way, there is no need to peel them. Needless to say, avoid using moldy or rotten vegetables.
  • Vegetables to avoid: You can use this basic recipe and add more veggies based on what you have on hand. However, we recommend avoiding cruciferous vegetables such as kale, cabbage, and Brussels sprouts as they can make your broth bitter. Also, starch veggies like potatoes would make your stock cloudy so it is best not to use them.
  • Storage & freezing instructions: You can store your stock in an airtight container (such as a mason jar) in the fridge for up to 5 days. You can also freeze it for up to 6 months. Thaw it in the fridge overnight.
  • Vegetable stock with scraps: You can make vegetable broth using kitchen scraps or even frozen scrap. The method is similar but there are a few other things to pay attention to. If you want to try that method, check out our detailed post on how to make veggie broth from scraps to learn more.

Nutrition

Calories: 107kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 4780mg | Potassium: 411mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 177IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 162mg | Iron: 2mg

The post How To Make Vegetable Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-vegetable-stock/feed/ 2
Vegetable Stock from Scraps https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-stock-from-scraps/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-stock-from-scraps/#respond Wed, 12 Apr 2023 22:06:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66247 Making homemade vegetable stock from scraps is an easy way to save money, eliminate food waste, and prepare hundreds of delectable dishes. Cheaper than store-bought broths, this simple recipe makes for easy storage and freezing, so you can effortlessly incorporate it into your weekly meal prep. Not to mention, it is a great alternative to chicken stock to use in vegetarian recipes. Add it to sauces for a rich, savory...

The post Vegetable Stock from Scraps appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Making homemade vegetable stock from scraps is an easy way to save money, eliminate food waste, and prepare hundreds of delectable dishes. Cheaper than store-bought broths, this simple recipe makes for easy storage and freezing, so you can effortlessly incorporate it into your weekly meal prep. Not to mention, it is a great alternative to chicken stock to use in vegetarian recipes.

Add it to sauces for a rich, savory flavor, or use it as a delicious base for your favorite soups and stews. No matter how you use it, vegetable scrap broth will make your kitchen taste like a five-star restaurant. 

Kitchen scraps placed in a pot to make vegetable broth.

What Veggie Scraps to Use for Stock?

Don’t know what ingredients to add to your veggie scrap stock? Using this master list, you’ll find dozens of ideas, from hearty vegetable trims to savory veggie peels. 

  • The outer layer and skin of alliums: One of the most flavorful additions that you can add to a veggie broth from kitchen scraps is the outer layer of vegetables like onions, shallots, and garlic. In particular, onion skins and onion peels give scrap stock a hearty, robust taste.
  • Green parts of scallions and leeks: The green ends of green onions and leek tops can add mild, grassy undertones to your vegetable broth with scraps.
  • Fennel tops: Full of sweet, licorice flavor, fennel tops make a great addition.
  • Carrots and carrot tops: These carrot bits unlock sumptuous, sweet flavors in your stock. As a bonus, they also add great color!
  • Corn cobs: If you are like us a huge fan of the popular Mexican dishes, Mexican Corn Salad or Mexican Street Corn Soup and make them during the summer months, with this recipe, you can use the leftover corn cobs to lend your own vegetable broth a sweet, buttery taste. And if you have so many corn cobs then you can also make our Corn Broth recipe.
  • Mushroom stems: Don’t throw away your mushroom scraps the next time you make Roasted Portobello Mushrooms or Shiitake Mushroom Soups. Mushroom stems are the perfect ingredient to give your homemade stock an earthy, full-bodied flavor.
Veggie scraps to use for stock are on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • Tomatoes and tomato skins: Some of my favorite leftover vegetable scraps to add are tomatoes and tomato skins. These pantry-classic ingredients add a bright and sweet flavor to any homemade broth.
  • Vegetable peels: Nearly any vegetable peel will work in this flavorful stock recipe, from carrot peels to squash peels. Even pea pods add delicious notes to this flavorful vegetable stock.
  • Herbs and herb stems: After using fresh herbs in a dish be sure to add your leftover stems to your vegetable stock! Fresh parsley and thyme are some of the best things to brighten up the taste of your vegetable scrap stock.
  • Peppers: There’s no need to let the tops of your bell peppers go to waste. Add them in for a light, earthy flavor. However, I recommend using bell peppers in small amounts, as they can give them a bitter taste if used too much.
  • Asparagus ends: Put your leftover asparagus bits (including the woody ends) to good use and add to the saved scraps pile. 

Optional Add-Ins

Want to add even more flavor to your veggie stock from scraps? Here are a few additional ingredients to elevate veggie scrap broth:

  • Onion, carrot, celery: These three ingredients—a mix called “mirepoix”—form a hearty vegetable stock base. They are also the backbone of a good vegetable broth. While scraps are usually enough, (optionally) you can also add an equal amount of each of these vegetables to ensure that your broth from veggie scraps has a rich, well-balanced flavor profile.
  • Garlic: If you prefer a bold, rich flavor, garlic cloves are a great way to add complexity to the stock. You don’t need to peel them, either; simply smash the cloves and add them directly to your vegetable scraps.
  • Bay leaf: I love to add bay leaves as they give the liquid irresistible herby undertones. Even better, you only need one bay leaf per batch of broth.
  • Salt: Salt can be a secret weapon when making veggie stock from scraps. Add a small amount of kosher salt (or sea salt) to bring out the nuanced flavors of your broth veggies.
  • Black peppercorns: Whole peppercorns are a classic ingredient in any stock recipe and this one is no exception.
  • Fresh ginger and turmeric: Ginger and turmeric are my go-to’s when making Asian-inspired dishes. Use a small amount of these ingredients to complement your dish. Keep in mind, however, that turmeric will likely change the color of your broth.

What Vegetable Scraps Are Not Good for Stock?

There are no strict rules regarding which veggie scraps should be avoided in making vegetable stock. With that being said, in an ideal scenario, it would be preferable to exclude certain vegetables or at least use them sparingly. Below are a few of those:

  • Cruciferous vegetables: Avoid adding many vegetables from the Brassica family—such as kale, cabbage, cauliflower, broccoli, chard, and Brussels sprouts, as these veggie scraps may give your broth a bitter flavor.
  • Starchy vegetable trimmings: I don’t recommend adding the skins and trimmings of starchy vegetables, like potatoes or potato skins, to your broth recipe, as they tend to make the stock cloudy.
  • Beets: I avoid beets in my kitchen scraps pile because they carry an intense color and overpoweringly earthy flavor.
  • Eggplant: I recommend avoiding eggplant trimmings in your food scraps to eliminate an unwanted slimy texture and unnecessarily strong flavor.
  • Spicy peppers: It isn’t easy to cook with veggie stock that’s too spicy. That’s why I avoid spicy peppers—such as jalapeños, serranos, and habaneros—when preparing my vegetable scrap stock.
  • Artichokes: Artichoke pieces tend to have a powerful taste that will overwhelm the other, more nuanced flavors of vegetable scrap broth.
  • Rotten or moldy vegetables: The most important rule of thumb is to use vegetables that aren’t rotten or moldy, as these ingredients will give your stock a bitter flavor and even pose a health risk.

How to Save Vegetable Scraps for Stock

Wash the vegetables well before use to keep the scraps as fresh, clean, and tasty as possible. A soft kitchen brush works well to eliminate any unwanted soil and debris. This way, your peels, ends, leaves, stems, and trimmings are ready to use directly after cutting.

Photos showing how to save scraps for stock in plastic bags.
  • In the fridge: You may store your vegetable scraps in an airtight Ziploc bag in the refrigerator and add them to your veggie scrap stock once you collect 4-6 cups. Labeling your bags will help ensure your ingredients don’t go bad before you use them. 
  • In the freezer: Another way to collect vegetable scraps is by putting them in an airtight container or a freezer bag in the freezer. Once you reach 4-6 cups, you can save them for later or make veggie stock immediately.

How to Make Vegetable Broth from Scraps

Making vegetable stock from scraps is the best way to use up vegetable leftovers without hassle. Follow these effortless instructions for savory, rich broth every time.

A collage of images showinghow to make veggie broth from scraps.
  1. Add the ingredients: Place all the veggie scraps, salt, and peppercorns into a large stock pot or Dutch oven. If you’re making vegetable stock from frozen scraps, you don’t need to thaw them first. Just keep in mind that the total time of cooking will be longer. Pour the water over the veggie scraps, put the lid on the pot, and bring the contents to a boil over the stovetop. 
  2. Let it simmer: After it boils, leave the lid ajar, and let it simmer for 1-1½ hours.
  3. Strain: Strain the veggie stock broth by placing a fine-mesh strainer over a large bowl. Discard or compost the leftover vegetables.
  4. Cool the stock: If you are using it right away, use it in your dish. Otherwise, pour the stock into mason jars or airtight plastic containers, and let the liquid cool to room temperature.
  5. Store: Once the liquid has cooled, store it in the fridge, or freeze it for later use.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw

  • Store: Place broth in airtight plastic containers or mason jars. Once they are fully cooled, place them in the fridge and use them within 5 days.
  • Freeze: To freeze, let the liquid come to room temperature in freezer-safe airtight containers (such as Weck jars). Leave 1-2 inches at the top of each container. Then, store the stock in the freezer for up to 6 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw the frozen broth in the fridge overnight.
Veggie scrap stock in a jar labeled with the date.

How to Use It In Your Cooking?

There are countless ways to use this flavorful homemade veggie stock from scraps. From creamy risotto to hearty soup recipes, the possibilities are endless when you make your own vegetable stock. 

  • Soups and stews: Veggie scrap stock makes a rich, flavorful base for countless delicious soup and stew recipes. Whether you whip up an umami-packed, one-pot Shiitake Mushroom Soup or a hearty, vegan French Lentil Soup, your kitchen scraps can create mouthwatering flavors in under an hour.
  • Poached vegetables with meat and fish: Who can resist buttery, tender veggies alongside a protein-packed main? Use your vegetable broth from scraps to make these crowd-pleasing menus, and your dinner guests won’t resist a second plate.
  • Risotto: Rich, creamy, and utterly delicious, risotto is one of my favorite Italian dishes. Now you can add incomparable savoriness to every bite by whipping up this classic recipe using this simple recipe as the cooking liquid.
  • Cooking grains: There’s no reason why your grains have to be bland. You can give anything from Jasmine Brown Rice, Black Rice Pilaf to white rice, and even Stovetop Quinoa gourmet taste using vegetable scrap stock.

Expert Tips

Here are a few helpful tips for the best results as you make your own veggie broth from scraps:

  • Don’t use old or moldy vegetables: Even though we’re using scraps, you don’t want to use moldy or rotten vegetables. These unpalatable veggies will give your broth a sour, bitter taste and may introduce unwanted bacteria to your recipe. Be sure, too, to give your veggies a good rinse before adding them to your mix.
  • Mix and match veggies: Don’t be afraid to experiment with new blends of vegetables. Various combinations will result in different flavors, which may better suit a specific recipe or taste preference.
  • Don’t overuse any vegetables: One of the best parts about making broth from veggie scraps is that the flavor improves with a balanced mix of vegetables. Try not to use too much of any one kind of vegetable, as this will give your broth’s favor a monotone, often unsavory taste.
  • Try to compliment your favorite recipes: Nothing tastes better than using a perfectly paired veggie stock to make a recipe. I recommend tailoring which veggie scraps you use to bring out your menu’s natural flavors. For example, when cooking Asian-inspired dishes—like my fan-favorite Ramen Bowl—I love adding ginger to my veggie scrap mix. 
  • Roast or sauté the scraps: Though this extra step takes more prep time, roasting or sautéing veggie scraps before adding them to your broth mix will give your stock a rich, caramelized flavor. To roast your veggies, bake them in the oven at low heat (300 degrees F.) for 20-25 minutes, and toss them halfway through the cooking process. To sauté them, cook them in a pan for 5-7 minutes with a bit of olive oil.
  • Cook it at a gentle simmer: To avoid giving your veggie scrap stock a bitter flavor, bring your mix to a gentle simmer after it reaches a boil. Don’t cook it for more than 1½ hours, and be sure to taste it before adding it to other recipes.
  • Store it in small portions: Store your stock in 1-2 cup portions, which makes it easy to use in future meals (including your weekly meal prep.)
Vegetable scrap broth with veggies after the cooking time is completed.

FAQs:

Have more questions about this homemade vegetable broth with scraps? This simple guide covers everything from making vegetable broth from frozen scraps to alternate cooking methods.

Can I reuse/recycle the veggie scraps after making veggie broth?

I don’t recommend reusing veggie scraps after making homemade broth because you’ve likely already extracted all their flavor and nutrition. Instead, you can discard or put the scraps in a compost bin.

How to make vegetable stock from frozen scraps?

You don’t have to thaw your vegetable pieces when you make veggie stock from frozen scraps. Simply follow the recipe as usual, considering the cook time will be longer.

How to make vegetable stock from scraps in an Instant Pot?

To make veggie scrap broth in a pressure cooker, use the same amount of ingredients written in the recipe and set your Instant Pot to high pressure for 30 minutes. Though, keep in mind that it will take about 20 minutes for your mix to reach high pressure before beginning the cooking process.

How many cups of vegetable scraps should I use for stock?

Depending on the size of your pot, I recommend using 4-6 cups of veggie scraps and 8-10 cups of water, to make a whole batch of homemade vegetable scrap broth.

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Vegetable stock from scraps in a big pot from the top view.
Print

Vegetable Stock from Scraps Recipe

The foolproof method for making vegetable stock from kitchen scraps. This method is not only delicious but also much cheaper than the vegetable stock you buy at the grocery store. Use it in soups, stews, casserole, sauces, and more!
Course Vegetarian
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 8 cups
Calories 7kcal

Ingredients

  • 4-6 cups of veggie scraps ie peels, trimmings, tops, and bottoms
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 8-10 black peppercorns
  • 8-10 cups of water

Optional Add ins:

  • 2-3 cloves of garlic smashed
  • 3-4 parsley stems

Instructions

  • Place veggie scraps, salt, and peppercorns into a stock pot or a Dutch oven. If using, add garlic and parsley stems.
  • Pour water over the veggie scraps.
  • Bring it to a boil and let is simmer for 1 to 1 ½ hours (partially cover it with the lid.)
  • When done, turn the heat off and let it cool for 20-30 minutes.
  • Place a fine mesh strainer over a large bowl and strain vegetables. Discard or compost vegetables.
  • Pour the veggie scarp stock into jars (or plastic containers), bring to room temperature, and store in the fridge or freeze for later.

Notes

  • Ratio of kitchen scraps to water: Depending on the size of your pot, I recommend using 4-6 cups of veggie scraps and 8-10 cups of water, to make a whole batch of homemade vegetable scrap broth.
  • Vegetables that are good for scraps: Trimmings and peels of alliums (onions, leeks, shallots), carrot, celery, garlic, tomatoes, and corn cobs are a few to name.
  • Vegetables to avoid: Peels and trimmings of cruciferous vegetables (i.e. kale, cabbage, Brussels sprouts), beets, spicy peppers, and artichokes are a few to name. We also recommend avoiding any moldy or rotten vegetables or scraps.
  • Frozen scraps: You can use this exact recipe with frozen scraps. There is no need to thaw. The only difference would be the time of cooking.
  • Storage & freezing: You can store your stock in an airtight container (such as a Weck jar or a mason jar) in the fridge for up to 5 days. You can freeze it for up to 6 months. We recommend thawing it in the fridge overnight.
  • Vegetable stock using whole veggies: If you prefer making stock using whole vegetables (instead of kitchen scraps), be sure to check out our detailed post on Homemade Vegetable Broth.

Nutrition

Calories: 7kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 0.01g | Saturated Fat: 0.003g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Sodium: 773mg | Potassium: 6mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 282IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.05mg

The post Vegetable Stock from Scraps appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-stock-from-scraps/feed/ 0
Steamed Asparagus https://foolproofliving.com/steamed-asparagus-with-white-bean-and-artichoke-aioli/ https://foolproofliving.com/steamed-asparagus-with-white-bean-and-artichoke-aioli/#comments Sun, 09 Apr 2023 22:34:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7431 We’re huge fans of asparagus here at Foolproof Living. From rich, buttery Pan Sautéed Asparagus to tender-crisp Air Fried Asparagus, asparagus recipes are a must in my recipe book. If you prefer to cook veggies in the oven, you could even whip up my healthy yet flavorful Baked Asparagus with just five simple ingredients! These simple veggie sides are just what you need to complete your menu during asparagus season....

The post Steamed Asparagus appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
We’re huge fans of asparagus here at Foolproof Living. From rich, buttery Pan Sautéed Asparagus to tender-crisp Air Fried Asparagus, asparagus recipes are a must in my recipe book. If you prefer to cook veggies in the oven, you could even whip up my healthy yet flavorful Baked Asparagus with just five simple ingredients! These simple veggie sides are just what you need to complete your menu during asparagus season.

Steamed asparagus on a plated garnished with lemon wedges.

Ingredients

Whether you’re making steamed asparagus in a steamer or steaming asparagus in a pan doesn’t matter. You only need one simple ingredient to prepare this nutritious recipe: asparagus! Plus, of course, your favorite seasonings such as butter, a squeeze of lemon juice, and salt & pepper (we’ll cover the seasoning options in detail below.)

Seasoning for steamed asparagus; butter, lemon, and salt and pepper on a marble backdrop.

You may choose any fresh asparagus for this recipe, including green, purple, and white asparagus. 

Keep in mind, too, that the steam time for asparagus directly correlates with the thickness of your stalks—not necessarily the type of asparagus. Therefore, your asparagus steam time may vary depending on the thickness of your spears.

After selecting your asparagus, complete the following steps: 

  1. Rinse it under cool water.
  2. Dry it with a kitchen towel.
  3. Remove the woody ends (1-2 inches from the bottom). You can either snap off these ends with your fingers or line up your asparagus stalks on a cutting board and slice them off as a group. Discard the trims or save them for making veggie stock later.
Person cutting the woody ends of asparagus on a cutting board.

Once prepped, you can cook the vegetable immediately or save it for future use. For more handy tips on storage instructions, check out my simple guide on storing asparagus.

How to Steam Asparagus?

This steamed asparagus recipe comes together with minimal effort and in no time, no matter which method you choose. Select any of these four foolproof cooking styles, and you’ll never have to scramble for side dish ideas again.

With a Steamer Basket

Want to steam fresh asparagus perfectly every time? Learn how to steam asparagus with a steamer basket, and your veggies will come out exquisitely tender without hassle. 

A collage of images showing how to steam asparagus using a steamer basket.
  1. Fill the pot: Select a large pot—one that’s large enough to fit your steamer basket—with a tight-fitting lid. Fill the bottom of the pan with 2-3 inches of water. The water level should reach below the bottom of the steam basket.
  2. Prepare the steamer basket: Place a collapsible steamer basket (affiliate link) inside the pot. Add the lid to the pot and bring the water to a boil.
  3. Steam the asparagus: Place the asparagus spears—cut or whole—inside the basket, put the lid back on the pot, and cook for 4-5 minutes for al dente.
  4. Serve: Carefully remove the asparagus stalks from the steamer basket. Top with your desired seasonings, then serve.

On the Stove

Steaming asparagus on the stove is one of the most hassle-free methods of perfectly cooking your veggies. Using this method, you can still get similar results to steaming asparagus in a steamer without having to own yet another kitchen gadget.

A collage of photos showing how to steam asparagus spears on the stove in a skillet.
  1. Prepare the skillet: Fill a large skillet with just enough water to cover its bottom. You shouldn’t have to use more than a cup of water.
  2. Steam asparagus in the pan: Add the asparagus to the skillet, put the lid on, and bring the water to a boil over medium-high heat. Pan-steam the asparagus for 5-6 minutes or until tender.
  3. Serve: Transfer the pan-steamed asparagus to a serving plate.

In the Microwave

Curious about how to steam asparagus without a steamer? Follow this steamed asparagus recipe that I learned from the folks over at The Kitchn! The steps below will have you steaming asparagus in the microwave in no time. 

A collage of images showing how to steam asparagus in the microwave.
  1. Wet the paper towels: Wet four sheets of paper towels with ¼ cup water. Gently squeeze each sheet to remove excess water. Your paper towels should be damp—not soaking wet—by the end of this step.
  2. Assemble: Stack all four paper towel sheets on top of one another, then arrange the asparagus stalks in a single layer. This step is optional but if you want season the vegetables with salt with a little bit of salt (about ¼ teaspoon.)
  3. Wrap: Roll the paper towels with the asparagus inside into a semi-tight bundle. When finished wrapping, your bundle should have several layers of asparagus and paper towels inside.
Person placing asparagus in microwave with paper towel.
  1. Cook asparagus in the microwave: Place the asparagus in the microwave with the paper towel wrap. Cook on high for 3 minutes.
  2. Check for doneness: Remove the microwave-steamed asparagus bundle from the microwave, being careful of its heat. Gently unroll the bundle and pierce one of the spears with a paring knife to check for doneness. If it needs more time, re-roll the bundle and steam the asparagus in the microwave in 1-minute increments until it reaches your desired doneness.

In a Rice Cooker

If you love easy kitchen shortcuts, you’ll adore this foolproof method for fresh steamed asparagus. Put your rice cooker to work and get tender, nutritious spears every time.

A collage of images showing how to steam asparagus spears in a rice cooker.
  1. Prepare the rice cooker: Fill the inner pot of your rice cooker (I own an Aroma Rice Cooker – affiliate link) with 1½ cups of water. Place the steamer tray on top.
  2. Arrange the asparagus: Place asparagus stalks on top of the steamer tray.
  3. Steam the spears: Close the lid, then turn on your rice cooker. Select the steam setting and set your timer for 10 minutes. Because the countdown timer doesn’t start until the water inside boils, even though the actual cook time is only 10 minutes, it takes about 20-25 minutes to steam asparagus in a rice cooker.
  4. Remove the steamer basket: After cooking, open the lid and carefully remove the steaming basket using a tong or oven mitts.
  5. Serve: Transfer the steamed fresh asparagus to a serving platter, season as desired, and serve.

How Long Does it Take to Steam Asparagus?

Wondering how much time it takes to steam asparagus? The quick answer is that this simple recipe usually takes 3-6 minutes to prepare. However, remember that these times are for one bunch of medium-thick spears (about ½-inch diameter).

Below is a quick guide for steaming time for asparagus to an al dente tenderness. If your stalks are different thicknesses, use the following tips:

  • If you select thinner stalks, reduce the cooking time by 1-2 minutes. 
  • If you choose thicker stalks, add 1-2 minutes of cooking time to the recipe.
Steaming MethodAsparagus Steam Time
Using a steamer basket4-5 minutes
On The Stove in a Pan5-6 minutes
In the microwave (high heat setting)3 minutes
In a rice cooker (using the steamer insert)20-25 minutes 

How to Check for Asparagus Doneness

There are two easy ways to check whether your asparagus is ready to eat:

A person checking doneness by inserting a knife into a spear.
  • Knife method: To check the doneness of your asparagus, insert a paring knife into a spear. If the blade enters without extra effort, your asparagus doesn’t need more time. You may also cook your asparagus to whatever tenderness level you prefer.
  • Visual cues: You can also assess whether your asparagus needs more or less time by its color. Perfectly steamed asparagus should have beautiful, fresh green hues. If your spears come out in more of a green-olive color, they’re likely overcooked.

How to Season Steamed Asparagus?

If you love to try new flavor combinations, you’ll enjoy the endless seasoning options that are available to you. The list below includes zesty lemon juice, creamy salad dressing, roasted garlic, and more!

  • Butter: Rich, decadent, and full-bodied, butter is just what you need to bring this easy dish to life. Drizzle your asparagus with two tablespoons of melted butter, or kick it up a notch with my robust and creamy Roasted Garlic Butter.
  • Extra Virgin Olive oil: A small drizzle of olive oil is an easy way to give your delicious asparagus subtle yet mouthwatering complexity. Plus, olive oil makes it much easier to season steamed asparagus with other herbs and spices.
  • Salt & pepper: Who can resist a classic? Always stocked in my spice cabinet, a pinch of sea or kosher salt and a dash of freshly ground black pepper are my go-to seasonings for this steamed asparagus recipe.
  • Garlic: Give this side dish bold, earthy notes by topping steamed asparagus with garlic. Along with a drizzle of olive oil, you can use freshly minced garlic, oven-roasted garlic, air-fried garlic, lightly sautéed garlic, or even garlic powder in this asparagus recipe.
  • Parmesan cheese: Nothing complements steamed asparagus’s grassy, tender taste better than nutty, rich parmesan cheese. Sprinkle your freshly steamed asparagus with one tablespoon of olive oil, 2-3 tablespoons of parmesan cheese, and a dash of black pepper, and voila! An elegant side perfect for any occasion.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh parsley and basil are an iconic seasoning for steamed asparagus. Earthy, fragrant, and visually stunning, these herbs will give every bite a sumptuous flavor.
  • A squeeze of fresh lemon: Bring every bite of your vegetable to life with a light spritz of fresh lemon juice. Brilliant and bright, lemon wedges will also give your asparagus spears a gorgeous presentation.
  • Your favorite salad dressings: To give your asparagus maximum flavor, salad dressing is the way to go. Yogurt Dressing and Ranch Yogurt Dressing are two easy recipes with creamy, tangy richness. Or, try a lighter flavor profile with my fan-favorite recipes for Lemon Salad Dressing and Lemon Mustard Dressing.
  • Hollandaise sauce: You only need four ingredients and two minutes to make this buttery, luxurious topping. Serve this sophisticated asparagus dish at Easter brunch or on busy weeknights. You’ll be licking your plate clean, no matter the time of day.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

Steaming fresh asparagus is the perfect dish for easy meal prep. Store it for simple lunch salads throughout the week, or freeze it for meals months in advance—the choice is yours!

  • Storage: Before storing, let your steamed asparagus cool completely. Once room temperature, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for 3-4 days.
  • Freezing: I recommend flash-freezing asparagus to ensure it maintains its texture. First, let your steamed spears cool completely. Then, lay them in a single layer on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper. Place the baking tray in the freezer until the asparagus hardens. Once frozen, transfer the stalks to an airtight container, such as a Ziploc bag, and remove as much air as possible. You may then store your asparagus in the freezer for up to a month.
  • Thawing: To thaw your frozen asparagus, take it out of the freezer one to two hours before serving.

How to Serve?

This recipe for steamed asparagus is as versatile as it is delicious. Serve it warm or cold, with a protein or on a salad, or even on its own for a side dish the whole family will love.

  • As a side dish: Light and healthy, steamed asparagus perfectly balance the hearty taste of chicken, beef, pork, and turkey recipes. You can even serve it with morning eggs to start your day with vitamins, antioxidants, and fiber.
  • Make it a part of a spring salad: What pairs better with spring-fresh salads than more delicious vegetables? Mix your steamed asparagus into irresistibly fresh recipes, like my Asparagus Salad or Boston Lettuce Salad, for a light lunch or a crisp vegetarian main course.
  • As a topping: Steamed asparagus makes an ideal topping for dozens of nutritious, filling recipes. Add it to Savory Steel-Cut Oatmeal for a hint of grassy flavor, or layer it atop Asparagus Tart for an earthy, creamy side you’ll serve at every get-together.

Expert Tips

It doesn’t matter whether you prefer preparing your asparagus in a steamer or making asparagus steamed in the microwave. Here are a few pro tips to help you get tasty and tender asparagus every time.

  • Woody ends: Don’t skip trimming off the asparagus spears’ bottom 1-2 inches. These tough ends have a rigid, woody texture and don’t taste good.
  • Cut or not: For any of my four cooking methods, you may steam your asparagus spears whole or cut them into smaller, 2-inch pieces.
  • Using rice cooker and microwave: Please keep in mind that every rice cooker and microwave is different, so I’d encourage you to look at their user manuals before steaming asparagus. Take my recipe instructions as a place to start and adjust them as necessary, especially when it comes to steaming time.
  • Ice water bath: If I am serving y steamed asparagus right away, there is no need to set up an ice water bath. However, if you are planning to serve it later, it is a good idea to fill a bowl with water and ice and place the freshly steamed asparagus stalks in there to stop the cooking. This way it will continue to maintain its bright green color and still be fork-tender when you are ready to serve.

FAQs

There’s no secret to how to steam fresh asparagus. This handy guide will answer all your questions, from how long to steam asparagus to the difference between cooking methods.

Is it better to boil or steam asparagus?

My favorite way to cook asparagus is to steam it instead of boiling it. When you boil asparagus, the vegetables lose some of their nutrients in the water. By contrast, steamed asparagus retains its nutritional value while achieving a warm, tender texture.

How do you tell if steamed asparagus is done?

You can tell asparagus is done using one of two ways. One method is to insert a paring knife into an asparagus spear and see if the spear is tender enough to allow easy insertion. You can also use visual cues to tell. Appropriately steamed asparagus should have a bright green color, while overcooked asparagus is a lighter green with olive undertones.

How do you steam asparagus if you don’t have a steamer?

If you don’t have a steamer, you can also use the other three other methods I detail above: on the stove, in the microwave, or in a rice cooker.

How is steaming asparagus different than blanching?

Unlike steaming, blanching is a form of par-cooking in which you cook asparagus directly in boiling water for 5-6 minutes before immediately transferring it to an ice bath. By contrast, steaming entails cooking asparagus in the steam of boiling water for 5-6 minutes.

Other Asparagus Recipes You Might Like

One bite of this perfectly steamed asparagus, and you’ll be longing for asparagus recipes every night of the week. Satisfy all your garden-fresh cravings with these easy side dishes.

Steamed asparagus on a plate garnished with lemon slices.
Print

Steamed Asparagus Recipe

Steamed asparagus is probably the easiest and most versatile side dish you can make. Below is 4 different methods you can steam asparagus; Using a steamer basket, on the stove, in the microwave, and in a rice cooker.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 1 Bunch
Calories 91kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 bunch of asparagus rinsed
  • Water

Instructions

  • Trim the ends: Snap off the woody ends of the asparagus spears by holding the ends and bending them until they break naturally. Or, if you want to do it faster, you can line them on a cutting board and trim an inch (or two) off the bottom using a knife.

Using a Steamer Basket:

  • Prepare the pot: Fill the bottom of a large pot (one that is large enough to accommodate your steamer basket) with a tight-fitting lid with two to three inches of water. The water level should be below the bottom of the steamer basket.
  • Assemble the steamer basket: Place a collapsible steamer basket inside. Put the lid on and bring the water to a boil.
  • Add the asparagus spears: Place the asparagus stalks inside, put the lid back on, and cook for 4-5 minutes for al dente.
  • Season and serve: Carefully remove steamed asparagus stalks from the steamer basket and season it with your favorite seasonings.

In a Pan on the Stove Top:

  • Prepare the skillet: Fill a large (10 or 12-inch) skillet with water just enough to cover the bottom of it. No more than 1/2 cup.
  • Cook: Add the asparagus, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat. Let it steam for 5-6 minutes or until tender. I use kitchen tongs to turn them a few times to ensure that they are cooking evenly.
  • Serve: Transfer them onto a plate and season as you wish.

In the Microwave:

  • Prepare the paper towels: Wet 4 sheets of paper towels using ¼ cup water. Gently squeeze each sheet of paper towel to remove excess water. They should be dampened instead of soaking wet.
  • Assemble: Stack all four sheets on top of each other and spread the asparagus spears on top in a single layer. Season with salt.
  • Wrap: Roll the paper towels into a bundle with asparagus spears, forming layers of asparagus and paper towels throughout. It should be a semi-tight bundle more so than a loose one.
  • Microwave: Place the bundle into the microwave and cook on high for 3 minutes.
  • Check for doneness: Remove the asparagus bundle from the microwave. Being very careful (it is hot!!), unroll the bundle and pierce one of the spears with a pairing knife to check for doneness. If it needs more time, roll it again and microwave for 1-minute increments until it is cooked to your liking.

In a Rice Cooker:

  • Prepare the rice cooker: Fill the inner pot of your rice cooker with 1 ½ cups of water. Place the provided steamer tray on top.
  • Add the asparagus: Place the asparagus on top. If the full stalks don't fit, you can cut them into smaller pieces.
  • Steam: Close the lid. Turn on the rice cooker. Select the steam setting and set the timer to 20 minutes. Please remember that the countdown timer does not start until the water inside the cooker comes to a boil.
  • Remove from the rice cooker: When the cooking time is completed (my rice cooker beeps), open the lid and carefully remove the steamer basket using a tong or kitchen mittens.
  • Serve: Transfer the steamed asparagus to a serving platter. Season as desired before serving.

Notes

  • Steaming Time: The time suggested for steaming using every one of these methods is for medium-sized asparagus (about ½-inch diameter) to an al dente tenderness. If your stalks are different thicknesses, use the following tips:
    • If you select thinner stalks, reduce the cooking time by 1-2 minutes. 
    • If you choose thicker stalks, add 1-2 minutes of cooking time to the recipe.
  • Seasoning ideas:
    Below are a few seasoning ideas that you can use to season your steamed asparagus after it is cooked:
    • Melted butter and salt and pepper: Drizzle steamed asparagus with 2 tablespoons of melted butter and sprinkle with salt and pepper. 
    • Extra virgin olive oil, garlic, lemon juice, and salt and pepper: Mix together 2 tablespoons of olive oil, 1 small minced garlic, and 1 tablespoon of lemon juice with ½ teaspoon salt, and ¼ teaspoon pepper in a small bowl. Drizzle it over the steamed asparagus.
    • Olive oil, parmesan cheese, and black pepper: Drizzle asparagus with 1 tablespoon of olive oil and sprinkle it with 2-3 tablespoons of parmesan cheese. Finish it off with freshly cracked pepper. Give it a gentle toss and serve.
  • The method for steaming asparagus is adapted from The Kitchn.

Nutrition

Calories: 91kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 916mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 3429IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 109mg | Iron: 10mg

The post Steamed Asparagus appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/steamed-asparagus-with-white-bean-and-artichoke-aioli/feed/ 8
Eggplant Beef Stew https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/#comments Mon, 03 Apr 2023 23:15:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1169 Inspired by my Vegetable Beef Soup and Crock Pot Vegetable Beef Soup, along with my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, this Turkish-style eggplant beef stew recipe takes home cooking to another level. Trust the process with this one, as the low and slow cooking technique I learned from my mom is worth the wait. Love eggplant? Be sure to check out our collection of tasty eggplant recipes. Ingredients Many of the ingredients...

The post Eggplant Beef Stew appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Inspired by my Vegetable Beef Soup and Crock Pot Vegetable Beef Soup, along with my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, this Turkish-style eggplant beef stew recipe takes home cooking to another level.

Trust the process with this one, as the low and slow cooking technique I learned from my mom is worth the wait. Love eggplant? Be sure to check out our collection of tasty eggplant recipes.

Beef and eggplant stew in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

Many of the ingredients for this beef stew with eggplant are pantry staples, along with a few that are easy to grab on a quick trip to the grocery store. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe portioned out and photographed from the top view.
  • Stew meat: You can use Sirloin steak tips, or a whole boneless beef chuck roast cut into 1 – 1 ½ inch cubes.
  • Aromatics: Onions and garlic give it a deep, savory flavor.
  • Olive oil
  • Spices and seasonings: These include ground cumin, paprika, bay leaf, salt, and black pepper.
  • Peppers: I like jalapenos for a kick of spice or red bell peppers for mild.
  • Tomatoes: We are using tomato paste and canned tomatoes (diced or crushed).
  • Eggplant: Globe eggplant is the easiest to find in grocery stores and commercial varieties mean you no longer have to deal with Sweating Eggplant. But feel free to use any Type of Eggplant you love.
  • Chicken stock: Homemade Chicken Stock will provide the best flavor, but a store-bought chicken broth would also work.
  • Green peas: Blanched Frozen Peas or store-bought frozen peas will both work.
  • Herbs: Fresh parsley or fresh oregano leaves would also work.

How to Make Eggplant Beef Stew?

This beef with aubergine recipe takes some time and patience, but your efforts will be worth it in the end. Here’s how I like to make it:

Person drying the meat and meat is in the dutch oven.
  1. Dry meat: Dry the stew meat with a paper towel on all sides.
  2. Prep meat: Set the Dutch oven over low heat and add the meat and quartered onion. Cover with the lid and let it cook for 1 hour (no peeking).
  3. Keep it low and slow: At the end of 1 hour, open the lid and give the meat and onions a stir. Cover again and continue to cook for another 2 hours. After 2 hours, you will see that the meat will release most of its juices. Do not be tempted to increase the heat – the beauty of this recipe is to cook it low and slow.
A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Finish beef: Continue cooking the meat for another 2 hours, stirring at the end of each hour. The meat should now be super soft. There may be some liquid in the pot, depending on the stew meat, which is totally fine. Give it a taste and make sure that it is soft and not too chewy. If it is, then continue cooking for another 30 minutes to an hour.
  2. Remove meat: Remove the meat, onion, and all the juices from the Dutch oven into a bowl. Cover with foil to keep warm. Do not wash the Dutch oven.
  3. Saute aromatics and spices: In the same Dutch oven, heat olive oil over medium heat and add chopped pepper, tomato paste, ground cumin, and paprika. Cook, stirring frequently, for 4 – 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for 1 minute, or until fragrant.
  4. Add veggies & let it simmer: Add the prepared eggplant, tomatoes, chicken stock, bay leaf, salt, and pepper. Place the beef, onion, and all of the juices back into the pot. Give it a stir and cover it with the lid. Bring it to a boil, then reduce it to a simmer for 15-20 minutes. 
  5. Add peas: After the 15-minute mark, add the frozen peas. Bring it to a final boil and let it simmer until ready to serve.
  6. Serve: When ready to serve, remove the bay leaf. Garnish with parsley and serve.
Turkish Style eggplant beef stew after it is cooked in a big pot with a wooden spoon on the side.

How to Make Ahead, Store Leftovers, Reheat and Freeze?

Beef stew and eggplant can be made ahead of time and stored in the fridge or freezer for longer storage. Here’s how to do it:

  • Make Ahead: The stew meat and onions can be prepped and slow-cooked (steps 1-5) up to 3 days in advance. This gives you a good head start if looking to prepare the stew any night of the week.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in 30-second increments in the microwave or over medium heat on the stove until warmed through.
  • Freeze: Bring to room temperature, then store in a freezer-safe container for 1-2 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the fridge, then reheat as instructed above.

What to Serve It With?

Any of my side dish recipes would pair wonderfully with this recipe. But if you are looking for some inspiration, some of my favorites include:

Beef eggplant stew in a plate with bread on the side.

Expert Tips

  • So delicious, you don’t even need salt. Don’t fret about not salting the meat in the beginning. The low and slow cooking method creates meat so delicious you’ll find you will not need salt until braising.
  • Keep it low and slow. Trust the process, and the meat will cook through until melt-in-your-mouth tender. Patience is a virtue with this one.
  • A quick tip for preparing eggplant for cooking: As I cut eggplant, I place it in a large bowl of water with some Kosher salt to prevent the eggplant from oxidizing and turning brown.
  • Use one kind of stew meat to ensure the best flavor and even cooking. As I learned from The Kitchn’s article, Best Choice of Meat for Stew, using one type of meat cut in equal sizes will ensure that you will end up with an eggplant beef stew that is evenly cooked.
  • Incorporate other vegetables. Mushrooms, green beans, or potatoes can be used instead of (or in addition to) eggplant. Keep in mind, potatoes or other root vegetables might take longer to cook.
  • Keep it on the smallest heat source. Use the smallest burner on the stovetop over the lowest heat setting when first cooking the meat and onions.

FAQs

Can I make this recipe in the slow cooker?

I would not recommend making this in a slow cooker (or Instant Pot) as the slow cooker is too hot, even on the low setting. The magic of this recipe is to keep it on the smallest and lowest heat source on the stove.

Can you put eggplant in beef stew?

Yes, it is one that I use in many of my stew recipes. It cooks very fast and absorbs the many delicious flavors of beef and vegetables.

How long does eggplant need to be cooked in stew?

Eggplant only takes about 15-20 minutes to cook through in stew.

Do you need to peel eggplant for stew?

No, this is a personal choice. The skin is edible, so unpeeled eggplant is just fine.

Other Beef Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Eggplant and beef stew in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Eggplant Beef Stew Recipe

Eggplant Beef Stew served with bulgur pilaf makes a satisfying dish with tender pull-apart meat. Cooked low and slow, this Turkish style beef stew is a must try!
Course Beef
Cuisine American, Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 6 hours
Total Time 6 hours 15 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 295kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 lbs stew meat Sirloin steak tips or boneless beef chuck roast, cut into 1 ½ inch cubes
  • 1 large yellow onions peeled and cut into quarters
  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil olive oil or avocado oil
  • 3 jalapeno peppers seeded and chopped – or bell pepper would also work
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 eggplant cut into cubes ~ 1 lb.
  • 1 can diced tomatoes 14.5 oz.
  • 1 cup chicken stock
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 1 cup frozen peas no need to thaw
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley freshly chopped
  • Pinch red pepper flakes or Aleppo pepper if you can get your hands on it

Instructions

  • Dry meat: Using paper towels, pat-dry the stew meat as much as you can.
  • Cook meat: Place meat in a Dutch oven with the quartered onion over low heat. Put the lid on and let it cook for an hour without opening it. I recommend using the smallest burner on your stovetop.
  • Keep it low and slow: At the end of an hour, give it a stir, put the lid back on and let it continue to cook for another two hours. At the end of two hours, you will see that the meat will release most of its juices. Do not be tempted to increase the heat or move to a larger burner; the beauty of this recipe is to cook low and slow.
  • Finish beef: Continue to cook for another 2 hours, giving it a stir at the end of each hour mark. In the end, the meat should be super soft. Depending on the stew meat you are using, there may be some liquid in the pot, which is okay.
  • Remove meat: Remove the meat and onion (and all the juices) from the pot into a bowl, cover with foil, and set it aside. Do not wash the dutch oven.
  • Saute aromatics and spices: In the same dutch oven over medium heat, heat olive oil and add chopped pepper, tomato paste, ground cumin, and paprika. Cook, stirring frequently, for 4 to 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for a minute.
  • Add veggies: Add the cubed eggplant, tomatoes, stock, bay leaf, salt, and pepper.
  • Simmer: Put the now-cooked beef, onion, and all of the juices back into the pot. Give it a quick stir, cover it with the lid, bring it to a boil and let it simmer for 15-20 minutes. Add the frozen peas and let them come to one last boil.
  • Serve: When ready to serve, make sure to take out the bay leaf. Garnish with parsley and serve.

Notes

  • Make Ahead: The stew meat and onions can be prepped and slow-cooked (steps 1-5) up to 3 days in advance. This gives you a good head start if looking to prepare the stew on a weeknight.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in 30-second increments in the microwave or over medium heat on the stove until warmed through.
  • Freeze: Bring to room temperature, then store in a freezer-safe container for 1-2 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the fridge, then reheat as instructed above.

Nutrition

Calories: 295kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 95mg | Sodium: 563mg | Potassium: 1025mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 601IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 80mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Eggplant Beef Stew appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/feed/ 17
Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie https://foolproofliving.com/peanut-butter-spinach-shake/ https://foolproofliving.com/peanut-butter-spinach-shake/#comments Sun, 02 Apr 2023 19:16:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10022 The combination of spinach and peanut butter may sound unusual, but the creamy nuttiness of the peanut butter perfectly complements the earthy flavor of the fresh spinach. Plus, adding a frozen banana and almond milk makes this spinach banana smoothie a naturally sweet and healthy drink that is worthy of your weekly smoothie rotation.  If you enjoy smoothies like this Peanut Butter Spinach Smoothie, you might also like our Turmeric...

The post Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
The combination of spinach and peanut butter may sound unusual, but the creamy nuttiness of the peanut butter perfectly complements the earthy flavor of the fresh spinach. Plus, adding a frozen banana and almond milk makes this spinach banana smoothie a naturally sweet and healthy drink that is worthy of your weekly smoothie rotation. 

If you enjoy smoothies like this Peanut Butter Spinach Smoothie, you might also like our Turmeric Green Smoothie and Vegan Banana Smoothie, which are both packed with a variety of nutrients for a satisfying breakfast. And if you need more smoothie recipe inspiration, be sure to browse our collection of superfood smoothies.

Spinach peanut butter banana smoothie garnished with banana slices from the front view.

Ingredients

The ingredient list of this peanut butter banana spinach smoothie is short and sweet, with plenty of substitutions and optional add-ins to make it even more nutritious. Below is everything you need to know to make this healthy green smoothie your own:

Ingredients for green monster smoothie on a marble backdrop.
  • Frozen banana: I usually freeze ripe bananas when they start changing their colors. If all you have is a fresh banana (and want your smoothie to be super cold), then just add in a cup of ice cubes.
  • Natural Peanut Butter: I prefer unsalted and unsweetened creamy peanut butter to avoid added sugars and excessive sodium. However, you can also use other nut butter options like almond butter or cashew butter. And if you have nut allergies, you can substitute peanut butter with a seed butter of your choice.
  • Non-Dairy Milk: I prefer dairy free unsweetened almond milk (or vanilla almond milk), but any kind of milk would work here. Soy milk, oat milk, and coconut milk would all work. 
  • Fresh Spinach Leaves: I recommend using prewashed and rinsed baby spinach for ease of use. While I prefer fresh spinach for its milder flavor, you can make it with frozen spinach as well.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins: 

  • Yogurt: I sometimes add in a few tablespoons of whole milk yogurt for probiotics. Both plain Greek yogurt and vanilla yogurt would work here.
  • Superfoods: If you stock your pantry with superfoods such as chia seeds, ground flax seeds (aka flaxseed meal), and hemp seeds, you can add them in. Additionally, you can add in a few tablespoons of your favorite protein powder and powdered collagen for an extra boost.
  • Other leafy greens: Use other leafy greens like kale (or blanched kale) and spring mix instead of raw spinach. Kale peanut butter smoothie is just as delicious but tastes rather earthy. You can also use swiss chard and collard greens, but I would recommend blanching them first to get rid of some of their bitterness.
  • Sweeteners: If you like your smoothie more on the sweeter side, adding a few tablespoons of maple syrup, a few pitted dates or some honey (non-vegan option) gives is a nice sweetness.
  • Spices: A pinch of cinnamon or nutmeg is an easy way to give in a nice kick of flavor.

How To Make Peanut Butter Banana Spinach Smoothie?

The best part of this spinach breakfast smoothie recipe is that it takes just a few minutes to make. Simply:

A collage of photos showing how to make spinach banana peanut butter smoothie recipe.
  1. Blend: Put spinach leaves, peanut butter, milk of your choice, and frozen banana (and all the optional add-ins) into a blender and blend until creamy and smooth. 
  2. Serve: Pour into a few glasses (or mason jars) and serve right away.

How To Make Ahead and Store Spinach Banana Smoothie?

Whether you make green smoothies like this for breakfast or enjoy them as a post-workout snack, with just a few minutes of advance prep, you can have them in minutes. Here is how I do it:

  • Make Ahead: Portion out all the ingredients (except peanut butter) and place them into a Ziplock bag. Store in the fridge (or freezer). When ready to serve, dump everything in your blender along with peanut butter and blend until smooth.
  • Storing leftovers: I think this peanut butter spinach banana smoothie recipe is best on the day that it is made. However, you can place the leftovers into a mason jar, put the lid on and store it in the fridge for up to 1 day. Just be sure to give it a good shake before serving.

Expert Tips:

  • Adjust the consistency: If you prefer your spinach banana peanut butter smoothie to have a thicker consistency add more frozen bananas along with a handful of ice cubes. And if you want it to have a thinner consistency, simply add more milk to the blender.
  • Use a high powered blender: If you make green monster smoothies like this one on the regular, I highly recommend investing in a high-speed blender. While you can make a good smoothie in any blender, a high-powered one makes it so much easier, especially when blending frozen fruit and leafy greens.
  • Chill your glass: I love serving this in the warmer summer months by the pool as an afternoon snack in a cold glass as an alternative to ice cream. I pour it into chilled glasses and serve it with a few slices of bananas and then let everyone know that I have a delicious green spinach milkshake! It disappears in minutes!
A person pouring smoothie with spinach and banana in a glass.

FAQs:

Why is spinach good in smoothies?

Adding a handful of spinach into your smoothie is a great idea because spinach is a low calorie, nutrient dense food that is packed with fiber, vitamins, and minerals. It also has a mild taste that does not take over the whole smoothie and blends well with the rest of the ingredients.

Are smoothies good for losing weight?

They can be as long as they are consumed in smaller portions and without extra added sugars.

Is peanut butter good for protein smoothies?

Yes, because peanut butter is a great source of plant-based protein, with 8 grams of protein per 2 tablespoons (source.) Adding a few tablespoons of peanut butter is an easy way to get a portion of your daily protein in.

Other Smoothie Recipes You Might Like:

It is no secret that green smoothies like this Spinach Banana Smoothie have a long list of benefits and incorporating them in your daily diet (especially as a substitute for your sweet cravings), will help you feel energized and full. If you agree, here are a few other smoothie recipes you might like:

If you try this healthy peanut butter green smoothie recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Peanut butter and spinach smoothie in a glass garnished with banana slices.
Print

Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie Recipe

Treat yourself to a refreshing Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie, crafted with creamy peanut butter, vibrant fresh spinach and a frozen ripe banana. This naturally sweetened green smoothie is ready in 5 minutes and great as a healthy breakfast or post work-out fuel.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 257kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups baby spinach leaves
  • 2 cups unsweetened almond milk or any other regular or plant based milk
  • 1 large banana frozen*
  • 3 tablespoons peanut butter creamy and unsalted natural peanut butter
  • 1 tablespoon ground flaxseeds optional – plus more as garnish

Instructions

  • Place all the ingredients into a blender. Blend in high speed until smooth.
  • Pour into glasses and sprinkle with ground flaxseeds (and/or chia seeds.) Serve right away.

Notes

  • Banana: If you do not have a frozen banana, you can use a ripe one and add 1 cup of ice cubes into the blender.
  • Optional sweeteners: If you want your peanut butter smoothie to be sweeter, you can add in a few tablespoons of maple syrup, honey or a few pitted dates and blend until smooth.
  • Consistency: For a thicker smoothie, use an additional half a banana and for a thinner one, use more almond milk.
  • To Make Ahead: Portion all the ingredients (except peanut butter) and place them into a plastic bag. Store in the fridge (or freezer). When ready to serve, dump everything in your blender along with peanut butter and blend until smooth.
  • Storing leftovers: I think this peanut butter spinach banana smoothie recipe is best on the day that it is made. However, you can place the leftovers into a mason jar, put the lid on and store it in the fridge for up to 1 day. Just be sure to give it a good shake before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 257kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 354mg | Potassium: 541mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 2851IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 353mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Spinach Peanut Butter Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/peanut-butter-spinach-shake/feed/ 8
Sauteed Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/sauteed-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/sauteed-eggplant/#comments Thu, 30 Mar 2023 15:09:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65625 Eggplant is one of our favorite vegetables here at Foolproof Living, as this nutrient-dense purple veggie is versatile, inexpensive, and easy to cook. If you’re looking for no-fuss, healthy eggplant recipes, we have no shortage on the blog. There are many different ways to prepare eggplant side dishes, such as Charring Eggplant on Stove, Roasting Eggplant Whole, or making Roasted Eggplant Slices and Roasted Eggplant Halves. For a super quick-cooking...

The post Sauteed Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Eggplant is one of our favorite vegetables here at Foolproof Living, as this nutrient-dense purple veggie is versatile, inexpensive, and easy to cook. If you’re looking for no-fuss, healthy eggplant recipes, we have no shortage on the blog. There are many different ways to prepare eggplant side dishes, such as Charring Eggplant on Stove, Roasting Eggplant Whole, or making Roasted Eggplant Slices and Roasted Eggplant Halves. For a super quick-cooking option, also try my Air Fried Eggplant

Sauteed eggplant slices on a plate garnished with fresh parsley.

Ingredients

Eggplant caramelizes beautifully with a bit of oil, so all you need for this recipe for pan-fried eggplant are salt, pepper, and garlic to enhance the veggie’s mild, sweet flavor. Below, you’ll find more information about these simple ingredients:

Ingredients needed to make pan fried eggplant from the top view.
  • Fresh Eggplants: We chose to use globe eggplant for this eggplant saute recipe, which is the most widely available in the US. You’ll recognize this type of eggplant as one with shiny skin, a deep purple color, and a rounded shape. However, different varieties of eggplant will also work for this recipe, such as Japanese Eggplant, Chinese Eggplant, or Italian Eggplant. You can even make sautéed White Eggplant!
  • Extra virgin olive oil: Caramelized eggplant recipes often call for olive oil, and I also prefer frying eggplant in olive oil. However, feel free to use any type of vegetable oil or even butter for this recipe. 
  • Fresh garlic cloves: I love the aroma of stir-fried eggplant with garlic. If you’re in a pinch, you can also make sautéed eggplant with garlic powder.
  • Seasonings: We’re keeping the seasonings simple for this recipe. You’ll need kosher salt, ground black pepper, and red pepper flakes (optional). 

Optional Add-Ins & Variations 

While the ingredient list for this simple eggplant recipe is short and sweet, feel free to amp up the flavor of your eggplant side dish by adding toppings and seasonings of your choice. Here are a few suggestions: 

  • Parmesan cheese: Garlic parmesan eggplant is an Italian favorite! Feel free to top your eggplant liberally with parmesan cheese for a nutty taste that pairs beautifully with the caramelized flavor notes. You can also top it with feta cheese for a Mediterranean flair. Both options would pair well with grilled chicken or fish. 
  • Fresh herbs: A sprinkle of fresh herbs, such as fresh parsley or fresh basil leaves, will elevate your pan seared eggplant and add a hint of earthy flavor. 
  • Asian variation: You can easily turn this easy recipe for eggplant saute into an Asian eggplant stir fry, filled with yummy umami flavor, with just a few ingredient swaps. Fry the eggplant in sesame oil and replace the salt with 2 tablespoons of soy sauce. Finish it off with a few sesame seeds and some fresh cilantro. 
  • Sauteed eggplant with onion and garlic: If you have an onion lying around, feel free to dice it and saute it alongside your eggplant for extra aromatics. Sauteed eggplant and onions would pair well with virtually any main dish!

How to Cut Eggplant for Pan Frying?

I chose to cut my eggplant into rounds (slices) for this pan fried eggplant recipe, as I find this to be the quickest and easiest way to prepare it for cooking. Eggplant rounds are also easy to flip, caramelize well, and maintain a soft texture instead of becoming mushy. This method is also ideal if you’re serving your eggplant as a side.

If you plan to use your pan cooked eggplant in a recipe, you may need to dice it instead. Just be aware that sauteed eggplant cubes don’t caramelize as well, so handle them gently. Additionally, in order to prevent them from getting mushy, you would want to be gentle as you flip them.

Follow the instructions below to prepare your eggplant for sauteing. For more detailed instructions, visit my easy guide on How to Cut Eggplant

  • Slices: Rinse the eggplant in cold water and dry it off with a paper towel. Trim the stem end of the eggplant and spin it around to cut off a small part of the bottom. Lay the eggplant on its side and slice it into ½-inch thick rounds.
  • Diced: Trim the eggplant on both ends. Lay the eggplant on its side or stand it up vertically (whichever is more comfortable) and slice it into ½-inch lengthwise slices. Stack the slices on top of one another and cut them vertically into ½ inch sticks. Rotate the sticks 90 degrees and cut ½ inch slices widthwise. You can also cut it into 1-inch cubes, depending on your recipe. 

How to Cook Eggplant on Stove Top

This easy eggplant recipe takes only about 15 minutes and requires only one skillet. Whether you cook your eggplant in slices or cubes, remember to leave them alone while cooking and only flip them once to ensure they take on that beautiful, golden brown color. Below is step by step instructions on how to saute eggplant:

Person showing how to cut eggplant to saute on the stove top.
  1. Slice the eggplant: Cut the eggplant into ½-inch thick rounds. Alternatively, you can also dice your eggplant.
Person seasoning eggplant before sauteing.
  1. Season: Season the eggplant on both sides with salt and pepper. 
person showing how to cook eggplant on stove in a collage of photos.
  1. Saute eggplant: Heat about 2 tablespoons of the oil in a non-stick, large skillet over medium-high heat until it is shimmering hot. Arrange half of the slices in the skillet in a single layer and fry eggplant in olive oil for 5-7 minutes per side or until golden brown and caramelized.  If you are cooking cubed eggplant, the cooking time would be a few minutes shorter.
  2. Repeat: Before cooking the second batch of eggplant slices, pat them dry on both sides with a paper towel (they tend to sweat as they sit). Add two more tablespoons of oil to the skillet and repeat the above process to saute the remaining eggplant slices. 
  3. Garnish and serve: Transfer the caramelized eggplant to a serving plate and garnish with your toppings of choice, such as a sprinkle of parmesan, fresh herbs, and chili flakes. 

How to Store, Reheat, & Freeze

I prefer to serve my eggplant stovetop recipe immediately after cooking, but you can always store and reheat your leftovers to enjoy on another day. Sauteed eggplant is also delicious when served cold, especially on sandwiches or salads! Here are some storage and reheating tips:

  • Store: Bring your eggplant saute to room temperature before placing it in an airtight container. It will keep in the fridge for 3-5 days. 
  • Reheat: When it comes to reheating eggplant, you have a few options. I recommend reheating in a 300-degree F air fryer for about 3-5 minutes or in a 350-degree F oven for a few minutes or until warmed through. Alternatively, you can also reheat the eggplant slices in a non-stick skillet until warm. Make sure to keep a close eye on them, as they can burn quickly.  
  • Freeze: To freeze your pan roasted eggplant, I recommend the flash-freezing method. Bring the slices to room temperature, arrange them in one layer on a parchment-lined baking sheet, and place them in the freezer. Once they are frozen, you can put parchment sheets between each slice to prevent them from sticking together and store them in a freezer-safe plastic bag or sealed container. 

Expert Tips

While this healthy eggplant recipe is pretty straightforward, I’ve learned some tips and tricks along the way that helped me achieve golden brown, tender, and sweet eggplant rather than mushy, bland slices. Here’s what you need to know:

  • Sliced crosswise vs. diced: How you cut your eggplant will affect the outcome of this recipe. I find that sauteing eggplant slices is easier than cooking diced eggplant, as slices are easier to flip, have more surface area for caramelization, and hold their shape without getting mushy. It’s possible to caramelize your pan fried eggplant cubes, but they tend to get mushy while cooking. To avoid this problem, leave your cubed eggplant alone as much as possible and turn them one by one (gently!) in the skillet. Also, make sure to saute eggplant cubes in one layer to avoid overcrowding. If you need to cook them in batches, add more oil between each batch if there’s not enough excess oil from the previous batch. 
  • If using diced eggplant, keep the peel on: If you’re cooking diced eggplant to add to various sauteed eggplant recipes, I recommend keeping the peel on. This layer of tougher skin will help them hold their shape while cooking. 
  • Salting your eggplant: Chefs used to generously salt eggplants before cooking them to remove bitter flavors. This technique is, for the most part, no longer necessary because modern farming has eliminated most of the bitter flavors from the vegetable. If you picked up your eggplant from the farmer’s market or if you grew it yourself, you may need to season it before cooking. To learn more, check out my How to Salt Eggplant guide. 
  • Cut your eggplant right before using: Once sliced, eggplants oxidize and turn brown very quickly, so make sure to cut your eggplant right before you intend to use it. Alternatively, you can fill a large bowl with tap water and add a few tablespoons of salt and place your cut eggplant slices or cubes to prevent them from changing their color.
  • Use a non-stick skillet: Even with the help of oil, eggplant tends to stick to skillets that aren’t non-stick. To successfully pan fry eggplant, you’ll want to use a non-stick saute pan (affiliate link) to ensure even cooking and avoid a mess! 
  • Don’t overcrowd the skillet: You may be tempted to add all your eggplant slices to the skillet at once, but it’s very important that each slice has room to cook and brown evenly. If you’re cooking eggplant on stovetop in several batches, make sure to add more oil before each batch.
  • Use visual cues: Cooking time for your eggplant will depend on the size and thickness of your slices. While it should take about 5-7 minutes per side, you’ll know the eggplant is done when it appears golden brown and caramelized. 
  • Don’t skimp on garnishes: Eggplant is still delicious with simple seasonings, but you can really elevate the flavor by adding lots of garnishes. I love to top mine with fresh herbs, parmesan cheese, and a sprinkle of chili flakes. 
Sauteed eggplant cubes in a plate from the top view.

What to Serve with Pan-Fried Eggplant?

Since this eggplant side dish recipe is so simple and versatile, you can pair it with virtually any main you’d like! Feel free to switch up the garnishes and seasonings for your sauteed eggplant to complement the flavor profile of your main dish. Here are a few pairing suggestions:

  • Chicken recipes: Chicken and a veggie side dish is a classic combo. Serve your seared eggplant with my juicy Yogurt Marinated Chicken or Air Fried Cornish Hens for a dinner-party-ready spread, or have an Italian night by serving it with Baked Chicken Parm
  • Seafood: For a fresh, light spring or summer meal, serve your eggplant side dish with a flavorful seafood recipe. Fire up your grill on a nice day and make my Grilled Mahi Mahi, Shrimp Scampi, or Shrimp Kabobs
  • Vegetarian: Get creative with your flavor profiles and pair your quick eggplant recipe with a yummy vegetarian main. Top your skillet eggplant with feta cheese for a Mediterranean flair, and serve it with Quinoa Salad with Feta or Quinoa Tabbouleh. Or, sprinkle your eggplant dish with parmesan cheese and pair it with my delicious Italian eggplant recipe, Baked Eggplant Parmesan.

FAQs

Do you peel eggplant before sauteing?

There’s no need to peel before cooking eggplant on the stove, as the peel softens during the cooking process. Eggplant skin even contains some nutrients! Leaving the peel on also helps your eggplant slices keep their shape while cooking. You can, however, peel your eggplant with a vegetable peeler if preferred (I recommend peeling it before cutting it into your desired shape).

Should I salt eggplant before sauteing?

In the past, salting eggplant was a necessary method to get rid of the vegetable’s bitter taste, but nowadays, modern farming techniques have reduced the bitterness of eggplants. If you bought your eggplant from your local grocery store, you don’t need to salt it, but if you purchased it from a farmer’s market, grew it yourself, or have a big eggplant, salting it before cooking on the stove would not hurt. For additional details, refer to my tutorial on salting eggplant.

How long to cook eggplant on stove?

If you are cooking eggplant slices, it is best to cook them for 5-7 minutes on each side for a total of 10-14 minutes, whereas if you are sauteeing eggplant cubes, you should cook them 4-5 minutes per side for a total of 10-12 minutes. They should be perfectly sauteed when they turn golden brown.

Other Easy Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like

If you can’t get enough of this yummy purple veggie after trying this sauteed eggplant recipe (we don’t blame you), then you’ll be glad to know that we have many other easy eggplant recipes here on the blog. Check out the links below for more quick recipes with eggplant: 

If you try this Sautéed Eggplant Recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Sauteed eggplant on a plate garnished with parsley.
Print

Sauteed Eggplant Recipe

Sauteed eggplant is an easy yet delicious dish that can be used as a side dish or as a flavorful addition to various eggplant recipes. Whether sliced or cubed, this versatile vegetable can be sauteed using just a few ingredients to create a dish that is quick and easy to prepare.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 1 eggplant
Calories 140kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 Globe Eggplant ~1lb – rinsed and dried
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 4 tablespoons olive oil plus more as needed

Optional Garnishes

  • 1 tablespoon parmesan cheese
  • 1 tablespoon fresh herbs such as fresh basil leaves or parsley
  • 1 Pinch of red pepper flakes optional

Instructions

  • Slice eggplant crosswise in ½-inch-thick rounds*.
  • Sprinkle eggplant slices with salt and pepper on both sides.
  • Heat half of the oil in a large non-stick skillet over medium heat. Add half of the eggplant slices in a single layer and cook for 6-7 minutes on each side or until it is slightly caramelized and turned golden brown.
  • Before sauteing the remaining eggplant slices, pat them dry on both sides with a paper towel, as they tend to sweat as they sit. Repeat the cooking process using the remaining olive oil for the rest of the eggplant.
  • Transfer the now-pan-fried eggplant onto a plate and garnish with parmesan cheese, fresh herbs, and chili flakes, if desired.

Notes

  • Sauteed eggplant cubes: Alternatively, you can cut your eggplant into 1-inch cubes and pan-sear them in oil following the same recipe. I prefer sauteing diced eggplant if I am using Chinese or Japanese eggplants instead of large globe or Italian eggplants. However, when sauteing diced eggplant, it is important to pay attention to a few things:
    • Do not stir them so much: To avoid eggplant cubes becoming mushy, refrain from stirring them excessively while cooking. It’s better to leave them alone and check for doneness by testing a single cube. When one side turns golden brown, turn each cube one by one to ensure even cooking.
    • Be aware of the shorter cooking time: They tend to cook quicker than sliced eggplants, so it is best to cook them for 4-5 minutes on each side (a total of 10 minutes or so).
    • Do not crowd the pan: Depending on the size of your eggplant, saute diced eggplant in two batches making sure to cook them on a single layer using more oil as needed.
    • Keep the skin on: When pan-frying eggplant cubes, I prefer not to peel the eggplant as leaving the skin on helps keep their shape.
  • Store: Bring the sauteed eggplant to room temperature before placing it in an airtight container. It will keep in the fridge for 3-5 days.
  • Reheat: When it comes to reheating eggplant, you have a few options. I recommend reheating in a 300-degree F air fryer for about 3-5 minutes or in a 350-degree F oven for a few minutes or until warmed through. Alternatively, you can also reheat the eggplant slices in a non-stick skillet until warm. Keep a close eye on them, as they can burn quickly.  
  • Freeze: Bring the sauteed eggplant slices to room temperature, arrange them in one layer on a parchment-lined baking sheet, and place them in the freezer. Once they are frozen, you can put parchment sheets between each slice to prevent them from sticking together and store them in a freezer-safe plastic bag or sealed container. 

Nutrition

Calories: 140kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 1271mg | Potassium: 1102mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 781IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Sauteed Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sauteed-eggplant/feed/ 4
Alison Roman’s “The Stew” Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/alison-roman-the-stew/ https://foolproofliving.com/alison-roman-the-stew/#comments Sat, 25 Mar 2023 18:47:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65568 Cookbook author and New York Times columnist Alison Roman first published the Alison Roman Chickpea Stew in The New York Times in 2018. The recipe quickly took the internet by storm, gaining popularity among home chefs and food lovers on social media through its own hashtag #TheStew.  The NYT chickpea stew recipe has many renditions today, so you may also see it referred to online as “Chickpea Turmeric Stew,” “Chickpea...

The post Alison Roman’s “The Stew” Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Cookbook author and New York Times columnist Alison Roman first published the Alison Roman Chickpea Stew in The New York Times in 2018. The recipe quickly took the internet by storm, gaining popularity among home chefs and food lovers on social media through its own hashtag #TheStew. 

The NYT chickpea stew recipe has many renditions today, so you may also see it referred to online as “Chickpea Turmeric Stew,” “Chickpea Curry Stew,” or “Coconut Curry Chickpea Stew.” Because of its original publication in The New York Times, you may also see it appear as “The New York Times Chickpea Stew” or the “NY Times Chickpea Stew.” Whatever you’d like to call it, Alison Roman’s viral recipe is truly delicious and worth a try!

Alison Roman's chickpea stew in a bowl garnished with yogurt and mint leaves.

Ingredients

The beauty of this vegetarian chickpea stew is that, because of its short ingredient list of pantry staples, it’s budget-friendly and requires little to no grocery shopping if you have a well-stocked kitchen. Here’s what you’ll need to make the Alison Roman stew recipe: 

Ingredients for chickpea stew by Alison Roman are in small bowls from the top view.
  • Olive oil: Garbanzo beans love to bathe in oil, so you’ll need about a ¼ cup. 
  • Aromatics: Onion, fresh ginger, and garlic deepen the stew’s flavors and add a nice aroma. 
  • Spices and seasonings: You’ll need ground turmeric, red pepper flakes (optional), kosher salt, and black pepper. 
  • Canned garbanzo beans: Spiced chickpeas, also known as garbanzo beans, are the star of the show in this recipe. The canned version is easy, inexpensive, and convenient, but you can also cook your own dried chickpeas if you’d prefer. Just ensure that the ones you use in this recipe are cooked.   
  • Full-fat coconut milk: According to Roman, full-fat coconut milk yields the best results for this chickpea coconut stew. You’ll want to avoid lite coconut milk, low-fat coconut milk, cream of coconut, or coconut milk that’s meant for drinking, as these variations will alter the consistency of the stew. 
  • Vegetable stock: You can also use chicken stock (I make mine following Barefoot Contessa’s Chicken Stock recipe) if preferred. 
  • Hearty leafy greens: Use your favorite hearty leafy green, such as kale, collard greens, swiss chard, baby spinach, or mustard greens. However, remember that swiss chard and spinach will wilt and soften much faster than kale or collard greens. 
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh herbs, such as mint, parsley, or cilantro, add the perfect finishing touch and hint of flavor to this recipe. 
  • Garnishes and accompaniments: Finish off your stew with a dollop of greek yogurt (or sour cream), a good drizzle of olive oil, a squeeze of lime juice, and a handful of fresh mint. You can also finish it off with extra chili flakes for a spicy chickpea soup. Serve with bread on the side, if preferred. 

Optional Add-Ins

Don’t be afraid to make this Alison Roman The Stew recipe your own by tossing in additional ingredients to amp up the flavor profile, make it more hearty, or add extra nutrients. Here are some suggestions: 

  • More vegetables: In my opinion, you can’t add too many veggies to a stew! To boost your turmeric chickpea stew with extra nutrition, stir in ½ cup of chopped carrots, celery, sweet potato, and baby bok choy. Roman recommends cooking the carrots, celery, and sweet potatoes along with the aromatics, but you’ll want to add in the bok choy during the last five minutes of cooking. 
  • Add a carb: While this stew is pretty filling on its own, you can make it especially hearty by adding a carb. I personally like to toss in some ramen noodles about three minutes or so before serving. You can also add some quinoa about 10 minutes before serving to give the stew extra body and heartiness. 
  • Make it richer: If you are a fan of turmeric and are like me, have a batch of homemade golden paste in your fridge at all times, use a tablespoon of it instead of using ground turmeric spice.

How to Make Alison Roman’s Chickpea Stew?

With just a few minutes of prep time and a little over a half hour of cook time, this creamy, flavorful, and spicy chickpea stew with garlicky coconut milk is ready to enjoy. Plus, it all comes together in one pot! Here’s how to make it: 

A collage of images showing how to sauté onions and crush spiced chickpeas with a wooden spoon.
  1. Cook the onion: Heat the oil over medium heat in a large pot or dutch oven. Add the onion and cook for 5-6 minutes, or until the onion is translucent, making sure to stir occasionally.
  2. Add additional aromatics and spices: Add the ginger, minced garlic cloves, ground turmeric, and a sprinkle of red pepper flakes to the pot and cook for 2 minutes, stirring often. 
  3. Fry the garbanzo beans: Pour in the cans of chickpeas (drained and rinsed) and let the chickpeas sizzle and break down, stirring frequently, for 8-10 minutes.
  4. Crush the garbanzo beans: Remove a cup of chickpeas to use for garnish. Using the back of a wooden spoon or a spatula, gently crush the remaining chickpeas against the side of the pot to help them release their starchy insides. Doing so will help make the stew a bit thicker, so do not skip this step.
Images showing how to simmer the spiced chickpea stew with coconut and turmeric.
  1. Add the liquids: Pour in the cans of coconut milk and vegetable broth and season with a pinch of salt and pepper. Stir, making sure to scrape the pot to remove any bits that are stuck to the bottom. 
  2. Simmer: Place the lid on the pot, bring it to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium-low. Let simmer for 25-30 minutes.
  3. Add the greens: Use your hands to chop the kale or leafy greens of your choosing into bite-size pieces and add them to the pot. Cook for an additional 5 minutes or until the greens are soft. Taste and adjust seasoning if needed. 
  4. Serve: Ladle into bowls and garnish with the reserved garbanzo beans and other toppings of your choosing. Serve with bread on the side, if preferred. 

How to Make Ahead, Store, Reheat, & Freeze?

This coconut chickpea stew is quick enough to whip up for an easy weeknight meal, but it’s also make-ahead friendly and stores well as part of your weekly meal prep. Here are some tips: 

  • Make ahead: To make this recipe ahead of time, follow the above instructions through step 6. You’ll want to add in your greens right before serving, as they tend to become wilted and soggy as the stew sits. 
  • Store: To store, bring the leftover kale and chickpea stew to room temperature before ladling it into an airtight container (you can also portion it out into several containers). It will keep in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Bring the stew to room temperature and store it in a freezer-safe container for up to 2 months. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen stew overnight in the fridge. Reheat per the instructions below. 
  • Reheat: You can reheat your leftover stew on the stovetop or, in a pinch, microwave it in 30 seconds intervals until warmed through, making sure to give it a stir after each interval. 

What Goes with Alison Roman Chickpea Stew?

Because of its Indian and Caribbean influences, this chickpea stew with coconut milk pairs beautifully with Middle Eastern and Mediterranean-style flatbreads. To round out your meal, you can also pair your stew with a simple green salad or a healthy grain. If you’re wondering what to serve with this chickpea stew recipe, here are a few additional ideas:

  • Serve it with bread: Bread is a no-brainer side to pair with a stew, and we especially love to dip our bread in that delicious leftover broth! I recommend pairing your coconut turmeric soup with a flatbread like Naan, Pita, or Lavash for a Middle Eastern flair. Also, my artisan-style, crusty, No-Knead Bread never met a stew it didn’t like. 
  • Pair it with a green salad: To get in your daily dose of greens, whip up an easy, nutrient-dense salad to enjoy as a side dish with your warm bowl of curry chickpea stew. My favorites are this Kale Quinoa Salad, this simple Spring Mix Salad, and my colorful Harvest Salad. Serve it with a glass of crisp white wine on the side and call it a dinner!
  • Add some cooked grains: If you prefer a hearty, filling stew, I recommend adding some cooked grains to offer texture, substance, fiber, and carbs. My favorites are quinoa and bulgur, and I even have how-to guides on the blog for Cooked Quinoa and Cooked Bulgur. For additional flavor, try serving it with my yummy Bulgur Pilaf
Chickpea stew garnished with fresh mint leaves and yogurt in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Expert Tips

Since this stew recipe is adapted from the original version created by Alison Roman, I learned a few tips and tricks from her while researching the recipe. I’ve included these tips below to help you achieve expert-level results on your first try:

  • Season as you go: Roman adds salt various times throughout the original recipe, which helps her ensure that each ingredient is properly seasoned. However, this is a bit too much salt for my preference, so I cut down on the salt a bit for my version of her recipe. However, I suggest that you taste as you go and adjust the salt to your liking. 
  • Simmer to your preferred thickness: This coconut ginger chickpea soup begins with a soup-like consistency and must simmer for about a half hour to take on a thicker, stew-like consistency. You can simmer it for less time if you’d prefer a coconut chickpea soup, or a bit longer if you’re after that perfect stew thickness. It’s up to you! 
  • Break those chickpeas! Do not skip the part where you break the garbanzo beans with the back of the spoon, as it will help thicken the stew.

FAQs

Can you freeze Alison Roman’s chickpea stew?

Yes, you can. After making your garbanzo bean stew, let it cool to room temperature. Ladle it into a freezer-safe airtight container and freeze for up to 2 months.

Is chickpea a carb or protein?

While garbanzo beans are considered a plant-based protein, they are also a good source of fiber, vitamins, and minerals. A 1-cup serving of garbanzo beans contains about 269 calories, of which about 67% are from carbohydrates. The remaining calories come from its protein and fat content.

Other Curry Recipes You Might Also Like

There’s nothing like an aromatic, warming, perfectly spiced bowl of curry to enjoy on a cool day (or even a warm one!), especially if you are a fan of the anti-inflammatory benefits of turmeric spice. If you love Middle Eastern, Indian, and Asian-inspired dishes with bold flavors like this curried chickpea stew, you’ll love these recipes below:

If you try Alison Roman’s Chickpea Stew Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Alison Roman The Stew recipe in a bowl garnished with a dollop of yogurt.
Print

Alison Roman The Stew Recipe

Here is the viral recipe for Alison Roman’s “The Stew” that had gained popularity in the last few years. Essentially a vegan stew that is made with spiced chickpeas, coconut milk, ginger, garlic and turmeric, this easy recipe comes together in a pot and perfect for a Tuesday night.
Course Soup, Stew
Cuisine Indian
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 553kcal

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for drizzling
  • 1 large yellow onion chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger finely chopped – from a 2-inch piece ginger
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 ½ teaspoons ground turmeric
  • ½ teaspoon crushed red pepper or chili flakes optional
  • 2 cans chickpeas (15-ounces each) drained and rinsed
  • 2 cans full-fat coconut milk (15-ounces each)
  • 2 cups vegetable stock
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 cups kale leaves torn into bite-sized pieces – other greens like Swiss chard and collard greens would also work
  • 1 cup fresh mint leaves or cilantro

For serving (optional):

  • Plain Yogurt
  • Toasted Pita or lavash bread

Instructions

  • Heat oil in a large Dutch oven over medium-high heat. Add the onion and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened 5-6 minutes.
  • Add the ginger, garlic, ground turmeric, and crushed red pepper and cook for 2 more minutes, stirring frequently.
  • Add the garbanzo beans and fry them in oil and spices while stirring frequently until they start to break down for about 8-10 minutes.
  • Using a spatula or a wooden spoon, crush the garbanzo beans slightly to release some of their starches (which will help thicken the stew.) Remove a cup of stewed chickpeas for garnish.
  • Add the coconut milk, vegetable stock, and salt and pepper. Scrape down the bits at the bottom of the pot and give it a good stir.
  • Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, turn down the heat to medium-low, and let it simmer for 25-30 minutes or until it thickens to your liking.
  • Add kale leaves and cook for 5 more minutes or until kale leaves are nice and soft.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
  • Ladle into bowls. Garnish with the reserved garbanzo beans, red pepper flakes, and a drizzle of olive oil.
  • Serve it with yogurt and pita bread (or lavash) on the side.

Notes

  • Season as you go: In the original recipe, Roman adds salt after each step, which helps her ensure that each ingredient is properly seasoned. However, this is a bit too much salt for my preference (especially if you are using any other salt then Diamond kosher salt), so I cut down on the salt a bit for my version of her recipe. However, I suggest that you taste as you go and adjust the salt to your liking. 
  • Simmer to your preferred thickness: This stew begins with a soup-like consistency and must simmer for about a half hour to take on a thicker, stew-like consistency. You can simmer it for less time if you’d prefer more of a soup or a bit longer if you’re after that perfect stew thickness. It’s up to you!
  • Break those chickpeas! Do not skip the part where you break the garbanzo beans with the back of the spoon, as it helps with thickening the stew.
  • Make ahead: To make this recipe ahead of time, follow the above instructions through step 6. You’ll want to add in your greens right before serving, as they tend to become wilted and soggy as the stew sits. 
  • Store: To store, bring the stew to room temperature before placing it into an airtight container (you can also portion it out into several containers). It will keep in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Bring the stew to room temperature and store it in a freezer-safe container for up to 2 months. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen stew overnight in the fridge. Reheat per the instructions below.
  • Reheat: You can reheat your leftover stew on the stovetop or, in a pinch, microwave it in 30 seconds intervals until warmed through, making sure to give it a stir after each interval. 

Nutrition

Calories: 553kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 44g | Saturated Fat: 30g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Sodium: 1353mg | Potassium: 756mg | Fiber: 12g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2790IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 161mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Alison Roman’s “The Stew” Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/alison-roman-the-stew/feed/ 2
Zucchini Turkey Meatballs https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-turkey-meatballs/ https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-turkey-meatballs/#comments Wed, 01 Mar 2023 23:32:26 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65168 I love to use turkey as an alternative to beef when I’m craving something hearty and comforting yet light and lean. You can even substitute ground turkey in recipes that traditionally use beef, as I did in my Sweet Potato Shepherd’s Pie. For other comforting recipes with turkey, try this 3 Bean Turkey Chili and my Turkey Pumpkin Chili.  Full List of Ingredients Aside from turkey and zucchini, all you...

The post Zucchini Turkey Meatballs appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I love to use turkey as an alternative to beef when I’m craving something hearty and comforting yet light and lean. You can even substitute ground turkey in recipes that traditionally use beef, as I did in my Sweet Potato Shepherd’s Pie. For other comforting recipes with turkey, try this 3 Bean Turkey Chili and my Turkey Pumpkin Chili

A pan of tomato sauce and meatballs shown from the top view.

Full List of Ingredients

Aside from turkey and zucchini, all you need are a few pantry staples to throw together these turkey zucchini meatballs. We’re using crispy Panko breadcrumbs for texture, lots of yummy Italian seasonings for flavor, and an egg to bind everything together. Here’s the full ingredient breakdown:

Ingredients for zuchinni meatballs in bowls shown from the top view.
  • Grated zucchini (from one large zucchini)
  • Ground turkey: You can use lean meat or dark meat. Dark meat will be more flavorful and rich than lean ground turkey, but it’s completely up to your personal preference. 
  • Panko breadcrumbs
  • Chopped scallions 
  • Garlic
  • An egg
  • Seasoning: Italian seasoning, onion powder, paprika, crushed red pepper flakes, kosher salt, and ground black pepper. 

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

While I enjoy the simplicity of these easy turkey meatballs, the recipe also offers a great base for ingredient add-ins that amp up the flavor. It’s also very substitution-friendly, allowing you to accommodate the ingredients you have on hand or your dietary preferences or restrictions. Here are some suggestions: 

  • Breadcrumbs: I love the crunch and crispiness of Panko breadcrumbs, but feel free to use regular breadcrumbs if Panko isn’t available. They even make gluten-free breadcrumbs for a great option that you can substitute if you follow a gluten-free diet! Or, for extra flavor, you can use seasoned bread crumbs if you can find them at your local grocery stores. 
  • Meat: If turkey isn’t your thing or if you’d like to take advantage of the meat you have on hand, you can easily substitute another ground meat for your meatballs with zucchini. I recommend ground pork, beef, or chicken. 
  • Onion: If you don’t have any scallions on hand (also known as green onions), you can use half of a grated onion instead. Just be sure to remove as many juices as possible using a colander or a double layer of paper towel, as we want to prevent the tender meatballs from becoming mushy. You can also substitute a teaspoon of onion powder if you don’t have a fresh onion (this will be in addition to the 1/2 teaspoon of onion powder that the recipe already calls for). 
  • Garlic: For an easy alternative to fresh garlic, simply substitute a teaspoon of garlic powder. 
  • Cheese: To add extra richness and a nutty Italian flavor, add a half cup of shredded parmesan cheese to this turkey meatballs recipe. 
  • Fresh herbs: If you want this recipe to be similar to the famous Ottolenghi turkey zucchini meatballs, you can add in fresh herbs such as fresh basil, parsley, mint, or dill. I recommend adding a total amount of about half a cup of herbs. 
  • Low carb, Whole30 or keto ground turkey meatballs: You can make a keto turkey meatball recipe or Whole 30 turkey meatballs by simply using an equal amount of almond flour instead of panko breadcrumbs. 

How to Make Ground Turkey Meatballs with Zucchini?

What’s better than a flavorful, healthy, and comforting recipe that comes together in only 30 minutes? Baking turkey meatballs is as simple as mixing the ingredients together, shaping them into meatballs, and popping them in the oven. Here’s a step-by-step breakdown:

  1. Prep for baking: Preheat your oven to 400 degrees F and line a sheet pan with parchment paper or spray with cooking spray. 
A person showing how to squeeze liquid from grated zucchini and use it to make meatballs.
  1. Shred the zucchini: Use the larger holes of a box grater to shred the zucchini. Place the shredded zucchini in the center of a clean kitchen towel, gather up the sides of the towel, and squeeze to remove as much juice as possible. It should yield about one cup of shredded zucchini. Place in a large mixing bowl.
  2. Add the ingredients: In the same bowl, combine ground turkey, Panko, scallions, egg, garlic, onion powder, Italian seasoning, red pepper flakes, paprika, salt, and pepper. 
A series of images showing how to bake and serve zuccini meatballs.
  1. Roll into balls: Use a small cookie scoop or a large spoon to divide the mixture into smaller portions. Wet hands with a little water and roll each portion into a small, golf-sized ball. Arrange them on the prepared baking sheet. 
  2. Bake: Cook the ground turkey meatballs in oven for 15-18 minutes or until they reach 165 degrees F when measured with a thermometer. 
  3. Serve: Serve the meatballs on a bed of pasta or with your favorite sauce. 

How to Serve?

These turkey and zucchini meatballs are delicious to enjoy on their own, but they also pair beautifully with various sauces and sides. Amp up the Italian flavor with a tomato sauce, make it Mediterranean with a yogurt drizzle or keep it traditional by serving on a bed of pasta. Here are my serving recommendations: 

  • Serve it with a simple tomato sauce: While the meatballs are baking, simmer your favorite tomato sauce over medium-low heat on the stove, so it’s nice and hot when the meatballs are done. If you’re looking for an easy, homemade tomato sauce, try my Tomato Basil Sauce. You can even sprinkle on some parmesan cheese to complete the dish! 
  • Drizzle it with a yogurt dip: Meatballs are a popular Mediterranean dish, and in Turkey, we love to pair them with a creamy, tangy Tzatziki Sauce. You can also whip up a Greek Yogurt Dill Sauce or this sesame-based Yogurt Tahini Sauce for Middle Eastern turkey meatballs. Serve them on a generous dollop of your yogurt sauce of choice, or simply drizzle it right on top.
  • Make pasta or zucchini noodles with meatballs: Name a more classic combination than spaghetti and meatballs! We have plenty of pasta dishes here on the blog that would pair perfectly with these tasty meatballs. Try this spicy, creamy Gigi Hadid Vodka Pasta, this easy, 30-minute Green Pasta, or a tangy, zingy Lemon and Ricotta Pasta. If you follow a low-carb diet but would still like to enjoy your meatballs with a pasta dish, you can serve them with veggie-based noodles like these Butternut Squash Noodles. Or, make turkey meatballs and Zoodles (zucchini noodles).
  • Serve it in a roasted spaghetti squash: If you’ve never had a spaghetti squash, you’ll be amazed by how much it actually resembles spaghetti! Simply cut your squash in half, roast the spaghetti squash, and serve the meatballs inside each half. It offers a fun presentation and is a great low-carb option, too. 

How to Store, Reheat, & Freeze?

While these healthy turkey meatballs are easy to whip up for quick weeknight family dinners, this is also a good meal prep recipe for busy weeks ahead. Here are some tips for storing, reheating, and thawing your meatballs: 

  • Store: You can store your leftover homemade turkey meatballs with or without tomato sauce. Either way, let them cool to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. They will stay fresh in the refrigerator for about 3-4 days. 
  • Reheat: You can reheat your leftovers in the microwave or in the oven. Microwave in 30-second intervals, making sure to stir them after each interval. You can also reheat your turkey meatballs in the oven. I recommend low heat (300 degrees F) for about 5 minutes or so. Alternatively, you can heat up the meatballs in your tomato sauce on the stovetop. 
  • Freeze: If you decide to serve your turkey meatballs with tomato sauce, you can freeze the meatballs with the sauce in an airtight container. However, I find it easier to freeze the meatballs individually so they don’t stick together. Place the leftover cooked meatballs in a single layer on a large baking sheet, let them freeze, and then store them in a freezer-safe plastic bag or container. However you choose to freeze them, they should keep for about 2 months. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen meatballs overnight in the fridge and reheat once completely thawed. 
Meatballs made from ground turkey in a pan of sauce shown from the side view.

Expert Tips

During my recipe testing, I learned a few techniques and tricks that will help you achieve expert results on your first go! Here’s what you need to know:

  • Don’t worry about spacing: Unlike cookies, these lean turkey meatballs won’t expand as they cook. You can place them pretty close together on your baking sheet, which will hopefully prevent you from needing another baking sheet (because who wants to wash more pans than needed?). 
  • Wet your hands: The turkey mixture is a little sticky, so I found that wetting my hands before rolling the meatballs prevented the mixture from sticking to my hands and making a mess. 
  • Use a cookie scoop: For evenly-sized meatballs, use a small cookie scoop (affiliate link). Ensuring they are the same size will also help them cook evenly.
  • Remove excess juices: While it may be tempting, especially if you’re in a rush, don’t skip the step where you squeeze the juices from the grated zucchini. This step only takes a second and will yield juicy baked turkey zucchini meatballs instead of mushy and soggy ones.

FAQs

What is the ideal internal temp for turkey meatballs?

As with other types of meat, the ideal internal temperature for oven-baked turkey meatballs is 165 degrees F. I recommend using an instant read thermometer for easy, accurate measuring that removes the guesswork.

How long to bake turkey meatballs at 400 F degrees?

For properly cooked, moist turkey meatballs that retain a juicy, tender center, I recommend baking them at 400 degrees F for 15-20 minutes. The temperature of turkey meatballs should reach 165 degrees F, so I also recommend using a thermometer to ensure they’re cooked properly.

Why are my turkey meatballs mushy?

Your recipe for turkey meatballs is likely mushy because the meatball mixture has a lot of moisture. To prevent this problem, make sure to remove as much excess moisture as possible from any veggies you add to the mixture, especially the grated zucchini (or grated onion, if using). I’ve found that the best way to remove the juices is to squeeze the grated veggies in a clean kitchen towel.

How do you keep turkey meatballs from falling apart?

The key to preventing the turkey mixture from falling apart is the addition of an egg. Eggs act as binding agents that help the ingredients adhere and stay together while baking. As a rule of thumb, use one egg per pound of ground meat. The addition of breadcrumbs in these turkey panko meatballs also helps to bind the mixture together, as well.

Are turkey meatballs good for weight loss?

Turkey is a lean meat that’s a great source of protein, loaded with important B vitamins, and rich in several minerals, among other health benefits. Because of these benefits, turkey can help you achieve your weight loss goals as long as you consume it in reasonable portions.

Other Ground Meat Recipes You Might Like

I love to use various types of ground meat for easy weeknight meals, as it cooks quickly and pairs well with a variety of flavor profiles. If you’re looking for more quick and easy meals with ground chicken or beef, check out these recipes below: 

If you try these Meatballs with Ground Turkey and Zucchini or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baked turkey meatballs served with a tomato-based sauce.
Print

Zucchini Turkey Meatballs Recipe

These Zucchini Turkey Meatballs are juicy, tender, packed with Italian flavor, and ready in only 30 minutes. Serve them with your favorite pasta for a comforting, family-friendly meal, or simply pair them with a tomato-based sauce and a sprinkle of parmesan cheese for a low-carb, no-fuss option.
Course Main Course
Cuisine American/Italian
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 30 meatballs
Calories 31kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup grated zucchini from one large or two small zucchinis ~ 190 grams
  • 1 pound ground turkey meat
  • ½ cup panko breadcrumbs ~ 40 gr
  • ½ cup chopped scallion both white and green parts ~56 gr
  • 2 cloves of garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • 2 teaspoons Italian seasoning
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon crushed red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 large egg
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven: Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Prep the zucchini: Shred the zucchini using the large holes of a box grater. Place it in the middle of a clean tea towel, collect it from the sides, and squeeze as much liquid as possible. You should have about 1 cup of shredded zucchini. Transfer it to a large bowl.
  • Mix the ingredients: Add the turkey, panko breadcrumbs, chopped scallions, minced garlic, onion powder, Italian seasoning, paprika, red pepper flakes, egg, salt, and black pepper into the bowl. Mix until fully combined.
  • Shape the meatballs: Using a small cookie scoop or a large spoon, divide the meat mixture into small golf-size balls. Each ball should be around 0.88 oz. Roll each turkey meatball between your palms and arrange them on a parchment-lined baking sheet.
  • Bake: Bake in the preheated oven for 15-18 minutes or until the internal temperature of a turkey meatball reaches 165 degrees F when a thermometer is inserted in the middle.
  • Serve: Enjoy it with your favorite sauce, or serve it with pasta.

Video

Notes

  • Store: You can store your leftover meatballs with or without tomato sauce. Either way, let them cool to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. They will stay fresh in the fridge for about 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: You can reheat your leftovers in the microwave or in the oven. Microwave in 30-second intervals, making sure to stir them after each interval (especially if you’re reheating them with tomato sauce). You can also reheat your turkey meatballs in the oven. I recommend a low-heat oven (300 degrees F) for about 5 minutes or so. Alternatively, if you’d prefer to serve your meatballs with tomato sauce, you can heat up the meatballs in the sauce on the stovetop. 
  • Freeze: If you decide to serve your turkey meatballs, you can freeze them with the sauce in an airtight container. However, I find it easier to freeze the meatballs individually so they don’t stick together. Place the leftover meatballs in a single layer on a large baking sheet, let them freeze, and then store them in an airtight container or freezer-safe plastic bag. However you choose to freeze them, they should keep for about 2 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw your leftovers overnight in the fridge and reheat once completely thawed. 
  • Can I cook the turkey meatballs in a skillet instead of baking them in the oven? You sure can. To do so, heat two tablespoons of olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat until the oil is shimmering. Add the meatballs in a single layer and cook, turning often, for 2-3 minutes on each side (a total of 5-6 minutes) or until the internal temperature of turkey meatballs reaches 165 degrees F. Transfer the pan-fried meatballs to a plate or place them right into warmed tomato sauce. Serve immediately.

Nutrition

Calories: 31kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 60mg | Potassium: 56mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 73IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 0.4mg

The post Zucchini Turkey Meatballs appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-turkey-meatballs/feed/ 4
Ina Garten Pot Roast https://foolproofliving.com/company-pot-roast/ https://foolproofliving.com/company-pot-roast/#comments Sat, 25 Feb 2023 03:47:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3240 If you like the rich, savory taste of this Ina Garten company pot roast, there are countless other tender beef recipes you can make for your next dinner party. Reverse Sear Tenderloin is a sophisticated dish perfect for special occasions, while Beef Brisket Tacos will enliven any party with fresh, zesty flavors. Or, warm up with a dish equal parts nutritious and hearty with my Vegetable Beef Soup. The sky...

The post Ina Garten Pot Roast appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you like the rich, savory taste of this Ina Garten company pot roast, there are countless other tender beef recipes you can make for your next dinner party. Reverse Sear Tenderloin is a sophisticated dish perfect for special occasions, while Beef Brisket Tacos will enliven any party with fresh, zesty flavors. Or, warm up with a dish equal parts nutritious and hearty with my Vegetable Beef Soup. The sky is the limit when it comes to mouthwatering beef dishes.

A company pot roast with herbs and veggies on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients

This Ina Garten pot roast recipe uses only wholesome, hearty ingredients. From savory beef chuck roast to garden-fresh veggies, you’ll find everything you need in this simple list.

Ingredients for a roast with beef on a cutting board from the top view.
  • Boneless beef chuck roast: Barefoot Contessa uses beef chuck roast in her fancy pot roast recipe. However, other cuts of beef—like eye round roast (AKA London broil), beef rump roast (AKA bottom round roast), or brisket—will also work. Whichever cut you choose, just be sure to tie it with kitchen string to help it hold its shape. Double-knot your twine around the short edge of the meat in one-inch intervals down the entire cut.
  • Salt and black pepper
  • All-purpose flour
  • Olive oil: Olive oil is necessary to sear the meat and saute the vegetables, ensuring your ingredients come out as tender and flavorful as possible.
Ingredients for a roast with vegetables shown from the top view.
  • Veggies: To make this beef roast recipe, you’ll need carrots, yellow onions, celery, leeks, and garlic cloves. However, you can add one more onion if you don’t have any leeks.
  • Liquid: For this dish, you’ll first need good red wine. Ina uses Burgundy in her original company pot roast, but your favorite Chianti or even Cabernet sauvignon would also work, as long as it’s a quality wine—a wine you would want to drink. You will also need one cup of chicken stock, such as the Ina Garten Chicken Stock Recipe I use in this dish. Alternatively, beef broth can also be used. Finally, you may also add two tablespoons of cognac or brandy to this recipe, though this addition is optional.
  • Canned tomatoes: The original recipe uses whole plum tomatoes, though I use diced tomatoes in my version.
  • Chicken bouillon: Though a chicken bouillon cube is optional (I prefer not to use it), it gives this roast beef recipe an extra salty flavor. If you are trying to cut back on salt, I would omit using it.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme and rosemary perfectly balance the meaty overtones of this beef roast with light, earthy flavors.
  • Unsalted butter: Ina thickens her pot roast with a mix of unsalted butter and flour. I skipped this step because the sauce did not need any more fat. It reached my preferred consistency after I pureed most of the sauce and added it back into the pot.

Equipment You’ll Need

This Ina Garten recipe for pot roast comes together effortlessly when you have the right tools. However, you can still make this tasty Barefoot Contessa dish with these flexible options:

  • Dutch oven: To prepare Ina’s company pot roast, I used a 7.25 qt. Le Creuset Enameled Cast Iron Signature Round Dutch Oven. You could also use a more cost-effective version, such as this Enameled Cast Iron Dutch Oven. If you don’t have a Dutch oven, you can sear the meat and saute the vegetables in a regular skillet, then roast them in the oven in a large casserole dish with a lid.
  • Immersion blender: Smooth, creamy sauce is the key to this tasteful meal. If you don’t have one, you can use a food processor or blender to give your sauce its silky texture.
  • Kitchen twine: Twine is necessary to tie your beef and herb bouquets in this Barefoot Contessa pot roast. Tying the meat will help maintain its shape while cooking.

How to Make Ina Garten’s Pot Roast Recipe

Whether you prepare this pot roast for a crowd or a special weeknight dinner doesn’t matter. These simple instructions will give you tender, flavorful results every time.

  1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F.
A person showing how to season and tie a beef chuck roast.
  1. Prepare the meat: Pat dry your beef chuck roast on all sides using a sheet of paper towel. Tie it with kitchen twine, and season it with kosher salt and ground black pepper on all sides. Dredge the entire roast in flour, covering every exposed edge, and shake off any excess flour.
A person making the Barefoot Contessa company pot roast.
  1. Sear the meat: Heat the oil over medium heat in a large Dutch oven. Once hot, cook the beef for 4-5 minutes on each side. To me, this is the most important step, as browning the meat will help the end result to have complex, delicious flavors. Yes, it does take 20 minutes or so to brown a big piece of meat, but it is so worth it. Transfer the meat to a large plate, cover it with aluminum foil and set it aside. Don’t wash the Dutch oven.
  2. Cook the vegetables: Heat olive oil in the empty Dutch oven before adding the chopped carrots, onions, celery, leeks, garlic, salt, and pepper. Cook until the veggies soften but do not turn brown (12-15 minutes), stirring often.
  3. Add liquids: Stir in the wine, brandy (if using), tomatoes, and chicken stock. 
  4. Add the beef roast: Transfer the seared meat back to the Dutch oven. Make an herb bouquet by tying together fresh thyme and fresh rosemary, and add the bundle to the pan. Bring the mixture to a boil, then let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.
Two images showing a beef chuck roast baking in a dutch oven.
  1. Cook the pot roast: Place the lid on the Dutch oven, and place it in the preheated oven. Roast it for 2½ hours or until the meat registers 160 degrees F. Turn the oven temperature down to 250 degrees F and let it continue to simmer at that low temperature for an hour.
  2. Let it rest: Carefully remove the Dutch oven from the oven, open the lid, transfer the pot roast onto a cutting board, and cover it loosely with aluminum foil.
Four images showing how to puree a roast made with beef and vegetables.
  1. Purée the sauce: Discard the herb bundle. Use a large spoon to skim off as much fat as possible from the top of the juices. Transfer 3 cups of the sauce and vegetables into a bowl and puree until smooth. I use an immersion blender to perform this step, but you can also use a food processor fitted with a steel blade or a blender. Be very careful as the liquid is very hot.
  2. Simmer the sauce: Add the pureed sauce back to the Dutch oven. Place the pot on the stovetop, turn the heat to medium-low, and return to a simmer.
  3. Slice & serve: Remove the twine from the roast and slice the meat. When ready to serve, place two or more slices of roast beef on each dinner plate and spoon the sauce on top.

How to Make this Recipe in a Slow Cooker?

If you prefer not to use an oven, preparing this pot roast in a slow cooker is an easy way to save effort and time. The recipe remains fundamentally the same for both cooking methods, with just a few differences.

  1. Prepare the meat: Tie your cut of beef with kitchen string, season it with salt and pepper, and dredge it in flour. Then, heat olive oil in a pan over medium heat. Sear your meat on all edges, 4-5 minutes per side, then set it aside under a tin foil covering. Do not skip this step, as it is a crucial one for building complex flavors.
  2. Cook the veggies: When the olive oil is hot, add your chopped celery stalks, carrots, onions, leeks, garlic, salt, and black pepper. Cook, frequently stirring, for 12-15 minutes until the veggies soften. 
  3. Transfer: Transfer the now-semi-cooked veggies into the slow cooker insert. Stir in the wine, brandy, tomatoes, stock, and herb bouquet. Add the seared rump roast and cook on low heat for 7-8 hours or on high heat for 6-7 hours. The meat should be fork-tender when done.
  4. Purée the sauce: In the last 30 minutes of cooking, purée 3 cups of the veggies and liquid until smooth. Pour it back into the slow cooker and let it simmer.
  5. Serve: Carefully remove the roast from the crock pot, slice, and drizzle each portion with the puréed sauce before serving.

How to Store and Freeze?

Not only is this pot roast by Ina Garten irresistible on the day you make it, but its leftovers are just as tasty—if not more! Take the stress out of meal prep, storage, and serving with these pro tips.

  • Store: To store the leftovers of your chuck roast, first bring it to room temperature. Then, portion the roast into your desired number of airtight containers (perfect for meal prep!) and store them in the fridge for up to five days.
  • Reheat: You can reheat the leftovers by placing them in an oven-proof casserole dish and baking them for 20-25 minutes at 350 degrees F. Or, you can reheat your leftovers on the stovetop if desired.
  • Freeze: To freeze this pot roast, place the meat with some juices in one airtight container and place the sauce in another. Separately freezing these components will ensure easy serving in the future. You can then store your two containers in the freezer for up to 2 months.
  • Thaw: The easiest, safest way to thaw your company pot roast is to place it in the fridge overnight and reheat it just before serving.

What to Serve It With

In my article What to Serve With Pot Roast, you can find countless delectable recipes to serve alongside your Barefoot Contessa pot roast. Here are just a few of my tastiest menu pairings.

  • Mashed potatoes: No one can resist a pair as classic as beef and mashed potatoes. If you’re cooking for a crowd for your Christmas dinner, my silky yet simple Rosemary Mashed Potatoes are just the thing to complete your holiday pot roast recipe. Or, whip up my layered Mashed Potato Casserole for a side that packs major flavor into every bite.
  • Whole grain dishes: Basic egg noodles are a go-to side to pair with this recipe. However, my other favorites are Bulgur Pilaf and Wild Rice Pilaf—two vegan sides that will delight your tastebuds with authentic Turkish taste. You can also serve my Lemon Herb Quinoa to brighten your spread with light, zesty flavors.
  • Vegetable side dishes: Exquisitely tender and richly seasoned, Green Beans in Air Fryer and Pan Sauteed Asparagus are two nutritious veggie dishes that perfectly balance this meaty main.
A Barefoot Contessa roast on top of mashed potatoes shown from the top view.

Expert Tips

Even novice chefs can cook like Ina Garten using these insider tricks. From how to develop flavor to simple recipe changes, these tips will have your guests devouring the whole roast.

  • Be careful: It goes without saying that this is a recipe that requires extreme caution. From searing 5 pounds of raw meat to carrying it from the stove to the oven to pureeing the hot liquid, you must be very careful as you perform each step. Also, do not open the lid while it is simmering in the oven, especially in the beginning. It is best to wait for the alcohol in wine (and cognac) to evaporate before opening the lid. In general, I recommend not removing the lid (even to take a quick peek) until the first two and a half hours of cooking time is fully completed.
  • Skim the fat: After removing the cooked beef from the Dutch oven, a thin layer of fat will likely sit on top of the juices. I recommend removing as much excess fat as possible by skimming the surface of the mixture with a spoon.
  • Tastes better the next day: The best part about this rump roast recipe is that it tastes even better the day after you make it, as the flavors develop and deepen overnight. For easy make-ahead meal prep, I recommend cooking your pot roast one day ahead, storing it overnight in the fridge, and heating it just before you’re ready to eat.
  • Makes a lot of sauce: Because your meat requires sufficient liquid to cook correctly, this recipe produces a lot of extra sauce. Rather than let this liquid go to waste, I recommend turning it into a flavorful gravy. Strain the vegetables, then reduce the liquid on the stovetop for 20-25 minutes. You can then drizzle your gravy over mashed potatoes, add it to beef tacos, or even use it as a decadent pasta sauce.
  • A few changes I made: When I first made this Barefoot Contessa roast, I followed the original recipe to a T. After several times making the dish, I made a few changes to enhance its flavor and texture. For instance, I didn’t add a chicken bouillon cube, which made the sauce too salty for my taste. I also chose not to add flour and butter to thicken the pot roast sauce at the end. I thought that there was enough fat in the liquid even after skimming most of it. 
  • Short on time: There is a reason why people refer to this recipe as “Sunday Roast”. It is surely a labor of love. If you are short on time or prefer a quicker version of this recipe, be sure to check out my post on How to Cook Pot Roast in Pressure Cooker. The version made in the instant pot takes much less time and is just as delicious and flavorful.

FAQs

There’s no reason to stress when making this pot roast dinner for company. This straightforward guide will answer your questions, from selecting the best cut of meat to expert browning advice.

What is a company pot roast?

Company pot roast is a recipe made by slow-cooking boneless chuck roast in a Dutch oven in a conventional oven. This recipe originally comes from Ina Garten’s cookbook Barefoot Contessa: Back to Basics, but it was popular enough to inspire dozens of different versions. In fact, the original Barefoot Contessa company pot roast has inspired a Smitten Kitchen pot roast, The Kitchn pot roast, Southern Living pot roast, and a pot roast from Taste of Home.

What is the most tender roast for pot roast?

Because beef cooks for a long time in this Ina Garten pot roast for company, a tougher cut of beef—a lean cut with little fat—works the best. The collagen in these tough cuts breaks down over time, resulting in gelatin that tenderizes your meat, keeps it succulent, and thickens your sauce with a rich, savory flavor. For this reason, chuck roast, eye round roast, beef rump roast, and brisket are some of the best options for pot roast.

Do you have to brown a roast before putting it in the crockpot?

Though technically not necessary, I recommend searing your meat before slow-cooking it. Searing your beef will give it a deeper, more complex flavor, whereas un-seared beef will have a shallower “meat” taste.

Can you overcook a pot roast?

It is possible to overcook this pot roast recipe, producing tough, dried meat. However, this overcooking often results from not adding enough liquid to the Dutch oven or slow cooker, so be sure to add sufficient liquid to your pot roast recipe.

Other Dinner Recipes to Serve a Crowd

Rich, succulent, and photo-ready, this Ina Garten pot roast with vegetables is a go-to for hearty, elegant eats. For even more recipes to satisfy your cravings, you’ll love these tasty dinner dishes.

If you try this Ina Garten’s Company Pot Roast recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Barefoot Contessa's Company pot roast recipe on a plate from the top view.
Print

Ina Garten’s Pot Roast Recipe

This Ina Garten Pot Roast recipe (aka Company Pot Roast) is a rich, savory, and elegant dish that's perfect to serve for your next dinner party. In this foolproof guide, we'll teach you how to make it in the oven and in your slow cooker. However you choose to make it, it's sure to impress!
Course Main Dishes
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 5 hours
Total Time 5 hours 30 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 699kcal

Ingredients

For The Roast:

  • 5 pounds Prime boneless beef chuck roast
  • 1 tablespoon kosher salt
  • 1 ½ teaspoons black pepper
  • 5 tablespoons all-purpose flour
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil

For The Vegetables:

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 cups carrots peeled and chopped
  • 2 cups yellow onions chopped
  • 2 cups celery chopped
  • 2 cups chopped leeks chopped (both white and light green parts)
  • 1 tablespoon kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 5 garlic cloves minced
  • 2 cups red wine Burgundy or Chianti
  • 2 tablespoons Cognac or brandy optional
  • 1 large can diced tomatoes (28-ounce)
  • 1 cup chicken stock
  • 3 branches fresh thyme
  • 2 branches fresh rosemary

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F. (163 degrees C.).
  • Place the meat on a cutting board and pat dry with a sheet of paper towel on all sides. Tie meat using kitchen twine. Season it with salt and pepper. Dredge the whole meat in flour, ensuring that all parts are covered with flour. Shake the excess flour.
  • Heat the oil over medium heat in a large Dutch oven. Cook the meat for 4-5 minutes on each side. Transfer it to a large plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and set it aside. Do not wash the Dutch oven.
  • Heat oil in the now-empty Dutch oven. Place chopped carrots, onions, celery, leeks, garlic, 1 tablespoon salt, and 1 teaspoon black pepper in the Dutch oven. Cook until all vegetables soften, 12-15 minutes, stirring often. You do not want the vegetables to turn brown.
  • Stir in the wine and cognac (if using), followed by tomatoes and chicken stock. Make an herb bouquet by tying thyme and rosemary. Place in the pan.
  • Transfer the roast back to the Dutch oven, bring it to a boil, and let it come to a simmer for 12-15 minutes.
  • Put the lid on and place it in the oven. Roast for 2 ½ hours, or the internal temperature registers 160 degrees F (72 degrees C.) when inserted with a digital thermometer. Next, turn the heat down to 250 F Degrees (or 122 degrees C) and let it simmer at that low temperature for an hour.
  • Carefully remove the pot roast onto a cutting board and cover it loosely with aluminum foil. Discard the bundle of herbs. Using a large spoon, skim off the fat on top of the juices as much as possible.
  • Transfer 3-4 cups of the sauce (about half of the sauce) and vegetables into a bowl and puree until smooth. I used an immersion blender but a food processor fitted with the steel blade or a standing blender would also work.
  • Pour the pureed sauce back into the pot. Put the Dutch oven on the stovetop, turn the heat on to medium-low, and return to a simmer for about 15 minutes.
  • Remove the strings from the roast and slice the meat.
  • When ready to serve, place 2 (or more) slices of meat on a dinner plate and spoon the vegetable sauce over it.

Notes

  • A few changes I made to the original recipe: When I first made this Barefoot Contessa roast, I followed the original recipe to a T. After several times making the dish, I made a few changes to enhance its flavor and texture. For instance, I didn’t add a chicken bouillon cube, which made the sauce too salty for my taste. I also chose not to add flour and butter to thicken the pot roast sauce at the end. I thought that there was enough fat in the liquid even after skimming most of it.
  • Store: To store the leftovers, first bring them to room temperature. Then, portion the roast into your desired number of airtight containers (perfect for meal prep!) and store them in the fridge for up to five days.
  • Reheat: You can reheat the leftovers by placing them in an oven-proof casserole dish and baking them for 20-25 minutes at 350 degrees F. Or, you can reheat your leftovers on the stovetop if desired.
  • Freeze: To freeze, place the meat with some juices in one airtight container and place the sauce in another. Separately freezing these components will ensure easy serving in the future. You can then store your two containers in the freezer for up to 2 months.
  • Thaw: The easiest, safest way to thaw it is to place it in the fridge overnight and reheat it just before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 699kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 57g | Fat: 40g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 197mg | Sodium: 2068mg | Potassium: 1329mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 5874IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 102mg | Iron: 7mg

The post Ina Garten Pot Roast appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/company-pot-roast/feed/ 19
Almond Flour Brownies https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-brownies/ https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-brownies/#comments Fri, 10 Feb 2023 19:12:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=38940 These homemade brownies with almond flour are so incredibly fudgy that you’d never know they were gluten-free! Sweetened with maple syrup, this extra chocolatey and easy gluten-free brownie recipe is guaranteed to be your next favorite recipe to bake when the chocolate cravings hit.  Like my Almond Flour Chocolate Cake and Flourless Chocolate Cupcakes recipes, this easy brownie recipe is easy to make. Plus, it is a great alternative to...

The post Almond Flour Brownies appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
These homemade brownies with almond flour are so incredibly fudgy that you’d never know they were gluten-free! Sweetened with maple syrup, this extra chocolatey and easy gluten-free brownie recipe is guaranteed to be your next favorite recipe to bake when the chocolate cravings hit. 

Like my Almond Flour Chocolate Cake and Flourless Chocolate Cupcakes recipes, this easy brownie recipe is easy to make. Plus, it is a great alternative to traditional brownies that are butter and sugar-packed and not so healthy.

Almond Flour Chocolate Brownies on top of each other

Why You’ll Love This Recipe:

  1. Made with everyday ingredients: The almond flour brownie batter comes together in one bowl in just a few minutes and uses only 7 simple ingredients, all of which are pantry staples.
  2. No different than a brownie made with regular flour: You won’t be able to detect any difference when it comes to taste and texture. Perfectly fudgy, almond flour brownies pack the same addictive chocolate flavor you’d expect from a brownie.
  3. Made with diet restrictions in mind: Like all of my almond flour recipes, compared to traditional baked goods made with all-purpose flour and butter, it uses a minimal amount of oil. It is also low-carb, grain-free (great for Passover), and paleo-friendly. Plus, thanks to the healthy fats in ground almonds, you can even count this as a healthy brownies recipe.
Almond brownies sliced into squares from the top view

Ingredients:

The ingredient profile for this gluten-free almond flour fudge brownies recipe is similar to that of my Almond Flour Chocolate Cake recipe and even my Flourless Chocolate Cupcakes recipe. (Can you tell I love almond flour desserts?)

Ingredients for almond flower brownie from the top view

In terms of ingredients, you will need:

Substitutions:

  • Oil: If you don’t have coconut oil on hand, you can substitute another neutral oil like avocado oil.
  • Almond Flour: If you cannot find it, you can make almond flour at home using a blender or food processor. This recipe can also be made with almond meal. However, almond meal brownies will be a tad bit dense compared to brownies made with almond flour.
  • Sweetener: You can swap agave nectar in place of maple syrup. You can also use honey, but I would recommend using less honey (¾ cup to 1 cup) as it is sweeter.
  • Keto Sweetener: If you are after keto almond brownies, I recommend sweetening with Keto Maple Syrup (affiliate link) sweetened with monk fruit. Liquid stevia can also be an acceptable substitute.
  • Nuts: Feel free to swap the walnuts in this almond flour brownie recipe for whichever nuts you prefer. Pistachios, pecans, sliced almonds, and even unsweetened coconut would work beautifully here!
  • Optional – Chocolate Drizzle: If you want to take this almond flour fudge brownies to the next level, I recommend drizzling them with chocolate. I prefer refined sugar free sweeteners like Enjoy Life or Lily’s dark chocolate chips (sugar free chocolate chips for the keto option) (affiliate links) for drizzling, but any of your favorite chocolate brand would work.
  • Optional – Dried or fresh fruit: If you want to make it a little bit colorful, top it off with fresh berries, or do what I do, sprinkle it with dried strawberries (affiliate link).
  • Optional – Sea Salt: You can sprinkle it with sea salt or lightly salted nuts as well. 
  • Serve them with ice cream: I can’t imagine a better way to serve these than a scoop of vanilla ice cream or whipped cream made with maple syrup on top.

How To Make Brownies with Almond Flour?

The steps to making this easy almond flour brownie recipe has 6 folds:

  1. Prepare for baking: Preheat the Oven to 350 Degrees. Line an 8X8 square baking dish with parchment paper.
Person Mixing dry ingredients for brownie with almond flour.
  1. Combine Dry Ingredients: Whisk together almond flour and cocoa powder in a large bowl until homogeneous, and no lumps remain.
Gluten free chocolate brownies batter is being mixed by a woman.
  1. Add Wet Ingredients: Add coconut oil, maple syrup, eggs, and vanilla extract to the bowl of dry ingredients, and whisk until fully incorporated.
  2. Add the Nuts: Fold in half a cup of the nuts.
Almond meal chocolate brownies in the baking pan before and after photos.
  1. Prepare to Bake: Transfer the raw batter into the prepared pan and spread it out evenly using a spatula. Sprinkle it with the rest of the walnuts.
  2. Bake: Cook them for 35-40 minutes in the prepared oven or until a toothpick inserted in the center of the brownies comes out clean (or with a few tiny crumbs). Allow the brownies to cool for 5 minutes, and remove them from the pan onto a wire rack. Let it cool to room temperature before slicing to avoid them falling apart. Serve with coffee, milk, or plant-based milks such as almond milk.
  3. Optional step: If you are like me, and enjoy extra chocolatey, gooey brownies, then I recommend drizzling them with melted chocolate. I think the easiest way to melt chocolate is in the microwave. To do so;
    1. Place 2 oz. of your favorite chocolate chips (both semi-sweetened and unsweetened would work) in a microwave-safe glass bowl. 
    2. Microwave at high for 30 seconds. Give it a stir and then repeat in 30-second intervals until fully melted. Slice your brownies and drizzle them with melted chocolate chips.
Paleo Chocolate brownies cut into squares with a knife on the side

How To Store, Freeze and Thaw?

My favorite thing about these homemade almond flour brownies is that they get better as they sit. I recommend storing them in the refrigerator and warming them slightly before serving.

  • Storage: These gluten-free chocolate brownies will keep for 3-4 days in the fridge in an airtight container or plastic bag. You can also store them on your counter in the same fashion for a day as long as your kitchen stays fairly cool. 
  • Freezing: To freeze, bring brownies to room temperature, individually wrap them with parchment paper, and store them in an airtight container in the freezer for up to a month.
  • Thawing: To thaw, let it sit on the counter for 15 minutes and warm in a low-heat (300 degrees F) oven for 10-15 minutes and serve.
Almond Brownies sliced with a knife on the side.

Expert Tips:

While this recipe for the most fudgy almond flour brownies you see below is pretty straightforward, there are a few things you can do to get the best results on your first try:

  • Room temperature ingredients: As it is with most baked goods when making these brownies, we recommend using ingredients that are at room temperature.
  • Wait for it to cool completely: We know it is hard to wait, but as it is with all almond flour desserts, these brownies need time to cool down. If you slice while they are still warm, the middle section will be (somewhat) wet, looking like it is not fully baked. Therefore, it is imperative to give them enough time to firm up.

FAQs:

Can you make brownies with almond flour?

You sure can. As a matter of fact, due to its high-fat content, brownies made with almond flour are just as fudgy, moist, and chocolate packed with a similar taste and texture to brownies made with traditional flour and butter.

Can I make this recipe without eggs?

This recipe will not work without eggs or egg replacers (i.e., flax eggs or chia eggs). I find that when it comes to baking with almond flour, eggs are crucial for making them rise and stay super fudgy. If you need a vegan brownies recipe, I recommend checking out my Almond Butter Brownies recipe. It’s made with wholesome ingredients like nut butter, spelt flour, Medjool dates, coconut oil, and maple syrup. 

How many calories are in each serving of almond flour brownies?

This recipe makes 9 servings and each serving is 375 calories.

Other Almond Flour Recipes You Might Like:

If you are in need of creative and healthier gluten-free recipes made without the use of refined sugars (i.e., white sugar), you’ll like the recipes below:

This almond flour chocolate brownies recipe is adapted from Almond Flour Brownies at Allrecipes.com with changes.

If you try this for Almond Flour Brownies, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Almond flour brownie cut into squares and placed on top of each other from the front view.
Print

Almond Flour Brownies Recipe

Almond Flour Brownies recipe made with only 7 ingredients in one bowl. They are just the trick to satisfy your sweet tooth without going totally overboard. Fudgy, moist, and Paleo-friendly, meaning they’re gluten-free, wheat-free, and dairy-free! Plus, they get their sweetness from maple syrup, making them refined sugar-free, as well.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 9 servings
Calories 375kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ cups almond flour 6.3 oz.
  • ½ cup + 2 tablespoons cocoa powder 2.3 oz.
  • ½ cup coconut oil melted and cooled
  • 1 ⅓ cups maple syrup at room temperature
  • 4 large eggs at room temperature
  • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
  • 1 cup walnuts or pecans chopped & divided

Chocolate Drizzle (Optional)

  • 2 oz. chocolate chips i.e. Naturally sweetened Enjoy Life brand
  • 1 tablespoon dried strawberries

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Line an 8X8 square baking pan with parchment paper.
  • Mix together almond flour and cocoa powder in a large mixing bowl until no lumps remain.
  • Add in coconut oil, maple syrup, eggs, and vanilla extract and whisk until fully incorporated.
  • Fold in half a cup of the nuts.
  • Transfer batter to the parchment lined pan and spread it throughout the pan using a spatula.
  • Sprinkle it with the rest of the walnuts.
  • Bake for 35-40 minutes or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean (or with a few tiny crumbs).
  • Let it cool for 5 minutes and remove from the pan on to a wire rack. Let it cool before slicing.
  • If you are using chocolate drizzle, place the chocolate chips in a glass bowl and melt in the microwave in 30-second intervals, mixing after each time until fully melted.
  • Drizzle the melted chocolate over the brownie and sprinkle with dried strawberries.
  • Slice & serve.

Video

Notes

  • To Store leftovers: Place the leftover brownies in an airtight container after they come to room temperature. Store in the fridge for up to 4 days. You can also store them on your counter in the same fashion for a day as long as your kitchen stays fairly cool. 
  • Freezing: To freeze, bring brownies to room temperature, individually wrap them with parchment paper, and store them in an airtight container in the freezer for up to a month.
  • Thawing: To thaw, let it sit on the counter for 15 minutes, warm in a low-heat (300 degrees F) oven for 10-15 minutes, and serve.

Nutrition

Calories: 375kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 32mg | Potassium: 136mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 31g | Vitamin A: 106IU | Calcium: 103mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Almond Flour Brownies appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/almond-flour-brownies/feed/ 22
Air Fryer Beets https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-beets/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-beets/#respond Tue, 07 Feb 2023 17:57:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=64487 It’s no wonder why air fryer vegetables are so popular. From these beets cooked in air fryer to Air Fryer Corn, Air Fryer Asparagus, and even Air Fryer Green Beans, air-fried veggies are an easy way to pack major nutrition with few calories and exquisite taste. Plus, unlike veggies roasted in the oven, these recipes take less than 15 minutes to make—with five ingredients or fewer! Learning how to air...

The post Air Fryer Beets appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It’s no wonder why air fryer vegetables are so popular. From these beets cooked in air fryer to Air Fryer Corn, Air Fryer Asparagus, and even Air Fryer Green Beans, air-fried veggies are an easy way to pack major nutrition with few calories and exquisite taste. Plus, unlike veggies roasted in the oven, these recipes take less than 15 minutes to make—with five ingredients or fewer!

Roasted beetroot in air fryer served in a bowl shown from the top view.

Learning how to air fry beets is a simple skill any chef can benefit from. This guide has what you need, from how to cook whole beets in an air fryer to peeling tips.

Ingredients

You only need four basic ingredients to whip up this air fryer beets recipe. Fast, tasty, and gluten-free, this delectable recipe won’t require any last-minute trips to the grocery store.

  • Beets: Many different beet varieties will work for this air fryer recipe. Red beets, golden beets, and Chioggia beets (AKA candy cane beets) are just a few of my favorites. Whichever type you choose, just be sure to peel and cut them into small, 1-inch chunks before cooking them in your air fryer. With that being said, you can roast beets as a whole or with other root vegetables (i.e., sweet potatoes and carrots.)
  • Oil: You can use either olive oil or avocado oil when cooking beets in an air fryer.
  • Salt and black pepper: These two simple seasonings are the key to bringing out your air fryer beets’ earthy flavor and natural sweetness.
Ingredients for air fried root vegetables in bowls from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Other root vegetables: Take this easy side dish to the next level by air frying your beets alongside another nutritious vegetable. Air fryer beets and carrots make a tender, filling combination, while air fryer beets and sweet potatoes will tantalize your tastebuds with a mildly sweet flavor. Or, roast all three together for a colorful veggie mix!
  • Seasonings: Herby and light, fresh herbs like mint or parsley make a fantastic addition to your air fryer roasted beets. Or, top your beets with Italian seasoning for an extra earthy flavor.
  • Toppings: If you’re a fan of rich, creamy flavor, you’ll love topping your roasted beets with goat cheese or feta cheese. Add a drizzle of olive oil, and your whole table will ask for seconds.

How to Cook Beets in Air Fryer?

Anyone can prepare roasted beets in an air fryer in minutes. In just five steps, these simple instructions will have even novice chefs making this great healthy side dish.

  1. Prepare the beets: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F. Peel and cut beets into 1-inch pieces.
A person adding olive oil and salt to sliced beets in a bowl.
  1. Toss the ingredients: Transfer the beet pieces to a mixing bowl. Drizzle them with olive oil, sprinkle them with salt and black pepper, and toss the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
Roasting beets in air fryer from the top view.
  1. Add beets to the basket: Arrange the seasoned beets in a single layer in the air fryer basket.
  2. Cook beets in the air fryer: Place beets in the air fryer and cook for 15 minutes, flipping them halfway through the frying process.
  3. Serve: Transfer the air-fried beets to a serving platter and add additional seasoning if necessary.

Can I Cook Whole Beets in Air Fryer?

Yes! You can easily make roasted whole beets in the air fryer and eliminate the extra prep time that comes with chopping. 

With that being said, there’s a direct correlation between size and air frying time, so choosing similarly-sized veggies is essential to ensure even cooking. Therefore, when roasting whole beets in an air fryer, I recommend selecting beets that are small and close to the same size. 

Roasted whole beets air fryer method shown from the top view.

The process and the air frying temperature do not change when roasting whole beets in an air fryer. Simply air fry your whole beets at 400 degrees F. and test for doneness after 15 minutes, flipping the veggies halfway through. Keep in mind, however, that it can take up to 20-25 minutes to roast whole beets in an air fryer, depending on the size of your beets.

You will also need to peel your veggies before placing the whole beets in the air fryer, as peeling them afterward will be more difficult. Using a vegetable peeler will make this step particularly easy.

How to Store, Reheat, and Freeze?

Air-fried beetroot is fantastic when it comes to easy storage. Whether you freeze your air fry beets for months or save your leftovers for the next day, these storage tips are a meal prep must.

  • Store: Once you cook your beets in the air fryer, let them cool completely. Then, store them in an airtight container for up to four days.
  • Reheat: I love to eat my leftover beets cold. However, you can also reheat your beetroot in the air fryer should you prefer to eat them warm. Place your leftovers in the air fryer for 3-4 minutes at 350 degrees F.
  • Freeze: To ensure your air-fried beets maintain their tender, roasted texture, you’ll need to flash-freeze them. Spread the cooled beets on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and freeze them solid. Then, transfer the pieces to a freezer-safe bag, remove as much air as possible, and freeze for up to three months.

How to Serve Air Fried Beets?

When you roast beets in an air fryer, you can design your menu in countless different ways. These menu ideas guarantee a five-star meal, from crisp salads to hearty mains.

  • Top off a salad: Tender and flavorful, roasted beets from an air fryer make an excellent salad topper. Roasted Beet Salad is one of my favorite beet recipes to prepare during busy weekdays.
  • Serve it as a side with meat: If you want a meal to impress, you’ll adore this sophisticated pair. After cooking beetroot in the air fryer, sprinkle it with feta or goat cheese and fresh herbs, such as fresh mint or parsley, and serve it alongside a hearty protein. Air-fried beets go exceptionally well with elevated meat dishes, such as Instant Pot Lamb Shanks or Reverse Sear Chateaubriand.
  • On top of hummus: Out of all the great combinations, easy roasted air fryer beets and savory hummus are among the greatest. Add your cooked beets to tasty hummus recipes, like my Mediterranean Hummus or Carrot Hummus, and you won’t believe how much variation you can achieve in your snacks.

Expert Tips

There’s no secret to this mouthwatering air fryer beet recipe. Following these pro cooking tips, your beets will be perfectly tender and exquisitely crisp every time.

  • Oil: One tablespoon is the ideal amount of oil for 1 pound of fresh beets that are medium-sized. We initially tried making this recipe using a teaspoon of oil as we wanted to use the least amount of oil possible. However, we quickly found out that an adequate amount of oil is an important factor when it comes to ensuring that your beets don’t dry up or lose their tender texture during the air frying process.
  • Peeling and cutting: For the best results, I recommend peeling and cutting your raw beets into 1-inch chunks before air frying them. This is not to say you can not do it later, but we found it much easier to do it beforehand.
Air fryer beets and sweet potatoes in a bowl from the top view.
  • Roast with other root vegetables: If you can’t get enough vegetarian recipes, you’ll love air frying your beets alongside another nutritious root vegetable. Carrots and sweet potatoes are two of my favorite air-fried pairs, and they take the same amount of time in the air fryer to cook properly.
  • Don’t overcrowd the basket: When air frying beets, it’s essential that you don’t overcrowd the air fryer basket, as too many beets will result in uneven cooking. I also recommend tossing your beets halfway through the roasting process to give each side equal roasting time.

FAQs

How long does it take to cook beets in an air fryer?

The total time it takes to make air fryer roasted beets is 15 minutes at 400 degrees F. However, there is a direct correlation between the size of the beets and air frying time. For best results, we recommend cutting beets in equal sizes before roasting them in the air fryer.

Is it better to peel beets before or after roasting them in the air fryer?

I highly recommend peeling your beets before cooking them in your air fryer. Unlike boiled beets, air-fried beet skin is much more difficult to remove after cooking.

Can you air fry canned beets?

If necessary, you can roast canned beets in an air fryer. Just be sure to dry each piece as much as possible with a clean paper towel before mixing it with the oil and seasonings.

Can you roast golden beets in the air fryer?

Yes! If you want a zesty, mellow alternative to red beets, air fryer golden beets are an excellent choice. The process and air frying time do not change. Simply follow the air fryer beets recipe below as written.

How to check the doneness of air-fried beets?

To see if your air fryer beets don’t need more cooking, insert a knife into their center. If the blade enters easily, your beets are ready to serve. If the knife finds resistance, you may add a few minutes of cooking time.

Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Like

I think we can all agree that air fryer veggies are healthy and easy to make. Not to mention, they make a great side dish. Here are a few more easy recipes to help you satisfy your cravings and get your fill of healthy nutrients:

If you try this Air Fryer Beets recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted carrots and beets in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Beets Recipe

These Air Fryer Beets are a colorful, nutritious, and easy side dish that's suitable for any occasion. Thanks to the speedy air fryer, these veggies are ready in under 30 minutes! Serve them as an elegant accompaniment to a dinner entree, as a topping for your favorite salad, or even for a quick and satisfying snack.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 2 cups
Calories 160kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound beets red, gold or Chioggia beets would all work
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer and prep the beets: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F. Peel and cut beets into 1-inch pieces.
  • Season the beets: Transfer to a large bowl, drizzle with olive oil, and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss to combine.
  • Transfer to the air fryer: Transfer the beets into the now-preheated air fryer basket and make sure they are in a single layer.
  • Air fry: Air fry for 15 minutes or until they are fork tender. Be sure to turn once halfway through the air frying process.
  • Serve: Carefully transfer them to a serving platter, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary.

Notes

  • Store: Once you cook your beets in the air fryer, let them cool completely. Then, store them in an airtight container for up to four days.
  • Reheat: I love to eat my leftover beets cold. However, you can also reheat your beets in the air fryer should you prefer to eat them warm. Place your leftovers in the air fryer for 3-4 minutes at 350 degrees F.
  • Freeze: To ensure your air-fried beets maintain their tender, roasted texture, you’ll need to flash-freeze them. Spread the cooled beets on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and freeze them solid. Then, transfer the pieces to a freezer-safe bag, remove as much air as possible, and freeze for up to three months.
  • Roasting whole beets: You can roast whole beets in the air fryer. However, please remember that there’s a direct correlation between size and air frying time, so choosing similarly-sized veggies is essential to ensure even cooking. Therefore, when shopping for beets, purchase beets that are small and equal in size. The ones you see in the photos took about 15-20 minutes, but larger ones would take more time to fry.
  • Using other root vegetables: Thanks to similar air frying times, you can roast sweet potatoes and carrots along with beets.

Nutrition

Calories: 160kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 758mg | Potassium: 741mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 76IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Air Fryer Beets appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-beets/feed/ 0
Kale Chips with Nutritional Yeast https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-oven-roasted-kale-chips/ https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-oven-roasted-kale-chips/#comments Fri, 03 Feb 2023 20:48:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=5103 Short on time? If you have an air fryer, be sure to also try our Air Fryer Kale Chips recipe, which takes less than 5 minutes to make from start to finish. These homemade kale chips are my favorite way to curb an afternoon salt craving, and they couldn’t be easier to throw together. If you find yourself grabbing for the crunchy, salty, savory snacks throughout the day, you’ll be...

The post Kale Chips with Nutritional Yeast appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Short on time? If you have an air fryer, be sure to also try our Air Fryer Kale Chips recipe, which takes less than 5 minutes to make from start to finish.

These homemade kale chips are my favorite way to curb an afternoon salt craving, and they couldn’t be easier to throw together. If you find yourself grabbing for the crunchy, salty, savory snacks throughout the day, you’ll be amazed at how these vegan cheesy kale chips are a great way to replace a bag of chips or pretzels. 

Kale Chips with nutritional yeast after they are baked on a sheet pan.

Not to mention, having your choice of seasoning for kale chips (more on that below) gives you unlimited options of flavors each time you make them. So, go ahead, make your own kale chips, and enjoy a great snack that happens to be good for you.

Ingredients

This quick and easy recipe for kale chips with nutritional yeast requires only a few ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe are placed in bowls from the top view.
  • Kale: Curly kale or lacinato kale (aka dinosaur kale) would both work in this recipe. If you are new to buying kale, be sure to check out our guide on the different varieties of kale.
  • Oil: I recommend using avocado oil, olive oil, or coconut oil. You can even use tahini (sesame paste), which will pair beautifully with the nutritional yeast. Though it is important to thoroughly whisk your tahini before massaging it into the kale.
  • Nutritional yeast: Nutritional yeast is the ingredient that gives these vegan kale chips their great cheesy flavor. The cheesy-tasting cousin to baker’s yeast, nutritional yeast is rich in nutrients. It is mostly used in place of cheese in vegan recipes (such as this vegan nacho cheese sauce) mainly because it tastes very similar to parmesan cheese. In this cheesy kale chips recipe, it is the savory element that makes them extra delicious. You can often find it in the healthy section of the store or order it online (affiliate link.)

Seasonings for Kale Chips:

The best part of this recipe is that it is incredibly versatile; you can easily make it your own by adding a variety of seasonings. Here are a few options:

  • A combination of ½ teaspoon of garlic powder and onion powder would not only pair well with the cheesy qualities of nutritional yeast but also enhance their umami flavors.
  • You can opt for a  Mexican flair by adding a sprinkle of ground cumin, chili powder, and even cayenne pepper for some heat.
  • Sprinkle it with some toasted sesame seeds or Everything But The Bagel seasoning for an extra savory punch. And, of course, you can also finish it with a sprinkle of sea salt to help bring all the flavors together.

How to make kale with nutritional yeast?

The steps of this vegan cheese kale chips recipe are simple and only take a few minutes. 

A collage of images showing how to make kale chips.
  1. Prepare the kale: Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F before you begin prepping the ingredients. Rinse a fresh bunch of kale and tear it into small pieces. Dry them in a salad spinner as much as you can. Alternatively, you can spread them on a sheet pan lined with a kitchen towel and gently pat them dry with a sheet of paper towel.
  2. Mix: Lightly massage kale with oil, nutritional yeast, and any of the kale chip seasonings of your choice in a large bowl. 
Homemade kale chips on a sheet pan before and after they are baked.
  1. Prep for baking: Spread the kale on a large sheet pan in a single layer. This is an important step for achieving crispy kale chips, so if needed, feel free to use two separate baking sheets.
  2. Bake: Bake in the preheated oven for 5 minutes. Remove from the oven, gently flip the kale leaves and bake for another 5-7 minutes keeping a close eye on it. If you are baking two sheets at the same time, be sure to rotate them as well. 

How to make ahead and store leftovers?

  • Make Ahead: Most of the prep time involved in this recipe is the cleaning and preparing of the kale to make the chips. The good thing is that you can easily wash, cut, and store kale in the refrigerator, so it takes just a few minutes to put it all together. If you are new to prepping kale, be sure to check out our guide on storing kale.
  • Store: I’d be surprised if you have leftover kale chips. Truthfully, these crunchy kale chips are best on the day they are made. However, if you do wish to store them, wait until they cool fully, then keep them in an airtight container or a paper bag large enough that they won’t break. They should be good for up to 2 days.

Expert Tips:

Having been making these cheesy vegan kale chips for years, I learned a thing or two. Here are my tips for making the best baked kale chips:

  • Dry kale thoroughly. Take the time to dry the kale thoroughly. While it may sound like an unnecessary step, removing the excess moisture is an important step for getting that addictive crispy texture. Plus, doing so ensures that the nutritional yeast mixture will stick to each piece of kale.
  • Tear or Cut the kale into equally sized pieces. Make sure to tear or cut the raw kale pieces roughly equal in size. This will help them bake evenly and prevent browning.
  • Massage the oil into the kale. Tossing kale with oil and nutritional yeast is an option, but I recommend giving it a gentle massage to ensure that they are distributed evenly throughout. If you are new to it, be sure to check out our quick guide on how to massage kale.
  • Low-temperature oven: Baking kale leaves at a low oven temp is a key step for crispy chips. Low and slow is a safer option for getting evenly baked kale chips with a crispy texture.
  • Watch it closely. We highly recommend keeping a close eye on the kale chips after the 10-minute mark. Since all ovens behave differently, you may have to rely on visual cues to decide whether or not you need the extra few minutes. If it is nice and crisp, it is time to pull it out. If the leaves are still on the softer side, give a minute or two for them to get crisp. Though please be aware that if you leave them in the oven for too long, they will turn brown and burn.

FAQs

Does making kale chips destroy the nutrients?

Surprisingly, when baking kale, very minimal nutrients are cooked off, making it a more nutritious alternative to other salty snacks such as potato chips, pretzels or tortilla chips.

How do you keep kale chips crispy?

The secret to keeping kale chips crispy is to let them cool completely before storing them. We also recommend storing them in a large enough container so they won’t break.

Other Kale Recipes You Might Enjoy

If you love kale or are using kale to add more leafy greens to your diet, here are a few more must-try kale recipes:

If you try this Homemade Kale Chips recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

kale chips in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Kale Chips with Nutritional Yeast Recipe

These Kale Chips are flavored with nutritional yeast for a cheesy yet vegan and healthy snack. Flavored with nutritional yeast, this easy and quick-to-make kale snack recipe is guaranteed to be your next movie night treat. Perfectly crispy, this kid-friendly snack is a great way to sneak some greens into your diet. Paleo, whole30 & gluten-free diet-friendly tool!
Course Healthy Snacks
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 cups
Calories 86kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 bunch fresh kale (curly kale) (8 oz. with stems), about 4-5 cups
  • 2 teaspoons olive oil or avocado oil or coconut oil
  • 2 tablespoons nutritional yeast plus more for sprinkling
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
  • Rinse kale under cold water, remove stems, and tear each leaf into bite-size pieces. It is best if they are (roughly) equal in size to help with even roasting in the oven.
  • Using a salad spinner, dry the leaves as much as possible. Alternatively, you can spread them on a sheet pan lined with a kitchen towel and gently pat them dry. Transfer the kale leaves to a large mixing bowl.
  • Drizzle with oil and sprinkle with nutritional yeast and salt. Lightly massage to ensure each leaf is coated with the oil and nutritional yeast.
  • Transfer kale to the parchment-lined baking sheet. Spread them on an even layer making sure that they are not overlapping. You can grab a second baking sheet or bake it in two batches if needed.
  • Bake in the oven for 7 minutes. Remove from the oven, gently flip each piece of kale, and bake for another 5-7 minutes. Towards the end, they should be crisp but not browned.
  • Remove from the oven and let it cool for 1-2 minutes. Serve with an additional sprinkling of nutritional yeast on top.

Notes

  • Dry kale thoroughly. Take the time to dry the kale thoroughly. While it may sound like an unnecessary step, removing the excess moisture is important for getting that addictive crispy texture. Plus, doing so ensures that the nutritional yeast mixture will stick to each piece of kale.
  • Tear kale into equally-sized pieces. Make sure to tear or cut the kale leaves roughly equal in size. This will help them bake evenly and prevent browning.
  • Watch it closely. We highly recommend keeping a close eye on the kale chips after the 10-minute mark. Since all ovens behave differently, you may have to rely on visual cues to decide whether or not you need the extra few minutes. If it is nice and crisp, it is time to pull it out. If the leaves are still on the softer side, give a minute or two for them to get crisp. Though please be aware that if you leave them in the oven for too long, they will turn brown and burn.
  • Storage: While we think that these kale chips are best on the day they are made, you can store them to enjoy later. To do so, bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container or a paper bag large enough that they won’t break. They should be good for up to 2 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 86kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 325mg | Potassium: 376mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 6494IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 165mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Kale Chips with Nutritional Yeast appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-oven-roasted-kale-chips/feed/ 6
Air Fryer Kale Chips https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-kale-chips/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-kale-chips/#respond Thu, 02 Feb 2023 20:55:07 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=64342 It’s no secret that we love kale here at Foolproof Living. Made from my favorite superfood, kale chips in the air fryer are one of my go-to snacks. That’s why I have countless other tasty kale recipes in my recipe book!  For a light lunch or nutritious side, Avocado Kale Salad and Kale Quinoa Salad are the perfect recipes for busy weekdays. Or, if you want your kale on the...

The post Air Fryer Kale Chips appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It’s no secret that we love kale here at Foolproof Living. Made from my favorite superfood, kale chips in the air fryer are one of my go-to snacks. That’s why I have countless other tasty kale recipes in my recipe book! 

For a light lunch or nutritious side, Avocado Kale Salad and Kale Quinoa Salad are the perfect recipes for busy weekdays. Or, if you want your kale on the go, my Pineapple Kale Smoothie uses only five ingredients to start your morning with a sweet energy boost.

Crispy pieces of air-fried kale in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

To make kale in the air fryer, you only need three simple ingredients:

Ingredients for air frying kale in bowls from the top view.
  • Kale: When selecting among types of kale for this recipe, I recommend choosing either curly kale or lacinato kale. Curly kale is available in most grocery stores, making it a go-to for crispy kale chips. Lacinato kale—also known as dinosaur kale—is more delicate, so it will cook more quickly.
  • Oil: Olive oil, coconut oil, or avocado oil will work in this air fryer kale chips recipe. If you want less oil, you can spray the leaves lightly with oil spray. You may also use well-stirred tahini to give your healthy kale chips an earthy, savory flavor.
  • Salt: To bring out the snackable flavor of your air fry kale chips, I recommend using sea salt, kosher salt, or garlic salt.

Kale Chips Seasoning Ideas

  • Ranch seasoning: You don’t need to run to the grocery store to make ranch kale chips in the air fryer. You can easily make it at home. This Homemade Ranch Seasoning calls for ¼ teaspoon each of dried dill, dried parsley (or chives), garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and black pepper.
  • Cheese: Give your air fry kale a rich, gooey flavor by sprinkling it with your favorite cheese. For vegan cheese, use two teaspoons of nutritional yeast. Or, top your kale with one tablespoon of parmesan cheese for savory, nutty undertones.
  • BBQ seasoning: If you count barbecue sauce as one of your favorite seasonings, try this Homemade Barbeque Seasoning. Simply mix ¼ teaspoon of brown sugar, paprika, chili powder, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and black pepper. You can even add a kick of spice by adding a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes on top of the kale.
  • Everything But the Bagel seasoning: Robust and garlicky, Everything But the Bagel seasoning (affiliate link) makes an excellent addition to seasoned kale. However, if you don’t have this seasoning on hand, toasted sesame seeds make a great substitute—especially if you massage your kale with tahini!

How to Prepare Kale for Chips?

Following these simple steps, you don’t need to stress about kale prep time. From cutting kale to cleaning and storing kale, you’ll make kale chips in the air fryer in no time.

  • Wash and dry kale: Wash your raw kale leaves under cold water. To dry, line a baking sheet with paper towels, place the wet leaves on top, and pat them dry with more paper towels. You can also use a salad spinner to dry your kale if you want to avoid using extra towels.
  • Remove stems: Using a cutting board and a sharp paring knife, remove the stems of your kale. Fold the kale leaves in half, so the stem lies at one end, and then slice along the stem to separate the leaves. Or, pull the stem through one closed fist to detach the leaves without using a knife.
  • Tear the kale: Once de-stemmed, tear your leaves into bite-sized pieces. Try to keep your pieces of kale as equal as possible to ensure even cooking.

How to Make Kale Chips in Air Fryer?

If you like healthy eating and have an air fryer, this easy kale recipe is just what you need. Follow these hassle-free steps, and you can prepare kale in the air fryer in just ten minutes.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat your air fryer to 375 degrees F.
A person showing how to make kale chips in the air fryer from the top view.
  1. Mix the ingredients: Add the fresh kale leaves, olive oil, and salt to a large mixing bowl.
  2. Massage the kale: Using your hands, lightly massage the kale such that you evenly coat each leaf with olive oil. For more detailed instructions on this step, check out my guide on how to massage kale
  3. Arrange in the air fryer basket: Transfer the massaged kale pieces to the air fryer basket. Spread the leaves in a single layer, being sure not to overcrowd them. I recommend frying your kale leaves in batches to make crispy kale in the air fryer.
  4. Air fry the kale: Air fry the arranged kale leaves for 3-5 minutes, flipping them halfway during the process.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

You won’t be able to get enough of these air fried kale chips once you give it a go. Here is how I make it ahead and store leftovers to have this flavorful afternoon snack ready whenever a craving strikes:

  • Make ahead: For the crunchiest, best results, I recommend putting your kale in the air fryer on the day you want to enjoy it. However, you can prepare your kale leaves (the part of this recipe that takes the most amount of time) in advance by following my tips on how to store kale. First, wash your kale in cold water, remove the stem, and dry the leaves. Once dry, lay 2-3 kale leaves per paper towel and roll them into a sort of towel-kale cannoli. Place the rolled kale in a plastic storage bag and store it in the fridge. When ready to use, remove the kale from the refrigerator, massage the leaves, and air fry as usual. I recommend using stored kale within 2-3 days.
  • Store: For maximum crunchiness, I prefer to eat homemade kale chips on the day I cook them. However, storing kale chips is an easy way to fit healthy vitamins into your diet throughout the week. Simply place your kale chips in a paper bag or a paper towel-lined airtight container large enough so that the crispy leaves will not break. Your chips will stay fresh for up to two days.
A person holding an air-fried kale chip from the top view.

Expert Tips

It doesn’t matter whether you’re a master chef or new to the air fryer game. This air fryer kale recipe will come out perfectly crisp every time with these foolproof suggestions.

  • Dry kale leaves thoroughly: Drying your kale leaves is the key to getting crispy air fryer chips. I recommend using a salad spinner or laying your washed kale on a paper towel-lined sheet pan for complete dryness. Just don’t let your kale sit out for too long, as the leaves will lose their firmness.
  • Lightly massage kale to coat them with oil: A light, even oil coating is necessary to give your kale chips sufficient crunch. For this reason, it’s essential that you gently massage your leaves in the oil for 30-40 seconds before adding them to the air fryer.
  • Arrange leaves in a single layer: For proper cooking, it’s crucial to arrange your kale leaves in a single layer in your air fryer basket. Overcrowding will prevent the chips from crisping up evenly. Remember that you’ll likely have to cook your kale in batches to avoid overcrowding.
A person placing a rack over pieces of kale in an air fryer.
  • Cover chips with another rack while cooking: Due to hot air circulation, kale tends to fly around in the air fryer during the cooking process. Covering each batch with an air fryer rack or another basket will keep your kale chips in place.
  • Check after three minutes: It doesn’t take long to air fry kale, so you must keep a close eye on it to avoid overcooked chips. After three minutes of cook time, checking each batch will help keep your kale from burning.
  • Play with seasoning ideas: One of the best parts about these easy air fryer kale chips is how simple it is to try different flavor combinations. It doesn’t matter if you’re looking for a savory, herby, or cheesy flavor. Experimenting with kale chip seasonings is a great way to add creativity to your kitchen.

FAQs

There’s no need to stress out about air frying kale. Whether you want to know about air fryer kale chips’ nutrition information or how to make crispy kale in the air fryer, this FAQ has all you need.

Can you air fry kale chips?

Definitely! Making kale chips in an air fryer is one of the easiest snacks in my recipe book. Good for weight loss, dietary restrictions, and cost-effectiveness, air-fried kale chips come together in less than ten minutes using any air fryer brand. (We tested this recipe in a Ninja Air Fryer and Instant Vortex Air Fryer, but any kind should work!)

Are kale chips better in the oven or air fryer?

Kale chips are a delicious snack whether you make them in an oven or an air fryer. The only difference is that cooking them in the air fryer is quicker, though you’ll have to cook them in several batches. By contrast, the oven will require a longer cook time, but you can make your kale chips in a single batch.

How do you keep kale chips so crunchy?

To get your air fryer kale chips as crunchy as possible, dry them thoroughly before massaging them with oil. Then, keep a close eye on them during the air frying process to ensure they crisp up without burning.

Are kale chips healthy?

Yes! Kale chips are one of my favorite healthy snack recipes because they contain a fraction of the fat of regular potato chips and retain their nutritional value during the air frying process. Kale is high in vitamins A, B, and C and has tons of fiber and antioxidants. As an added bonus, these air fryer kale chips are keto, vegan, gluten-free, Whole30, low-carb, and low-calorie!

Can you air fry frozen kale?

Yes, you can air fry frozen kale by frying the frozen pieces for 7-8 minutes at 375 degrees F. When using this method, I recommend placing smaller pieces of kale in your basket to avoid overcrowding, as frozen kale will expand in the hot air. Also, remember that fresh kale tends to result in crunchier chips.

Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Like

Kale chips from the air fryer are a healthy, crunchy snack that’s as satisfying as it is tasty. After trying out these other delicious recipes, your air fryer will be your new favorite appliance.

If you try this Air Fryer Kale Chips recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of baked kale leaves shown from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Kale Chips Recipe

These Air Fryer Kale Chips are a fun, crispy, and nutritious snack that's ready in about 10 minutes. They're vegan, gluten-free, keto, and low-calorie, too, so you can munch on them guilt-free. Sprinkle these crunchy chips with your favorite seasoning as a great way to get in your veggies for the day!
Course Snack
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 7 minutes
Cook Time 3 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 2 cups
Calories 121kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 5 cups kale (1 bunch of kale) rinsed, spin-dried, torn into smaller pieces
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer: Preheat air fryer to 375 degrees F.
  • Add the ingredients to a bowl: Place kale leaves, olive oil, and salt in a large mixing bowl.
  • Massage the kale: Lightly massage the kale, ensuring all leaves are coated with the oil.
  • Place in the air fryer: Transfer the kale to the air fryer basket and spread them in a single layer, making sure not to overcrowd them. It is best to air-fry kale leaves in batches for optimum crispiness.
  • Air fry the kale: Air fry for 3-4 minutes, turning them halfway through the air frying process. Keep a close eye on them around the 3-minute mark to prevent over cooking.

Notes

  • Can I air fry frozen kale? Yes, you can. Frozen kale takes about 7-8 minutes. Keep in mind, though, that kale expands as it air fries, so it’s important not to overcrowd the air fryer basket. Additionally, during our recipe testing, we found that kale chips made with fresh kale were crispier than its version made with frozen kale.
  • You may need to cover kale with another rack while cooking: Due to hot air circulation, the fragile and light kale leaves tend to fly around in the air fryer during the cooking process. Covering each batch with an air fryer rack or another heat-proof basket will keep your kale chips in place.
  • Seasoning ideas: Seasoning is the fun part of making kale chips at home! While you can sprinkle them with parmesan cheese (or nutritional yeast for a vegan option), you can also season them with ranch seasoning, bbq seasoning, or even everything but the bagel seasoning.
  • Make ahead: The part that takes the most time in this recipe is preparing the kale chips (rinse, dry, and cut the leaves into small pieces) for frying. The good news is that you can prepare kale and store it in the fridge a few days in advance.
  • Storage: For maximum crunchiness, we recommend air frying kale chips on the day you plan to consume them. However, if you have some leftovers, you can store them in a paper bag or a paper towel-lined airtight container large enough so that the crispy leaves will not break. Make sure that they are at room temperature before you store them. Your chips will stay fresh for up to two days.

Nutrition

Calories: 121kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 380mg | Potassium: 583mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 16733IU | Vitamin C: 156mg | Calcium: 426mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Air Fryer Kale Chips appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-kale-chips/feed/ 0